Low-carbon hydrogen is expected to play an important role in helping Scotland reach net zero, particularly in sectors where electrification is difficult, such as heavy industry, shipping and aviation. Understanding how hydrogen deployment could develop under different policy, market and technology conditions is essential for planning this transition.

This research develops a new hydrogen deployment model for Scotland. The model provides Scottish Government with a flexible tool to explore how different assumptions affect hydrogen demand and the infrastructure needed to support it through to 2050.

This report explains how the model was developed and demonstrates its use through two illustrative scenarios:

  • Pragmatic scale-up reflects a future where hydrogen use grows steadily, but demand remains the main constraint.
  • Industry breakthrough reflects stronger policy support, greater export growth and wider use of hydrogen in sectors where cutting greenhouse gas emissions is particularly challenging.

Key findings

  • The report recommends continuing to develop the model as Scotland’s hydrogen sector evolves and using it alongside further analysis of infrastructure costs and future market conditions.
  • The model is designed to test different future scenarios and support evidence-based decision making, rather than predict a single outcome.
  • In both scenarios, exports drive most of Scotland’s hydrogen demand, with domestic demand led by shipping, aviation, steel and the chemical industry.
  • Affordable electricity and timely investment in export infrastructure are the two biggest factors influencing hydrogen deployment. Delays to pipeline connections with the rest of the UK and Europe could significantly limit Scotland’s ability to grow its hydrogen sector and access international markets.
  • The findings highlight the need for coordinated policy, competitive electricity prices and investment in export infrastructure to support hydrogen deployment.

For further information, please read the full report.

If you require the report or annex in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

Research complete March 2026

DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7184

1. Executive summary

Low-carbon hydrogen has been identified as a critical enabler of the transition to net zero. This is particularly the case in sectors where electrification is technically or economically constrained, such as heavy industry, shipping, aviation, and export markets. Achieving this ambition requires transparent, evidence-based analytical tools that can translate policy assumptions into credible deployment trajectories.

This report presents the findings of a research project commissioned by ClimateXChange (CXC) and the Scottish Government to develop a quantitative hydrogen deployment model for Scotland. The project responds to the need for an updated evidence base on Scotland’s hydrogen potential in light of significant policy, market, and technological developments since the 2020 Scottish Hydrogen Assessment (SHA).

As part of the project, we have created a flexible, user-configurable modelling tool. The model allows Scottish Government and Scottish Enterprise to explore how different policy, economic, infrastructure, and market conditions affect the pace and scale of hydrogen deployment across Scotland’s key sectors through to 2050. We used two illustrative deployment scenarios to test the model’s functionality and represent distinct and plausible futures for Scotland’s hydrogen sector.

The low-carbon hydrogen deployment model

The model is a scenario-based analytical tool for estimating hydrogen demand across Scotland’s key sectors through to 2050. It also estimates the supply-side infrastructure required to meet that demand. The model provides a quantitative, user-friendly framework for translating policy, economic, and technological assumptions into sector-level hydrogen demand projections and infrastructure requirements. It can be used to explore alternative deployment pathways, test key assumptions and support evidence-based decision-making.

The model itself, accompanied by a detailed user guide, was developed for use, and continued development, by Scottish Government and Scottish Enterprise analysts. This report summarises the process of its development and documents its use in testing two scenarios. The model is intended to support scenario testing and exploration of alternative futures, rather than provide a single forecast of Scotland’s hydrogen deployment trajectory. Results should therefore be interpreted as conditional on the policy, market and infrastructure assumptions specified within each scenario.

Two scenarios for hydrogen deployment in Scotland

The first scenario, ‘pragmatic scale-up’, is broadly aligned with the International Energy Agency (IEA) Stated Policies Scenario (STEPS). It reflects a world in which hydrogen grows but demand remains the binding constraint. The second, ‘industry breakthrough’, moves closer to an IEA Net Zero Emissions (NZE) trajectory. It is characterised by centralised infrastructure, high shipping and aviation targets, reliance on green hydrogen, and export development. It is a scenario in which hydrogen becomes a structural pillar of Scotland’s industrial sectors where reducing greenhouse gas emissions is particularly challenging.

Under Scenario 1, total hydrogen demand in Scotland reaches 40.2 TWh by 2050. This is underpinned by 11 GW of green and 135 MW of blue installed production capacity. Exports, (both pure hydrogen flows and derivatives such as ammonia and e-fuels), account for the majority of demand. Domestic consumption is led by shipping, aviation (including sustainable aviation fuels (SAF)), the steel sector, and the chemical industry.

Under Scenario 2, total demand reaches 70.3 TWh by 2050, served by 19.4 GW of green and 0.12 GW of blue production capacity. Exports again represent the largest single component of overall demand, with higher transport sector demand reflecting a more ambitious policy environment.

When considered alongside existing Scottish and UK hydrogen studies, both scenarios are above the most conservative projections and broadly in line with mid-range reference cases. However, they sit below the Scottish Government’s previous headline production ambitions and the most optimistic SHA scenarios.

Implications for hydrogen deployment

The model’s outputs are most sensitive to two parameters: electricity prices and the availability of export infrastructure. Electricity prices directly govern the business case for electrolytic green hydrogen production. The availability of export infrastructure acts as a hard boundary on whether Scotland can access international hydrogen demand. These findings are consistent with the broader literature and reinforce the relevance of both affordable renewable electricity and infrastructure.

We highlight several priorities for policy and investment.

  • Targeted policy support to enable a competitive electricity price is essential for driving deployment and hydrogen competitiveness.
  • Export infrastructure deserves early and decisive attention. Both scenarios show that exports drive the majority of Scotland’s hydrogen demand, yet export volumes are acutely sensitive to whether pipeline connections to the rest of the UK and the EU are available on time. Delays to these infrastructure routes are shown to significantly constrain overall system scale or alternatively cause sunk investments. The case for accelerating planning, consenting, and investment in inter-UK and EU cross-border hydrogen infrastructure is therefore strong.

This report and model should be treated as a first analytical layer. It focuses on demand-driven deployment under policy and infrastructure conditions and only considers electricity price conditions as a competitiveness cost-related input. No infrastructure deployment cost drives the deployment of hydrogen infrastructure in the model. Further work is recommended to evaluate the total system deployment costs of each scenario, carry out deeper sensitivity analyses, and update the model as Scotland’s hydrogen market continues to evolve.

Glossary/Abbreviations table

ATR

Autothermal Reformer

BEIS

Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy

Blue Hydrogen

Hydrogen produced from natural gas via SMR or ATR, with CO2

BRIA

Business and Regulatory Impact Assessment

CCS

Carbon Capture and Storage

CCUS

Carbon Capture, Utilisation and Storage

CLI

Competitiveness and Likelihood Indicator

CO2

Carbon dioxide – a greenhouse gas produced during combustion and industrial processes, captured in blue hydrogen production pathways.

CPS

Current Policies Scenario

CXC

ClimateXChange

ToC

Theory of Change

DESNZ

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero

ELY

Electrolyser

EU

European Union

GHG

Greenhouse Gas

Green Hydrogen

Hydrogen produced via electrolysis using renewable electricity, resulting in near-zero direct carbon emissions.

GW

Gigawatt

HAR

Hydrogen Allocation Round

H2

Molecular hydrogen — the energy carrier at the centre of this model.

IEA

International Energy Agency

IEA CP

International Energy Agency Current Policies

IMO

International Maritime Organisation

JRC

Joint Research Centre (European Commission)

LCHA

Low Carbon Hydrogen Agreement

MW

Megawatt – a unit of power used to express electrolyser and production capacity.

NZE

Net Zero Emissions (by 2050)

NZTC

Net Zero Technology Centre

p.a.

Per annum – per year.

rUK

Rest of United Kingdom

SAF

Sustainable Aviation Fuel

S-Curve/Logistic Curve

A logistic growth curve used in the model to represent technology adoption within incremental sectors, converting a CLI score into a deployment share.

SMR

Steam Methane Reformer

STEPS

Stated Policies Scenario

TRL

Technology Readiness Level – a scale used to assess the maturity of a technology, applied in the model to calibrate the speed of hydrogen uptake across sectors.

TWh

Terawatt-hour – a unit of energy used to express large-scale electricity generation or consumption.

UK

United Kingdom

UKG

UK Government

VRES

Variable Renewable Energy Source

2. Introduction

This report presents the findings of research on the development of a hydrogen deployment model to support policymaking. The research was carried out by Ramboll on behalf of ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government.

Low carbon hydrogen has been identified as a cornerstone of Scotland’s transition to net zero by 2045. This project responds to the need to update the 2020 Scottish Hydrogen Assessment in light of significant policy, market, and technological developments.

Hydrogen is increasingly recognised as a critical enabler of decarbonization across multiple sectors. It is seen as particularly important in industry, long-haul transport, and for process heat, where electrification may be less feasible.

Scotland’s Hydrogen Action Plan (Scottish Government, 2022) sets out ambitions for 5 GW of installed hydrogen production capacity by 2030 and 25 GW by 2045, with a strong emphasis on export potential to Europe. This aligns with the UKG’s ambitions of developing low carbon hydrogen capacity for use in key sectors as outlined in the Hydrogen Strategy update to the market (DESNZ, 2025). Alongside the EU’s REPowerEU initiative (EU Commission, 2026), these strategies collectively signal a growing cross-border demand for clean hydrogen. The Scottish Government’s Hydrogen Sector Export Plan (Scottish Government, 2024) highlights the importance of international competitiveness, underpinned by robust certification and emissions accounting.

3. Methodology

This research was built on three complementary workstreams:

  • Literature review: gathering key data and insights to inform model building, assumptions, and scenarios. This ensured an up-to-date technical and policy basis for model development. It delivered inputs for the assumptions, and created a foundation for scenario development. The review covered Scottish and UK policy and strategy documents (including the Scottish Hydrogen Action Plan (Scottish Government, 2022), UK Hydrogen Strategy updates (UK Government, 2022-2025), Clean Power 2030 Action Plan (UK Government, 2024), and relevant low-carbon hydrogen standards and business model frameworks), Scottish technical and market studies, and international benchmarks such as IEA scenarios (including STEPS/CPS) (IEA, 2025) and other public sources. The review was used to define baseline assumptions and parameters, including technology costs, deployment timelines, policy milestones, demand drivers, and key interdependencies across the hydrogen value chain. The outcome of the review feeds into Section 4.1and provides a structured evidence base for modelling choices, scenario narratives, and stakeholder discussions.
  • Deployment model development: constructing a dynamic hydrogen deployment scenario model that allows for pathway generation based on different scenario configurations. This addressed the core of the research and delivered the modelling tool that then allows for scenario analysis and exploration of deployment alternatives. Model development included: (i) defining the overall model structure and interlinked input/output sheets; (ii) generating modules and dependencies across hydrogen production, demand, infrastructure, and exports; (iii) identifying and implementing parameters and assumptions; (iv) building a dashboard for user-friendly configuration and output interpretation; and (v) testing and calibration of model functionality. The model captures key relationships such as conversion of supply targets into capacity, links between capacity and build times, infrastructure implications of policy targets, and dependencies between hydrogen production buildout and grid needs. A short description of the model is provided in Section 4, with results generated through annual trajectories to 2050.
  • Scenario specification: creation of two distinct scenarios for analysis. This collected the necessary data and variations to create different pathways for hydrogen deployment (summarised in Section 3.2). The scenarios were then used in the deployment model to generate results on the future hydrogen sector in Scotland (Section 5). Scenario design was based on the literature review, related studies, and project experience. Each scenario includes (i) a narrative describing the underlying assumptions and drivers, and (ii) parameter settings for production, demand, infrastructure, exports, and policy/enablers. The two scenarios are aligned with IEA, UK Government, and Scottish Government policy ambitions and targets. These scenarios demonstrate model functionality and provide a basis for deeper sensitivity analyses on the parameters that most strongly influence hydrogen deployment outcomes.

4. Literature review and data

The scope of the study required a deep literature review to establish necessary understanding of the Scottish context and extract relevant data sources. The following sections provide the findings of the review on the Scottish energy landscape and the relevant documents used for model development. We then summarise the two scenarios that were established from the literature review. These scenarios serve as case studies for use of the deployment model.

The Scottish energy landscape

The literature review was used to establish the system context, policy boundaries, and credible deployment pathways for the Scotland hydrogen deployment model before populating detailed technical parameters. In practice, these sources informed (i) the model scope and scenario logic, (ii) the demand sectors and infrastructure pathways represented in the model, and (iii) the policy/commercial assumptions used to interpret results. This was particularly important because hydrogen deployment in Scotland is shaped not only by local resource potential, but also by UK market support frameworks, certification rules, export readiness, and wider European/international market development. The section below sets out the key documents that were used to inform the model design.

At the Scotland level, the Scottish Hydrogen Action Plan (Scottish Government, 2022) provides the primary strategic baseline for domestic and export ambition. This includes the headline production ambition (5 GW by 2030 and 25 GW by 2045) and the broader framing of hydrogen as both a decarbonisation and industrial opportunity. It was used to identify the main demand segments and deployment themes relevant to the model (industry, transport, power system integration, exports, regional clusters/hubs, and enabling infrastructure). The accompanying Business and Regulatory Impact Assessment (BRIA) (Scottish Government, 2022) provided the structure for understanding barriers and delivery risks (e.g., market immaturity, infrastructure needs, investment uncertainty and policy coordination requirements). These informed the way uncertainty is reflected in model dials and scenario ranges rather than treated as fixed outcomes.

The Scottish Government export plan (A Trading Nation: Realising Scotland’s Hydrogen Potential – A Plan for Exports) (Scottish Government, 2024) was then used to add an explicit export-system perspective. This source helped structure how the model considers Scotland’s role not only as a domestic hydrogen producer, but as a future exporter into UK and European markets. It highlighted practical enablers and constraints around export market development. These include demand assurance, certification, transport routes, ports and terminals, storage, and international coordination. These considerations were important for how infrastructure requirements and timing assumptions are framed in the model, particularly where export demand competes with or complements domestic demand growth.

A second group of sources was used to understand the UK-wide policy and commercial framework, which materially affects whether Scottish projects can progress. The UK Government’s Low Carbon Hydrogen Production Business Model (DESNZ, 2022) and the Low Carbon Hydrogen Agreement (LCHA) (BEIS, 2022) were important for understanding the commercial support architecture (e.g., long-term contractual support and price/reference-price concepts), and therefore for interpreting what kinds of projects may be financeable under different market conditions. The Hydrogen Update to the Market (DESNZ, 2025) was used as a current-state snapshot of UK policy progression and programme delivery (e.g., allocation rounds, project support progress, and updates on transport and storage business model development). This helped avoid designing scenarios around outdated assumptions and provided evidence on the pace at which the UK hydrogen market architecture is maturing.

For the power-system interface, the Hydrogen to Power consultation response (DESNZ, 2024) and the Clean Power 2030 Action Plan (UK Government, 2024) were key to understanding the emerging role of hydrogen in dispatchable, low-carbon flexible generation and system balancing. These sources frame hydrogen-to-power as a strategic, but policy-dependent, demand pathway with relevance for long-duration/seasonal balancing and firm capacity provision rather than bulk generation. This was important for defining when hydrogen-to-power demand should appear in scenarios, and how strongly it should be linked to wider electricity-system conditions and policy support. The hydrogen blending consultation document (DESNZ, 2025) was also used, but mainly as a transitional/uncertain demand pathway: it is reflected in the model as an enabler for earlier uptake rather than a core long-term demand assumption.

A third group of sources supported the representation of infrastructure and delivery pathways. The Net Zero Technology Centre (NZTC) Hydrogen Backbone Link (NZTC, 2024) report was used for understanding the strategic case and practical considerations for linking Scotland to European demand centres, including route/infrastructure development thinking and export system integration. The Joint Research Centre (JRC) assessment of hydrogen delivery options (JRC, 2021) and the academic journal article ‘An analysis of the bulk transport of green hydrogen at sea: Comparison between submarine pipeline and compressed and liquefied transport by ship’ (d’Amore-Domenech, R. et al., 2023) provided broader techno-economic context on transport vectors (e.g., pipelines vs shipping and derivative pathways) and how technology choice depends on distance, scale and delivery context. These sources did not directly set final technical parameters, but they strongly informed the infrastructure options represented in the model, i.e., trailers, pipelines and ships.

Finally, the IEA Global Hydrogen Review 2025 (IEA, 2025) and World Energy Outlook 2025 (IEA, 2025) were used as macro-level context sources. The Global Hydrogen Review was especially valuable for understanding the gap between announced project pipelines and projects reaching firm investment stages. It also helped with understanding the continued importance of established demand sectors and the central role of policy support, offtake certainty and infrastructure in unlocking deployment. The World Energy Outlook provided broader power-system and energy-security context (e.g., rising electrification, flexibility needs, grid and resilience constraints), which is relevant for interpreting hydrogen’s role in a future Scottish energy system and for ensuring the model reflects wider system interactions, rather than hydrogen in isolation.

Overall, the literature review provided the evidence base to define a policy-aware, infrastructure-aware and market-aware model structure for Scotland. It informed which dials were necessary in the model (e.g., policy support strength, export ambition, sector uptake, infrastructure rollout timing), the plausible ranges for projected system development, and the main risks and dependencies that should be reflected in scenario interpretation rather than hidden as fixed assumptions.

The representation of Scotland’s current energy system was primarily based on public data from the Scottish Energy Statistics Hub (Scottish Government, 2026), which was used to compile historical datasets on energy, heat and electricity demand. This source also informed the sectoral breakdown of fuel consumption, geographic patterns of consumption, and historical greenhouse gas emissions by type. These datasets were used to establish the baseline system conditions against which hydrogen deployment pathways were assessed.

Variable renewable energy source (VRES) capacity factors were derived from historical installed capacity and actual generation data. This enabled the model to reflect observed system performance and variability, rather than relying solely on generic capacity factor assumptions.

Most of the technical parameters used in the model were drawn from Ramboll’s internal expert knowledge, project experience, and proprietary databases developed across previous hydrogen and energy system studies. These parameters include electrolyser (ELY) efficiencies, low heating values, hydrogen storage characteristics, pipeline specifications, hydrogen tube trailer and shipping assumptions, and conversion/logistics values for hydrogen derivatives such as ammonia, e-methanol and sustainable aviation fuel (SAF). Using these internal sources ensures consistency across technologies and alignment with current engineering practice used in project development.

Scenarios

The research developed two scenarios for hydrogen in Scotland, each of which has a different underlying logic while maintaining an IEA related scope. The two following paragraphs describe the scenarios and their storyline. The scenarios are analysed using the model and results are shown in section 5.

Scenario 1 – “Pragmatic scale-up” (STEPS-aligned; hydrogen grows, but demand remains the binding constraint)

Scotland develops hydrogen in a world that broadly follows the IEA Stated Policies Scenario (STEPS) (IEA, 2025). Governments expand policies beyond what is already enacted. Barriers to new technologies are lower than in a “current policies” world, but aspirational targets are not fully met and new fuels often struggle without continued support. In this context, hydrogen activity expands, but the rate limiter is bankable demand rather than project announcements or supply potential.

Globally, hydrogen demand is still dominated by established uses (refining, chemicals such as ammonia/methanol), while new applications remain small. The IEA notes that new applications are <1% of total hydrogen demand and are heavily concentrated in a limited number of test projects. Scotland therefore prioritises near-term, contractable demand pools (industrial users, refining/chemicals, public procurement) and uses Hydrogen Allocation Rounds / business model instruments to close the cost gap. This reflects the IEA conclusion that stable, predictable demand is a key lever and that firm offtake remains limited, relative to announced project potential.

On supply, Scotland’s comparative advantage is access to low-emissions electricity. However, the “pragmatic” scenario also gives blue hydrogen a meaningful early role. This is because the cost gap for electrolytic hydrogen remains challenging and CCUS-based routes can be competitive in some regions. Accordingly, Acorn CCS progress and an acceptability window for blue hydrogen materially affect the build-out trajectory.

Hydrogen for power system firming/peaking is limited to demonstrations and niche resilience needs, consistent with STEPS’ observation that the dynamism of electricity isn’t automatically matched by strong uptake of low-emissions fuels without policy support.

Exports are a medium-term option, not the backbone: the IEA highlights that hydrogen trade remains limited today and that export-oriented projects often lack off-takers and face infrastructure constraints. Scotland therefore develops export capability cautiously, with realistic delays and selective market focus (UK first; EU later).

Scenario 2 – “Industry breakthrough” (NZE-leaning; hydrogen becomes a strategic pillar for shipping, aviation and industry)

Scotland accelerates hydrogen development in a world moving closer to an IEA Net Zero Emissions by 2050 (NZE)-type pathway (IEA, 2025). In this pathway low-emissions molecules play a larger role because electrification cannot fully decarbonise all end-uses. The use of low-emissions hydrogen and hydrogen-based fuels rise sharply (including high shares in aviation and shipping). Hydrogen-based fuels become a major decarbonisation vector for parts of transport and industry.

In scenario 2, Scotland’s policy framework is designed around the IEA’s central diagnosis that demand certainty is the key lever for investment. Support mechanisms are strengthened, long-term revenue stabilisation expands, and government orchestrates large, credible demand pools (industry clusters, ports, aviation fuel supply chains). The UK and Europe become lead markets for synthetic fuels through SAF mandates that include explicit hydrogen-based sub-targets, creating meaningful e-fuel volumes by 2030 and beyond.

Shipping demand accelerates because the regulatory environment tightens. The IEA describes how the IMO Net-Zero Framework (fuel intensity standard + GHG pricing) can incentivise low-emissions fuels, and that ports and bunkering infrastructure become pivotal early-mover nodes. Scotland leans into this by positioning key Scottish ports as hydrogen-derivatives hubs (ammonia/methanol). This aligns with the IEA’s finding that hydrogen-based fuel handling is concentrated in a limited set of ports and that infrastructure readiness can unlock early offtake.

Export development becomes a cornerstone in hydrogen sector ramp-up. While the IEA cautions that trade is limited today and export projects often lack off-takers, it also shows that trade-oriented project announcements are large and that ammonia/methanol can scale with the right contracts and terminals. Scotland therefore uses aggressive offtake aggregation and export infrastructure build-out, targeting both UK balancing and EU demand growth.

On supply, cheap renewable electricity is fully mobilised (electrolysis at scale). Blue hydrogen plays a time-limited bridging role, contingent on CCS delivery and emissions standards. This reflects the IEA view that multiple production routes can compete depending on costs and policy.

5. Hydrogen deployment model

The deployment model is at the core of this research. This section provides a summary of the purpose, the workflow and the outputs it delivers. The Annex contains a step-by-step description of the model in the form of a user guide. Detailed technical sources are marked within the model.

Purpose and design philosophy

The low-carbon hydrogen deployment model is a scenario-based analytical tool built to estimate hydrogen demand across Scotland’s key sectors through to 2050. It estimates the supply-side infrastructure required to meet that demand. The model was developed to accompany existing qualitative analysis on Scotland’s hydrogen potential. It provides a quantitative, user-friendly framework capable of translating different policy, economic, and technological assumptions into concrete, sector-level hydrogen demand projections and infrastructure requirements.

The model allows users to configure a range of external conditions, energy prices, policy ambition, infrastructure readiness, and others, and observe how sensitive hydrogen deployment is to each of those assumptions. Throughout development, the model structure and its underlying assumptions were refined in close collaboration with the project steering committee. This ensured that the tool was tailored to the specific needs of Scottish policymakers and grounded in the most relevant available evidence. This makes the model serve not just as a forecasting tool, but as a structured framework for stress-testing assumptions, identifying critical dependencies, and supporting evidence-based decision-making.

The model deliberately does not take account of deployment costs to reflect the aim of defining transition possibilities and infrastructure needs. Outputs should be seen to represent transition potential, under certain policy assumptions. The key to the outputs lies in the identification of hydrogen uptake potential per sector, given certain policies.

The model is designed primarily as a scenario exploration and policy testing tool rather than a predictive forecasting model. Its purpose is to assess how different combinations of policy, market, infrastructure and economic conditions may influence hydrogen deployment in Scotland. The outputs should therefore be interpreted as conditional scenarios based on the assumptions and calibration choices embedded within the model, rather than forecasts of future deployment

Model workflow

The model is organized into four interconnected modules, covering demand, production, infrastructure, and exports. Each module captures a distinct dimension of the hydrogen system, see Figure 1. These modules are linked through a common set of user-adjustable input parameters, referred to as dials. These represent the external conditions that determine whether hydrogen becomes competitive in a given sector. The dials allow for specifying Scottish factors such as electricity and gas prices, policy and funding strength, and CCUS infrastructure availability. They also address international parameters governing Scotland’s potential to supply hydrogen to the rest of the UK and the EU.

Electricity price inputs, including user-defined values for 2035, 2040, and 2050, and a score for the broader power procurement and grid environment, form the primary driver of competitiveness across the model. Alongside these, sector-specific policy levers capture the strength of support for hydrogen in individual end-use areas, including heat adoption, power generation, shipping, sustainable aviation fuel, and green ammonia production. A further set of infrastructure dials governs the availability of enabling conditions: the status of carbon capture and storage infrastructure, whether hydrogen production is assumed to be centralised or distributed across Scotland, the availability of export routes to the rest of the UK and the EU, and any assumed delays to deployment. Finally, three macroeconomic parameters (cost of labour, tax regime business impacts, and overall macroeconomic tendency), are combined with electricity price indicators into a composite Demand Development Score, which describes the growth or contraction of legacy sector energy demands over the modelling period.

Each dial setting is converted into a normalised score. These scores are combined, using literature-calibrated weightings, into a single Competitiveness and Likelihood Indicator (CLI) for each demand sector. The CLI captures, in a single value, how favourable the overall environment is for hydrogen adoption in a given sector under the chosen scenario. Each sector is assigned a specific deployment threshold: the CLI must exceed this threshold before any hydrogen uptake occurs in that sector. The presence of positive sector-specific policy support reduces the threshold, reflecting how targeted policy can unlock deployment in sectors where hydrogen would not otherwise be competitive on its own.

The CLI score is then used to determine deployment scale through sector-appropriate logic. For capital-intensive, binary sectors (such as potential hydrogen-based steel plants), the CLI triggers discrete investment decisions, reflecting the all-or-nothing nature of large industrial commitments. For more incremental sectors such as distilleries or road transport, a logistic S-curve converts the CLI into the fraction of total energy demand that switches to hydrogen. The shape and position of the curve is calibrated to reflect each sector’s technology maturity and typical investment cycle. Separate CLIs are calculated for rUK and EU export markets to capture Scotland’s relative competitiveness as a hydrogen and derivatives exporter in each of those markets.

Once sector-level hydrogen demand is established, the model builds full annual trajectories from 2026 to 2050. Deployment timing is governed by a combination of a sector start year, a construction or transition period, and any assumed delay. Together, these determine when hydrogen first enters service in each sector. Different sector types follow distinct demand calculation logics. Legacy incremental sectors project demand by applying the CLI-derived uptake share to current energy consumption, adjusted for the efficiency difference between existing fuels and hydrogen. Legacy non-incremental sectors shift demand on a plant-by-plant basis as the CLI crosses relevant thresholds. New capital-intensive industries derive demand from the number of plants triggered by the binary CLI logic multiplied by per-plant hydrogen consumption. New incremental export demands are matched against literature-derived estimates of accessible rUK and EU import markets, modulated by infrastructure availability and assumed build-out timelines. For the domestic aviation sector, an additional SAF mandate calculation runs in parallel with the general deployment logic, and the higher of the mandate-required volume and the model’s standard deployment projection is taken as the binding output.

The blue-green production is configured directly through the blue hydrogen acceptability dials. These set the relative construction share of electrolysis versus methane reforming with carbon capture, the maximum permissible share of blue hydrogen in the overall supply mix, and the years within which blue hydrogen is eligible to enter and exit the system. If Project Acorn is set to be cancelled in the infrastructure dials, the blue hydrogen share defaults to zero regardless of other inputs.

The infrastructure module then translates production volumes into physical asset requirements, pipelines, storage, and distribution. It uses spatial heuristics that account for whether production is assumed to be centralised at hydrogen hubs or dispersed across Scotland’s geography to serve distributed loads.

Outputs

The model produces a comprehensive set of time-series and summary outputs intended to directly inform infrastructure planning and policy analysis. On the demand side, these include annual hydrogen consumption by sector and production pathways from 2026 to 2050, alongside export volumes to rUK and EU markets. On the supply side, the model derives the electrolyser capacity and renewable electricity requirements associated with green hydrogen production, the SMR or ATR plant capacity and CO2 storage volumes associated with blue hydrogen. It also derives the transport and distribution infrastructure, pipelines, storage, and haulage fleet, required to connect supply to demand across Scotland’s geography. All outputs are accessible through a visual dashboard that allows scenario assumptions to be configured, and results observed in a clear and comparable way.

6. Results

The model was run under the two scenarios described in Section 5.2, generating annual hydrogen demand trajectories, production profiles, and infrastructure requirements from 2026 to 2050. The two scenarios are designed to bracket a plausible range of futures: Scenario 1, ‘pragmatic scale-up’, reflects a world of constrained but real hydrogen growth, while Scenario 2, ‘industry breakthrough’, represents an accelerated, NZE-aligned pathway in which hydrogen becomes a structural pillar of Scotland’s industrial sectors where reducing greenhouse gas emissions is particularly challenging. Both scenarios include support through aviation and shipping targets, moderate-to-low electricity prices, and pipeline export infrastructure to the rest of the UK and the EU, though the timing, scale, and ambition of these conditions differ between them. A key distinction is the role of blue hydrogen: the less ambitious scenario includes a meaningful share of methane reforming with carbon capture. This reflects the persistent cost gap for electrolysis in a pragmatic world. The more ambitious scenario converges rapidly on near-exclusively green hydrogen production.

An overview of the key results across the two scenarios is shown in Table 1[1]

Scenario 1

Scenario 2

2030

2040

2050

2030

2040

2050

H2 domestic demand

TWh

1.2

7.9

11.3

1.4

14.4

22

Green H2 production

TWh

1.79

18.4

39.2

27.9

47.4

69.4

Green H2 ELY capacity

GW

1

5

10.9

1

13

19.4

Blue H2 production

TWh

0

1

1

0

0.9

0.9

Blue H2 SMR capacity

MW

0

135

135

0

122

122

H2 Export rUK and EU

TWh

0

4.7

18.7

0

21

30.9

Ammonia Exports

TWh

0

1.0

3.1

0

1.8

4.9

Methanol for Exports

TWh

0

1.2

1.9

0

2.3

3.2

SAF Exports

TWh

0

1.3

2.2

0

2.3

3.3

Table 1: Overview of key results across the scenarios.

Scenario 1 – Pragmatic scale-up

Scenario 1 is configured around a distributed deployment of electrolysers, lower overall macroeconomic growth, higher acceptability of blue hydrogen, and low-to-moderate targets for transport sectors. Export infrastructure, i.e., pipeline connections to both the rest of the UK and the EU, is built out but subject to delay, meaning international flows do not begin until 2038. No hydrogen-based heat decarbonisation is assumed.

Under this configuration, total hydrogen demand in Scotland reaches 40.2 TWh by 2050, supported by 11 GW of installed green electrolyser capacity and 135 MW of blue hydrogen production. Demand is modest through the late 2020s, then accelerates between 2030 and 2040 as derivatives export production scales up. A domestic ammonia-for-fertiliser plant is triggered by policies, contributing approximately 2.6 TWh of annual demand. By 2035, cumulative annual demand reaches approximately 9.8 TWh, before growing more gradually to the 2050 endpoint. See Figure 2 for an overview of demand for Scottish hydrogen.

Exports account for a large share of Scenario 1 demand. Pure hydrogen exports to the rest of the UK and the EU reach approximately 18.7 TWh per year by 2050, while hydrogen derivatives exports, primarily ammonia and e-fuels for shipping and aviation markets, contribute a further 7.2 TWh. While the export pipeline infrastructure is eventually built in this scenario, the assumed delays mean that pure hydrogen exports do not commence until 2040 and derivatives exports only begin to ramp meaningfully from 2033 onward.

Scotland’s domestic hydrogen demand reaches approximately 11.4 TWh by 2050. Shipping is the single largest end-use sector, contributing around 4.6 TWh as Scotland’s ports and short-sea routes transition toward ammonia and methanol-based fuels. Aviation, incorporating both general sector uptake and volumes driven by the UK SAF mandate, accounts for approximately 1.5 TWh. Industrial demand is anchored by the chemical industry (approximately 1.8 TWh). The energy sector, hydrogen for power system firming and peaking, demands approximately 1 TWh, with electricity sector end-use adding a further 0.4 TWh. Road transport does not see an uptake, while distilleries and the mineral industry together account for under 0.4 TWh. Heating, light vehicle transport, rail, and paper and wood production do not register material hydrogen demand under this scenario. This is either because the CLI does not exceed sector thresholds or because the assumed policy and infrastructure conditions do not make hydrogen the least-cost decarbonisation option in these areas. Figure 3 shows domestic hydrogen demand across all sectors.

Scenario 2 – Industry breakthrough

Scenario 2 is configured around a centralised deployment of electrolysers with lower reliance on distributed small-scale infrastructure. It has high transport sector targets for both shipping and aviation, low acceptability of blue hydrogen, and more favourable electricity prices. Export infrastructure to the rest of the UK is available on time, while the EU export route is subject to delay. As in Scenario 1, no hydrogen-based heat decarbonisation is assumed. These settings reflect an accelerated policy environment in which strong regulatory support, SAF mandates with hydrogen sub-targets, tightening IMO shipping regulations, and orchestrated industrial demand clusters, enables a step-change in Scotland’s hydrogen deployment, consistent with an NZE-aligned global trajectory.

Under this configuration, total hydrogen demand reaches 70.3 TWh by 2050, supported by an almost entirely green production system totalling approximately 19.5 GW (19.4 GW of installed green electrolyser capacity and 0.12 GW of blue hydrogen). The deployment trajectory is steeper and earlier than in Scenario 1. By 2035, annual demand has already reached approximately 30.7 TWh, driven by the more rapid mobilisation of export infrastructure and the higher transport sector targets. Growth continues, albeit at a more modest pace, through to 2050. The near-complete absence of blue hydrogen in this scenario reflects both the low acceptability dial setting and the expectation that scale-up of green electrolysis, combined with stronger policy support, is sufficient to meet demand from an early stage. See Figure 4 for an overview of demand for Scottish hydrogen.

As in Scenario 1, exports dominate overall demand also in Scenario 2, with derivatives and pure hydrogen exports together accounting for the majority of the 42 TWh total. The earlier availability of the UK export pipeline (on time in this scenario) allows hydrogen trade with the rest of the UK to commence sooner. This strengthens the export revenue case and accelerates the investment rationale for large-scale electrolyser deployment. Domestic demand is driven by a higher-ambition transport sector, with shipping and aviation contributing materially more than in Scenario 1 due to the high regulatory and policy support settings. Industrial hydrogen demand, i.e., steel, chemicals, and associated sectors, follows broadly comparable trajectories to Scenario 1. This is because these sectors are anchored by binary investment decisions that are triggered once the CLI crosses the relevant threshold in both cases. The centralised infrastructure model in Scenario 2 concentrates electrolyser and storage capacity at hubs. This results in a smaller number of decentralised small-scale asset requirements compared to Scenario 1, but requires a more developed inner-Scottish pipeline and transmission system.

Comparison with previous studies

Scenario 1’s projected 40.3 TWh of demand is higher than many more conservative studies. It is well above the FES Falling Behind scenario (~2.9 TWh in 2050), FES Electric Engagement (~10.4 TWh), and the SPICe Spotlight assessment (~14.9 TWh). However, it is notably below the SHA Scenario A H2 Economy result (~65 TWh) and considerably below the Scottish Government’s headline trajectory derived from the Hydrogen Policy Statement, Hydrogen Action Plan, and Trading Nation export plan (which implies approximately 126 TWh by 2050). The result most closely resembles the FES Hydrogen Evolution scenario (~34.5 TWh), but is slightly higher due to the large export volumes that become available once infrastructure is in place. See Figure 6 for a comparison of Scenario 1 with related studies and Figure 7 for a comparison of Scenario 2.

Scenario 2, at approximately 70.3 TWh, comes much closer to the SHA Scenario A H2 Economy benchmark (~65 TWh). It represents the upper end of what a policy-supported, demand-led deployment model credibly projects without assuming full alignment with the most optimistic supply-push scenarios. Like Scenario 1, it remains below the 126 TWh implied by Scottish Government headline targets and the SHA Scenario B Green Export pathway. This underscores the fact that achieving those ambitions would require not only the strong policy and infrastructure conditions embedded in Scenario 2, but also additional demand creation, export market development, and a pace of scale-up that the model’s current calibration does not support. Both scenarios are, however, consistent with the IEA’s assessment that Scotland-scale producers in a STEPS-to-NZE world can expect to occupy the mid-range of the hydrogen deployment spectrum. This means they can be significant contributors to a decarbonising energy system, but constrained by the pace at which global demand for hydrogen and its derivatives actually materialises.

Conclusions

At the core of this research is the development of a hydrogen deployment model. The two scenarios generated by the Scotland hydrogen deployment model represent a test to model functionality as well as an outlook on future system development under IEA related assumptions. The modelling suggests substantial hydrogen deployment in Scotland under a range of future policy and market conditions. Across both scenarios, exports account for the majority of hydrogen demand by 2050, highlighting the importance of Scotland’s ability to access UK and European markets. The results also indicate that electricity prices and the availability of export infrastructure are the most important determinants of deployment, with both factors strongly influencing the scale and pace of hydrogen uptake

Scenario-related considerations

The scenarios show a moderate and a more ambitious outlook for Scotland’s hydrogen sector, spanning a range from approximately 40.2 TWh to 70.3 TWh of total hydrogen demand in 2050. Both scenarios show a period of steep growth between approximately 2030 and 2040 (as export infrastructure, derivatives production, and key industrial investments come online), followed by slower growth through the 2040s. Both scenarios estimate a level of demand in 2050 that is below what can be seen in other studies and projections.

The model’s outputs are most sensitive to two parameters: electricity prices and the availability of export infrastructure. Electricity prices are the primary determinant of the business case for green hydrogen production, directly governing both the competitiveness of electrolysis relative to fossil alternatives and the Competitiveness and Likelihood Indicator scores that drive uptake across most demand sectors. This sensitivity highlights that cheap, reliable access to renewable electricity is the foundational condition for green hydrogen business cases: electricity costs make up the largest component of electrolytic hydrogen production costs.

Export infrastructure availability acts as a hard structural boundary: if pipeline connections to the rest of the UK and the EU are not in place, international hydrogen demand, which accounts for the majority of total modelled deployment in both scenarios, cannot be incorporated regardless of how favourable other conditions are. The findings therefore reinforce the importance of timely infrastructure development alongside continued efforts to secure competitive renewable electricity.

Model development – lessons and next steps

We developed the model to describe deployment of hydrogen and hydrogen related infrastructure in Scotland. It serves as a tool for generating and testing alternative deployment scenarios. It links policy choices and market conditions to hydrogen demand and associated infrastructure requirements. The underlying logic is anchored in determining the demand for hydrogen across different sectors based on the policy landscape and support mechanisms available. Demand for hydrogen translates into the need for hydrogen infrastructure.

The main challenge of implementing policy-driven hydrogen uptake lies in meaningfully combining demand and supply-side support policies for deployment modelling. The approach we took was to work from demand estimation, based on policies. This takes limited account of supply-side-driven uptake of hydrogen. The main aim of this project was to create a user-friendly modelling tool. Within the time and resource available, the capacity for simultaneous modelling of both supply and demand side factors was limited.

The following model refinements may produce more detailed outputs:

  • Electricity prices: More detailed electricity price series could improve representation of hydrogen competitiveness.
  • Demand data: Improved sector-level demand data and bottom-up estimates of current energy use could enhance the quality of outputs .
  • Hydrogen adoption pathways: Better evidence on technology readiness and sector-specific adoption pathways could refine uptake assumptions.
  • Technology maturity and adoption: More explicit cost-based assessment of competition between technologies may improve representation of future trade-offs between blue and green hydrogen, alternative transport modes and storage options.

References

International Energy Agency (IEA) (2025) World Energy Outlook 2025. Paris: IEA.

Scottish Government (2024) A Trading Nation: Realising Scotland’s Hydrogen Potential – A Plan for Exports. Edinburgh: Scottish Government.

d’Amore-Domenech, R. et al. (2023) ‘An analysis of the bulk transport of green hydrogen at sea: Comparison between submarine pipeline and compressed and liquefied transport by ship’, Energy, 263, 125905.

Net Zero Technology Centre (NZTC) (2024) Hydrogen Backbone Link: Connecting Scotland to Europe – Report 3. Aberdeen: Net Zero Technology Centre.

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) (2023) Low Carbon Hydrogen Certification Scheme: Consultation Response. London: DESNZ.

Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy (BEIS) (2022) Low Carbon Hydrogen Production Business Model: Heads of Terms. London: BEIS.

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) (2025) Low Carbon Hydrogen Agreement (LCHA): HAR1 Key Terms Summary and Explanatory Notes. London: DESNZ.

European Commission, Joint Research Centre (JRC) (2021) Assessment of Hydrogen Delivery Options. Luxembourg: Publications Office of the European Union.

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) (2025) Hydrogen Update to the Market (July 2025). London: DESNZ.

European Commission, Joint Research Centre (JRC) (2021) Assessment of Hydrogen Delivery Options. Luxembourg: Publications Office of the European Union.

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) (2025) Hydrogen Update to the Market (July 2025). London: DESNZ.

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) (2024) Hydrogen to Power: Consultation Response. London: DESNZ.

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) (2025) Hydrogen Blending into the GB Gas Transmission Network: Consultation Document. London: DESNZ.

Scottish Government (2022) Hydrogen Action Plan: Business and Regulatory Impact Assessment. Edinburgh: Scottish Government.

Scottish Government (2022) Scottish Hydrogen Action Plan. Edinburgh: Scottish Government.

International Energy Agency (IEA) (2025) Global Hydrogen Review 2025. Paris: IEA.

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) (2024) Clean Power 2030 Action Plan (Main Report). London: DESNZ.

Scottish Government (n.d.) Scottish Energy Statistics Hub. Edinburgh: Scottish Government.

European Commission (2026) REPowerEU. European Commission.

How to cite this publication:

Mouelhi, B., Martin Nieto, C., Lüth, A., Raheli, E., Bush, R. (2026) ‘A Low Carbon Hydrogen Deployment Model for Scotland’, ClimateXChange. DOI https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7184

© The University of Edinburgh, 2026.
Prepared by Ramboll on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk

If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

  1. Throughout section 5, hydrogen demand is reported in four categories: (a) domestic demand is hydrogen consumed within Scotland across industrial, transport and energy sectors; (b) pure hydrogen exports is hydrogen exported directly to the rest of the UK or the EU; (c) derivative export demand is hydrogen used in Scotland to produce export products such as ammonia, methanol and SAF; (d) total hydrogen demand is the sum of domestic demand, export demand and hydrogen used for derivative production.
    Unless otherwise stated, references to total hydrogen demand include all four components.


Hydrogen derivatives and products (HDPs) are made by combining hydrogen with other elements. These processes make products that can be more easily used, transported or stored than pure Hydrogen.

With Scotland’s ambitious plans to increase low-carbon hydrogen production, HDPs are expected to play an important role in reducing emissions from sectors such as aviation, shipping and road transport. They could also create new export opportunities for Scotland.

This report focuses on ammonia, e-methanol, synthetic aviation fuel (SAF) and other e-fuels (made using hydrogen and captured carbon dioxide). It assesses whether current Scottish, UK, European and international regulations are suitable for supporting the production, storage, transport and use of these fuels. It identifies where they provide a strong foundation and where changes could help the sector grow.

Key findings

  • Our study found strong foundations for regulations related to: planning; technology; and health, safety and environmental (HS&E) standards. These include Scotland’s planning and environmental systems, the UK’s Control of Major Accident Hazards (COMAH) framework, and international shipping standards covering hydrogen-derived products.
  • Market regulations for hydrogen-derived products are the least fit-for-purpose. A lack of clarity and consistency mean they do not increase confidence in long-term production, and they provide uneven support across products. The key limitations identified are:
    • Support is heavily weighted towards sustainable aviation fuel (SAF). Comparable incentives are not available for ammonia, e-methanol or sustainable marine fuels.
    • Differences between UK and EU rules for renewable fuels and SAF could reduce Scotland’s export competitiveness.
    • Uncertainty in the UK Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS) creates further risk. Power-to-Liquid SAF (e-SAF) is not currently zero-rated, and it is unclear whether the ETS will extend to shipping, reducing confidence in future demand.

Recommendations

  • Regulations related to consenting and health, safety and environmental standards (HS&E) should be monitored to ensure they remain fit-for-purpose as the HDP markets and technologies develop.
  • Support International Maritime Organization (IMO) proposals to reduce emissions, encouraging future demand for hydrogen-derived marine fuels.
  • Most regulations were not designed to support hydrogen-derived products. New support mechanisms, similar to those already available for green hydrogen, could help grow the sector.
  • Address gaps and inconsistencies in market rules, including better alignment between UK and EU requirements to support Scottish exports.
  • Include e-fuels, including e-SAF, in the UK Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS) and introduce dedicated support for ammonia and e-methanol, similar to existing support for sustainable aviation fuel (SAF).

March 2026

DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7017

Executive summary

Aims

Scotland has set ambitious climate and hydrogen policies, including an ambition of 5 gigawatts (GW) of low‑carbon hydrogen production by 2030 rising to 25 GW by 2045. Hydrogen derivatives and associated products are expected to play a key role in enabling domestic decarbonisation. They are also expected to help position Scotland as an exporter to meet growing European demand.

Hydrogen derivatives are produced by combining hydrogen with other elements that can be more easily transported and stored. They may then be converted back into hydrogen or used directly as fuels or feedstocks. Where no further processing or conversion occurs before use, the term hydrogen product is used.

This study assesses whether the current regulatory landscape is fit‑for‑purpose to support the growth of hydrogen derivatives and products: ammonia, e‑methanol as well as synthetic aviation fuel (SAF) and wider e-fuels (fuels produced by combining hydrogen with carbon dioxide via electrolysis). Throughout this study these are referred to as hydrogen derivatives and products (HDPs).

The objective is to identify limitations and gaps within the current regulations and propose associated interventions. Drawing on an extensive regulatory review, stakeholder engagement and a criteria-based assessment, this study seeks to answer the following research questions.

  1. What is the regulatory landscape for ammonia, e‑methanol and SAF in Scotland?
  2. To what extent is the current regulatory regime fit‑for‑purpose to enable Scottish hydrogen derivative production, storage, transport and end‑use?
  3. What interventions are needed to create a coherent, safe and effective regulatory environment that accelerates HDPs across the value chain?

The assessment covers fuel types derived from green hydrogen and captured CO₂, and excludes bio‑derived fuels (e.g., bioethanol or biodiesel) and hydrogen production itself. The areas of hydrogen derivative value chain covered include: production in Scotland; storage; transport and use. Our assessment groups regulations by jurisdictions (both domestic and international) and impact area. Impact areas include: consenting and planning; route to market; technical standards and health, safety and environment standards (HS&E). This work follows previous ClimateXChange studies looking at HDP supply chain capabilities (Ella Yip, 2025) and the demand for HDPs (Szebasztian Csernik-Tihn, 2024).

Findings

Our study found strong existing foundations across all jurisdictions for consenting, technology standardisation and HS&E related regulations. These included existing planning, consent and environmental authorisations in Scotland, UK HSE legislations such as COMAH as well as the inclusion of HDPs in international standards under the International Maritime Organisation (IMO).

Route to market regulations, which cover hydrogen derivative related definitions, eligibility requirements and dedicated targets or mandates, were deemed least fit-for-purpose across all jurisdictions. They currently lack the clarity and cross-jurisdictional consistency to fully de-risk long-term production and market demand to maximise opportunities. They further do not provide incentives across all derivatives equally. The key limitations we identified included:

  • Uneven support across derivatives
    The UK policy landscape is currently skewed toward SAF, represented by the dedicated SAF mandate and revenue support mechanism. No equivalent commercial incentives exist for ammonia or e‑methanol. There is no mandate or incentive for the production of sustainable HDP maritime fuels.
  • Misalignment between UK and EU regulatory definitions
    Definitions and requirements for Renewable Fuels of Non-Biological Origin (RFNBOs) and SAF differ, particularly around greenhouse gas (GHG) emission thresholds, and the proximity of renewable electricity sources. Scotland’s export competitiveness into the EU may be limited if producers comply only with UK requirements.
  • Uncertainty in the UK Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS)
    Power to Liquid SAF (PtL or e-SAF) – produced specifically using CO2 and green hydrogen – is currently not zero-rated within the UK ETS, while the future expansion of the UK ETS to cover maritime sectors remains uncertain. This creates a further commercial risk for producers in terms of more limited offtake potential.

Recommendations

  • Consenting and HS&E related regulations should be monitored to ensure they remain fit-for-purpose as the hydrogen derivative market expands and technology develops.
  • Regarding specific technical standards and associated routes to market, we recommend supporting the progression of the IMO GHG reduction proposals for marine vessels. This encourages a further future offtake market.
    The majority of assessed regulations are not explicitly designed to promote the hydrogen derivative market. Dedicated support options could be considered, in order to further strengthen the sector. Potential interventions can be taken from adjacent sectors such as (green) hydrogen. For example, the Hydrogen Storage Business Model and Hydrogen Transport Business Model currently does not include hydrogen‑derived fuels (e.g., ammonia, e‑methanol). A dedicated mechanism mirrored on these models could be established for the derivative sector.
  • Other proposed interventions focus on addressing regulatory discrepancies and gaps in the route to market impact area. This includes promoting the alignment between UK and EU requirements and definitions for HDPs. The EU market represents a strong opportunity for Scottish production and export potential. Securing compliance with regulatory requirements will be essential.
  • We further recommend the inclusion of e-fuels / e-SAF within the UK ETS, aligning e-fuels with biomass-derived options and with the EU ETS approach. We also recommend a dedicated route to market support framework for ammonia and e-methanol. This could mirror the current support dedicated to SAF in the UK, such as specific mandates or revenue support mechanisms. 

We recognise the limits of Scottish Government influence on EU and UK regulations, but our recommendations may usefully inform existing conversations and engagement opportunities to seek improvements in these routes to market.

Glossary & abbreviations

Abbreviations

ADA

Alternative Design Arrangement

ADR

Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road

AFIR

Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulation

ASTM

American Society for Testing and Materials

ATEX

ATmosphères EXplosibles (EU directives for explosive atmospheres: equipment/workplaces)

ATJ

Alcohol-to-Jet (SAF production pathway)

CBAM

Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism

CCGT

Combined Cycle Gas Turbine

CCS

Carbon Capture and Storage

COMAH

Control of Major Accident Hazards

CXC

ClimateXChange

DCO

Development Consent Order

DESNZ

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero

DSEAR

Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres Regulations

EIA

Environmental Impact Assessment

ETS

Emissions Trading Scheme

EU

European Union

FT

Fischer-Tropsch (chemical process used to convert syngas – a mixture of carbon monoxide and hydrogen – to liquid fuels)

GB

Great Britain

GHG

Greenhouse Gas (Emissions)

HDP

Hydrogen derivatives and products

HPBM

Hydrogen Production Business Model

HS&E

Health, Safety and Environment

HSE

Health and Safety Executive

IAF

Integrated Authorisation Framework

ICAO

International Civil Aviation Organization

IMO

International Maritime Organisation

LCAF

Low-carbon Aviation Fuel

LHV

Lower Heating Value

NOx

Nitrous Oxides

MCA

Marine and Coastguard Agency

MTJ

Methanol-to-Jet (SAF production pathway)

NSIP

Nationally Significant Infrastructure Project

PtL

Power-to-Liquid

REACH

Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals

RED

Renewable Energy Directive

RFNBOs

Renewable Fuel of Non-Biological Origin

RTFO

Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations

SAF

Sustainable Aviation Fuel

SEPA

Scottish Environment Protection Agency

SOLAS

International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea

TNUoS

Transmission Network Use of System (charges)

UK

United Kingdom

UK ETS

United Kingdom Emissions Trading Scheme

VOC

Volatile Organic Compounds

Glossary of terms and units

CO2

Carbon dioxide

CO2e

Carbon dioxide equivalent

E10/E5

Petrol containing up to 10% / 5% ethanol blend

e-fuels

Electro-fuels are synthetic drop-in fuels to replace fuels such as petrol and diesel. Produced by combining hydrogen with carbon dioxide.

e-SAF

Electro-Sustainable Aviation Fuel (also known as Power-to-Liquid SAF or FT-SAF)

e-methanol

Methanol produced using electrolytic hydrogen as a feedstock

GW

Gigawatt

H2

Hydrogen

HDPs

Hydrogen derivatives and products, in this study focused on ammonia, methanol as well as SAF and wider e-fuels

IBC Code

International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk

IGC Code

International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk

IGF Code

International Code of Safety for Ships Using Gases or Other Low-Flashpoint Fuels

MARPOL

International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships

NOx

Nitrogen oxides

Policy

Set of ideas or plans officially agreed by a government (in this context). Represents the ‘what’ and ‘why’.

Regulation

An official rule or law controlling activities and processes. Represents the ‘how’.

SOx

Sulphur Oxides

Mt

Mega tonne (1,000,000 tonnes)

t

Tonne

%

Percentage

Introduction

The production of hydrogen derivatives and products (HDPs) forms an integral part of Scotland’s Hydrogen Action Plan (2022) and 2045 net zero targets. The Scottish Government’s aim is to establish Scotland as a key producer and exporter of hydrogen and hydrogen-derived products. This goal is underpinned by a 5GW low-carbon hydrogen production ambition by 2030, increasing to 25GW by 2045. Scottish export ambitions align with the EU’s goal of importing 10Mt of low-carbon hydrogen from outside of the EU by 2030, a significant part of which is anticipated to be in the form of HDPs.

HDPs are chemicals made by combining hydrogen with other elements so that it becomes easier to store, transport or to use as energy. The main HDPs – ammonia, e-methanol, and sustainable aviation fuel (SAF) – are studied in this report. Only HDPs from green hydrogen were considered, and not those where the hydrogen comes from bio-feedstocks. This means that in the case of SAF, only PtL SAF – also called synthetic aviation fuel or e-SAF – is included.

This study forms part of the Hydrogen Action Plan tasks of ‘building our evidence base’ and ‘identifying market access barriers’ for hydrogen and HDPs (Scottish Government, 2022). In this report, we provide an overview and analysis of the current regulatory landscape for HDPs in Scotland, the wider UK, EU and internationally. We focused on regulations applying to the whole value chain of production, storage, transport, and use. The overarching aim is to identify barriers to developing the Scottish HDPs market. This is important for three reasons: the proximity to 2030 ambitions; the need to create transition opportunities for traditional fossil fuel industries and workforce now; and the anticipated strong competition from other HDPs producers for European import targets. Many relevant route to market regulations sit at UK, EU or international level, limiting direct Scottish Government control over implementation. While the Scottish Government’s overall regulatory influence may be more limited at EU and international level, intervention options can still feed into an aligned Scottish-UK position and overall hydrogen strategy.

The research questions we aim to respond to are:

  • What is the regulatory landscape for the core HDPs ammonia, e-methanol, and SAF?
  • To what extent is the regulatory landscape fit-for-purpose to enable the growth of the HDPs sector in line with Scottish net zero, just transition and hydrogen ambitions?
  • What interventions would be needed to create a coherent, safe, and effective framework that accelerates HDPs across all value chain areas?

To address these questions, we first conducted an extensive literature review of relevant regulations across all four jurisdictional levels. We collated applicable regulations in an extensive database and categorised them against their applicability by fuel type, value chain, and impact area.

The hydrogen derivative fuel types considered are: ammonia, e-methanol, SAF and e-fuel (e.g., e-diesel).

The value chain refers to the activities required to produce, transport, store and use HDPs. Each area has different technical process, risks and regulatory requirements. The value chain areas are: production (Scotland focus), storage, transport and use.

Impact areas refer to aspects that can influence the growth and development of a sector. These are:

  • Route to Market – This impact area is used to determine the availability of offtake opportunities and customers for HDPs. Any regulations may affect how easily products can reach the customer. Overall regulatory mandates or targets can impact the size of the market available to the HDP producer, thus affecting the sector’s overall business case. Regulations may also capture market access and funding mechanisms (such as subsidies), providing revenue certainty.
  • Technology development and standardisation – As technology improves, it enables a sector to do things more efficiently and/or effectively. It can further open up new markets or growth areas. Technology development has to adhere to a standard for quality. Standardisation thus creates certainty and safety for products to work reliably for the users. With international standards, these allow for products and services to be exported globally and thus accelerate global adoption in the sector.

Technical standards referenced in this study focus on standards that serve as the de facto global market‑entry requirements embedded in regulatory acceptance for certain fuels. An example of this are the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards, which in the case of SAF, determine eligibility as aviation fuels. ISO and BSI standards, while important technical references, do not in themselves confer regulatory approval and therefore fall outside the study’s focus on regulation.

  • Health, safety and environment (HS&E) – A strong HS&E framework demonstrates that a sector operates safely and responsibly which builds public trust and attracts investors. It prevents incidents which could cause shutdowns and project delays to enable a smoother long-term growth of the sector. For developers or operators, a clear, standardised HS&E framework can reduce project development uncertainty.
  • Consenting – A clear and consistent consenting and planning framework can support effective and efficient project development activities. This reduces the risk of project delays and overall uncertainty for project developers and operators. A lack of clear consenting guidelines or uncertain applicability for HDPs may slow or complicate the approvals process, ultimately affecting investor confidence. This could potentially slow the growth of the sector.

We then assessed each regulation to determine suitability for and potential impact on the Scottish HDPs market, using the following criteria:

  • Policy intent: To what extent the policy is designed to support development of the HDPs market
  • Market impact: How it affects market outcomes in practice with respect to project viability, investment decisions or deployment pathways
  • Scope and breadth of impact: How much of the market is exposed to the policy’s effects (e.g., one or multiple derivatives or value chains)
  • Certainty and clarity: How clear, stable and well-understood it is and how much requires interpretation for clarity
  • Degree of regulatory influence: How easily it can be influenced or changed by Scottish and/or UK Government

An overview of the assessment criteria, scoring approach and weightings is provided in Appendix A. Using the total scores, individual criteria outputs, and associated justifications for each regulation we were able to identify initial gaps, limitations and discrepancies across the regulatory landscape and jurisdictional levels. A stakeholder session was held to validate and refine our initial outputs. These combined outputs then formed the basis of our recommended intervention areas.

To help communicate this complex landscape, we also developed a visual map of all regulations across impact areas and value chain levels. This map is available separate to this report and in Appendix C.

Scope Parameters and Limitations

This study focused solely on regulations regarding the production, storage, transport, and use of HDPs. Only fuel types derived from green hydrogen and a carbon dioxide feedstock were covered, not fuels derived from bio-feedstocks. We also excluded the production of low-carbon hydrogen itself and associated feedstocks such as electricity from renewable energy sources. These topics have already been subject to review and reported on in existing studies[1]

Regulatory landscape for HDPs

In this section, we capture the relevant regulations for HDPs across each of the jurisdictional levels – Scotland, UK, EU and internationally. Each sub-section focuses on one geography, outlining the regulations assessed, the derivatives and value chain elements to which they apply, and their impact areas. The following sub-sections cover each jurisdictional level:

  • Scotland
  • UK
  • European Union
  • International

The overarching policy and sector strategies for each geography are laid out to provide context, and to highlight stated policy intent relating to HDPs.

Our intention in this section is to describe the regulatory landscape for ammonia, e‑methanol and SAF produced in Scotland and transported and consumed either domestically or abroad. Section 5 captures the fit-for-purpose analysis with overall assessment outputs accessible in Appendix B.

Where appropriate, the regulations have been grouped together according to impact areas in each geography. Regulations that showed greater relevance in the scoring assessment and subsequent study recommendations were outlined in additional detail for reference.

A visual regulatory map of jurisdictional levels and impact areas accompanies this report.

Scotland

Policy and sector strategy

Scotland set out an ambition of 5GW of renewable and low-carbon hydrogen production by 2030 and 25GW by 2045, in their Hydrogen Policy Statement (Scottish Government, 2020). One of the Scottish Government’s actions from this Statement was to ensure the regulatory, planning and consenting framework for renewable developments would support the scale-up of hydrogen. Hydrogen is an export ambition and HDPs are included as a form of hydrogen transport vector and commodity. Hydrogen derivative developments are subject to an overarching UK regulatory regime. This is discussed further in Section 4.2.

Scottish climate policy

Scotland’s climate policy framework is underpinned by the Climate Change (Scotland) Act (Scottish Government, 2009). This sets a legally binding target for Scotland to achieve net‑zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2045, five years earlier than the UK-wide target. The Act also requires Ministers to set and meet carbon budgets. These carbon budgets will each cover a series of 5-year periods from 2026 to 2045.

In addition, the Scottish Government published its draft Climate Change Plan 2026–2040 (Scottish Government, 2025) in November 2025. This Plan sets out how Scotland intends to meet its first three carbon budgets covering the period 2026–2040, providing a pathway aligned with independent advice from the Climate Change Committee. The draft Plan is currently undergoing public consultation.

Scotland’s draft Climate Change Plan (Scottish Government, 2025) does not address

deployment targets for HDPs such as ammonia and e-methanol. It does mention the Scottish Government’s plan to consider options for increasing SAF production and its use.

Hydrogen Action Plan

The Hydrogen Action Plan (Scottish Government, 2022) positions hydrogen and its derivatives as essential for decarbonising hard‑to‑abate sectors and supporting a just transition. The Plan outlines actions to develop Scotland’s hydrogen economy, including scaling renewable hydrogen production to support derivative fuels for domestic and export markets. It recognises the need for safe, regulated development of derivatives and highlights their potential role in early export pathways to mainland Europe. Direct actions for HDPs in the Plan are in identifying priority export markets internationally and market access barriers for derivatives.

Hydrogen export plan

Scotland published its first hydrogen sector export plan, A Trading Nation: Realising Scotland’s Hydrogen Potential – A Plan for Exports (Scottish Government, 2024) which sets out Scotland’s ambition to become a major exporter of hydrogen and HDPs to European markets, underpinned by ambitions of 5 GW of production by 2030 and 25 GW by 2045. The plan recognises Europe’s rising demand for renewable hydrogen and hydrogen products and positions Scotland as having the renewable capacity, skills and supply‑chain capability to supply derivative fuels at scale.

Scottish regulatory landscape

Scottish regulations relevant to derivatives primarily address procedures in consenting, planning and permitting of certain activities. A UK regulation on Green Freeports which impacts route to market has been included in this section as it is relevant to Scotland. Table 1 captures the assessed regulations for the development of HDPs in Scotland.

Regulation

Derivative

Value Chain Area

The Environmental Authorisations (Scotland) Amendment Regulations 2025

All

Production

Transport

The Town and Country Planning (Hazardous Substances) (Scotland) Regulations 2015

All

Production Storage

The Town and Country Planning (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017

All

Production

Marine Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017

All

Storage

Transport

Finance Act 2021 with Finance (No. 2) Act 2023* – with regards to freeport tax site especially Green Freeports in Scotland

All

Production

Storage

Transport

Town and Country Planning (Scotland) Act 1997

All

Production

Storage

Transport

Table 1: Scottish Regulations applicable to derivatives across the value chain and impact area. *UK regulation

The regulatory landscape is not hydrogen or HDPs specific but is neutral in allowing projects which adhere to the planning framework and regulated activities which require permits to proceed.

  • The Environmental Authorisations (Scotland) Amendment Regulations 2025 – which amends the 2018 Regulations to create an Integrated Authorisation Framework (IAF). This framework streamlines the Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) regulation of waste, water, and industrial activities. These regulations cover activities requiring permits that must be gained separately to planning permission. This streamlined regulation is aimed at enhancing efficiency in the process for hydrogen derivative project developers in Scotland. An overall outcome or evaluation of this aim was not available at the time of writing.
  • Marine Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017 – regulations which govern EIAs for Scottish marine developments within the 12-nautical mile boundary. For hydrogen derivative projects, the water usage, waste discharge as well as infrastructure risks will be considered.
  • Finance Act 2021 with Finance (No. 2) Act 2023 – the 2021 Act (UK Government, 2021) and 2023 amendments (UK Government, 2023) set the UK‑wide legal basis for Freeports, including the tax reliefs and commercial incentives available within designated Freeport tax sites. In Scotland, this framework is applied through the Green Freeports, which focus on net‑zero and just‑transition objectives, including low‑carbon fuels and energy transition projects. This makes it relevant to the hydrogen‑derivatives landscape. For example, the Forth Green Freeport identifies opportunities for alternative fuels alongside offshore wind, shipbuilding, modular manufacturing and creative industries. This emphasis on net‑zero activities provides an additional policy route and potential market access point for HDPs.
  • Town and Country Planning Act 1997 the principal consolidating statute that provides the core legal framework for regulating land development, preparing development plans, determining planning applications, and enforcing planning control in Scotland (as significantly amended by later Acts such as the Planning etc. (Scotland) Act 2006 and the Planning (Scotland) Act 2019).

UK

Policy and sector strategy

Strategy and policy on climate, transport decarbonisation, and industrial development all influence direction on HDP production and use. The most relevant UK policies and strategies are outlined below focussing on their relevance to HDPs and the scope of this project.

Climate policy

UK Government is obliged to deliver net zero emissions for the UK by 2050 by the Climate Change Act (UK Government, 2008). Legally binding carbon budgets have been set covering the period out to 2037, and the seventh carbon budget (covering 2038 to 2042) needs to be set by June this year. Additionally, the UK Government has ratified the Paris Agreement.

The Carbon Budget and Growth Delivery Plan (UK Government, 2025) lays out how the Government intends to meet its statutory carbon budgets. This focusses on the period to 2037. HDPs are listed directly as achieving emissions reduction in the following areas:

  • Aviation (SAF)
  • Shipping (low carbon fuels including ammonia and methanol)
  • Road Transport (low carbon fuels including ammonia and methanol)

Deployment assumptions are listed for each of these sectors, but no breakdown is given. Therefore, there are no clearly stated deployment targets for the HDPs that are in the scope of this report.

Maritime Decarbonisation Strategy

The Maritime Decarbonisation Strategy (UK Government, 2025) sets out GHG emissions targets for the maritime sector. (30% reduction by 2030, 80% by 2040, 100% by 2050 relative to 2008 levels). This sets out guiding principles that include a co-ordinated approach to regulation with international bodies such as IMO. The document is clear that there are significant roles for ammonia and methanol in decarbonising the maritime sector. The strategy is focussed on achieving decarbonisation and does not include any targets for or give any direction on the need for domestic UK production of these fuels.

Jet Zero Strategy

The Jet Zero Strategy (UK Government, 2022) recognises that SAF is required to reduce emissions from the aviation sector and included the launch of a SAF mandate as a key objective. Relating to production, a KPI for five commercial scale SAF plants to be under construction was set. PtL SAF is not explicitly mentioned, and the strategy only includes general statements on funding for first of a kind commercial and demonstration advanced fuels plants.

Decarbonising transport

The Decarbonising Transport Strategy (UK Government, 2021) includes the UK Government’s strategy for decarbonising road transport. Electrification, biofuels and hydrogen are included as mechanisms to reduce emissions. This strategy introduced plans to phase out internal combustion engine vehicles in the UK, and these plans have been supported by subsequent governments. That means that while there is support for low carbon drop in fuels as an interim solution (such a biofuels), in the long term this type of fuel will be phased out in the road transport sector. There is no current strategy or policy that supports the use of HDPs in this sector.

Industrial strategy

The UK’s Modern Industrial Strategy (UK Government, 2025) has identified Clean Energy Industries as one of eight strategic sectors. The Clean Energy Industries Sector Plan (UK Government, 2025) includes hydrogen but does not specifically mention HDPs.

Hydrogen Strategy

The UK’s Hydrogen Strategy (UK Government, 2021) sets out a framework for scaling hydrogen production, transport, storage, and use, and set an ambition of 5 GW low carbon hydrogen production by 2030, later doubled to 10GW in the British Energy Security Strategy. There is no mention of HDPs in the Hydrogen Strategy. It does establish policy direction on hydrogen standards and business models that indirectly impact the derivative markets.

An update to the Hydrogen Strategy was due in late 2025 but has not been published at the time of writing this report.

UK regulatory landscape

HDPs are regulated through a combination of industrial safety legislation (e.g., COMAH), environmental consenting, and sector‑specific regimes (e.g., shipping, aviation, and industrial chemicals). As such there are multiple stakeholders split across these areas, including Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ), Environment Agency, Health and Safety Executive, and Department of Transport. This results in a fragmented regulatory landscape which limits the strategic direction, market impact and regulation clarity for new projects.

Route to market

The considered route to market regulations within the UK are shown in the table below, highlighting which hydrogen derivative(s) they are applicable to and at what point in the value chain.

Regulation

Derivative

Value Chain Area

Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations (RTFO) and Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Mandate Technical Guidance

All

Production (Scotland) Use

Merchant Shipping (Carriage of Dangerous Goods and Harmful Substances) Regulations 2024

All

Transport

UK Emissions Trading Scheme (The Greenhouse Gas Emissions Trading Scheme Order 2020)

All

Production (Scotland)

Storage

Energy Act 2023

Ammonia

e-Methanol

Use

The Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations Order (RFTO) 2007

Ammonia

e-Methanol

Use

UK Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) (Finance Bill 2025-26)

Ammonia

Production (Scotland)

Use

Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Mandate (Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations (Sustainable Aviation Fuel) Order 2004

SAF

Production (Scotland)

Storage

Sustainable Aviation Fuel (Revenue Support Mechanism) Bill

SAF

Production (Scotland)

Hydrogen Production Business Model (HPBM)

All

Production (Scotland)

Table 2 UK Regulations for Route to Market

Many of these regulations do not directly promote HDPs and are driven as a result of decarbonisation targets. Regardless, they have an effect on derivatives. Regulations that will have a market impact on hydrogen derivative products are:

  • Energy Act 2023 – provides the statutory framework to implement key elements of UK hydrogen policy. For HDPs, the Act helps enable investment by clarifying market arrangements and government intervention powers. The Act provides the framework for setting up business models and funding structures such as revenue support (e.g., SAF Revenue Support Mechanism, covered further below).
  • UK Emissions Trading Scheme (UK ETS) – sets a carbon price on emissions only from the power generation, industry and aviation sectors, improving the relative competitiveness of low‑carbon HDPs versus fossil alternatives. This is being reviewed for expansion to maritime sector in 2026 and waste incineration in 2028. At present, PtL SAF (e-SAF) does not receive zero-rated status. Zero‑rated fuels are assumed to have zero carbon emissions when used, a designation that applies only to biomass‑based SAF.
  • Renewable Transport Fuel Obligation (RTFO) – represents the central policy driver for hydrogen‑derived fuels in the relevant transport sector. This includes road vehicles and non-road transports such as non-road mobile machinery (NRMM) and the maritime sector, if the fuel used is a renewable fuel of non-biological origin (RFNBO). It creates demand for eligible RFNBOs through tradable certificates. An eligible RFNBO is required to
    • Achieve a 65% GHG emission saving over the whole lifecycle relative to the fossil fuels fuel baseline of 94 gCO2eq/
    • demonstrate that the renewable electricity or heat used to produce the RFNBO satisfies regionalisation rules and additionality rules. The regionalisation rule includes demonstrating that the electricity comes from the same region and electricity market where production is located. The additionality rule requires the electricity used to make RFNBO is additional, meaning produced from new, upgraded, and recommissioned production, and not diverted from existing renewable power.

Note this RFNBO definition differs from the EU definition and is further discussed in Section 5.1.1.

  • RTFO and Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Mandate Technical Guidance – provides the guidance on technical requirements which are largely consistent between the RTFO and SAF Mandate, covering classification, carbon and sustainability criteria, GHG calculations and evidence requirements. This guides suppliers and allows RFTO and SAF fuels to be consistent across the UK:
    • sets sustainability rules to qualify for certificates with GHG emission savings relative to fossil fuels for SAF having to be equal or above 40%, and for RFNBOs to be equal or above 65%, respectively
    • provide evidence requirements, which include documentation for eligible fuel feedstock, process emissions, evidence that fuel can be tracked from source to final delivery and audits within the supply chain
  • UK Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) – legislation to prevent cheaper carbon intensive products being imported into the UK. Importers are charged a fee based on the carbon emissions from goods production. This will be introduced from 1 January 2027 and mainly impacts green ammonia imports (as fertilisers are included), making it more competitive. Methanol and other fuel are not covered in this legislation.
  • SAF Mandate – sets a legal obligation on aviation fuel suppliers to supply a minimum proportion of SAF, increasing over time. The mandate therefore acts as a key demand‑side policy for HDPs in aviation, alongside parallel SAF revenue support mechanisms. PtL SAF obligations only start in 2028. In addition, there is currently a consultation to broaden the SAF Mandate eligibility to crop-derived SAF for flexibility.
  • Sustainable Aviation Fuel (Revenue Support Mechanism) Bill – this set the regulation for the proposed revenue certainty mechanism for UK SAF production. The legislation for the revenue certainty mechanism is expected to be finalised by the end of 2026.
  • Hydrogen Production Business Model (HPBM) – indirectly supports HDPs production by providing revenue support for the hydrogen used for derivatives production. However, hydrogen used to produce energy carriers for export is excluded from HPBM support.

Technology development and standardisation

Technology development and standardisation regulations for HDPs are designed to ensure that when these are used, they are produced, transported and used safely.

Regulation

Derivative

Value Chain Area

The Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulations 2017

All

Use

Maritime and Coastguard Agency (MCA) Customer Process for Alternative Fuels – Ammonia

Ammonia

Use

Motor Fuel (Composition and Content) Regulations and the Biofuel (Labelling) (Amendment) (NO. 2) Regulations 2021

e-fuel (road)

Use

Table 3 UK Regulations for Technology development/standardisation

There are specific regulations that set the technical, safety and operational requirements for developing and using hydrogen‑derivative technologies. Similar to ‘route to market’ related regulations, they do not actively promote the HDPs sector. However, they affect the way derivatives are deployed in the end-user market.

  • The Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulations – regulation to ensure a common set of standards and functionality for the provision of certain alternative fuel infrastructure. These alternative fuels include electricity, hydrogen, synthetic fuels – which comprise of HDPs – supplied to vehicles or ships in a way which is consistent across the UK.
  • Maritime and Coastguard Agency (MCA) Customer Process for Alternative Fuels – Ammonia – IMO have developed interim guidelines for using ammonia as fuel and these can be used by owners/operators wishing to build new vessels or convert existing vessels to run on ammonia. This guidance is used in conjunction with IMO’s International Code of Safety for Ships using Gases or other Low-flashpoint Fuels (IGF Code). The UK policies in Section 4.2.1 have not been clear on the use of ammonia as a fuel. However, this regulation indicates the MCA is preparing for this to be a possibility, which will ease its deployment as a maritime fuel.

Health, Safety and Environment

Health, Safety and Environment (HS&E) related legislation includes the Control of Major Accident Hazards (COMAH) regime and dangerous substances regulations, which govern the safe handling, storage and transport of hydrogen and HDPs.

Regulation

Derivative

Value Chain Area

The Carriage of Dangerous Goods and Use of Transportable Pressure Equipment Regulations 2009

All

Transport

Control of Major Accident Hazards (COMAH) Regulations

All

Production (Scotland)

Storage

Pipeline Safety Regulations 1996

All

Transport

UK Registration Evaluation Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals – The REACH etc. (Amendment) Regulations 2021

All

Production (Scotland)

Transport

Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres Regulations 2002 (DSEAR)

All

Storage

The Dangerous Goods in Harbour Areas Regulations 2016

All

Storage

Transport

Table 4 UK Regulations for HS&E

Table 4 lists the regulations for HS&E pertaining to HDPs. Most of these are not regarded as a barrier to deployment or constraining market activity, but to support the safe delivery of derivatives. Some of the relevant HS&E regulations for derivatives to note are:

  • Control of Major Accident Hazards (COMAH) Regulations – these regulations aim to prevent and mitigate the consequences of major accidents involving dangerous substances. They apply to sites that store or handle large quantities of hazardous chemicals. The regulation is based on the mass of the particular substance so will apply to hydrogen derivative thresholds of ammonia (50 tonnes), methanol (500 tonnes), SAF (2500 tonnes). COMAH would apply to all derivatives – but not all projects as dependent on mass of substances.
  • UK REACH etc. (Amendment) Regulations 2021 – applies to most chemical substances that are manufactured in or imported into England, Scotland, and Wales – and covers all HDPs. This has an associated fee and processing time for registration. The EU has its own REACH rules, which differ from UK REACH. Section 5.1.3 discusses the implications of this.

Consenting

Hydrogen derivative production facilities and infrastructure are subject to planning and permitting under UK regulations governing emissions to air, land and water, waste management and industrial installations, as shown Table 5.

Regulation

Derivative

Value Chain Area

Pipelines Act 1962

All

Transport

Town and Country Planning Act 1990

All

Production (Scotland)

Storage

Transport

The Environmental Permitting (England and Wales) Regulations 2016

All

Storage

Transport

Planning and Infrastructure Act 2025

All

Production (Scotland)

Storage

Planning Act 2008 – Nationally Significant Infrastructure Projects (NSIPs) (includes Development Consent Order)

All

Transport

able 5 Regulations for Consenting

In particular, some relevant regulations to highlight are:

  • The Environmental Permitting (England and Wales) Regulations 2016 – governs the environmental permitting and protection controls framework for any industrial and waste installations and its emissions. HDPs storage and transport in England and Wales will be regulated, however this will not apply to hydrogen derivative production facilities in Scotland.
  • Planning Act 2008 – Nationally Significant Infrastructure Projects (NSIPs) – NSIPs are large scale projects falling into five general categories (energy, transport, water, waste water and waste). This applies primarily to England and Wales. They include projects as diverse as electricity generating projects, reservoirs and hazardous waste facilities. HDPs would fall under Energy and energy infrastructure such as a pipeline carrying HDPs or storage of derivatives.

Cross-border projects covering Scotland and England (such as transport pipelines) will be subject to different regulatory and planning frameworks. For example, for a linear infrastructure project (e.g., cables, pipelines, rail) crossing the border, a project may need a DCO for the English portion, while the Scottish portion requires planning permission under the Town and Country Planning (Scotland) Act 1997. This would also include engaging with two different regulators handling matters – Environmental Agency and Natural Resources Wales regulating England and Wales, and Scottish Environment Protection Agency for Scotland.

European Union

Policy and sector strategy

Europe’s wider strategy and policy for HDPs is informed by the EU Hydrogen Strategy launched in 2020. HDPs are an indirect benefactor of aims to promote the overall demand for clean hydrogen and the recognition that a supportive enabling framework is required to achieve this.

The EU has several initiatives aimed at both promoting the production and use of hydrogen within the economy, with some specifically recognising the role of HDPs. Standing out are the creation of the European Hydrogen Bank and Global Europe Hydrogen Facility designed to accelerate renewable hydrogen deployment by supporting both domestic production and imports to meet 10 million tonnes by 2030. A key aim is to unlock private investment by bridging the price gap between renewable hydrogen and conventional fuels. Additional policy and regulatory frameworks are realised through the EU’s ‘Fit for 55’ Package to reach at least 55% GHG emissions reductions by 2030 compared to 1990 levels.

EU regulatory landscape

Throughout the EU landscape there is a strong focus on route to market-based regulations, with a wide application to the ‘Use’ value chain area.

Route to market

There is significant route to market enablement in the EU via hydrogen specific regulation and policy on HDPs. Standing out in particular are the definitions of what constitutes low-carbon and renewable hydrogen and the eligibility of the resulting products. The assessed regulations are shown in the table below.

Regulations

Derivative

Value Chain Area

EU Renewable Energy Directive III (RED III)

All

All

EU Emissions Trading Scheme

All

Use

Fit for 55 – ReFuelEU Aviation

SAF

Use

Regulation on employment of alternative fuels infrastructure (Regulation (EU) 2023/1804 of the European Parliament and of the Council)

All

Use

Fit for 55 – ReFuelEU Maritime

Ammonia

e-methanol

Storage

Use

EU Gas Directive (2024/1788) and its accompanying Regulation (2024/1789)

Ammonia

e-methanol

Use

EU Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM)

All

Table 6 European Regulations Assessed

There are three key policy instruments within the EU that take direct action in the promotion of hydrogen derivative products:

  1. Renewable Energy Directive III (RED III) outlines and defines the eligibility criteria particularly for hydrogen and HDPs. Hydrogen derivative criteria are defined within the description of Renewable Fuels of Non-Biological Origin (RFNBOs) as well as setting minimum mandates for use of RFNBOs across many sectors of the EU economy, including industry and transport. The European approach does not penalise international products provided they also meet the domestic eligibility criteria.There are strict eligibility criteria within RED III for RFNBOs (and the source hydrogen) via Delegated Acts:
    • GHG saving must by >70% compared to fossil equivalent
    • The source of power must be new renewable energy generation that is enabled by the project (alongside temporal and geographical/location constraint of the generating power asset matching hydrogen production with available renewable power generated locally)
    • CO2 source restrictions must be complied with, particularly fossil fuel-based emissions. As an example, CCS from Natural Gas powered CCGT will be ineligible beyond 2036.
    • RED III requires translation into law by each member state. At the time of writing this study, 25 out of 27 member states have bypassed the deadline to translate into domestic laws.
  2. ReFuelEU Aviation sets volume requirements for low carbon aviation fuel, SAF, to be utilised within the aviation sector. The requirements are driven by mandates on transport fuel suppliers. There are specific, time bound targets for the use of SAF and particularly synthetic or e-SAF. The latter does not take effect until 2030.
  3. ReFuelEU Maritime sets GHG intensity targets for ships over a 5000 gross tonnage calling at European ports. It is agnostic to fuel types or the usage of RFNBOs and does not explicitly require or promote their usage within the stated aims.

The EU definition of RFNBOs includes hydrogen itself and is not exclusive to HDPs. Therefore, any mandated use of RFNBOs throughout the economic zone does not ensure the promotion of HDPs exclusively as they will be competing directly with hydrogen itself.

Enabling policy that is indirectly supportive of low carbon HDPs includes the following:

  • European Union Emissions Trading Scheme (EU ETS) which incentivises industry to utilise HDPs to avoid carbon emission penalty costs by capping the allowable volume of carbon emissions per sector of the economy. This prices carbon emissions based on supply and demand within the market and also penalises non-compliance with costs. Sectors include aviation and shipping within the capped allowances. Utilising low carbon fuels such as RFNBOs is recognised to reduce emissions intensity, offsetting exposure to carbon emissions costs
  • Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) which aims to protect production of low-carbon goods domestically by exposing non-domestic goods to the same level of domestic eligibility criteria with respect to GHG emissions, or face tariff penalties. This currently only applies to ammonia as a hydrogen derivative, as it is included within fertiliser as one of the five affected sector goods.

The EU ETS states that the emissions cap is agnostic to fuel choice or emissions reduction approach, therefore the adoption of RFNBOs or HDPs is not a direct policy intention. There is, however, a dedicated support mechanism for RED III eligible SAF within the scheme, which both accounts for the lower lifecycle emissions of SAF fuels (reducing the emissions liability of the airline if using SAF) and awards allowances to support price premium of SAF over conventional jet fuel. Similarly, the EU ETS recognises eligible RFNBO fuel usage as reducing the monitored and reported emissions of a stationary installation, and can effectively be used to offset emissions allowance requirements.

Other regulations that are generally supportive of HDPs within the EU include:

  • Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulation (AFIR) which affects road infrastructure (fuelling stations), airports and ports predominantly. It requires the rollout and installation of alternative fuel supply infrastructure, such as electric charging and hydrogen refuelling. The standards and mandates are not for HDPs, although they are not explicitly excluded from the regulation.
  • EU Gas Directive & Regulation (2024/1788, 2024/1789) which has been updated to include provisions for hydrogen pipelines and networks. It has recognition of HDPs ammonia and methanol as supply products relating to hydrogen terminals, particularly for the transformation of these products into hydrogen. It does not have specific provision for the transport of ammonia and methanol as energy carriers themselves (i.e., with own pipeline infrastructure network requirements).

Technology development and standardisation

Drop-in hydrogen derivative fuels or e-fuels are accommodated for within existing EU Fuel Quality Directive. This directive specifies the quality requirements for fuels for example in combustion engines, which will apply the hydrogen derivative drop-in fuels.

Regulations

Derivative

Value Chain Area

EU Fuel Quality Directive (Directive 98/70/EC, as amended by 2009/30/EC)

e-fuels

Use

Table 7 European Technology Development and Standardisation Regulations Assessed

Health, Safety and Environment (HS&E)

HDPs are accommodated within existing HS&E regulations within the EU such as EU REACH, which requires the registrations of all chemicals produced or imported into the EU above a certain quality. This is a separate registry from the UK REACH. Similarly, the ATEX regulation provide mandated equipment design requirements of pressurised and explosive substances, including HDPs.

Regulations

Derivative

Value Chain Area

EU Registration Evaluation Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) (Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006)

All

Production

Transport

ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU (equipment) and 1999/92/EC (workplaces)

All

Storage

Use

Table 8 European Regulations Assessed

Other supportive initiatives

In addition to the regulation discussed above there are other supportive instruments within the EU particularly targeting the growth of the hydrogen and hydrogen derivative sector:

  • The European Hydrogen Bank is an EU-level financing instrument that, through its international pillar, supports the import of renewable hydrogen and its derivatives (such as ammonia, methanol, and e-fuels) from non-EU countries into the EU. It functions through the design of mechanisms like joint auctions and incentives to bridge price gaps, ensure sustainability standards, and help meet the EU’s 10Mt annual import target by 2030.
  • H2Global is a Germany-initiated auction-based funding scheme that facilitates large-scale imports of green hydrogen and derived products from outside the EU/Germany into Europe. The derivatives included are primarily ammonia and methanol. It functions by using public funds to cover price differences between global producers’ offers and European buyers’ willingness to pay, thereby de-risking early projects.

International

Policy and sector strategy

International legislation falls within collaborative organisations that typically have remits for safety, security, and environmental protection. Efforts to progress decarbonisation are prevalent for aviation and marine sectors relating to frameworks for enabling the low carbon fuels including HDPs.

Regulatory landscape

This study reviewed regulations predominantly related to the marine and aviation environment. These are currently the dominating modes of distribution and use of HDPs internationally. The regulatory landscape internally focuses on technology development and standardisation, particular as it pertains to marine vessels.

Route to market

Within the marine sector the IMO has draft legislation targeting decarbonisation which would see a reduction in carbon emissions from combustion of fuels on large vessels over time.

Regulations

Derivative

Value Chain Area

International Maritime Organisation (IMO) Net-Zero Framework

Ammonia

e-methanol

Use

Table 9 International Route to Market Regulations Assessed

The draft legislation has 2 main policy considerations which may indirectly influence the market of HDPs as low carbon marine fuels:

  • Global Fuel Standard (GFS): Sets yearly intensity reduction targets for ship fuel, forcing gradual decarbonization.
  • GHG Pricing: Imposes costs on emissions above the standard, with two tiers: a lower price for emissions between base and target, and a higher price for exceeding the target.

Technology development and standardisation

All aspects of the value chain of HDPs are applicable to existing international regulations with respect to technology development and standardisation.

Regulations

Derivative

Value Chain Area

International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Global Framework for SAF, LCAF and other Aviation Cleaner Energies

SAF

ALL

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ALL

Production

Use

International Code of Safety for Ships Using Gases or Other Low-Flashpoint Fuels (IGF Code) SOLAS

Ammonia

e-methanol e-fuel

Transport

Use

International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code)

Ammonia

e-methanol

Transport

The International Code of the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code) SOLAS

Ammonia

Transport

International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL)

Ammonia

e-methanol

Use

Table 10 International Technology Development and Standardisation Regulations Assessed

The international regulations assessed are described below in relation to three categorisations:

  • Marine vessel construction and operation.
  • SAF international proliferation (as drop in fuels like eSAF will have less of an infrastructure barrier to adoption as alternative fuels in marine context).
  • Fuel specifications

Marine vessel construction and operation

Non-pipeline transport of HDPs relies on the maritime sector and marine vessels. This sector adheres to internationally agreed regulation via the International Maritime Organisation (IMO). Existing IMO codes cover construction, bulk transport and design of vessels utilising HDPs as both a fuel, a refrigerant, and a hydrogen carrier (in the transportation of HDPs). There is an existing risk-based approval pathway within IMO codes for approving new ship types and fuels, via the Alternative Design Arrangement (ADA).

There is also an existing convention particularly for management of marine pollution within the IMO, the International Convention for Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL). This regulation is effective in limiting pollution from existing marine fuel types, with respect to NOx, SOx, Ozone depleting substances, Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs), onboard incineration and fuel oil quality. No alternative fuels are included within the fuel type definitions, however, they would be expected to fit within the same rules for pollution. This is particularly relevant for utilising Ammonia as a fuel with respect to SOx emissions. It is expected that this will be managed and controlled by the inherent design of the vessel to ensure the pollution constraints are met (e.g., via the use of selective catalytic conversion technologies onboard vessels).

SAF international proliferation

Global frameworks exist particularly for the promotion of SAF within the aviation industry, via ICAO Global Framework for SAF. Promotion, support and developmental funding is provided via this organisation, of which the UK is a prominent and influential member.

International fuel specification / standards

For the widespread adoption of new fuels (e.g., SAF) standardised testing methods and specification have been created through the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). This is vital for the commoditisation of alternative fuels to be used by aircraft globally. ASTM standards have been developed for all main variants of e-fuel production pathways, ensuring there is no barrier to adoption due to uncertainty of fuel specification.

Health, Safety and Environment (HS&E)

HS&E regulations are typically covered within local jurisdiction, or embedded within the technology development regulations above. It is noted that international carriage of dangerous good by road covers transport of HDPs beyond marine and aviation environments, ensuring full coverage of transport regulations.

Regulations

Derivative

Value Chain Area

Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR)

ALL

Transport

Table 11 International Regulations Assessed

Regulatory gap analysis

Our aim in this section is to address the second and third research question of this study. We explore and discuss the gaps and limitations identified within the regulatory landscapes across and between the different jurisdictional levels, categorised by impact area. These impact areas are ‘Consenting’, ‘HS&E’, ‘Route to Market’ and ‘Technology Development / Standardisation’. To aid assessment we initially reviewed each regulation against a set of pre-determined scoring criteria to help categorise and compare before investigating regulations for gaps and limitations as a more granular level. The assessment methodology and output are shown in Appendix A and Appendix B.

Gaps and limitations

The most significant gaps relate to the Route to Market impact area. Our assessment indicated discrepancies in the treatment or definition of HDPs between jurisdictions as well as the exclusion of one or more of the three derivatives covered in this study.

We also identified wider market gaps that do not necessarily arise from the HDPs regulatory landscape. Examples are outlined separately in Section 5.1.55. While not included within our core analysis scope, they provide useful discussion points on potential actions to promote the wider growth of the derivatives market.

Route to market

Route to market regulations show clear jurisdictional discrepancies that complicate offtake opportunities. Impactful regulations were predominantly EU-led regulations, such as RED III and the EU ETS, which offer a comprehensive and clear support framework with established targets and mechanisms that would incentivise offtake and thus a route to market. Particularly supportive for Scottish HDPs production is the openness for international products under RED III and direct inclusion of derivatives under RFNBO definitions. Although these definitions were deemed comprehensive and supportive in terms of allowing international products and different production methods, market participants have also highlighted them as too restrictive in practice (WoodMackenzie, n.d.). European legislations were considered largely outside the direct influence of Scottish and UK Governments.

Key regulations such as Fit for 55 – ReFuelEU Aviation and FuelEU Maritime offer support to HDPs, but are limited by scope. ReFuelEU Aviation is only applicable to SAF and provisions for synthetic SAF are not expected to come into effect until 2030. This timeframe aligns broadly with realistically expected supply timelines. FuelEU Maritime is not explicitly designed to drive HDPs within the maritime sector. With the options of other fuels or electrification being used, the overall market impact of this regulation on HDPs was deemed to be lower.

The UK route to market landscape heavily favours SAF, with limited support for ammonia and e‑methanol. Overall, there is currently an unclear role particularly for ammonia in the UK’s energy system. The topic is expected to be covered in the next UK Government Hydrogen Strategy Update this year, with an overall greater focus and associated support mechanisms required to incentive wider production and use for this derivative type.

Specific support is only available to e-SAF as a hydrogen derivative via the Sustainable Aviation Fuel (Revenue Support Mechanism) Bill and SAF Mandate (Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations (Sustainable Aviation Fuel) Order 2004. An uncertainty within the Revenue Support Mechanism is found in plans to continue stakeholder engagement on the PtL/e-SAF obligation buy-out price at £5 per litre and the mismatch to anticipated high UK production costs. This pricing mismatch may limit uptake and reduce offtake opportunities. Similar dedicated mandates or wider commercial support frameworks currently do not exist for ammonia and e-methanol. In addition, the SAF Mandate currently does not require PtL/e-SAF to be sourced from the UK, placing local producers in competition with overseas markets.

Limitations identified within the current UK ETS system focused on PtL/e-SAF being excluded from zero-rating and users of PtL/e-SAF not being able to claim reduced emissions allowances as is possible within the EU ETS, resulting in uncertainty of application if the UK and EU ETS were to align in the future. Additional uncertainty in the UK ETS stems from the question of whether maritime sectors will be included in future, with a respective consultation planned for 2026. This makes future treatment of e‑fuels in maritime uncertain, limiting potential offtake routes.

A final limitation to highlight is the difference between UK and EU definitions and criteria for HDPs in their respective regulations. Compared to the EU ETS, the UK ETS regulation currently excludes applications in the maritime sector and has no emissions allowance for PtL/e-SAF. UK and EU definitions for SAF and RFNBOs also differ. EU requirements for RFNBOs currently exceed those of the UK, particularly with regard to the geographic correlation for renewable energy sourcing for derivative production. This currently risks reduced export potential for Scottish-produced e-methanol and ammonia if they only adhere to UK requirements.

As highlighted throughout this section, there are opportunities to reduce barriers to offtake and expand the market by seeking greater alignment between UK and EU jurisdictions. A core focus lies in aligning definitions and criteria for HDPs. Additional market engagement with Scottish producers seeking offtake options can help assess the feasibility and impact of further alignment.

Technology development & standardisation

Our analysis of technical standards identified a regulatory landscape with high degrees of certainty and clarity. Although these standards are not designed to promote derivatives, they do not currently represent barriers. Rather, they are enablers by setting the rules and guidance by which technologies and products, including for HDPs (e.g., ammonia fuelled marine engines) will need to abide.

International frameworks exist that cover the three major hydrogen derivative products. Current legislation does not create barriers to their growth, especially for transporting ammonia and methanol, which are already widely traded.

The standards for fuel testing, and promoting the wider usage of new fuels (ASTM), is available for key HDPs already, such as e-SAF (including PtL, Fischer-Tropsch variant), ammonia, methanol and drop-in motor fuels (e.g., e-diesel). With requirements for utilisation of the drop in fuels already regulated under existing legislation e.g., the UK Motor Fuel Regulations (2021).

For marine transport, the IMO IBC Code and IGC Code frameworks, enables transport of substances, such as ammonia as a hydrogen derivative, but not for its use as a fuel. However, there are existing accommodations for alternative fuels such as ammonia and methanol via the IMO IGF code Alternative Design Arrangement. The main gap is the lack of formalised standards for using HDPs outside the risk‑based ADA process. The IMO has released interim guidance for safely using ammonia as a fuel in marine vessels, which is a positive step in accommodating this hydrogen derivative within the sector.

Health, Safety and Environment

We assessed the HS&E regulatory environment as largely-fit for purpose. Regulations are characterised as agnostic to HDPs specifically, thereby not directly targeting or limiting the growth of the market as a policy intent. There is a low degree of influence of the Scottish Government to introduce amendments in European and Global regulations such as EU REACH, EU ATEX directive and the Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road. There are areas for efficiency and improvement, however, for instance in the current dual burden of complying with both UK and EU REACH regulations if a Scottish producer was to export to Europe.

Consenting and Development

Scotland and the UK have a supportive consenting landscape, with existing regulations already applicable to HDPs specifically. An example of this is the Town & Country Planning Hazardous Substances (Scotland) Regulations 2015. A Hazardous Substances Consent would be required for on-site storage above the thresholds of 50t for ammonia, 500t for methanol and 2,500t for jet fuel.

The Planning and Infrastructure Act 2025 sets out to accelerate the planning and delivery of critical infrastructure – including those for clean energy projects and NSIPs but HDPs are not explicitly covered. The new Environmental Delivery Plans also require clearer guidance for derivative‑specific facilities, creating uncertainty for developers. Establishing additional clarity is important to de-risk the wider value chain for HDPs produced in Scotland, ensuring barriers or complexities in transport or storage outside of Scotland do not impede local production business cases.

Attempts at improving existing regulations and permitting requirements have already been introduced. An example of this is the Environmental Authorisations (Scotland) Amendment Regulations 2025, which seeks to streamline the regulation of waste, water, and industrial activities outside of the overall planning regime. Initial stakeholder feedback has been that it is still too early to establish if the intended outcome has been achieved. We recommend continued monitoring and engagement with stakeholders on these amendments.

Additional regulatory limitations for consideration

We have identified additional market mechanisms and current challenges within the (green) hydrogen production landscape that could be applicable to HDPs. These represent a wider current limitation where a market promoting mechanism is available to hydrogen production, but not to derivatives. They are worth acknowledging when considering the future growth of the HDPs market in Scotland.

  • UK power network and policy costs exemptions
    An existing scheme for relief to energy intensive industries offers an exception of up to 90% of Transmission Network Use of System (TNUoS) charges. It is unclear whether electrolytic hydrogen or derivative production will qualify for these exemptions, and for how long this scheme may be active. The Climate Change Levy exemptions currently apply to electrolysis for hydrogen production, reducing the cost of power to green hydrogen producer, however, it is uncertain if further exemptions will follow for power consumed by production of HDPs.
  • UK hydrogen‑focused regulations do not extend to derivatives
    Policies such as the Hydrogen Transport and Storage Business Models exclude hydrogen‑derived fuels (e.g., ammonia, e‑methanol), limiting support for derivative project deployment. Similar mechanisms could be considered for and targeted at the derivatives market specifically.
  • UK / EU hydrogen certification schemes
    There is a mismatch between recognised standards for certifying low carbon hydrogen utilised within the UK and EU. The UK has a single Low Carbon Hydrogen Standard, with no further standard definition to describe HDPs utilising this hydrogen. Currently, this standard is voluntary unless receiving support via HPBM scheme. The EU, however, has a selection of third-party certification schemes (CertifHy EU RFNBO, ISCC EU, REDcert EU, TUV SUD CMS 70). The lack of a singular certification scheme may lead to additional administrative and cost burden for hydrogen derivative producers.

Intervention areas

Xodus identified the following proposed interventions and recommendations based on the gap and limitations analysis in Section 5.1. Interventions cover specific regulation areas and wider market supporting interventions outside of existing HDP regulation. We suggest that route to market interventions are the main priority, given the existing applicability and suitability of the regulatory landscape to accommodate HDPs across the other impact areas. Xodus recognise that the route to market aspects lie primarily within UK and EU jurisdictions, with more limited direct regulatory influence for the Scottish Government. The interventions thus represent overall engagement and discussion topics to promote greater alignment between jurisdictions to benefit the overall hydrogen derivative value chain.

Intervention 1: Inclusion of e-fuels / e-SAF within UK ETS

  • Description: Recognise synthetic renewable fuels used by regulated industries as part of the UK ETS, similar to what the EU ETS currently does – both schemes are misaligned at present. Ptl/e-SAF is currently zero rated in the EU and not in UK. Synthetic fuels should be recognised as low or zero emissions within the emission factor available for fuels, similar to biomass implementation currently.
  • Changes would remove potential additional burdens on producers to monitor and adhere to two separate ETS definitions and regimes. Inclusion of synthetic fuels within UK ETS would incentivise further offtake and thus promote market growth.
  • Associated regulation: UK Emissions Trading Scheme
  • Jurisdiction: UK

Intervention 2: Extend suitable hydrogen funding mechanisms to incentivise the production of hydrogen derivatives

  • Description: Existing hydrogen incentivisation models recognise the production of hydrogen and hydrogen derivatives where these are not exported as energy carriers. These could be extended to include the direct subsidisation of ammonia production within the Hydrogen Production Business Model and recognise ammonia as a hydrogen storage solution within the Hydrogen Storage Business Model.
  • Impacts focus on promoting deployment and offtake by improving the initial economic viability of production plants. The intervention further addresses the current focus on green hydrogen production and similar funding options for SAF.
  • Associated regulation: Hydrogen Production Business Model, Hydrogen Storage Business Model
  • Jurisdiction: UK

Intervention 3: Targeted end-use and route to market support for ammonia, e-methanol and other e-fuels

  • Description: Implementation of instruments and regulations specific to the use of low carbon ammonia, e-methanol and other e-fuels. Support would require dedicated targets for production and consumption of ammonia and e-methanol in Scotland and the UK. A consenting perspective can aim to promote options for fast-tracking associated production plant applications. For targeted financial support an example is the Advanced Fuels Fund (AFF).
  • This recommendation is closely aligned with Intervention 2 on expanding the dedicated route to market and offtake support for ammonia and e-methanol. They consider the current focus on dedicated support for SAF (e.g., through the SAF Mandate and Revenue Support Mechanism). The impact of recommendation focuses on promoting market and offtake demand, thus supporting economic viability for producers.
  • Associated regulation: AFF, Hydrogen Production Business Model, similar targeted support for ammonia and e-methanol as found in the SAF Mandate
  • Jurisdiction: UK

Intervention 4: Explore options to harmonise the UK and EU definition and eligibility criteria of SAF

  • Description: The UK SAF Mandate definition and eligibility criteria for SAF are less restrictive than the EU counterpart. Impacts of aligning requirements focus on enhancing efficiency in offtake across multiple jurisdictions. This reduces burden on producers and supports overall viability, market development and export options from Scotland/UK to EU. It is recommended to explore options and associated impacts to harmonise requirements between the two jurisdictions. Stakeholder engagement with producers can further explore the extent of the issue on available market size.
  • Associated regulation: UK SAF and ReFuelEU Aviation
  • Jurisdiction: UK & EU

Intervention 5: Support progression of IMO GHG reduction proposals for marine vessels

  • Description: Support the representation of UK and Scottish interests within IMO forums. Promote inclusion of hydrogen derivative applications within GHG reduction options for marine vessels in support of the Net Zero Framework. This would impact the overall potential offtake market for HDPs where they are used as a marine fuel. Strengthens a further demand market for produced derivatives.
  • Associated regulation: IMO Net Zero Framework
  • Jurisdiction: International

Conclusion

This study focused on assessing the regulatory landscape for HDPs in Scotland across key market impact areas and different geographical jurisdictions. We considered relevant Scottish, wider UK, EU and international regulations within the HDP and net zero policy context. Our evaluation of key impact areas covered consenting of hydrogen derivative related infrastructure, route to market regulations, technology development and standardisation as well as HS&E related requirements.

Our assessment of the regulatory landscape showed an existing fit for purpose framework particularly within the consenting, standardisation and HS&E related regulations in Scottish, UK and international jurisdictions. Existing regulations for industrial and traditional fossil-fuel based projects are already directly applicable, even where the overall policy intent is not focused explicitly on HDPs. Examples of this have included COMAH, Pipeline Safety Regulations and UK/EU REACH requirements.

Current limitations and gaps within the regulatory landscape were predominantly found to be within the route to market impact area. The UK regulatory landscape here is skewed towards more dedicated support for SAF production and use compared to e-methanol and ammonia. In addition, as there is currently not a support mechanism for the decarbonisation of marine vessels, there is opportunity for the Scottish Government to intervene and further support this.

Our analysis showed a discrepancy in requirements for HDPs in Scotland/UK compared to EU counterparts. Examples of this included the differences between UK ETS and EU ETS extent and a more stringent RFNBO definition in EU regulations overall.

We recognise that the route- to market regulations lie largely outside the Scottish Government’s direct regulatory influence. Interventions were thus proposed to guide future engagement between Scottish, UK and EU regulatory counterparts, focusing on alignment and standardisation of criteria in HDPs. We consider that improved regulatory alignment across different jurisdictions and more targeted support for all hydrogen derivative offtake will be crucial for the underlying business case of hydrogen derivative production.

Progress in these route to market areas would support the path towards more effectively realising Scotland’s ambitions of becoming a hydrogen derivative exporter. At the same time, any local demand for derivative products could be met with a reduced administrative burden or compliance risk for producers.

References

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 2026. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). [Online]
Available at: https://www.icao.int/SAF/saf-conversion-processes

Ella Yip, D. N. J. W. H. M., 2025. Scotland’s capabilities in producing hydrogen products and derivatives. s.l.:ClimateXChange.

European Parliament and of the Council, 2003. European Parliament ETS DIRECTIVE 2003/87/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL. [Online]
Available at: https://climate.ec.europa.eu/eu-action/carbon-markets/eu-emissions-trading-system-eu-ets_en

European Parliament, 2006. EU Registration Evaluation Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) (Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006). [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX:32006R1907

European Parliament, 2014. ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU (equipment) and 1999/92/EC (workplaces). [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX:32014L0034

European Parliament, 2023. EU Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM). [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2023/956/oj/eng

European Parliament, 2023. Regulation on employment of alternative fuels infrastructure (Regulation (EU) 2023/1804 of the European Parliament and of the Council). [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A32023R1804

European Parliament, 2024. EU Gas Directive (2024/1788) and its accompanying Regulation (2024/1789). [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/EN/legal-content/summary/rules-for-renewable-gas-natural-gas-and-hydrogen-in-the-internal-market.html

European Parliament, n.d. EU Fuel Quality Directive (Directive 98/70/EC), as amended by 2009/30/EC. [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/dir/1998/70/oj/eng

European Parliament, n.d. Fit for 55 – ReFuelEU Maritime Regulation 2023/1805. [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A32023R1805

European Parlianment, 2023. Fit for 55 – ReFuelEU Aviation. [Online]
Available at: https://transport.ec.europa.eu/transport-modes/air/environment/refueleu-aviation/faq-refueleu-aviation_en

ICAO, 2023. International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Global Framework for SAF, LCAF and other Aviation Cleaner Energies. [Online]
Available at: https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=&ved=2ahUKEwi9xOCF4b2SAxVxTkEAHd6eFiwQFnoECBwQAQ&url=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.icao.int%2Fsites%2Fdefault%2Ffiles%2Fsp-files%2Fenvironmental-protection%2FGFAAF%2FDocuments%2FICAO-Global-Framework-on-Av

IMO, 2004. International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code). [Online]
Available at: https://www.imo.org/en/ourwork/environment/pages/ibccode.aspx

IMO, 2005. International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL). [Online]
Available at: https://www.imo.org/en/about/conventions/pages/international-convention-for-the-prevention-of-pollution-from-ships-(marpol).aspx

IMO, 2017. International Code of Safety for Ships Using Gases or Other Low-Flashpoint Fuels (IGF Code) SOLAS. [Online]
Available at: https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=&ved=2ahUKEwjq9MG-7vmRAxUlQ0EAHQzpATMQFnoECDMQAQ&url=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.itfseafarers.org%2Fsites%2Fdefault%2Ffiles%2Fnode%2Fresources%2Ffiles%2FITF%2520Guideline%2520on%2520IGF%2520Code.pdf&usg=

IMO, 2026. International Maritime Organisation (IMO) Net-Zero Framework. [Online]
Available at: https://www.imo.org/en/mediacentre/hottopics/pages/faqs-the-imo-net-zero-framework.aspx

IMO, n.d. The International Code of the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code) SOLAS. [Online]
Available at: https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=&ved=2ahUKEwiqt9H-3_uRAxW2VkEAHcsyKzEQFnoECB0QAQ&url=https%3A%2F%2Ftreaties.fcdo.gov.uk%2Fdata%2FLibrary2%2Fpdf%2F1998-TS0015.pdf&usg=AOvVaw1aAAZ9q9YDJOKHzwKkqNst&opi=89978449

Scottish Government, 2009. Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/asp/2009/12/section/A1.

Scottish Government, 2015. The Town and Country Planning (Hazardous Substances) (Scotland) Regulations 2015. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2015/181/contents.

Scottish Government, 2017. Marine Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2017/115/introduction.

Scottish Government, 2017. The Town and Country Planning (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2017/102/contents.

Scottish Government, 2020. Scottish Government Hydrogen Policy Statement. s.l.:https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-government-hydrogen-policy-statement/.

Scottish Government, 2022. Hydrogen Action Plan. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/hydrogen-action-plan/documents/
[Accessed 3 February 2026].

Scottish Government, 2024. A Trading Nation: Realising Scotland’s Hydrogen Potential – A Plan for Exports. s.l.:https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2024/11/trading-nation-realising-scotlands-hydrogen-potential-plan-exports/documents/trading-nation-realising-scotlands-hydrogen-potential-plan-exports/trading-nation-reali.

Scottish Government, 2025. Scotland’s Climate Change Plan – 2026-2040. s.l.:https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-climate-change-plan-2026-2040/pages/1/.

Scottish Government, 2025. The Environmental Authorisations (Scotland) Amendment Regulations 2025. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/sdsi/2025/9780111061473/introduction.

Szebasztian Csernik-Tihn, J. M. J. W. H. M., 2024. Review of demand for hydrogen derivatives and products. s.l.:ClimateXChange.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION, Oct 2023. Renewable Energy Directive III Directive (EU) 2018/2001. [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A32023L2413&qid=1699364355105

UK Governement, 1996. Pipeline Safety Regulations 1996. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/1996/825/contents.

UK Government, 1962. Pipe-Lines Act 1962. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Eliz2/10-11/58/contents.

UK Government, 1990. Town and Country Planning Act. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/1990/8/contents.

UK Government, 2002. The Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres Regulations. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2002/2776/contents.

UK Government, 2007. Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations Order. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2007/3072/contents.

UK Government, 2008. Climate Change Act. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2008/27/contents.

UK Government, 2008. Planning Act. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2008/29/contents.

UK Government, 2009. Carriage of Dangerous Goods and Use of Transportable Pressure Equipment Regulations 2009. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2009/1348/contents.

UK Government, 2015. The Control of Major Accident Hazards Regulations. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2015/483/contents.

UK Government, 2016. The Dangerous Goods in Harbour Areas Regulations. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2016/721.

UK Government, 2016. The Environmental Permitting (England and Wales) Regulations. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2016/1154/contents.

UK Government, 2017. Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulations. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2017/897/contents/made.

UK Government, 2021. Decarbonising Transport. s.l.:https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/610d63ffe90e0706d92fa282/decarbonising-transport-a-better-greener-britain.pdf.

UK Government, 2021. Finance Act 2021. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2021/26/part/4/crossheading/freeports.

UK Government, 2021. Freeports Guidance. s.l.:https://www.gov.scot/policies/cities-regions/green-ports/.

UK Government, 2021. Motor Fuel (Composition and Content) Regulations and the Biofuel (Labelling) (Amendment) (No. 2) Regulations 2021. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukdsi/2021/9780348224856.

UK Government, 2021. UK Hydrogen Strategy. s.l.:https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/64c7e8bad8b1a70011b05e38/UK-Hydrogen-Strategy_web.pdf.

UK Government, 2021. UK Registration Evaluation Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals – The REACH etc. (Amendment) Regulations 2021. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2021/904/made.

UK Government, 2022. Hydrogen production business model. s.l.:https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/hydrogen-production-business-model.

UK Government, 2022. Jet Zero Strategy. s.l.:https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/62e931d48fa8f5033896888a/jet-zero-strategy.pdf.

UK Government, 2023. Energy Act 2023. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2023/52/contents.

UK Government, 2023. Finance (No. 2) Act 2023. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2023/30/contents.

UK Government, 2024. The Merchant Shipping (Carriage of Dangerous Goods and Harmful Substances) (Amendment) Regulations. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2024/636.

UK Government, 2025. Carbon Budget and Growth Delivery Plan. s.l.:https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/carbon-budget-and-growth-delivery-plan.

UK Government, 2025. Clean Energy Industries Sector Plan. s.l.:https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/68587856b46781eacfd71de4/industrial_strategy_clean_energy_industries_sector_plan.pdf.

UK Government, 2025. Maritime and Coastguard Agency (MCA) Customer Process for Alternative Fuels: Ammonia. s.l.:https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/mca-customer-process-for-alternative-fuels-ammonia.

UK Government, 2025. Maritime Decarbonisation Strategy. s.l.:https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/67f4dcb3c2fea2548f4eff64/dft-maritime-decarb-strategy-25.pdf.

UK Government, 2025. Planning and Infrastructure Act. s.l.:https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2025/34.

UK Government, 2025. Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Mandate. s.l.:https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/sustainable-aviation-fuel-saf-mandate.

UK Government, 2025. Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Revenue Certainty Mechanism Bill 2024-205. s.l.:https://commonslibrary.parliament.uk/research-briefings/cbp-10279/.

UK Government, 2025. The UK’s Modern Industrial Strategy. s.l.:https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/69256e16367485ea116a56de/industrial_strategy_policy_paper.pdf.

UK Government, 2025. UK Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) (Finance Bill 2025-26). s.l.:https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/factsheet-carbon-border-adjustment-mechanism-cbam/factsheet-carbon-border-adjustment-mechanism.

UK Government, 2026. RTFO and SAF Mandate Technical Guidance. s.l.:https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/693984d733c7ace9c4a41f43/rtfo-saf-mandate-technical-guidance-26.pdf.

UK Government, 2026. UK Emissions Trading Scheme (UK ETS). s.l.:https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-emissions-trading-scheme-uk-ets-policy-overview/uk-emissions-trading-scheme-uk-ets-a-policy-overview.

United Nations, 2015. Paris Agreement. s.l.:https://unfccc.int/files/essential_background/convention/application/pdf/english_paris_agreement.pdf.

United Nations, 2023. Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR). [Online]
Available at: https://unece.org/transport/standards/transport/dangerous-goods/adr-2023-agreement-concerning-international-carriage

WoodMackenzie, n.d. Hydrogen: 5 things to look for in 2026. [Online]
Available at: https://www.woodmac.com/news/opinion/hydrogen-2026-outlook/?utm_campaign=pandr-lenspr-g&utm_medium=email&utm_source=campaign-email&utm_content=wtw26

Appendices

Assessment methodology

This section gives a more detailed description of the methodology used to assess and score each regulation reviewed within this report across Scotland, UK, EU and international jurisdictions. The full tabulated results are shown in Appendix B.

We started with a comprehensive desk-based literature review of hydrogen derivative relevant regulations and wider jurisdiction policies. All regulations were captured in an Excel database and categorised according to the following aspects:

  • Applicable derivatives: which hydrogen derivative(s) the regulation applies to (ammonia, e-methanol, SAF or combination of these)
  • Applicability across value chain: which stage of the hydrogen value chain the regulation affects (production, storage, transport or use)
  • Primary aspect of impact: the market growth or development factor impacted for HDPs, covering:
    • Health, Safety and Environment (HS&E): affects safety requirements, risk management, or operational controls
    • Consenting or Permitting: affects planning, permitting, approvals, or regulatory authorisations
    • Route to Market: affects demand creation, market access, offtake, or commercialisation
    • Technology development or Standardisation: affects technology requirements, standards, or technical development
  • Expected impact timeframe: the likely timeframe in which the regulation is expected to have most impact on the HDPs market, split into 0-2, 3-5 or 5+ years.

Where a regulation was judged to impact more than one of the impact areas listed above or could not clearly be attributed to a single category then it was given an impact area labelled as Multiple or Cross-Cutting.

Each regulation was further reviewed for specific applicability considerations and limitations in their treatment of HDPs. Findings were used to shape justifications for each assessment score. The assessment criteria, associated definitions and weightings can be seen in Table 12. A focus was to identify the overall policy intent and market impact of a regulation with regards to HDPs, as well as how clear or certain specific requirements or guidance is.

An acknowledgement of regulations only focusing on one derivative specifically – such as the SAF mandate – was reflected in the lower weighting of scope and breadth of impact. A sub-scoring was also introduced for the degree of regulatory influence – with a higher scoring accounting for direct Scottish Government influence and a 2.5 score for UK-level regulation authority.

Individual scores for each aspect of a regulation were then collated to generate a total score for the regulation’s applicability to, and support for the HDPs market. This then provided an indicator of potential areas of concern and limitations as well as regulations that offered a more supportive environment.

In a subsequent step, these scoring indicators were used to revisit regulations to identify specific gaps and discrepancies between jurisdictions. These were then used to inform potential intervention areas and recommendations.

Criteria (Weighting)

Description

High (3)

Med (2)

Low (1)

Policy Intent

(25%)

To what extent the policy is designed to support development of the HDPs market

Explicitly designed to promote or grow the HDPs market (e.g., mandates, incentives, targets)

Neutral or indirectly supportive (e.g., enabling frameworks, safeguards or oversight)

Primarily restrictive (constraining, limiting or prohibiting market activity)

Market Impact

(30%)

How it affects market outcomes in practice

Has a clear net positive effect on project viability, investment decisions, or deployment pathways

Has a neutral effect or limited / indirect influence on market

Has a net negative effect, creating material delays, costs, or barriers to deployment

Scope and Breadth of Impact (5%)

How much of the market is exposed to the policy’s effects

Affects multiple derivatives and multiple stages of the value chain

Affects one derivative across multiple stages or multiple derivatives at one stage

Affects a single derivative and a limited part of the value chain

Certainty and Clarity

(25%)

How unclear or unstable it is

Clear, stable, and well-understood requirements

Some ambiguity or elements that require interpretation or are under development

Significant uncertainty, ambiguity, or instability that materially affects investment or planning

Degree of Regulatory Influence

(15%)

How easily it can be influenced or changed by UK regulators or government

High (3) Set at Scottish level and can be directly influenced or amended by Scottish Government

Med-High (2.5) Set at UK level and can be directly influenced or amended by UK Government

Influenced by UK regulators but constrained by wider frameworks (e.g., international obligations, multi-agency coordination)

Largely determined by international standards, treaties, or external bodies, or regulatory regimes set by other nations, with limited scope for UK-level influence

Table 12 – Regulation Scoring Criteria, Definitions and Weightings

Regulatory assessment outputs

The full tabulated results are shown by jurisdiction and the primary aspect of impact. Abbreviations are used for the value chain and derivative types, as follows:

  • Value chain area
    • Production (P)
    • Storage (S)
    • Transport (T)
    • Use (U)
  • Derivative type:
    • Ammonia (A)
    • E-Methanol (M)
    • SAF (S)

Scoring description

The total score shown in the rag review tables on the following pages are weighted averages across the key impact areas with a score between 1 and 3. The total score is a nuanced output, whereby a given score can be used to infer the characteristics of a given regulation, for example:

High scoring (2.5- 3) can be characterised as regulations that are a combination of the following:

  • Explicitly designed policy for HDPs that will directly affect a Scotland value chain
  • Clear and direct market impact e.g., through targeted support, subsidy, mandates for HDPs and products
  • Applies to multiple HDPs across multiple parts of the value chain
  • There is a high degree of regulatory influence due to being a regulation under either a Scottish government or UK government jurisdiction

Lower scoring (1.5-2.5) can be characterised as regulations that are a combination of the following:

  • Neutral or indirectly supportive regulation for HDPs within a Scottish value chain
  • Neutral or indirect effect on the HDPs market, as likely not targeting these substances specifically within the economy
  • Applies to a limited number of HDPs (e.g., 1) or only a limited part of the value chain
  • The Scottish government has a limited degree of regulatory influence, owing to the fact the regulation is set at beyond the jurisdiction of Scotland or the UK governments (e.g., Internationally)

Scotland full results

HS&E

No Scotland specific regulations were identified for review.

Consenting

The following regulations are all active within Scotland.

Regulation

App. der.

Value chain

Policy intent

Market impact

Scope & breadth of impact

Certainty & clarity

Degree of influence

Final score

Justification

The Town and Country Planning (Hazardous Substances) (Scotland) Regulations 2015

All

P, S

2

2

3

3

3

2.45

  • This Act is to cover planning consent for developments in Scotland including those in the hydrogen derivative sector
  • Market Impact is limited as the planning consent process is a requirement
  • Scope and breadth of impact – affects ammonia, e-methanol and SAF facilities and pipelines if they meet a certain threshold – Ammonia 50 Tonnes, Methanol 500 Tonnes, Jet fuel 2,500 Tonnes
    As the scope covers raw materials and quantity in process 2 tonnes of hydrogen present brings the site within the scope of these regulations

The Town and Country Planning (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017

All

P

2

2

3

3

3

2.45

  • This Act is to cover planning consent for developments in Scotland on the need for EIA including those in the hydrogen derivative sector
  • Market Impact is limited as the EIA process is a requirement with the nature of HDPs
  • Scope and breadth of impact – affects ammonia, e-methanol and SAF facilities and pipelines – Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is necessary if the development is likely to have significant effects on the environment

Marine Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017

All

S, T

2

2

3

3

3

2.45

– Regulation Intent is not to build the HDPs market demand but for to assess impact to environment in any marine developments involving HDPs e.g., a pipeline or storage by marine terminal
– Market Impact – limited influence as environmental assessments for any developments need to be in place and as such, is not regarded a barrier

The Environmental Authorisations (Scotland) Amendment Regulations 2025

All

P, T

2

2

3

3

3

2.45

– This regulation gives a single, simpler integrated authorisation framework for providing authorisation for activities that affect the environment. It indirectly affects the HDPs market as the production of these affect the environment.

– Market Impact for ammonia have a neutral effect as the derivatives are expected to comply with regulation with no exception.

Table 13: Regulations active in Scotland

Route to market

No Scotland specific regulations were identified for review.

Technology development & standardisation

No Scotland specific regulations were identified for review.

UK full results

HS&E

All HS&E related legislations were deemed to have an impact timeframe of 0-2 years.

Regulation

Derivative

Value chain

Policy intent

Market impact

Scope & breadth of impact

Certainty & clarity

Degree of influence

Final score

Justification

The Carriage of Dangerous Goods and Use of Transportable Pressure Equipment Regulations 2009

ALL

P, S

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

Policy Intent is not to build the HDPs market demand but for safety considerations in transport by rail or road.

Control of Major Accident Hazards (COMAH) Regulations

ALL

T

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

Market Impact – limited influence as safety measures need to be in place for rail and road transport which serves the transport of HDPs

Pipeline Safety Regulations 1996

ALL

P, T

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

Scope and breadth of impact – regulations would apply to all HDPs

UK Registration Evaluation Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals – The REACH etc. (Amendment) Regulations 2021

ALL

S, T

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

Policy Intent is not to build the HDPs market demand but for safety considerations. Regulation is based on the mass of the particular substance so will apply to a small amount of hydrogen storage (>5 tonnes); Derivative thresholds – Ammonia (50 tonnes), Methanol (500 tonnes), SAF (2500 tonnes). Calculation of quantity is cumulative and must consider all qualifying materials on site)

Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres Regulations 2002 (DSEAR)

ALL

S

2

2

2

3

2.5

2.325

Market Impact – limited influence as safety measures need to be in place for project viability and as such not a barrier if project needs requirements

The Dangerous Goods in Harbour Areas Regulations 2016

ALL

S, T

2

2

3

3

2

2.3

Scope and breath of impact – COMAH would apply to all derivatives – but not all projects as dependent on mass of substances

Table 14: All HS&E related legislations were deemed to have an impact timeframe of 0-2 years.

Consenting

All consenting related legislation were deemed to have immediate impact timeframes of 0-2 years.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

Pipelines Act 1962

A, M

T

2

3

2

3

2.5

2.625

  • Applies to ‘cross country’ pipelines, which going by definitions would be any derivatives pipeline over 16km (10 miles). There is an exclusion for ‘small’ pipelines – but the definition for this references gas pipelines only, with small being defined by energy transported per year.
  • The gas wording looks like there would be no ‘small’ size exclusion for derivatives (not even gaseous ammonia – the definition of ‘gas’ doesn’t include it).

Town and Country Planning Act 1990

ALL

P, S, T

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

  • This Act is to cover planning consent for developments including those in the hydrogen derivative sector
  • Market Impact is limited as the planning consent process is a requirement
  • Scope and breadth of impact – affects ammonia, e-methanol and SAF facilities and pipelines if they meet a certain threshold

The Environmental Permitting (England and Wales) Regulations 2016

ALL

S, T

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

  • Will not apply to production of H2 derivatives in Scotland

Planning and Infrastructure Act 2025

ALL

P, S, T

2

2

3

2

2.5

2.125

  • This Act is legislation to speed up development by streamlining planning and approvals so indirectly supports projects in the hydrogen derivative sector
  • Market Impact is limited while the planning of projects may be accelerated, there is additional environmental requirements
  • Scope and breadth of impact – affects ammonia, e-methanol and SAF facilities and pipelines
  • Certainty and Clarity – the interpretation of this regulation on any hydrogen derivative project is uncertain because while the Act supports hydrogen as a clean power and NSIP, HDPs are not explicitly defined and may not be accelerated. The Act also introduces new environmental permitting in the form of Environmental Delivery Plans but its application to specialised facilities like for HDPs will require more definition.

Planning Act 2008 – Nationally Significant Infrastructure Projects (NSIPs) (includes Development Consent Order)

ALL

T

2

2

3

2

2.5

2.125

  • This Act is to cover a development consent process for major developments including those in the hydrogen derivative sector
  • Market Impact is limited as the development consent process is a requirement
  • Scope and breadth of impact – affects ammonia, e-methanol and SAF facilities and pipelines if they meet a certain threshold
Table 15: Consenting related legislation

Route to market

Impact timeframes for route to market regulations cover 0-5 years, with the Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations (RTFO) and Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Mandate Technical Guidance and wider RFTO set at wider 3–5-year timeframes. The Sustainable Aviation Fuel (Revenue Support Mechanism) Bill currently has a longer impact time frame of 5+ years.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

Finance Act 2021 with Finance (No. 2) Act 2023 – with regards to freeport tax site especially Green Freeports in Scotland

ALL

P, S, T

2

3

3

3

3

2.75

  • Decarbonisation is the policy intent – the focus is on manufacture of renewables and other low carbon technologies, along with the creation of the related new green jobs.
  • Currently, £50m of seed funding for studies across 2 sites Cromarty and Firth has been given, with an investment focus on decarbonisation projects, which can include hydrogen and its derivatives – so positive for market impact although indirectly

Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations (RTFO) and Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Mandate Technical Guidance

ALL

P, U

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

  • Policy Intent is more focussed on reduction of GHG emissions from fuels used for transport and aviation
  • Market Impact is limited as H2 derivatives promotion for SAF is chiefly around PtL obligation starting in 2028
  • Scope and breadth of impact – affects ammonia, e-methanol and SAF

Energy Act 2023

A, M

U

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

  • While HDPs are not explicitly state in the regulation, they are covered under Renewable Transport Fuel definition in Energy Act 2004 and their core fuel sector activity is covered under Part 12
  • Sustainable aviation fuel is defined and the SAF revenue mechanism consultation and report mentioned (and currently being carried out)
  • It is thus a neutral regulation that does not limit derivatives and its market impact

Hydrogen Production Business Model

A

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

  • Policy Intent is not to build the HDPs market demand but the hydrogen supply for market
  • Market Impact – While policy is explicitly for H2 projects but some have dependent H2 derivative projects
  • Greenhouse gas threshold as ≤ 20 g CO₂e/MJ LHV (~2.4 kg CO₂e/kg H₂)​ based on H2 production vs ≥ 70% GHG saving relative to fossil reference via lifecycle method for RFNBO may affect export

Merchant Shipping (Carriage of Dangerous Goods and Harmful Substances) Regulations 2024

ALL

T

2

2

3

3

2.5

2.375

  • Policy Intent is not to build the HDPs market demand but for safety considerations when goods such as HDPs are transported or used in shipping transport
  • Market Impact – limited influence as safety measures need to be in place and as such, is not regarded a barrier

The Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations Order (RFTO) 2007

A, M

U

2

2

2

3

2.5

2.325

  • Policy Intent is more focussed on reduction of GHG emissions from fuels used for road transport, non-road mobile machinery and marine industry, expanded to support RCFs
  • Market Impact is limited as H2 derivatives are not the focus of this policy rather RCFs are.
  • Scope and breadth of impact – affects ammonia and e-methanol as transport fuels
  • Note – RFNBO refer to maritime fuels if fuel is a renewable fuel of non-biological origin but its definition is different from the EU RFNBO for energy sources, GHG threshold and certification

UK Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM)

(Finance Bill 2025-26)

A

P, U

2

3

1

2

2.5

2.325

  • Policy intent: Primarily serves to protect domestic producers, including those pursuing low-carbon ammonia production, from cheaper high-carbon foreign competition rather than providing direct support like subsidies or incentives for low-carbon methods.
  • Acts as a safeguard of domestic low carbon ammonia production
  • Increases price of high carbon imports, encouraging low carbon domestic production and use of low carbon imports.
  • Policy not yet confirmed, expected 2027.
  • UK and EU CBAM are different (EU is ahead) so possible alignment ahead

Sustainable Aviation Fuel (Revenue Support Mechanism) Bill

S

P

3

3

1

1

2.5

2.325

  • Policy Intent is not to build the HDPs market demand but to reduce carbon emissions in a hard to abate sector
  • Market Impact – likely a bigger impact on the market for UK produced SAF than SAF Mandate, as no requirement under the mandate for fuel to be sourced from the UK. It also aims to overcome investment barriers for SAF production.
  • Certainty and clarity – The government is expecting that all the required legislation for the revenue certainty mechanism is laid by the end of 2026. However, the issue of PtL costs could face challenges to produce in the UK which will affect investment.

Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) Mandate (Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations (Sustainable Aviation Fuel) Order 2004

S

P

2

2

1

3

2.5

2.275

  • Policy Intent is not to build the HDPs market demand but to reduce carbon emissions in a hard to abate sector
  • Market Impact is limited as H2 derivatives promotion for SAF is chiefly around PtL obligation starting in 2028

UK Emissions Trading Scheme (The Greenhouse Gas Emissions Trading Scheme Order 2020)

ALL

P, U

2

2

3

2

2.5

2.125

  • This regulation serves to incentivise decarbonisation by setting a limit on emissions in heavy industry, power and aviation sectors (only) via a carbon cap. This indirectly promotes the HDPs market.
  • Market Impact for HDPs have a positive impact on for investment and project viability. However synthetic fuels are not recognised within stationary installation and aviation as part of the UK ETS and do not have low or zero emissions within the emission factor available for fuels, unlike biomass implementation currently
  • Certainty and Clarity – UK ETS Scope expansion for maritime consultation being carried out in 2026 and waste incineration in 2028
  • Degree of influence – Will be influenced by EU ETS as both seek future alignment
Table 16: Route to market regulations

Technology development & standardisation

Impact timeframes for the guidance and regulations related to technology development and standardisation are focused on 0-2 year periods, with more immediate, existing impacts.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

The Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulations 2017

ALL

U

2

3

3

3

2.5

2.675

  • Regulation intent is to ensure standardised alternative fuel infrastructure across UK, no particular promotion towards ammonia or e-methanol but affects these as fuel alternatives in transport.
  • Market Impact – viewed as positive to accelerate deployment

Maritime and Coastguard Agency (MCA) Customer Process for Alternative Fuels – Ammonia

A

U

2

3

1

3

2

2.5

  • This guideline was developed for using ammonia as fuel for maritime vessels and indirectly supports the development of ammonia in the market.
  • Market Impact for ammonia (only) would be positive to help with deployment
  • While issued by the MCA, these guidelines were developed by IMO and can be influenced as such.

Motor Fuel (Composition and Content) Regulations and the Biofuel (Labelling) (Amendment) (NO. 2) Regulations 2021

E

U

2

2

2

3

2.5

2.325

  • Sets the required fuel quality standards that any other renewable/drop-in road fuels will need to comply with.
Table 17: Regulations related to technology

EU full results

HS&E

These HS&E regulations are currently active.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

EU Registration Evaluation Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) (Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006)

All

P, T

2

2

3

3

1

2.15

  • EU REACH is a HSE regulation and not to promote HDPs so its market impact is also neutral
  • EU REACH registration is mandatory for manufacturers or importers placing more than 1 tonne/year of chemical substances on the EU market, requiring a dossier submission to the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA).
  • Regarded a major hurdle for UK manufacturing and import into Europe – involves registration fees

ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU (equipment) and 1999/92/EC (workplaces)

All

P, S

2

2

2

3

1

2.1

  • Existing safety regulation which any alternative or hydrogen derived fuel will need to abide by, particular for equipment and installations containing explosive or pressurised equipment.
  • ATEX is an EU Directive that no longer applies in the UK, this is replaced by 2016 No. 1107 – Equipment for use in hazardous areas needs to be certified by a UK Approved Body)
Table 18: HS&E regulations currently active

Consenting

Not reviewed at the European block level. Consenting is specific to local jurisdiction.

Route to market

All regulations are active now and expected to impact within 0-2 years, with the exception of ReFuelEU Maritime which is expected to be long terms 5+ years.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

EU Emissions Trading Scheme

All

U

3

3

3

3

1

2.7

  • Primarily effects combustion emissions within EU member states but also influences demand for low carbon fuel alternatives such as HDPs.
  • Influences e-SAF via direct subsidy support ‘Subject to carbon budgets and free allowances set within the EU commission

RED III Directive Implementation – Germany (Quota on GHG in Transport)

All

P, U

3

3

3

3

1

2.7

  • Policy intent is to incentivise / mandate use of RFNBOs within the transport fuel mix within Germany. Requires supply of RFBNOs fuels.
  • Positive market impact, which could drive offtake agreements of RFBNO producer projects.
  • Affects use and indirectly effects production within the RFBNO value chain.
  • Agnostic to location of RFNBO production (could be imports)

Executive Order on the Reduction of Greenhouse Gases from the Transport Sector and Sustainability

All

U

3

3

2

3

1

2.65

  • Translated RED III Directive with specific targets for RFNBOs
  • Does not meet the minimum target required by RED III for RFNBO %, 0.9% vs 1%

Fit for 55 – ReFuel EU Aviation

SAF

U

3

3

1

3

1

2.6

  • EU mandates for promotion of SAF within the aviation industry.
  • Explicit targets for renewable hydrogen derived synthetic aviation fuel
  • SAF Targets active now but, targets for synthetic aviation fuel do not come into effect until 2030

Regulation on employment of alternative fuels infrastructure (Regulation (EU) 2023/1804 of the European Parliament and of the Council)

All

S, U

2

2

3

3

1

2.15

  • Policy implicitly supports Ammonia , e-methanol, and e-SAF by defining them within alternative fuels whereby this regulation requires member states to deploy measures to support the build-up of alternative fuels infrastructure.
  • Mandates and targets are not required specifically for ammonia / e-methanol / SAF within this regulation. The policy focus of standards and mandates are on electric charging and hydrogen refuelling for road vehicles and electric charging for maritime vessels and stationary aircraft.

Fit for 55 – FuelEU Maritime

A, M

S, U

2

2

2

3

1

2.1

  • Policy is technology and fuel agnostic with the primary focus reduction in well to wake carbon intensity for maritime vessels. It is no guarantee that the policy will result in increased penetration of HDPs fuels compared to alternatives (e.g., biofuels, electrification).

EU Gas Directive (2024/1788) and its accompanying Regulation (2024/1789)

A, M

U

2

2

2

3

1

2.1

  • Regulation is pertinent to hydrogen and supply of HDPs ammonia and e-methanol
  • Includes liquid ammonia within the definition of hydrogen terminals for the purpose of manging hydrogen injection into the gas grid

EU Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM)

A

2

2

1

3

1

2.05

  • Policy intent influences only ammonia as a hydrogen derivative currently as one of the five sectors covered
  • Supportive to EU low carbon fertiliser production and sets the requirements for import GHG. This is influence low carbon ammonia produced in Scotland only if it is exporting to EU.
Table 19: Route to market

Technology Development & Standardisation

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

EU Fuel Quality Directive (Directive 98/70/EC, as amended by 2009/30/EC

e-fuel

(e-diesel)

Use

2

2

2

3

1

2.1

Sets the required fuel quality standards that any other renewable / drop-in road fuels will need to comply with if supplying EU.

Table 20: Technology development and standardisation

Multiple or cross-cutting.

The expected impact timeframe for HDPs through RED III is 3-5 years.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

EU Renewable Energy Directive III (RED III)

All

P, S, T, U

3

3

3

3

1

2.7

Wide overarching regulation setting mandated targets within the EU for adoption of HDPs in the form of RFNBOs. Sets out targets across industrial, transport including.

There is however a risk of delay for member states transposing the Directive mandates into member states Law. The directive entered into force Nov. 2023 with a deadline for member state transposition of May 2025. But as of January 2026, only 2 out of 27 member states have fully transposed the directive into law.

Policy indirectly supports global HDPs, however competition exists among hydrogen derivative producers.

Table 21: Multiple or cross-cutting

International full results

HS&E

The ADR regulation below is active now.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR)

All

T

2

2

2

3

1

2.1

Regulation to ensure safety transport of goods, including ammonia, methanol and kerosene.

Existing rules in place which the HDPs already abide and must continue to abide. ”

Table 22: ADR regulation

Consenting

Not reviewed at the international level. Consenting is specific to local jurisdiction.

Route to market

The IMO Net-Zero Framework is draft legislation with expected impact in the medium term (3-5 years).

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

International Maritime Organisation (IMO) Net-Zero Framework

A, M

U

2

2

2

1

1

1.6

  • Policy intent is to enforce decarbonisation within the marine sector for large vessels, but this is technology and fuel type agnostic, the focus is on emissions reduction.
  • Market impact is neutral as the policy will not directly incentivise the use of HDPs
  • Significant uncertainty as this framework has not become legally binding nor agreed upon by all members. Due for reconvening of the parties in 2026.
Table 23: The IMO Net-Zero Framework

Technology development & standardisation

Below are standards / guidance, except for the ICAO Global Framework for SAF which is a Strategy / Policy initiative. All are active with an impact timeframe 0-2 years.

Regulation

App. Der.

Value Chain

Policy intent

Market Impact

Scope & Breadth of Impact

Certainty & Clarity

Degree of Influence

Final Score

Justification

International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Global Framework for SAF, LCAF and other Aviation Cleaner Energies

S

P, S T, U

3

3

2

2

2

2.55

  • Wide reaching strategy / initiative to support the net-zero emissions from aviation with a particular focus on SAF through the ACT-SAF scheme.
  • UK is a significant contributor to the organisation intellectually as the leader in SAF mandate regulation domestically and also providing funding for developing country SAF feasibility projects.
  • Unlikely to have domestic UK benefactors of the initiative as it has a global intent, with little focus on UK specific activities.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

All

P, U

2

3

1

3

1

2.35

  • Policy intent specific to SAF is to ensure standardisation of testing and definition of fuel quality requirements for SAF. This also applies across the spectrum of HDPs e.g., ammonia, e-methanol and e-diesel.
  • Has a positive market impact as allows SAF to be utilised within the aviation sector, given it qualifies / meets the standards set out.

International Code of Safety for Ships Using Gases or Other Low-Flashpoint Fuels (IGF Code) SOLAS

A, M

T, U

2

2

2

3

1

2.1

  • International codes by the IMO. Necessary design considerations for enabling transport and usage of ammonia and methanol as marine fuels for ships bigger than 500 tonnes.
  • Neutral effect as this international code is a requirement for safe design and operability of uses gases and other low-flashpoint fuels onboard ships.
  • Governs methanol as a marine fuel, requiring an Alternative Design Arrangement (ADA) for risk assessment, alongside MSC.1/Circ.1621, which provides interim guidelines for methyl/ethyl alcohol, addressing its flammability and specific handling needs,
  • The IMO approved MSC.1/Circ.1687 in Dec 2024 for ammonia as fuel, focusing on equivalent safety to conventional fuels.

International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code)

A, M

T

2

2

1

3

1

2.05

  • International codes by the IMO, Necessary design considerations for enabling bulk transport of methanol and ammonia.

The International Code of the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code) SOLAS

A

T

2

2

1

3

1

2.05

  • International codes by the IMO. Necessary design considerations for enabling transport of ammonia via ship but only when utilising ammonia as a refrigerant
Table 24: Technology development and standardisation guidance

Multiple or cross-cutting.

No regulations fit within this category.

Regulatory map

How to cite this publication:

Chan, S., Fernandes, J., McWhirr, C., Jurgens, L., (2026) ‘Regulatory Landscape for Hydrogen Derivatives and Products in Scotland’, ClimateXChange. DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7017

© The University of Edinburgh, 2026
Prepared by Xodus Group on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk

If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

  1. >For other reports in this series on hydrogen derivatives and products, please visit the CXC Publication Page, and see ‘Review of demand for hydrogen derivatives and products’ and ‘Scotland’s capabilities in producing hydrogen products and derivatives’.

February 2026

DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7018

Executive summary

Governments across the world are introducing policy targets to decarbonise heavy duty vehicles (HDVs). This shift presents an economic opportunity for Scottish companies. Scottish Government commissioned this research to identify the current and future economic impact of decarbonisation across three particular supply chains:

  • HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing
  • HDV charging infrastructure
  • Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

*HDVs are vehicles with gross vehicle weight of more than 3.5 tonnes (for example, heavy goods vehicles, buses, coaches, municipal vehicles, emergency service vehicles). Niche vehicles are those with gross weight of less than 3.5 tonnes (for example, wheelchair accessible vehicles and four by four electric vehicles).

Key findings

  • Strong global policy and market forces are accelerating HDV decarbonisation
  • The speed of transition varies by type of HDV and low carbon fuels are playing a role alongside zero emission options
  • Scottish HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain activity is concentrated in a few companies
  • The HDV charging infrastructure supply chain is mainly service based and is growing
  • The HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain is very limited, with the main growth opportunity identified after 2035
  • Market demand stimulation is vital but supply side actions are important too

Current make-up and capabilities of supply chains

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

  • The overall supply chain includes 21 companies with locations in Scotland. We estimate there are between 3,200 and 4,000 jobs in this supply chain, with annual turnover of between £800m and £1,000m.
  • The zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain is a subset of the above. We identified seven active, or recently active, companies. We estimate there are between 300 and 500 jobs in this supply chain, with an annual turnover of between £80m and £120m.

HDV charging infrastructure

  • We identified 15 active companies. We estimate there are between 200 and 400 jobs in this supply chain. There was insufficient evidence to estimate the supply chain turnover.

Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

  • We identified seven active companies and estimate there are less than 100 jobs in this supply chain. There was insufficient evidence to estimate the supply chain turnover.

Supply chain strengths and opportunities

We conducted a SWOT analysis of each supply chain. The strengths and opportunities for each are summarised here.

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

Scotland’s main strengths are in niche manufacturing and vehicle integration, rather than mass production. Existing companies have expertise in the building of specialist vehicles, bespoke design, systems integration and aftersales support. However, the manufacturing base is small, fragmented and relies heavily on imported chassis and core systems. The most realistic opportunities for Scottish companies sit in specialist and niche applications, such as municipal and emergency vehicles.

HDV charging infrastructure

A key strength is the presence of established EV charging integrators and service providers with experience in depot-based charging, developed through the bus sector and early HDV projects. There are, however, notable gaps in the supply chain. Opportunities are driven by growing HDV electrification and policy requirements for charging infrastructure both domestically and internationally.

HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

Scotland’s main strength is its practical delivery experience derived from hydrogen mobility projects, particularly for buses and municipal fleets. However, the supply chain is small and capacity constrained. There is significant reliance on a few providers and on imported core equipment. Opportunities for Scottish companies in hydrogen refuelling infrastructure are limited and use-case specific.

Future demand

For the three key supply chains discussed above, we used employment numbers as a proxy for economic growth. Our estimate for the potential change in job numbers to 2030 and 2035 is compared with current job numbers in Table 1.

Supply Chain

Current Jobs

Jobs by 2030

Jobs by 2035

Overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

3,200 to 4,000

3,200 to 4,500

3,200 to 5,200

Zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing (subset of the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain)

300 to 500

500 to 1,000

1,000 to 3,000

HDV charging infrastructure

300 to 400

400 to 700

Uncertain – no estimate

HDV refuelling infrastructure

Less than 100

Uncertain – no estimate

Uncertain – no estimate

Table 1: Estimated current and future Scottish job growth due to HDV decarbonisation

Feedback from stakeholders also identified a small number of examples where companies in other sectors have benefited from HDVs decarbonisation, such as clean heat, onshore renewables and civil engineering

Abbreviations

AFIR

Alternative fuels infrastructure regulation

BEV

Battery electric vehicle

CAGR

Compound annual growth rate

CCUS

Carbon capture, utilisation and storage

EPC

Engineering, procurement and construction

EV

Electric vehicle

FTE

Full time equivalent

HDV

Heavy duty vehicle

HFCEV

Hydrogen fuel cell electric vehicle

HGV

Heavy goods vehicle

HRS

Hydrogen refuelling station

HVO

Hydrogenated vegetable oil

ICE

Internal Combustion Engine

IEA

International energy agency

OEM

Original equipment manufacture

SME

Small to medium enterprise

SWOT

Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats

TCO

Total cost of ownership

TEN-T

Trans-European transport network

ZEHID

Zero emission heavy goods vehicle & infrastructure demonstration programme

Introduction

Governments across the world are introducing policy targets to decarbonise heavy duty vehicles (HDVs) as part of activities to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. This shift presents an economic opportunity for Scottish supply chains.

This report aims to identify the current and future economic impact of decarbonisation on key supply chains. Findings are based on desk-based evidence and conversations with 27 industry and other stakeholders. We identify active companies and their capabilities in each supply chain and analyse the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats (SWOT) for each. We then estimate how policy drivers might impact demand in the coming decade. Finally, we examine how other sectors in Scotland could benefit from opportunities related to HDV decarbonisation.

This section summarises what the research was trying to achieve and how it was carried out. Further information on this can be found in Appendix A.

Research aims

The aims of this research study were to:

  • Identify and assess the current make-up and capability level of
    • the Scottish HDV manufacturing supply chain, including HDV manufacturing
    • the Scottish HDV charging infrastructure supply chain
    • the HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain
  • Identify the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats for the existing supply chains
  • Identify and assess how demand for Scottish supply chain and manufacturing services may change in future, particularly in light of policy drivers and decarbonisation targets
  • Identify how other sectors in Scotland (e.g. low carbon energy, heat in buildings, construction, digital) can benefit from new supply chain opportunities related to HDV decarbonisation

Scope and boundaries

The supply chains of interest are:

  • HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing – manufacture of physical and/or digital products. This includes the supply chain currently active in the manufacture of fossil fuel powered vehicles as well as the subset of this that is already active in the manufacture of zero emission vehicles.
  • HDV charging infrastructure – manufacture of physical and/or digital products and the delivery of services associated with design, installation, operation and maintenance.
  • Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure – manufacture of physical and/or digital products and the delivery of services associated with design, installation, operation and maintenance.

The research DOES cover:

  • Companies currently active in these supply chains and those with the capabilities to potentially become active in future
  • Battery electric, hydrogen fuel cell and hydrogen combustion powertrains

The research DOES NOT cover:

  • Hydrogen production and transportation activities
  • Biofuel, biomethane or hydrogenated vegetable oil (HVO) fuelled HDV activity
  • Retrofitting of the existing HDV fleet with decarbonisation technologies

Research method

The research was carried out between October 2025 and February 2026. It consisted of desk research, one-to-one consultations with 27 industry and other stakeholders from across the three supply chains and a validation workshop, attended by 13 industry and other stakeholder from ten organisations.

It is helpful to further define some of the key terms we use in this report to help clarify the scope:

  • Overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain – this includes all companies involved in the manufacture of HDVs and niche vehicles, regardless of the technology used to power the vehicle. This supply chain therefore includes companies that are currently only involved in the manufacture of diesel powered HDVs and niche vehicles, companies that are currently only involved in battery electric powered vehicles and companies involved in a mix of several technologies. It is important that we capture this overall supply chain as companies currently active only in diesel powered vehicle manufacture will need to consider moving into zero emission powered vehicles as HDVs are decarbonised
  • Zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain – this is a subset of the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain. It is useful to separately identify the make-up and capabilities of this supply chain to understand the current economic contribution by companies already active in responding to the decarbonisation of HDVs
  • The category of ‘niche vehicles’ includes Scottish companies involved in production of battery electric wheelchair accessible vehicles and full electric 4×4 vehicles that are under the weight threshold of 3.5 tonnes, meaning they are not classed as HDVs
  • Companies identified as having the potential to become active have been identified as part of this study. These are companies that have been reviewed using desk-based, publicly available, information, such as websites. This is useful to understand the extent to which there are companies have the potential to develop goods and services relevant to one, or more, of the three supply chains being investigated. It is also useful to note that only a small proportion (less than 5%) of the companies identified as being potentially active have confirmed that they are actually interested in doing so. The others have capabilities that have been assessed as potentially relevant.

Desk research was used to identify companies active, and having the potential to become active, in the three supply chains, to build an understanding of the composition of each.

This desk research also identified estimates of employment numbers and turnover for each company. We cross-checked the lists of active companies with stakeholders and added those we had not identified during the desk research. We categorised each company’s capabilities by assigning them to different segments of the supply chains.

We used a combination of desk research and stakeholder feedback to identify the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats relevant to each of the supply chains.

We used the findings of the desk research to understand the nature and timing of HDV decarbonisation and how this might impact on the number of jobs in each of the supply chains between now and 2030 and 2035. We used number of employees as the best available proxy for economic growth of the supply chains. We tested this understanding of how HDV decarbonisation would impact on the supply chains with industry and other stakeholders, both through one-to one consultations and in a group workshop.

During our discussions with stakeholders, we also identified a small number of examples of how companies from other sectors have benefited from the decarbonisation of HDVs.

A more detailed description of the research method can be found in Appendix A.

The context for HDV decarbonisation

Policies in support of HDV decarbonisation

Internationally, governments are moving to decarbonise HDVs through a mix of regulation, long-term targets and public funding. There is broad recognition that HDVs are harder to decarbonise than cars and vans. Vehicles are more expensive, infrastructure requirements are greater, and operators face tighter margins. As a result, leading countries are not relying on market forces alone. They are setting clear end dates for diesel sales, placing obligations on manufacturers and fleets, and investing directly in vehicles and infrastructure.

Many countries have now committed to 100% zero-emission HDV sales by 2040 under the Global Memorandum of Understanding on Zero-Emission Medium- and Heavy-Duty Vehicles. In the strongest cases, these commitments are backed by binding domestic regulation. The European Union has established the most comprehensive framework. Its CO₂ emission performance standards require manufacturers to achieve progressively deeper emissions reductions, reaching a 90% reduction by 2040 (EU Regulation 2019/1242). The rules apply across most truck and bus categories and are supported by mandatory monitoring and financial penalties for non-compliance. This provides long-term certainty to industry and sends a clear signal on the direction of travel.

The United Kingdom is currently consulting on a new HGV CO2 emissions regulatory framework, setting out a pathway towards the government’s intention of ending the sale of new non-ZE HGVs up to and including 26 tonnes by 2035, and all new non-ZE HGVs by 2040. (UK Government, 2026). This approach is supported by targeted public funding. The Zero Emission HGV and Infrastructure Demonstrator (ZEHID) programme is investing around £200 million to deploy zero-emission trucks and develop charging and hydrogen refuelling infrastructure. The aim is to test real-world performance, reduce cost uncertainty and inform future policy development (Innovate UK Business Connect, 2024).

In North America, regulation is combined with significant financial support. The United States has introduced strong state-level fleet requirements alongside large federal grant programmes to support vehicle purchases and infrastructure rollout (EPA, 2024). Canada has also set a 2040 sales target and is investing in charging and refuelling infrastructure to enable uptake. These measures are designed to stimulate early demand and support domestic supply chains.

China is playing a central role in global HDV decarbonisation. It has deployed large-scale subsidies and regional mandates, particularly in logistics hubs and freight corridors. This has enabled rapid deployment of zero-emission trucks and buses in targeted applications (ICCT, 2025) Although approaches vary across provinces, the overall scale of intervention is significant.

Several European countries are placing strong emphasis on infrastructure as a critical enabler. Spain is combining fleet support under Real Decreto 983/2021 with hydrogen investment programmes such as H2 Pioneros, linking transport decarbonisation with industrial and regional policy (Gobierno de España, 2021; MITECO, 2023). Norway operates competitive funding schemes that support zero-emission trucks and associated charging infrastructure, prioritising projects that deliver the greatest emissions reduction per unit of public funding (Enova, 2025). The Netherlands has adopted a similar model through its Hydrogen in Mobility subsidy scheme, which supports both hydrogen vehicles and refuelling stations (Netherlands Enterprise Agency, 2025). Ireland and Denmark are also investing in vehicle grants and infrastructure to support the transition (ZEVI, 2024; Danish Ministry of Transport, 2021).

Overall, the strongest policy frameworks combine three elements: clear long-term targets, enforceable regulatory standards and sustained public investment. The European Union, the United Kingdom, the United States, China, Norway and the Netherlands stand out in this regard. International evidence suggests that regulation alone is insufficient. Coordinated action across vehicles, infrastructure and market development is required to deliver large-scale change and to position domestic industries for emerging global opportunities.

Market trends in HDV decarbonisation

This section summarises the key market trends for the three supply chains. Understanding the market trends is important to identifying and assessing the likely nature, scale and timing of HDV decarbonisation. This will drive changes in demand for goods and services provided by the three supply chains we are investigating in this study.

A more detailed description is provided in Appendix B.

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

International Energy Agency (IEA, 2025) is projecting that around 20% of new global bus sales and 13% of new global heavy truck sales in 2030 will be battery electric.

The European Automobile Manufacturers Association reports that, globally, around 2.9 million HGVs and 362 thousand buses were manufactured in 2024 (ACEA, 2024). Around 20% of buses sold around the world in 2024 were zero emission, either battery electric vehicles (BEV) or hydrogen fuel cell electric vehicles (HFCEV), compared with only 3% of HGVs.

China is by far the largest national market, with Europe and North America also significant regional markets (IEA, 2025). In the EU, Germany, France, the Netherlands and Sweden account for 85% of zero emission HDV sales (Mulholland, E., et al, 2025).

In the UK, in 2024, there were 50,987 newly registered HGVs, of which 268, or 0.5%, were zero emission battery electric. In the same year, 9,919 new buses and coaches were registered in the UK, with 1,719, or 17.3%, of these being zero emission battery electric.

In Scotland, in 2024, there were 3,958 newly registered HGVs, with 12 of these, or 0.3%, being zero emission battery electric. In the same year, 663 new buses and coaches were registered, of which 74, or 11.2%, were zero emission battery electric (Department for Transport 2026 [4] and [5]).

Charging infrastructure

The International Energy Agency (IEA, 2024), expects significant growth in the stock of HDV charging devices installed, globally, estimating a twenty-fold increase by 2035.

China is the market leader in the adoption of electric buses and electric trucks and therefore is the also market leader in deployment of heavy-duty charging devices (IEA, 2024).

After China, Europe is the second largest market for electric bus and electric truck sales with the accompanying need for charger installation (IEA, 2024). The countries in Europe with the highest projected demand for battery electric truck charging infrastructure are Germany, Italy, France, Poland and Spain, collectively accounting for more than 70% of the total charging needs in the EU-27 (Basma, H and Schmidt, J. ,2025).

In the UK, it is projected that there will be a need for 400,000 truck chargers serving HGVs by 2050 (Drake, W. et al, 2023). Reports reviewed for this study found differences of opinion on the extent to which HGV charging devices would be located in the depot. One report assumed that 93% of HGV chargers would be based in depots (Drake, W. et al, 2023) whilst another stated an expectation that 77% of HGV charging would take place at depots (Energy UK, 2025).

Charging will typically take place overnight and most charging devices (97%) will be less than 100kW capacity. Public opportunity charging will require chargers with high capacity for quicker charging times. It is projected that 2,000 350kW and 1,200 1MW chargers will be required by 2050 (Drake, W. et al, 2023).

Licenced HGVs in Scotland represent 6.9% of HGVs licenced in the UK, based on Q3 2025 data (Department for Transport, 2026 [3]). It could be assumed that a similar proportion of HGV charging devices will be installed in Scotland, meaning approximately 27,600 installed by 2050 (based on UK data from Drake, W. et al, 2023). If these charging devices were installed equally over the period 2026 to 2050 then annual installations of HGV chargers would be just over 1,100 per year in Scotland. However, HGV operations in Scotland can differ materially from the UK average in ways that affect charging demand. For example, routes are often longer and less densely connected, with more variable terrain and harsher weather conditions. These factors can increase energy consumption per journey and, in turn, raise the frequency and duration of charging required per vehicle. At the same time, the spatial distribution of logistics activity in Scotland may reduce opportunities for high utilisation of individual charging sites compared to more densely populated parts of the UK. This could mean a greater number of chargers are needed to provide adequate coverage and resilience, even if utilisation rates per charger are lower. Taken together, these differences mean that Scotland’s share of charging infrastructure demand may not scale directly in line with its share of the HGV fleet.

The rate of electric heavy duty vehicle adoption will be influenced by the extent to which fleet operators use low carbon fuels, such as biomethane, HVO and biodiesel, as a means to decarbonisation their vehicles in the short term. For example, this is a strategy supported by both Logistics UK (Logistics UK, 2025) and the Road Haulage Association (Road Haulage Association, 2025), both representative bodies for the freight transport sector. If fleet owners follow this strategy in the short term, then this could delay some purchases of battery electric vehicles and reduce the associated demand for charging infrastructure.

Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

Hydrogen refuelling stations (HRS) rollout is modest compared to charging infrastructure deployment. As of 2024, there were approximately 1,160 HRSs worldwide, mostly confined to Germany, Japan, and South Korea, compared to 4.5 million EV charging stations (Mohapatra, 2025).

The value of the global hydrogen refuelling station market was estimated at about USD 1.00 billion in 2025 and is projected to grow at a 19.8% CAGR over the period 2025 – 2033, inclusive of all applications including passenger vehicles (Grand View Research, 2026).

The EU has committed €600 million through the Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Facility to support 38 new hydrogen refuelling stations (European Commission, 2025). Member states must install one HRS every 200 km along the core of the Trans-European Transport Network (TEN-T), where minimum transport movement thresholds are exceeded. The aim is to complete these installations by 2030 with interim targets set for 2025.

In 2023, the UK had zero fuel cell HGVs in operation and only 6 HRSs. Scotland had four hydrogen refuelling stations for public use (Transport Scotland, 2022). Two of which are based in Aberdeen to support the fleet of bus and municipal hydrogen HDVs with further stations in Orkney and outside Edinburgh. The need for a minimum viable network of hydrogen refuelling stations is limiting deployment of hydrogen powered HDVs (Hydrogen UK, 2023). Cost of hydrogen fuel is also a limiting factor, according to some stakeholders. Strong near-future deployment opportunities lie in off grid refuelling applications for construction based HDVs with full HDV rollout expected to grow from 2035 onwards.

Current make-up and capabilities of supply chains

This section uses the findings of the desk-based research and feedback from stakeholders to identify and assess the current make-up and capabilities of the Scottish HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing, HDV charging infrastructure and HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chains.

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

Overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain

The overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain includes 21 companies with manufacturing locations in Scotland. This includes manufacturers, and their supply chains, active in fossil fuel and zero emission HDVs and niche vehicles. Combined, we estimate these companies employ 4,402 people and generate turnover of £1,123 million. It should be noted that these figures are indicative as some of the companies reported employment and turnover includes contributions from operations located outside of Scotland. In addition, some of these companies are also involved in other markets, in addition to HDVs and niche vehicles, so the total HDV and niche vehicle employment and turnover is less than the amounts stated. We estimate that 12 of these 21 companies are exclusively active in the HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain. These 12 companies employ 3,251 people and generate annual turnover of £804 million. We estimate that the current employment range for this supply chain is between 3,200 and 4,000. We also estimate that current turnover ranges between £800m and £1,000m.

An overview of the number of companies active in each supply chain segment is shown in Table 2.

Materials

Subsystems

Systems

OEMs

Others

Niche

0

7

0

7

5

2

Table 2: Overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain (no. of companies)

The most economically significant segment of the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain is the HDV Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) segment. Based on the employee numbers of the seven HDV OEMs in this segment, compared to the total 21 companies in the overall supply chain, it represents 72% of the total supply chain. The niche vehicle manufacturing segment, with two companies, is the next most significant segment of the supply chain, representing 20% of the total supply chain.

Zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain

Seven of the 21 companies active in the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain are also active in the zero emission HDVs and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain. Combined, these seven companies employ 3,005 employees and generate annual turnover of £792 million. However, our research indicates that the number of people currently employed in Scotland in the zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain is limited to several hundred. Based on stakeholder feedback and desk research, we estimate 85% to 90% of the HDV and niche vehicles manufacturing activity in Scotland uses diesel internal combustion engines and 10% to 15% being zero emission vehicles, almost all of these being buses. We also estimate, based on a combination of stakeholder feedback and desk research, that six of the seven zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain companies have a low single digit percentage of their employees engaged in zero emissions activities. We estimate that only Alexander Dennis Limited has a significant proportion of its HDV (bus) manufacture that is zero emissions. This is based on sector wide data about the proportion of new bus sales that are zero emission in the UK as we were unable to obtain data directly from the company for this study. We have used the resulting estimate, of 10% to 15% of HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing in Scotland being zero emission, to estimate associated zero emission employment to be between 300 and 500 and zero emission annual turnover to be between £80m and £120m.

An overview of the number of companies active in each supply chain segment is shown in Table 3.

Materials

Subsystems

Systems

OEMs

Others

Niche

0

1

0

4

0

2

Table 3: Zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain (no. of companies)

The OEM and niche vehicle manufacturing segments of the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain are assessed as being the most economically significant, based on proportion of employment in those sectors. The OEM segment is the most economically significant of the zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain. The companies active in these segments are shown in Figure 1.

An additional company, H2 Vehicle Systems, was registered last year and is focused on emissions reduction from diesel HDVs; it is also seeking to develop hydrogen powered HGVs. There are no Scotland-based manufacturers of chassis that are used in HGVs.

There are seven companies that are active in design and manufacture of subsystems that are used in HDVs, including mechanical, hydraulic, electrical and electronic components, and five others that design and manufacture bodywork for HDVs and niche vehicles.

Companies with potential to become active

Based mainly on desk research, we have identified 102 companies as having relevant capabilities, meaning they have theoretical potential to become active in the zero emission HDV manufacturing supply chain. Of this total, 96 could provide mechanical, hydraulic, electrical and electronic system and subsystem design and manufacture. This includes, for example, sensors, control systems, power convertors and drive systems. There are also companies offering precision engineering services for the design and manufacture of parts, and others manufacture and supply materials for structural components and interior fittings.

Together, the subsystem and system capabilities in Scotland could support the further development and customisation of zero emission HDVs. Each of these companies could, potentially, work with existing OEMs to customise and optimise zero emission HDVs for specific purposes. This could include, for example:

  • lightweighting, through the use of composite materials
  • improving the energy efficiency of auxiliary equipment, through the design of electrical, mechanical and hydraulic subsystems
  • enhanced software control of systems to optimise use and minimise energy consumption, for example through using telemetry data

However, we do not have sufficient information on whether these companies would view the zero emission HDV manufacturing supply chain as an opportunity.

Scotland’s role in the rest of the UK and international markets

Based on interviewee feedback, we have confirmed that seven of the 21 companies active in this supply chain export to markets outside the UK. Others may also export but we did not find evidence during our research to confirm this. We have also confirmed that three of the seven companies active in the zero emission HDV and niche vehicle supply chain export to markets outside the UK. Others may also export but we did not find evidence during our research to confirm this.

Role of the supply chain in other sectors

Companies that are further back in the supply chain have opportunities to sell into other net zero supply chains, including other forms of transport such as automotive, rail, and maritime.

Challenges faced

The main issue facing companies that are trying to enter the market for decarbonised HDV and niche vehicles is that customer demand is still very low. The majority of sales, particularly in the UK, are for fossil-fuel powered HDVs. Feedback from our interviews with companies and other stakeholders is that uncertainty around the deadlines for mandating zero emission HDVs is not stimulating demand compared to the situation where credible regulated deadlines were in place.

While an increasing percentage of buses are now electric, most of the OEMs supplying these vehicles are located outside of Scotland and the UK. As the majority of systems and sub-systems are integrated by the bus OEM, there is a much smaller opportunity for Scotland-based companies to become part of these supply chains.

The opportunities are greater for those supplying OEMs that design and manufacture specialised vehicles, but even here, feedback from our interviews strongly suggests that demand for zero emission vehicles will remain low due to customer concerns regarding duty cycles and opportunities to recharge or refuel the vehicle during use.

Stakeholders representing relevant industry associations whose members operate HGVs, confirmed that at present there is interest from their members regarding zero emission vehicles. There are also concerns, particularly around total cost of ownership (TCO) and the perceived increased costs of charging and hydrogen refuelling would have on their operations. There was universal concern regarding the impacts on SMEs, which represent the majority of HGV users, particularly haulage firms. Most of those interviewed believe that it is likely only larger operators, particularly those who want to be first movers, will adopt zero emission technologies prior to legislation coming into force. The only exception to this would be if the customer of the haulage firm required a reduction in scope 3 emissions (i.e., from its supply chain). In these cases, there is competition from low carbon fuels, such as biomethane or HVO as an alternative solution to zero emission vehicles. It was clear from these discussions that smaller companies, in particular, would like to see commitment from government on when legislation will come into force and assurances that the necessary charging and refuelling infrastructure will be in place, before they would commit to purchasing/operating a zero emission HDV. A lack of hydrogen refuelling infrastructure was highlighted by another stakeholder as the prime reason that they had stopped operating HFCEVs.

Companies further back in the supply chain told us that they tend to be more reactive to what customers need. They can supply into zero emission HDV manufacturing but equally could supply into OEMs that are manufacturing diesel powertrain vehicles. In many cases these companies supply a range of sectors and application areas, with automotive and HDV being just one. Overall, there are likely to be opportunities for such companies in the future, but this will be dictated by decisions made by the OEMs.

Charging infrastructure

We have identified 15 companies active in the HDV charging infrastructure supply chain with locations in Scotland. All of these companies are involved in other activities not related to HDVs. Eight of the 15 companies also have operational locations outside of Scotland. Employment and turnover data identified from desk research covers all activities in all locations of each company. It has, therefore, not been possible to use the desk-based data to reliably estimate the proportion of the total employment and turnover associated with the HDV charging infrastructure projects and carried out by staff based in Scotland.

Instead, we spoke with six of the 15 HDV charging supply chain companies and, based on these discussions, we are able to report an indicative level of current employment associated with HDV charging infrastructure work and carried out by employees based in Scotland. Companies provided information on employment related to HDV charging infrastructure activities but not turnover. This was due to a combination of the interviewees finding it easier to provide data on employment and it being less commercially sensitive than turnover data.

Based on the discussions with the six HDV charging infrastructure supply chain companies, we identified 114 employees, operating from a Scottish location that work on HDV charging infrastructure activities. It is estimated that there are between 200 and 400 employees, across all 15 supply chain companies, that are active HDV charging infrastructure projects. This estimate was tested at the validation workshop held during this study and the attending stakeholders confirmed this is a reasonable estimate. It is not possible to be more precise given the lack of data from the nine companies not interviewed as part of this study.

Based on feedback from stakeholder interviews and desk research it is reasonable to estimate that at least 90% of employment is related to the design and installation and operations and maintenance segments of the supply chain. We have not been able to reliably allocate employment numbers to a single segment of the supply chain as seven of the 12 companies active in design and installation are also active in the operation and maintenance segment. We do not have data on the activity split for the companies involved in these segments and are, therefore, unable to allocate employment numbers separately between them.

An overview of the current make-up and capability level of the Scottish HDV charging infrastructure supply chain, is shown below.

An overview of the number of companies active in each supply chain segment is shown in Table 4 (please note that the figures in Table 4 total more than the 15 companies we identified for this supply chain. This is due to some companies being active in more than one segment of the supply chain).

Materials

Parts & System Manufacture

Systems Integrator/ OEM

Design and Installation

Ownership

Operations and Maintenance

0

1

0

12

4

7

Table 4: HDV charging infrastructure supply chain (no. of companies)

The 12 companies active in the design and installation and operation and maintenance segments are show in Figure 2.

Four companies have also been identified as being owners of HDV charging infrastructure facilities: First Bus, FOR EV, Green Wheel Electric and Enerveo. The company included in the charger parts, components and systems manufacture segment has not been identified in this report due to this activity not being in the public domain.

Companies with potential to become active

We have identified 60 companies with capabilities potentially relevant to the charging infrastructure supply chain. We found no evidence that any of these were currently active in this supply chain. Our assessment of their capabilities was made based on reviewing information on their websites and most have not confirmed if they are interested in entering the supply chain.

The supply chain segment assessed as having the most potentially relevant companies was design and installation. Some of the companies identified in this segment also had capabilities that are potentially relevant to operation and maintenance. The companies were, typically, either low voltage EV charging installers, high voltage electrical contractors or civils contractors with experience in different sectors. To enter the HDV charging infrastructure market, the low voltage EV charging installers would have to develop new skills and competences to work on high voltage systems and become familiar with the installation requirements of different charging devices. Civils contractors may also require additional accreditations to work in high voltage environments. High voltage electrical contractors are likely to face the lowest barriers to entering this market of all the potential companies identified. This is due to the nature of their existing experience and skills being very similar to what is required to design and install HDV charging infrastructure.

Potential parts and systems manufacturers, for both fixed and mobile charging equipment, were identified. This covered enclosure fabrication, electronic components and devices, embedded software and cables, connectors and sockets. To enter the charging infrastructure market, these companies would have to develop supply chain relationships with manufacturers of HDV charging equipment. No manufacturers of this kind are currently located in Scotland. It is challenging to develop relationships with geographically remote customers unless there are unique attributes to the parts and systems these companies are able to supply. This could include circumstances where, for example, the potential Scottish supplier has parts or systems protected by intellectual property rights.

Six companies were identified as having the potential to manufacture fixed HDV chargers and two with the potential to manufacture mobile HDV chargers. Most of these companies are currently active in low voltage charger manufacture. It has not been confirmed if they are interested in investigating the HDV charger market.

One existing HDV charger manufacturer, located outside of Scotland, was identified as a potential inward investor for assembly activities. It has not been named due to confidentiality considerations.

Scotland’s role in the rest of the UK and international markets

We have confirmed that four of the 15 companies active in the HDV charging infrastructure supply chain export to markets outside the UK. Others may also export but we did not find evidence during our research to confirm this.

We spoke with three of these four exporting companies. In all three cases the companies described how they successfully delivered an HDV charging infrastructure design and installation project in the UK for an international customer. Having demonstrated competence in this type of project the same client then contracted with them to deliver the same type of project in overseas markets.

Two companies in the Scottish charging infrastructure supply chain described having offices in overseas companies. This includes the United Arab Emirates, which was described as having very similar electrical installation standards as the UK. Other examples of target international markets include countries in Europe such as Sweden and Germany.

Whilst there is evidence of international markets being accessible to electrical design and installation companies it is possible that opportunities for civil engineering contractors will be restricted to Scotland and the rest of the UK. This is due to reliance on capital intensive equipment that is not easy to transfer to overseas locations.

Four of the supply chain companies located in Scotland were part of a UK or international group. This means that the locations in Scotland typically service just the Scottish market or the UK market, depending on where other offices in the wider group are located. In these cases, the opportunities arising internationally will be serviced directly from other locations closer to those markets.

Role of the supply chain in other sectors

Some of the active supply chain companies identified are focused only on EV charging markets covering all sizes of vehicle, including HDVs.

Other companies have a wider target market and provide services to other sectors. For example, an electrical design and installation company servicing electrical systems works in the commercial and industrial sectors. The ability to carry out high voltage electrical projects has very wide applications, including in other sectors where decarbonisation is being driven by electrification.

Civil engineering design and installation contractors also have a wide range of application sectors for their services. Some of these may be closely connected to net zero, such as installation of district heat networks and wind farm development. Other civils work is not connected to net zero, such as expansion of the road transport network.

Challenges faced

The main challenge faced by companies in this supply chain is the current low demand from HDV operators. The main reason for this low demand is uncertainty amongst HDV operators about hard deadlines for when zero emission vehicles only will be available on the new vehicle market. All stakeholders recognise the long-term shift to decarbonised HDV fleets but, without an immediate regulatory or commercial reason to switch, there is limited incentive.

There is also uncertainty about which powertrain option to invest in amongst operators. Representative bodies, such as Logistics UK and the Road Haulage Association are lobbying for low carbon fuels to play more of a role in the short-term decarbonisation of fleets. Although these are not zero-emission solutions, they are commercially proven and an attractive option for some operators seeking to demonstrate action on greenhouse gas emission reduction to their customers. Pursuing this as a decarbonisation option in the short term could delay the adoption of zero emission HDVs and the charging and refuelling infrastructure they will require.

Other challenges

  • Low operator awareness of, and skills required for, fleet decarbonisation plus limited awareness of Scottish supply chain options
  • Sporadic short term grant funding for operators
  • Grid capacity constraints and connection queues
  • Availability of finance for fleet operators
  • Physical space constraints in HDV depots
  • Skills shortages in key areas, such as high voltage design engineering
  • Training gaps for low voltage charger installers interested in high voltage HDV charging installation

Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

We have identified seven companies active in the HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain with locations in Scotland. All of these companies are involved in other activities not related to HDVs. This means that it has not been possible to use company level employment and turnover data, identified during the desk research, to estimate the scale of HDV activity.

We spoke with two of the seven supply chain companies and a further six stakeholders with knowledge of the hydrogen economy. Based on these discussions, we estimate that the HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain employs fewer than 100 people in Scotland. As with the charging infrastructure supply chain, there is very limited manufacturing activity, with only two of the seven supply chain companies being active in components and systems manufacture. Most equipment used by the Scottish companies being sourced from the rest of the UK or overseas and integrated by companies in the Scottish supply chain rather than manufacturing original equipment. Based on our discussions with stakeholders, the limited number of jobs within the HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain are concentrated across systems integration, design, construction and installation and ownership, operation and maintenance. It has not been possible to calculate exact percentages of jobs in each of the supply chain segments as six of the seven companies are active in more than one segment and we do not know the relative split of activity between segments. Although all seven supply chain companies were approached for interview, only two participated, meaning there is insufficient data available to estimate the exact breakdown of employment by supply chain segment. There is also insufficient data available to allow us to estimate the turnover for this supply chain as those companies who did speak with us preferred to provide information about employment levels rather than turnover.

An overview of the number of companies active in each supply chain segment is shown in Table 5 (please note that the figures in Table 5 total more than the seven companies we identified for this supply chain. This is due to some companies being active in more than one segment of the supply chain).

Materials

Parts & System Manufacture

Systems Integrator/ OEM

Design, Construction & Install

Ownership, Operations and Maintenance

0

2

4

5

4

Table 5: HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain (no. of companies)

The seven companies active in the hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain are show in Figure 3.

Companies with potential to become active

Our research has also identified 19 companies with the potential to become active in the hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain. This assessment was made through review of their capabilities, e.g. based on information on their websites, and suggestions made by stakeholders during the consultation period that highlighted potential activity.

Most of these companies have capabilities that are potentially relevant to the component and system manufacturing segments of the supply chain. Identified companies are either already active in adjacent component supply chains or developing capabilities in hydrogen specific supply chains. The types of components include compressor and decompressor equipment, pipework, valves, metal tanks / vessels, nozzles and tubes, sensors. For example, Stewart Buchanan Gauges Ltd is designing and developing hydrogen valves, which could be relevant to the HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain.

The design, construction and installation companies identified mostly offer concept design, detailed design, and health and safety consultancy and support services that include hydrogen safety. It has not been confirmed whether work has been done in the hydrogen refuelling market specifically.

Scotland’s role in the rest of the UK and international markets

The UK hydrogen refuelling market is at a very early stage of development. There is limited completed or planned refuelling infrastructure. However, where it has been developed, these refuelling sites have generally been delivered by Scottish OEMs and systems integrators.

In terms of international markets, feedback from stakeholders confirms that Scotland-based systems integrators and OEMs are providing, or have provided, services and products to international markets including Europe and Asia. However, it was noted that the likelihood of entering the Chinese market is now limited due to central government financial support and rapid deployment leading to high levels of in market competition. The decline of demand in the USA market since the beginning of the current Government Administration has been damaging to what has been a core market for Scottish companies.

Role of the supply chain in other sectors

The design of the system for hydrogen refuelling infrastructure is unique to the end-use, however opportunities exist in adjacent hydrogen sectors as they develop including off-grid power generation and distribution, hydrogen storage and transport. The core hydrogen technologies and capabilities can be energy storage and refuelling applications, with stakeholder feedback identifying that there is more activity in the energy storage segment at present.

Further back in the supply chain the component manufacturers generally transition from legacy oil and gas industries and deliver components that can be used in other net zero markets including the broader hydrogen derivatives market. This could include ammonia for the decarbonisation of maritime as well as other potential applications in energy generation and storage utilising liquid or gaseous vectors and mechanical components for applications such as pumped hydro. The challenge for the supply chain is the slow progress and certainty around the development of these other net zero markets.

Challenges faced

The central challenge faced by this supply chain is a lack of clear and positive policy intent. Further, the dangers of a net zero targets easing to allow for a small amount of fossil fuel use poses a threat to the development of the hydrogen refuelling market, resulting in it becoming a marginal technology to address residual emissions rather than a primary route to decarbonisation. It was recognised through consultation with stakeholders that hydrogen (more generally) but particularly hydrogen HDVs will likely play a comparatively small but critical role in the achievement of net zero targets. The technology will likely occupy a marginal role in the achievement of the final, hard to abate reductions necessary for net zero. If policy goals shift towards allowing a small role for fossil fuels, the hydrogen economy is likely to contract.

Attracting finance to enable pilot market activity that can demonstrate commercial viability has also been identified as a key challenge.

A lack of component certification standards for hydrogen refuelling infrastructure applications was also identified as a challenge to the development of compliant components.

We note that international markets have more proactively set targets and support mechanisms for the deployment of hydrogen refuelling stations and hydrogen HDVs more broadly. One stakeholder noted that it would be helpful for the supply chain to have a clear point of contact within Transport Scotland to discuss challenges and opportunities related to hydrogen refuelling. Further challenges beyond the scope of this project include the cost of energy, the cost of producing and transporting hydrogen, and consequently, the levelised cost of hydrogen.

SWOT Analysis

Summaries of the key findings of the SWOT analysis for each supply chain are shown in Table 6: SWOT analysis – HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain, to Table 8: SWOT analysis – HDV hydrogen refuelling supply chain.

Strengths

Weaknesses

Scotland has specialist HDV manufacturers and integrators with capability in bespoke vehicle design, integration and aftersales support

The manufacturing base is small and fragmented, with limited OEM capability

Existing strengths in control systems, software, telematics and energy management are transferable to zero-emission HDVs

Most zero-emission HDV activity (outside buses) remains pilot-scale, with minimal demand and no measurable employment growth to date

Manufacturers are embedded in public-sector procurement, which supports early trials and specialist applications where OEM solutions are less mature

Heavy reliance on imported chassis and systems limits value capture and exposure to external OEM decisions

Opportunities

Threats

UK and EU zero-emission targets have the potential to create a long-term market for compliant vehicles and systems

Strong international competition, particularly from large Chinese OEMs, limits Scotland’s competitiveness in zero-emission HDV manufacturing

Niche and specialist vehicles (e.g. refuse, emergency and municipal) offer the most realistic entry points for Scottish manufacturers

Weak and uncertain market demand, driven by high vehicle costs and limited infrastructure, undermines investment confidence

Growth is most likely in integration, engineering services, software and lifecycle support

Low confidence amongst some supply chain companies that 2035 and 2040 zero emission HDV policy targets will be enforced as currently stated

Table 6: SWOT analysis – HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain

Scotland’s main strengths are in niche manufacturing and vehicle integration, rather than mass production. Existing companies have expertise in the building of specialist vehicles, bespoke design, systems integration and aftersales support. Capabilities in software, control systems and energy management are largely transferable to zero-emission HDVs and align with areas where future value is expected to sit. Strong links to public-sector procurement have enabled early trials and demonstrator projects, generating learning even where commercial outcomes remain uncertain.

The analysis, however, highlights some significant weaknesses. The manufacturing base is small, fragmented and relies heavily on imported chassis and core systems. Scottish companies, therefore, have very limited influence over technology pathways or product availability, which are shaped by global OEM decisions. Zero-emission HDV production (outside buses) remains at pilot scale, with no clear evidence of employment growth to date. High vehicle costs, limited infrastructure and weak customer demand reinforce a cautious, wait-and-see approach across the supply chain.

Opportunities are largely policy-driven rather than market-led. UK and EU emissions standards and demonstrator funding create long-term demand for zero-emission vehicles, but the most realistic opportunities for Scottish companies sit in specialist and niche applications, such as municipal and emergency vehicles, and in service-led activities including integration, engineering support and digital systems.

The threats are significant. International competition, particularly from large Chinese OEMs, constrains Scotland’s ability to compete on cost or scale. Uncertain demand, high upfront costs and reliance on global supply chains increase commercial risk. Stakeholder feedback from some company and other stakeholders expressed doubt that policy targets for zero emission HDVs will be enforced as stated, and viewed this as leading to market uncertainty.

Strengths

Weaknesses

Scotland has an established EV charging supply chain with practical experience in depot-based charging, including early HDV applications

Only one domestic manufacturer of HDV charging device components, with most value coming from services rather than equipment

Scottish-based integrators and service providers already deliver design, grid connection, installation and operations, with growing HDV-related employment

Shortages of skilled contractors and engineers for high-power and large-scale installations may constrain delivery and scale-up

Current Scottish capabilities align well with the expected dominance of depot charging for HDVs to 2030

HDV charging remains early-stage and fragmented, with limited infrastructure coverage beyond pilots and bus depots

Opportunities

Threats

Strong growth in HDV electrification will create demand for depot charging, grid upgrades, and system operation, where Scotland already has capability

Grid capacity constraints and high connection costs risk slowing deployment, particularly for high-power sites

Companies report clear potential for job growth in Scotland, particularly in engineering, design and operations linked to HDV charging in Scotland, UK and export markets

Policy and funding uncertainty, including short-term grant schemes and lack of clarity about regulatory deadlines, undermine market and supply-chain confidence

EU and UK policy requirements for HDV charging corridors and depots support longer-term market demand

Skills shortages and reliance on imported hardware increase the risk that economic value and ownership shift to large international providers

Table 7: SWOT analysis – HDV charging infrastructure supply chain

A key strength is the presence of established EV charging integrators and service providers with experience in depot-based charging, developed through the bus sector and early HDV projects. This aligns well with evidence that depot charging will dominate HDV charging to 2030. Scottish companies already provide design, grid connection, installation and operations services, and some are seeing early employment growth linked to HDV charging.

There are, however, notable gaps in the supply chain. Only one domestic manufacturer of HDV charging components was identified, providing cooling systems for HDV chargers. The Scottish supply chain relies heavily on imported equipment. Skills shortages, particularly for high-power installations, and limited training provision constrain the pace of deployment. HDV charging infrastructure remains limited, with activity concentrated in pilots and early depot projects. Uncertainty about current and future demand for HDV charging infrastructure, combined with stop-start grant funding, have reduced confidence among both fleet operators and infrastructure providers.

Opportunities are driven by growing HDV electrification and policy requirements for charging infrastructure both domestically and internationally. These create potential for job growth and positive economic impact in the installation, operations and maintenance segments of the supply chain, rather than in manufacturing.

The main threats relate to delivery risk and investment confidence. Grid capacity constraints, high connection costs and short-term funding cycles all have a negative impact on deployment. The lack of domestic manufacturing of HDV charging devices, and very limited component supply chain, limits the value retained in the Scottish supply chain.

Strengths

Weaknesses

Scotland has practical experience in hydrogen mobility and refuelling from public-private projects in buses and municipal fleets

The supply chain is small, capacity-constrained and highly dependent on a few providers, which limits competition and resilience

A small number of Scottish-based integrators can deliver end-to-end hydrogen refuelling projects, including design, installation and operations

Most critical refuelling equipment is imported, restricting Scottish supply chain activity to integration and maintenance

Scotland’s extensive renewable electricity infrastructure supports the long-term potential for green hydrogen production linked to refuelling

Activity remains pilot-led and fragmented, with limited coordination between hydrogen production, vehicles and refuelling

Opportunities

Threats

Hydrogen refuelling is most viable in specific HDV use cases with high utilisation and centralised depots, such as buses and refuse vehicles

Weak fleet demand, high vehicle and fuel costs, and limited OEM activity in hydrogen powered HDVs undermine infrastructure utilisation and roll out

UK and international policy frameworks and demonstrator funding support continued trials and targeted deployment

Battery-electric HDVs are scaling faster and at lower cost, restricting hydrogen to niche roles

Scottish firms can realise economic benefits in system integration, EPC delivery and operations, and apply these capabilities in overseas markets

Policy uncertainty, high capital costs and reliance on a small international equipment market increase delivery and investment risk

Table 8: SWOT analysis – HDV hydrogen refuelling supply chain

Scotland’s main strength is its practical delivery experience derived from hydrogen mobility projects, particularly for buses and municipal fleets. A small number of Scottish-based companies can deliver end-to-end refuelling projects and have developed strong safety, engineering and operational expertise. Scotland’s renewable electricity base also supports the long-term potential for green hydrogen, where refuelling is co-located with production.

The analysis, however, highlights significant weaknesses. The supply chain is small and capacity constrained. There is significant reliance on a few providers and on imported core equipment. Projects are, typically pilots or demonstrators and have been delivered on a standalone, case-by-case basis, with limited coordination between hydrogen production, refuelling infrastructure and vehicles, except for the coordinated approach of Aberdeen City Council. Failed or stalled projects have reduced confidence among public-sector sponsors and fleet operators.

Opportunities for Scottish companies in hydrogen refuelling infrastructure are limited and use-case specific. Evidence gathered during this study suggests hydrogen is most viable for HDV applications with high utilisation and predictable duty cycles where purchase agreements can be forecast, for example, buses or refuse vehicles. Policy frameworks and demonstrator funding continue to support trials and demonstrators and there is potential for Scottish companies to participate in roles such as system integration, EPC delivery and operations, rather than in equipment manufacture.

The main threats relate to low demand and sidelining of hydrogen adoption in long-term policy and strategy. High vehicle and fuel costs, limited hydrogen powered HDV manufacture and uncertain utilisation undermine the commercial case for refuelling infrastructure. The use of battery electric HDVs is scaling more quickly and at a lower cost. Ongoing policy uncertainty, high capital costs and reliance on small global equipment supply chains further increase investment and delivery risks.

Our detailed analysis of the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats for each supply chain is provided in Appendix C.

Future demand changes for each supply chain

This section considers the potential change in demand of the three supply chains in Scotland as a response to the decarbonisation of HDVs. For the estimation of the current economic size of the HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain we have been able to use both turnover and employment data. Due to a lack of robust turnover data for the remaining two supply chains, from both desk research and stakeholder interviews, we have used employment estimates as a proxy for change in demand and all future economic size estimates. We recognise that using employment data has limitations in the extent that it can reflect changes in productivity. We consider 2030 and 2035 timeframes. No account has been made for any inward investment contribution to the supply chains in our estimated future economic size. Whilst we believe inward investment could be an important contributor to supply chain growth, the level of uncertainty about the scale of any such activity is too high to quantity the resulting impact. The employment projections are based on the growth of the existing supply chain companies.

We reviewed desk-based evidence to identify the nature, scale and timing of the shift to decarbonised HDVs. This provided context for how the market demand would change for the three supply chains covered in this study.

We spoke with 27 industry and other stakeholders covering all three supply chains. We combined the feedback from these stakeholders with what we found from the desk-based review. We used this to develop a view of what could happen to the number of jobs in Scotland in these supply chains from now until 2030 and then to 2035. We focused on employment numbers as a proxy for economic growth as stakeholders were more willing and able to provide data on projected employment than projected turnover.

We presented our emerging findings, about the scale of jobs growth in each of the three supply chains to 2030 and 2035, to a group of 13 industry and other stakeholders at a workshop. Some stakeholders had differing opinions on how quickly decarbonisation of HDVs will occur. Some point to parts of the HDV market where it can already be more cost effective to buy zero emission vehicles. For example, city buses and lighter heavy goods vehicles (HGVs). Others highlight the position of many HGV fleet operators that low carbon fuels, such as biomethane and hydrogenated vegetable oil (HVO), should play an important role in decarbonisation of HGVs in the short term, therefore delaying the uptake of some zero emission vehicles. However, there was broad agreement by the majority of stakeholders that the indicative scale and timing of job growth in each of the three supply chains was reasonable, given their understanding of HDV decarbonisation to 2030 and 2035.

Based on this, our estimate for the potential change in job numbers across each supply chain, to 2030 and 2035 is compared with current job numbers in Table 9.

Supply Chain

Current Jobs

Jobs by 2030

Jobs by 2035

Overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

3,200 to 4,000

3,200 to 4,500

3,200 to 5,200

Zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing (subset of the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain)

300 to 500

500 to 1,000

1,000 to 3,000

HDV charging infrastructure

300 to 400

400 to 700

Uncertain – no estimate

HDV refuelling infrastructure

Less than 100

Uncertain – no estimate

Uncertain – no estimate

Table 9: Estimated current and future Scottish job growth in the supply chains in response to HDV decarbonisation

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain, including zero emissions

Based on stakeholder feedback we estimate that the size of the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain is likely to remain stable or have modest growth in line with market demand for HDVs. We expect the global market demand for HGVs and buses and coaches to be less than 5% annually: 3.9% according to Grandview Research (2023) and 4.2% according to Research and Markets (2025). Within this overall supply chain, the zero emissions HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing activity is projected to move existing employment from fossil fuel vehicle manufacture to zero emission vehicle manufacture. There was some uncertainty expressed by one stakeholder about whether the pace of change would be slower than these projections suggest but the view by most stakeholders was that it was a reasonable estimate.

HDV charging infrastructure supply chain

The charging infrastructure stakeholders feedback consistently reported a significant projected increase in employment to 2030 related to HDV charging infrastructure, driven by a quickening pace of Heavy Goods Vehicle (HGV) decarbonisation. There was uncertainty about the level of jobs by 2035 due to concerns that regulatory targets to mandate new HDV sales to be net zero have not yet been established for the UK and a perceived risk that targets could subsequently be changed in future.

Hydrogen refuelling supply chain

Stakeholder feedback and desk research suggests that any significant jobs growth in hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain would likely take place after 2035. One stakeholder highlighted the risk that regulatory targets could be softened to require a high level of zero emission HDV adoption rather than complete zero emission adoption. They viewed this as a risk to current investment and an issue that could significantly curtail employment growth in the supply chain in future. Stakeholder feedback and desk-based research suggests that hydrogen refuelling will play a targeted but modest role in HDV decarbonisation. This may emerge through the development of a trunk road network approach to establish a minimum viable operating model for HDV refuelling infrastructure and, therefore, hydrogen HDV operation. This approach is being followed in Europe with regulatory and fiscal support from the European Commission. An alternative could be infrastructure funded by the private sector on a case-by-case basis. Shorter-term opportunities exist in the deployment of mobile refuelling solutions, where battery electrification and recharging is not suitable, such as mining and some agricultural purposes.

Cross-check of job projection estimates made in this study

We have compared our estimates of future job numbers with those made in a previous study (Scottish Enterprise 2024). This Scottish Enterprise study provides ranges of full time equivalent (FTE) jobs related to capital investment and operation & maintenance under two scenarios. The first scenario is ‘Business as Usual’, which assumes the rate of change is slower with less appetite for change at consumer level with the Net Zero target being missed. The second scenario is ‘Strong Ambition’, which assumes high levels of deployment driven by societal change and strong policy support. Table 10 provides upper and lower job number estimates for different supply chains, calculated from data in the Scottish Enterprise report. The lower number in each cell is the estimated job numbers under the Business as Usual scenario. The second figure in each cell is the estimated job numbers under the Strong Ambition scenario. The Scottish Enterprise data for the sectors equivalent to the supply chains being investigated in this study are shown in Table 10.

Sector (SE)

Equivalent supply chain in this study

2025 FTE range

2030 FTE range

2035 FTE range

EV Buses/HGVs

Zero emission HDV manufacturing

189 to 488

485 to 2,372

1,459 to 7,331

H2 Buses/HGVs

Zero emission HDV manufacturing

29 to 58

48 to 134

82 to 284

EV Chargers – All

HDV charging

87 to 235

330 to 888

789 to 1,861

Hydrogen Refuelling

HDV hydrogen refuelling

30 to 105

52 to 238

105 to 536

Table 10: Projected FTE jobs related to capital investment and operations & maintenance in sectors relevant to this study – Range presented for ‘Business as Usual’ scenario to ‘Strong Ambition’ scenario (Scottish Enterprise 2024)

We observe that the current and future employment estimates we made for the three supply chains, in this study, (shown in Table 9) are broadly compatible within the ranges of the two scenarios stated in the Scottish Enterprise (2024) report. Note that Table 10 provides job estimates for the zero emission HDV manufacturing supply chain only and not the overall HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain.

Comparison of HDV decarbonisation driven jobs growth with growth in other sectors

It is also useful to compare the current size and growth potential of the HDV related supply chains with some other sectors in the Scottish economy. This provides a context to the potential contribution of job growth from the decarbonisation of HDVs with potential job growth in other sectors. Table 11 shows current and projected employment growth from the same Scottish Enterprise study (Scottish Enterprise 2024).

Supply chain

2025 FTE range

2030 FTE range

2035 FTE range

Offshore Wind

6,164 to 11,068

11,291 to 25,738

23,278 to 67,121

Heat Pumps

1,089 to 6,589

3,516 to 14,119

4,647 to 13,105

Heat Networks

878 to 939

269 to 659

334 to 2,107

Hydrogen Production

51 to 160

257 to 8,039

151 to 6,181

CCUS

665 to 1,028

1,383 to 2,062

1,348 to 1,585

Table 11: Projected FTE jobs related to capital investment and operations & maintenance in other economic sectors – Range presented for ‘Business as Usual’ scenario to ‘Strong Ambition’ scenario (Scottish Enterprise 2024)

We observe that, by 2035, the number of jobs estimated for the supply chains driven by HDV decarbonisation (those shown in Table 10) is lower than the estimated job growth in offshore wind and heat pumps but comparable to hydrogen production and higher than heat networks and CCUS.

Benefits to other sectors from HDV decarbonisation

We looked for examples of where companies in other sectors, currently outside of the three HDV supply chains might benefit from HDV decarbonisation. We did this through stakeholder interviews and desk-research.

Companies in different parts of the construction sector have skills and capabilities relevant to the civil engineering aspects of development of charging infrastructure and hydrogen refuelling infrastructure. This includes early surveying, planning and design of civil works and also civil engineering contractors to carry out groundworks in preparation for the installation of electrical infrastructure or hydrogen refuelling equipment.

Companies in the renewable energy generation sector can move downstream into the development and provision of charging stations using their expertise in planning and project management. We identified one example of this, with Greenwheel Electric Ltd in the process of planning an electric only charging station in West Dunbartonshire. Greenwheel Ltd is part of Muirhall Energy, an established onshore wind developer. This enables Greenwheel to provide a 100% renewable electric charging station offering.

Companies in the clean heat sector can use their technologies to provide systems capable of electrifying HDV truck cabins and buses, to reduce the draw on electricity from the main vehicle battery. We are aware of one company that has taken part in a pilot project to provide heat for an electric bus using their technology usually deployed in home heating. We are also aware of a company with a heat pump technology also being used to provide a cooling system for an HDV charger manufacturer. We cannot name these companies due to commercial confidentiality.

Stakeholder views on maximising economic opportunities

We asked stakeholders from each of the three supply chains to identify what could be done to maximise the economic opportunities from the decarbonisation of HDVs. A broad range of demand side and supply side suggestions were made. These are summarised in Figure 4.

The suggestions made by interviewees, in relation to each of the three supply chains, are described in more detail in the following sections. Further details are in Appendix D.

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

  • Increased clarity of regulation and when new HDV sales must be zero emission
  • Long term, stable funding for operators to overcome total cost of ownership (TCO) issues
  • Support for operators to access financial models to fund vehicle and infrastructure investment
  • Improving skills provision for companies to safely work on OEM supplied BEV and HFCEV chassis when using these as a base to build customised HDVs

Charging infrastructure

  • Policy and regulatory certainty for HDV operators and manufacturers
  • Long term, stable funding for operators to overcome TCO issues
  • Coordinated research to understand locations where grid reinforcement is required and managing future connection queues
  • Support existing companies to enter the HDV charging manufacturing supply chain and attract inward investment opportunities
  • Promote Scottish supply chain capabilities to Scottish operators, including networking at existing public HDV charging sites
  • Invest in more in Graduate Apprenticeships to address areas of skills shortages, such as high voltage electrical design engineering
  • Support low voltage charger installers to upskill if they are interested in entering the high voltage HDV charging installation market, including establishing links with charging device manufacturers
  • Raise awareness of the market opportunities for civil engineering contracts and support skills development to work in high voltage environments

Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

  • Clear long-term policy confirming 100% net zero target
  • Development of industry standards to support hydrogen system component development
  • Promote Scottish supply chain companies to fleet operators and identify the main Government/Transport Scotland contact points for the supply chain

Conclusions

Strong global policy and market forces are accelerating HDV decarbonisation

We identified strong drivers for HDV decarbonisation, resulting in a clear direction of travel. This includes regulation and funding support from governments in major markets, including China, Europe and North America. Market drivers are also arising from companies that are increasingly demanding evidence from their supply chains that real action is being taken to reduce greenhouse gas emissions.

The speed of transition varies by type of HDV and low carbon fuels are playing a role alongside zero emission options

Many countries, including the UK, have set target dates by which sales of new diesel and petrol HDVs will be replaced by zero emission HDVs. The regulatory measures to support this are still being consulted on at a UK level. The feedback we received from stakeholders interviewed for this study highlights different views about how quickly the transition to zero emission HDVs is likely to happen.

Some stakeholders highlight examples of companies buying zero emission HDVs, without any grant funding support, due to the total cost of ownership being lower than traditional diesel alternatives. This has typically been in the bus market and lighter end of the HGV market.

Other stakeholders suggested that fleet operators are using low carbon fuels, such as biomethane and HVO in the short term for cost and proven performance reasons. Two of the main HGV fleet operator representative bodies are in favour of using low carbon fuels as a decarbonisation technology and this would likely contribute to delay in investment in battery electric and hydrogen powered HDVs.

Scottish HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain activity is concentrated in a few companies

We identified nine companies in Scotland during this study as being active in the manufacturing of HDVs or niche vehicles. Six of these are active, or have recently been active, in zero emission HDVs. An additional 12 companies are involved in the manufacturing supply chain, with only one of these having been active in zero emission manufacturing. In most of these companies, the transition to zero emission vehicles is likely to lead to safeguarding of existing jobs as diesel vehicle manufacturing is displaced. Currently the 22 active companies employ several thousand employees, with a few hundred of these being active in zero emission activities. Exporting is a key route to market for most of the companies in this supply chain. Although an additional 103 companies with Scottish locations have been identified as having potentially relevant capabilities, only three were identified as developing new products targeting this supply chain. For the remaining potential companies, there is uncertainty about whether they are either aware or interested in entering the supply chain. If they chose to do so there would be significant barriers if they did not have a clear, unique proposition.

The HDV charging infrastructure supply chain is mainly service based and is growing

We identified 15 active companies with locations in Scotland in this supply chain. We estimate that current employment is between 300 and 500 and the focus is on design, installation, ownership, operation and maintenance. Only one parts manufacturer, producing cooling systems for a large charging device manufacturer, was identified. Some companies in this supply chain are already active in European and Middle East markets, delivering HDV design and installation projects. All companies interviewed from this supply chain expect significant growth in their HDV charging business. An additional 60 companies were identified as having capabilities potentially relevant to this supply chain. Some of these are currently involved in the manufacture of charging devices for cars and light vans and it is not known whether they view HDV charging manufacture as a market development opportunity. Others are involved in installation of domestic and light commercial charging infrastructure and would need additional skills development to enter the HDV charger installation market. Again, it is not known how many of these companies view the HDV market as a realistic opportunity.

The HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain is very limited with the main growth opportunity identified after 2035

We identified seven companies with Scottish locations as being active in the hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain. We estimate that total current employment is fewer than 100. There is limited manufacturing capability in Scotland, with most systems integrators sourcing equipment from outside of Scotland. Most of the activity in this supply chain relates to hydrogen refuelling infrastructure design, installation and operation for demonstrators. The main focus is on supporting hydrogen powered buses and public sector vehicle fleets. Discussions with stakeholders in this sector highlighted that the most significant uncertainties relate to the timing of additional hydrogen powered HDV deployment and no future employment growth estimates have been made. There was general agreement from stakeholders that significant levels of adoption would take place mid to late 2030’s but this is very dependent on HDV decarbonisation policies being ‘zero emission’ rather than ‘almost zero emission’.

Market demand stimulation is vital but supply side actions are important too

Various initiatives already exist at government and industry level to stimulate market demand for zero emission vehicles and the associated charging or hydrogen refuelling infrastructure. Key actions, which are already well understood, include clear and stable policy, consistent funding support, clear regulations and addressing grid capacity and connection constraints. Stakeholders interviewed for this study also highlighted several actions addressing specific supply side issues. These includes awareness raising and networking with fleet operators, particularly for SMEs, to highlight Scottish supply chain capabilities. The importance of addressing current and future skills shortages in electrical design and installation and training capacity to upskill low voltage EV charging installers are also examples of supply side actions required to maximise economic opportunities for the Scottish supply chains.

References

ACEA (2024) Economic and Market Report Global and EU auto industry: Full year 2024. Available at: https://www.acea.auto/publication/economic-and-market-report-global-and-eu-auto-industry-full-year-2024/ (Accessed 12 November 2025)

Basma, H and Schmidt, J. (2025) Charging Infrastructure Needs for Battery Electric Trucks in the European Union by 2030. International Council on Clean Transportation. Available at: https://theicct.org/wp-content/uploads/2025/10/ID-476-–-EU-BETs_report_final-1.pdf (Accessed 08 January 2026)

BloombergNEF (2025) Zero Emission Commercial Vehicles – Accelerating the Transition. Available at: https://assets.bbhub.io/professional/sites/24/Zero-Emission-Commercial-Vehicles-Factbook-2025.pdf (Accessed 08 January 2026)

CSIRO and GHD (2023) Hydrogen Vehicle Refueling Infrastructure: Priorities and opportunities for Australia. Available at: https://elecseed.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/Hydrogen_Vehicle_Refuelling_Infrastructure_Report.pdf (Accessed 18 November 2025)

Danish Ministry of Transport (2021) Infrastructure Plan 2035. Available at: https://www.trm.dk/politiske-aftaler/2021/aftale-om-infrastrukturplan-2035-aftale/ (Accessed 13 November 2025)

Department for Transport (DfT) and Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency (DVLA) (2026) [1] Data Table Veh0556 – Heavy goods vehicles registered for the first time by gross vehicle weight (tonnes). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistical-data-sets/vehicle-licensing-statistics-data-tables#all-vehicles (Accessed 02 February 2026)

Department for Transport (DfT) and Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency (DVLA) (2026) [2] Data Table Veh0601 – Licensed buses and coaches at the end of the year by body type detail. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistical-data-sets/vehicle-licensing-statistics-data-tables#all-vehicles (Accessed 02 February 2026)

Department for Transport (DfT) and Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency (DVLA) (2026) [3] Data Table Veh1104 – Licensed Vehicles at the end of the quarter by body type and region. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistical-data-sets/vehicle-licensing-statistics-data-tables#all-vehicles (Accessed 04 February 2026)

Department for Transport (DfT) and Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency (DVLA) (2026) [4] Data Table Veh1154 – Vehicles Registered for the first time by body type and region: Great Britain and United Kingdom. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistical-data-sets/vehicle-licensing-statistics-data-tables (Accessed 11 February 2026)

Department for Transport (DfT) and Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency (DVLA) (2026) [5] Data Table Veh0171 – Ultra low emission vehicles (ULEVs) registered for the first time by body type and fuel type, including breakdown of generic models: Great Britain and United Kingdom. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistical-data-sets/vehicle-licensing-statistics-data-tables (Accessed 11 February 2026)

Drake, W. et al (2023) Why Great Britain’s long-distance, heavy-duty HGVs can go battery electric – and what needs done to achieve this, Element Energy/ ERM. Available at: https://www.erm.com/contentassets/553cd40a6def42b196e32e4d70e149a1/phase-two-report-use-cases-that-do-need-public-charging.pdf (Accessed 08 January 2026)

Energy UK (2025) Driving electrification in the road freight sector. Available at: https://www.energy-uk.org.uk/publications/driving-electrification-in-the-road-freight-sector/ (Accessed 02 March 2026)

Enova (2025) Support scheme for heavy-duty zero-emission vehicles. Available at: https://www.enova.no/nb/bedrift/landtransport/stottetilbud-innen-landtransport/tunge-nullutslippskjoretoy (Accessed 13 November 2025)

EPA (2024) EPA awards over $735 million for clean heavy-duty vehicles. Available at https://driveelectric.gov/news/epa-clean-heavy-duty-vehicles-awards (Accessed 13 November 2025)

European Commission (2024) Regulation (EU) 2023/1804 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 September 2023 on the deployment of alternative fuels infrastructure. Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A32023R1804 (Accessed 07 January 2026)

European Commission (2025) EU awards over €600 million to alternative fuel projects to boost zero-emission mobility. Available at: https://cinea.ec.europa.eu/news-events/news/eu-awards-over-eu600-million-alternative-fuel-projects-boost-zero-emission-mobility-2025-11-17_en (Accessed 26 November 2025)

European Commission (2025) [2] Ministerial Declaration on the Clean Transport Corridor Initiative. Available at: https://transport.ec.europa.eu/document/download/e49b6a7a-8f8a-4901-b8ba-b9f88aed8683_en?filename=CTCI-ministerial-declaration.pdf (Accessed 07 January 2026)

European Parliament news (2024) MEPs adopt stricter CO2 emissions targets for trucks and buses. Available at: https://www.europarl.europa.eu/news/en/press-room/20240408IPR20305/meps-adopt-stricter-co2-emissions-targets-for-trucks-and-buses (Accessed 28 January 2026)

Grand View Research (2023) The Global Commercial Vehicles Market Size and Outlook, 2023 – 2030. Available at: https://www.grandviewresearch.com/horizon/outlook/commercial-vehicles-market-size/global (Accessed 02 March 2026)

Grand View Research (2026) Hydrogen Fueling Station Market (2026-2033). Available at: https://www.grandviewresearch.com/industry-analysis/hydrogen-fueling-station-market-report (Accessed 28 January 2026)

Gobierno de España (2021) Real Decreto 983/2021, de 16 de noviembre. Boletín Oficial del Estado. Available at: https://www.boe.es/eli/es/rd/2021/11/16/983 (Accessed: 13 November 2025)

Herit, A., Hildebrandt, E. and Becker, H. (2024) Building Europe’s electric-truck charging infrastructure, McKinsey & Company. Available at: https://www.mckinsey.com/industries/automotive-and-assembly/our-insights/building-europes-electric-truck-charging-infrastructure (Accessed 07 January 2026)

Hydrogen Europe (2025) The need for a combined approach to zero-emission transport. Available at: https://hydrogeneurope.eu/policy-priorities/h2-mobility/ (Accessed 10 December 2025)

Hydrogen UK (2023) Hydrogen Transport Benchmarking. Available at: https://hydrogen-uk.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/HUK_Hydrogen-Transport-Benchmarking_online-Mar23.pdf (Accessed 14 November 2025)

Innovate UK Business Connect (2024) Zero Emission Heavy Goods Vehicles and Infrastructure Programme. Available at: https://iuk-business-connect.org.uk/programme/zero-emission-heavy-goods-vehicles-and-infrastructure/ (Accessed 13 November 2025)

International Council on Clean Transportation (ICCT) (2025) Zero-emission medium- and heavy-duty vehicle market in China: 2024 update. Available at: https://theicct.org/publication/ze-mhdv-market-china-2024-mar25/ (Accessed 14 November 2025)

International Energy Agency (IEA) (2024) Global EV Outlook 2024. Available at: https://www.iea.org/reports/global-ev-outlook-2024 (Accessed 07 January 2026)

International Energy Agency (IEA) (2025) Global EV Outlook 2025. Available at: https://www.iea.org/reports/global-ev-outlook-2025/trends-in-heavy-duty-electric-vehicles (Accessed 07 January 2026)

International Energy Agency (IEA) (2025) [2] Subsidies for FCEV program (Round 3). Available at: https://www.iea.org/policies/28065-subsidies-for-fcev-program-round-3 (Accessed 18 November 2025)

Logistics UK (2025) Powering change: building a credible plan for decarbonising road logistics. Available at https://logistics.org.uk/research-hub/reports/powering-change-building-a-credible-plan-for-decar (Accessed 07 January 2026)

Milence (2025) The Readiness of Public Charging Infrastructure for Electric Long-Haul Trucks. Available at: https://milence.com/press-release/milence-white-paper-assesses-infrastructure-readiness-and-calls-for-targeted-action-to-accelerate-the-pace (Accessed 07 January 2026)

Ministerio para la Transición Ecológica y el Reto Demográfico (MITECO) (2023) MITECO adjudica 150 millones de euros en la segunda edición de H2 Pioneros a 12 nuevos proyectos de hidrógeno renovable. Available at: https://www.miteco.gob.es/es/prensa/ultimas-noticias/2023/11/miteco-adjudica-150-millones-segunda-edicion-h2-pioneros-12-nuevos-proyectos-hidrogeno-renovable.html (Accessed 13 November 2025)

Mohapatra, A (2025) Hydrogen Powered Vehicles Face a Rough Road, S&P Global. Available at: https://www.spglobal.com/automotive-insights/en/blogs/2025/10/hydrogen-powered-vehicles-face-rough-road (Accessed 12 November 2025)

Mulholland, E. (2025) Race to Zero: European Heavy-duty Vehicle Market Development Quarterly (January – June 2025) (International Council on Clean Transportation). Available at: https://theicct.org/publication/r2z-eu-hdv-market-development-quarterly-january-june-2025-sept25/ (Accessed 12 November 2025)

Mulholland, E. et al (2025) Within reach – the 2025 CO2 targets for new heavy-duty vehicles in Europe, (International Council on Clean Transportation). Available at: https://theicct.org/publication/co2-targets-for-new-hdvs-in-europe-sept25 (Accessed 12 November 2025)

Netherlands Enterprise Agency (RVO) (2025) Hydrogen in Mobility Subsidy Scheme (SWIM). Available at: https://www.rvo.nl/subsidies-financiering/waterstof-mobiliteit (Accessed 13 November 2025)

Otto,T. et al (2024) Comparing hydrogen refueling concepts for heavy-duty vehicles. International Journal of Hydrogen Energy. Available at: https://juser.fz-juelich.de/record/1039806/files/1-s2.0-S0360319925005580-main.pdf (Accessed 18 November 2025)

Research and Markets (2025) Heavy Commercial Vehicles Market Outlook 2026 to 2034. https://www.researchandmarkets.com/report/heavy-commercial-vehicle-market (Accessed 02 March 2026)

Road Haulage Association (2025) The future of fleets – Informing the net zero transition for commercial vehicles. Available at: https://www.rha.uk.net/Campaigns/Publications (Accessed 09 February 2026)

Scottish Enterprise (2024) Economic Impact Scenarios for Scotland’s Energy Transition. Available at: https://www.scottish-enterprise.com/media/1ykbucca/the-economic-impact-of-scotlands-energy-transition.pdf (Accessed 09 February 2026)

Scottish Government (2025) Scotland’s Climate Change Plan – 2026 – 2040. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-climate-change-plan-2026-2040/pages/13/ (Accessed 02 February 2026)

Suneson, A. et al (2025) Don’t miss the bus: New strategies for European bus and coach OEMs (McKinsey & Company). Available at: https://www.mckinsey.com/features/mckinsey-center-for-future-mobility/our-insights/dont-miss-the-bus-new-strategies-for-european-bus-and-coach-oems (Accessed 12 November 2025)

Transport Scotland (2022) HGV Energy Infrastructure Opportunities and Challenges. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/meeting-hgv-energy-infrastructure-zero-emission-truck-taskforce-25-august-2022/hgv-energy-infrastructure-opportunities-and-challenges/ (Accessed 29 January, 2026)

UK Government (2026) Consultation on a New Heavy Goods Vehicle CO2 Emissions Regulatory Framework for the United Kingdom. Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/6983430d13622473b51ca9db/new_hgv_co2_emissions_regulatory_framework_for_UK.pdf (Accessed 02 March 2026)

Utomo, D. et al (2025) Towards Zero Emission HGV Infrastructure in Scotland: Phase 2 Report, Centre for Sustainable Road Freight at Heriot-Watt University (for Transport Scotland). Available at: https://www.csrf.ac.uk/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/Transport-Scotland-Stakeholder-Report-FINAL.pdf (Accessed 08 January 2026)

Zero Emission Vehicles Ireland (ZEVI) (2024) Zero Emission Heavy Duty Vehicle Purchase Grant Scheme. Available at: https://www.zevi.ie/supports-schemes/zero-emission-heavy-duty-vehicle-purchase-grant-scheme (Accessed 13 November 2025)

Zhu, Shirly (2025) 80% of global hydrogen refueling stations are located in just five countries, Interact Analysis. Available at: https://interactanalysis.com/insight/80-of-global-hydrogen-refueling-stations-are-located-in-just-five-countries/#:~:text=Regionally%20speaking%2C%20Asia%20Pacific%20has,site%20stations%20with%20hydrogen%20production. (Accessed 18 November 2025)

Appendices

Research method – further detail

The research method used for this study consisted of:

  • Desk based research
    • Development of a categorisation framework for each of the three supply chains
    • Development of supply chain database structures
    • Initial population of the supply chain databases
    • Identification and review of relevant policy and market information
  • Stakeholder engagement
    • Preparation of engagement materials
    • Preparation of target stakeholder lists
    • Conducting stakeholder interviews

Desk based research

Development of a categorisation framework for each of the three supply chains

The first task of the desk-based research was to develop and agree a framework for the three supply chain segments being investigated:

  • HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain
  • HDV charging infrastructure supply chain
  • HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain

The three supply chain structures used to categorise companies were as follows:

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain:

  • Material manufacturers
    • Polymers, composites and rubbers
    • Metals and alloys
    • Ceramics
    • Other
  • Sub-systems and components manufacturers
    • Electrical components and systems (wiring, cables, connectors, etc)
    • Electronic components and systems (displays, sensors, processors, lighting, power electronics, etc)
    • Mechanical components and systems (bearings, gears, etc)
    • Hydraulic and pneumatic systems (pumps, compressors, valves, etc)
    • Seals, gaskets, and tubing
    • H2 storage tank
    • Exterior panels and glazing
    • Interior panels, enclosures and fittings
    • Other
  • System manufacturers
    • Drivetrain
    • Battery systems
    • Fuel cell systems
    • HV system
    • Thermal management systems (for energy supply and for cabin)
    • Chassis and frame (including suspension, steering, and braking)
    • Embedded software systems
    • Other
  • System integrator/OEM
    • Heavy goods vehicles
    • Buses and coaches
    • Agriculture / forestry vehicles (tractors, combines, harvesters, etc)
    • Construction vehicles (excavators, rollers, dump trucks, etc)
    • Other on-road HDVs (fire appliances, refuse trucks, tankers, etc)
    • Other off-road HDVs (mining, quarrying, etc)
    • Other
  • Other
    • Software/ digital – aftermarket (e.g. telematics)
    • HDV conversion – full battery electric
    • HDV conversion – hydrogen fuel cell
    • HDV conversion – hydrogen ICE
    • Other
  • Non HDV niche vehicle manufacture

HDV charging infrastructure supply chain:

  • Material manufacture
    • Metals
    • Polymers
    • Other
  • Fixed charger component and system manufacture
    • Enclosures
    • Cables, connectors and sockets
    • Semiconductor chips
    • Electronic components and devices
    • Communication components and devices
    • Sensors
    • Displays
    • Embedded software
    • Other
  • Fixed charger systems integrator / OEM
  • Design, construction and installation
    • Design and planning
    • Site inspection and preparation (civil engineering)
    • General site construction
    • Engineering, procurement and construction (EPC)
    • High voltage / grid connection
    • Other
  • Ownership
    • Site owners
    • Asset owners
  • Operation and maintenance
    • Charge point operators
    • Maintenance services
    • Other
  • Mobile charger component and system manufacture
    • Enclosures
    • Cables, connectors and sockets
    • Semiconductor chips
    • Electronic components and devices
    • Batteries
    • Sensors
    • Displays
    • Embedded software (inc. battery management system BMS)
    • Chassis
    • Wheels/traction system
    • Other
  • Mobile charger systems integrator/OEM
  • Mobile charger systems maintenance

HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain:

  • Material manufacture
    • Metals
    • Polymers
    • Other
  • Components and systems manufacture
    • Enclosures
    • Nozzles and tubes
    • Pipework
    • Valves
    • Compressor and decompressor equipment
    • Dispensers
    • Regulators / controllers
    • Sensors
    • Displays
    • Electronic components and devices
    • Embedded software
    • Metal tanks / vessels
    • Composite tanks / vessels
  • Systems integrator / OEM
    • Fixed systems
    • Mobile systems
  • Design, construction and installation
    • Concept design engineering and consultancy
    • Detailed component design
    • Engineering, procurement and construction (EPC)
    • Detailed site design and planning
    • Health, safety and environmental consultancy
    • Site inspection and preparation (civil engineering)
    • Equipment installation and commissioning
    • General construction
    • Other
  • Ownership, operation and maintenance
    • Site owners / operators
    • Asset owners / operators
    • Maintenance services
    • Other

Development of supply chain database structures

Using the above supply chain frameworks, we created MS Excel based databases to record:

  • Companies either active, or with the potential to become active, in the supply chain
  • Supply chain position (based on the agreed frameworks)
  • Technology area (e.g. battery electric or hydrogen fuel cell electric)
  • Geographical location (postcode, local authority area, economic development region)
  • Number of employees and, where obvious from the activities of the company or through company interview, an estimate of the number of employees involved in the relevant supply chain
  • Turnover of the company (where available) and, where obvious from the activities of the company or through company interview, an estimate of the turnover involved in the relevant supply chain – note that publicly available data on actual turnover is typically only available for larger companies
  • Whether the company exports or not, where such data exists in the public domain or via company interviews. In the case of interviewed companies we also sought an approximate % breakdown of the domestic/export (outside UK) turnover related to the relevant supply chain

Initial population of the supply chain databases

We populated the supply chain databases based on our previous knowledge of companies from other studies, supplemented by additional desk research. This additional desk research included reviewing trade news sites, such as Freight Carbon Zero. We also used our subscription-based access to a proprietary database, which allowed us to generate lists of companies. We reviewed all companies identified via these methods to ensure quality control of the supply chain databases we created. This involved reviewing the online presence of all companies identified via this route using company websites, LinkedIn profiles and posts, etc.). The initial population was supplemented by feedback from the stakeholder interviews later in the study.

Identification and review of relevant policy and market information

We identified and reviewed numerous data sourced. Those used in the development of this report are included in the references section.

Stakeholder engagement

Preparation of engagement materials

We prepared a draft briefing note for the study. This contained details of the study background, scope and intended uses of the outputs. The briefing note included the information, legally required under GDPR regulations, to provide potential stakeholders with the opportunity to confirm their informed consent to participate. This included information about what personal data would be collected, how it would be processed, their right to withdraw consent and the data deletion policy.

A draft list of discussion topics was also developed to capture the information necessary to contribute, alongside the secondary research, to answering all of the study research questions.

Preparation of target stakeholder lists

We collated a list of 89 stakeholders and contacted them via email along with the briefing document. The stakeholder list had representation across all three supply chains and included companies and other stakeholders, such as support organisations and sector representative bodies.

Conducting stakeholder interviews

A total of 27 interviews were carried out over MS Teams (30% engagement rate), exceeding the planned target of 20-25.


In addition to these one-to-one interviews, we held an online validation workshop in January 2026, where initial findings were presented and discussed prior to the report being produced. This provided an opportunity to test and validate the findings. A total of 13 people, from seven companies and three support organisations/representative bodies, attended.

Market trends in HDV decarbonisation

Understanding the market trends is important to identifying and assessing the likely nature, scale and timing of HDV decarbonisation. This will drive changes in demand for goods and services provided by the three supply chains we are investigating in this study.

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing

Globally, around 2.9 million HGVs and 362 thousand buses were manufactured in 2024 (ACEA, 2024). Asia had the largest share, accounting for around 56% of HGVs and 62% of buses, with China responsible for around 60% of HGVs and 52% of buses manufactured in Asia in 2024.

Around 20% of buses sold globally in 2024 were zero emission, either BEV or HFCEV, compared with only 3% of HGVs. However, global zero emission bus sales have remained fairly constant at between 60,000 and 70,000 per year, over the last five years, while sales of zero emission HGVs grew from around 20,000 in 2020 to 96,000 in 2024 (IEA, 2025). Asia dominates both markets, with 79.7% of zero emission bus and 83.3% of zero emission HGV global sales. Europe came second with 13.9% of zero emission bus and 12.4% of zero emission HGV global sales, followed by North America with 1.9% and 2.0% respectively. Other global regions accounted for less than 1% of sales of both vehicle types. China is by far the largest national market, accounting for 68.2% of zero emission bus and 82.2% of zero emission HGV sales in 2024. It should be noted that China was an early adopter and that around 65% of China’s current electric bus fleets were in service before 2019. Figure 5 and Figure 6 provide further detail of global sales of zero emission buses and HGVs respectively (IEA, 2025).

In the EU, sales for all HDVs dropped by 15% in 2025 compared with 2024, to 176,000 units (IEA, 2025). However, registration of zero emission HDVs grew by 45% over the same period to 4,100, or 1.7% of all HDV registrations. 22% of new buses were zero emission, compared with 19% of medium and light goods vehicles and only 1.4% of HGVs. In total there were more than 100 BEV and 20 hydrogen fuel cell (HFC) HDV models available in the EU in 2025 (Mulholland, E., et al, 2025). 35% of all zero emission HDV sales were in Germany, followed by France (27%), the Netherlands (15%) and Sweden (8%). However, the percentage of total sales that were zero emission vary on a national basis, with, for example, 7% of all HGV sales in Sweden being zero emission compared with only 1.8% in Germany, and 64% of all bus sales in Denmark being zero emission compared with 24% in Germany (Mulholland, E., et al, 2025). The leading zero emission OEMs in the EU are Volvo and Renault for HGVs, Ford and Mercedes for light/medium goods vehicles, and Mercedes and MAN for buses. Chinese OEMs (mainly BYD and Yutong) secured 21% of the zero-emission bus market and surveys of bus operators suggest that this could climb higher, should Chinese OEMs be able to offer ownership cost savings of 10-20% versus European OEMs (Suneson, A. et al, 2025).

In the UK, in 2024, there were 50,987 newly registered HGVs, of which 268, or 0.5%, were zero emission battery electric. In the same year, 9,919 new buses and coaches were registered in the UK, with 1,719, or 17.3%, of these being zero emission battery electric. (Department for Transport, 2026 [4] and [5]).

In Scotland, in 2024, there were 3,958 newly registered HGVs, with 12, or 0.3%, of these being zero emission battery electric. In the same year, 663 new buses and coaches were registered, of which 74, or 11.2%, were zero emission battery electric. (Department for Transport, 2026 [4] and [5]).

There are strong policies, often supported by significant investments, around the world to support the introduction of zero emission HDVs, including: in the EU a target of 100% of city bus sales as zero emission by 2035 and reduction of emissions from other HDVs by 90% by 2040 (EU Parliament news, 2024), and the UK Government’s Zero Emission HGV and Infrastructure Demonstrator (ZEHID) programme (Innovate UK, 2024) aiming to support the transition to net zero by 2050. Despite this, there are other considerations, including the US decision to repeal various electric vehicle targets, that mean that the overall projected market share of electric HDVs is now less than was projected in 2024. Nevertheless, the International Energy Agency is projecting that around 20% of new global bus sales and 13% of new global heavy truck sales in 2030 will be electric (IEA, 2025).

Charging infrastructure

The International Energy Agency (IEA, 2024), expects significant growth in the stock of HDV charging devices installed, globally, to 2030 and also to 2035. Its report looks at two future scenarios. The first is called Stated Policies, referred to as STEPS, and this is what is thought the growth will be with the existing policies that are already in place. The second scenario is called Announced Pledges Scenarios, referred to as APS, and this is what is thought the growth will be if additional policies, which have been announced but not implemented, are added to what is already in place. Figure 7 shows 1 million charging devices installed by 2023, rising to between 5.5 million and 6.6 million chargers by 2030 and between 13.8 million and 17.9 million by 2035. Most of these HDV chargers will be installed in truck and bus depots, with a small percentage (less than 1% in 2035) being opportunity chargers, which means, for example, at motorway service areas.

China is the market leader in the adoption of electric buses and electric trucks and therefore is also market leader in the deployment of heavy-duty charging devices (IEA, 2024). China is also leading on manufacturing heavy duty trucks that are enabled for battery swapping, which is much quicker than plug-in charging.

After China, Europe is the second largest market for electric bus and electric truck sales with the accompanying need for charger installation (IEA, 2024). The countries in Europe with the highest projected demand for battery electric truck charger infrastructure are Germany, Italy, France, Poland and Spain, collectively accounting for more than 70% of the total charging needs in the EU-27 (Basma, H and Schmidt, J. ,2025). The European Commission has introduced the Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulation which mandates Member States to build out publicly accessible charging infrastructure on main road networks (European Commission, 2024). HDV manufacturers are also working together to roll out fast charging infrastructure to help overcome fleet operator concerns about lack of charging availability (Milence, 2025). By 2030, Europe will require more than 300,000 public and private charge points for medium and heavy-duty trucks, compared to approximately 10,000 in 2024, at an estimated cost of €7 billion (Herit, A., Hildebrandt, E. and Becker, H., 2024).

Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

The roll out of hydrogen refuelling stations (HRS) is modest compared to charging infrastructure deployment. As of 2024, there were approximately 1,160 HRSs worldwide, mostly confined to Germany, Japan, and South Korea, compared to 4.5 million EV charging stations (Mohapatra, 2025). The value of the global hydrogen refuelling station market was estimated about USD 1.00 billion in 2025 and is projected to grow at a 19.8% CAGR over the period 2025 – 2033, inclusive of all applications including passenger vehicles (Grand View Research, 2026). The growth in hydrogen powered mobility and related infrastructure is expected to peak in 2040 – 2050, led by HDVs as existing constraints such as limited hydrogen production, refuelling storage, and delivery technologies are addressed. Refuelling stations will likely have to deploy a range of refuelling pressures to cater for different vehicle technologies and requirements, in the early stages of deployment, whilst the market guides the dominant technology selection. At present, refuelling stations are predominantly focused on 350 bar refuelling as this is the most cost effective despite the improved efficiency of 700 bar refuelling for HDVs. A recent Hydrogen Energy Journal (Otto et.al, 2024) article found liquid hydrogen refuelling to be more cost effective than gaseous refuelling for HDVs, offering higher flow rates, lower station energy demand and simpler station design. Estimated refuelling costs were €0.16 to €0.58 per kilogram for liquid hydrogen compared with €1.02 to €3.73 per kilogram for gaseous hydrogen, with further component development and standardised protocols identified as key enablers for infrastructure deployment.

Hydrogen-powered HDVs are likely to represent a delayed or smaller share of zero-emission vehicles compared with electrification over the next decade.

As of 2025, 62% of the world’s hydrogen refuelling stations are in Asia (Zhu, 2025). China leads expansion with major hydrogen fuel cell electric vehicle (HFCEV) subsidies, highway-based HRS deployment, toll exemptions for hydrogen trucks, and provincial station incentives, targeting 50,000 fuel-cell vehicles and up to 200,000 tonnes per year of green hydrogen production by 2025 (IEA, 2025, [2]). South Korea plans 280 liquid hydrogen stations by 2030, supported by strong public – private partnerships (Zhu, 2025). India aims to deploy 1,000 hydrogen trucks and buses by 2030, though infrastructure plans are unclear. Australia and New Zealand are at earlier stages, with Australia operating 13 HRS and New Zealand 6, largely driven by local companies and pilot deployments (CSIRO and GHD, 2023). North America has experienced significant slowdown in hydrogen markets due, in part, to policy decisions of the current Administration in the USA.

In February 2025, H2 Mobility announced closure of several HRSs in German cities, shifting focus from urban light vehicle applications to larger infrastructure for commercial vehicles and buses with 350, 500, and 700 bar options (Mohapatra, 2025). The EU has committed €600 million through the Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Facility to support 38 new hydrogen refuelling stations (European Commission, 2025). Member states must install one HRS every 200 km along the TEN-T core network, with minimum levels of passing HDV transport. The aim is to complete installation by 2030 with interim targets set for 2025. Binding EU targets require a 90% reduction in HDV emissions by 2040 and zero emission for urban buses, supported by policies that ease barriers to scale-up (Hydrogen Europe, 2025). Despite this, Hydrogen Europe expects hydrogen HDVs and refuelling to lag battery electric solutions until at least 2030.


It is likely that in the UK investment in infrastructure will have to happen before hydrogen powered HDVs are adopted in significant numbers. In 2023, the UK had zero deployed heavy-duty fuel cell trucks and only 6 HRSs. As of 2022, Scotland had four hydrogen refuelling stations for public use (Transport Scotland, 2022). Two of which are based in Aberdeen to support the fleet of bus and municipal hydrogen HDVs with further stations in Orkney and outside Edinburgh. Without a minimum viable network of hydrogen refuelling stations deployment of hydrogen HDVs will be limited (Hydrogen UK, 2023). Strong near-future deployment opportunities lie in off grid refuelling applications for construction based HDVs with full HDV rollout expected to grow from 2035 onwards.

Detailed SWOT Analysis

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain SWOT

Strengths

  • Scotland has a small number of specialist HDV manufacturers and integrators (e.g. buses, emergency vehicles, refuse, gritters, temperature-controlled bodies) with application-specific knowledge rather than being involved in mass-market production
  • Some companies (e.g. Emergency One, Gray & Adams, James A Cuthbertson, Farid-Hillend) have capabilities in vehicle integration, bespoke design, and aftersales support
  • There is evidence of some limited export activity, mainly by Emergency One that has significant and growing international export activity in relation to its diesel vehicles. It has also exported a small number of zero-emission vehicles
  • Rokbak is referenced as part of the top end of the HDV value chain in Scotland and is implicitly export-oriented through its mining and construction markets, which are typically international in nature
  • There is demonstrable capability in control systems, energy management systems, telematics, and software-driven optimisation (e.g. battery management, route-aware energy optimisation). These capabilities are largely transferable to zero-emission HDVs (BEV and hydrogen), even if current market pull is weak
  • Scottish manufacturers are well embedded in public-sector procurement (local authorities, emergency services), providing familiarity with regulated markets and specialist use cases where OEM solutions are less mature
  • Interviewees consistently note that Scotland has experience and expertise in hydrogen technologies that could be applied to zero-emission HDVs, at a knowledge and R&D level, even if commercial delivery has been weak
  • Scottish public bodies (e.g. local authorities, Transport Scotland) have been willing to act as early adopters and demonstrator partners, providing capital support and participating in trials for zero-emission HDVs and associated infrastructure. This has resulted in real-world pilots, learning exercises, and prototype deployments, even where projects have struggled to deliver sustained operational outcomes
  • Scotland operates within a clear UK and international policy framework that is committed to 100% zero-emission HDV sales by 2040, supported by regulatory standards and funding programmes such as ZEHID

Weaknesses

  • Scotland has only a very small number of companies with full OEM or chassis-design capability; most are, primarily, assemblers, converters or bodybuilders, rather than system owners
  • Most depend on imported core systems (chassis, batteries, power electronics, fuel cells), sourced from European or even global manufacturers
  • As Scottish companies rely on imported chassis and systems, strategic decisions by European, Asian, or global OEMs directly shape what Scottish manufacturers can offer. This limits Scotland’s ability to influence technology pathways (e.g. BEV vs hydrogen) and increases vulnerability to shifts in OEM priorities
  • The historic component manufacturing base has largely disappeared, leaving a “hollowed-out” supply chain with limited depth
  • The overall scale of HDV manufacturing in Scotland is small, with a relatively high cost base, particularly compared with European and global competitors. This means that Scotland is not considered to be internationally competitive in zero-emission HDV manufacturing
  • Most HDVs produced or integrated in Scotland are diesel powered, with zero-emission vehicles representing only a very small proportion of output.
  • Most manufacturers report minimal customer demand for BEV or hydrogen HDVs and adoption is seen as policy-driven rather than market-driven, leading to hesitancy and “wait-and-see” behaviour across the supply chain
  • Vehicle costs (particularly BEV and hydrogen chassis) are consistently cited as prohibitive, thereby limiting demand
  • Charging and hydrogen refuelling infrastructure is viewed as inadequate, unreliable, or too uncertain to support operational deployment. Hydrogen projects in particular are described as fragmented, poorly coordinated, and failing to deliver end-to-end solutions. These issues are also contributing to limited demand
  • Smaller manufacturers lack the resources to invest in high-voltage training, facility upgrades, or in-house zero-emission R&D without clear demand signals
  • Competition for skilled engineers (e.g. from aerospace and other sectors) can constrain company growth
  • Although public support for zero-emission HDVs is acknowledged, it is perceived by a number of interviewees as fragmented and risk-averse. The projects funded to date have not translated into clear, coordinated supply-chain development
  • UK-wide programmes (e.g. ZEHID) are acknowledged, but Scottish participation, in terms of manufacturing, appears limited. As a result, learning, data, and supply-chain development benefits are not strongly feeding into Scottish manufacturing capabilities

Opportunities

  • Binding UK and EU CO₂ performance standards require steep emissions reductions from HDV manufacturers to 2040, creating a guaranteed long-term market for zero-emission vehicles and associated components
  • To meet these targets, well over one-third of new medium and heavy-duty trucks sold in Europe will need to be zero-emission by 2030, significantly increasing demand for compliant vehicles, systems, and sub-assemblies
  • UK government funding of approximately £200 million through the ZEHID programme supports vehicle deployment, infrastructure build-out, and real-world trials, creating opportunities for manufacturers and Tier 1 – 3 suppliers to participate in funded projects and supply chains
  • Demonstration activity supports learning-by-doing, product validation, and early revenues for companies involved in zero-emission HDV technologies.
  • Registrations of zero-emission HDVs in the EU grew by 45% between 2023 and 2024, with increasing model availability across trucks and buses, indicating accelerating market momentum that benefits manufacturers positioned in these segments
  • Battery-electric HDVs are expected to dominate early adoption due to increasing range (500–700 km) and broad OEM engagement, creating opportunities across electric drivetrains, power electronics, batteries, and vehicle integration
  • Niche vehicles (e.g. refuse vehicles, emergency vehicles, gritters, construction and municipal vehicles) are less well served by OEM zero-emission offerings than standard long-haul trucks. Scottish companies already active in specialist vehicle build, integration and/or conversion could participate in these segments if demand materialises
  • The transition to zero-emission HDVs is expected to drive service-led revenue models (e.g. vehicle-as-a-service, battery-as-a-service), with a majority of future profits projected to come from services rather than vehicle sales, opening opportunities for supply-chain companies to move up the value chain
  • There are also opportunities in energy management systems, control software, telematics, battery management, route optimisation and auxiliary load optimisation for battery electric, and to a lesser extent hydrogen, HDVs. These opportunities sit mainly at component, sub-system or service level, rather than full vehicle manufacture
  • Some interviewees suggest that attracting an anchor OEM or Tier-1 supplier of scale could enable parts of the domestic supply chain to be rebuilt. This is identified as conditional and uncertain, rather than a current strength or guaranteed outcome
  • Transition to BEV and hydrogen HDVs would require new skills in high-voltage systems, hydrogen safety, maintenance and infrastructure servicing. There could, therefore, be potential opportunities in training, certification and technical support services, subject to market uptake

Threats

  • Global zero-emission HDV manufacturing is currently dominated by Chinese OEMs, that produced approximately 230,000 zero-emission HDVs in 2024 alone, creating strong price and scale competition for European-based supply chains
  • Chinese manufacturers are gaining share in specific segments such as electric buses, with European operators considering them where cost savings of 10–20% can be achieved. This increases competitive pressure on UK and European manufacturers and suppliers
  • Despite general growth the demand for HDVs, market penetration of zero emission heavy trucks remains very low (around 1–2% of new sales in the EU), creating uncertainty over near-term production volumes and making it difficult for suppliers to justify large-scale capital investment
  • Adoption is uneven across countries and vehicle categories, which is resulting in demand volatility for manufacturers and their supply chains
  • Some existing Scottish HDV manufacturers face commercial uncertainty, including restructuring, relocation or reduced activity. The potential loss or downsizing of OEM-level capability could further weaken the domestic supply chain and reduce critical mass
  • Compliance with tightening CO₂ standards carries financial penalties for manufacturers that fail to meet targets, increasing cost pressure throughout the supply chain
  • Smaller manufacturers and suppliers face higher relative risk due to the cost of retooling, certification, and technology development required to support zero-emission platforms
  • Market uptake of zero-emission HDVs is strongly dependent on the parallel rollout of charging and hydrogen refuelling infrastructure, which remains incomplete and uneven, limiting demand certainty for manufacturers
  • Competing technology pathways (battery-electric versus hydrogen fuel cell) create strategic risk for suppliers that must choose where to invest without clarity on long-term market dominance
  • Zero-emission HDVs currently involve significantly higher upfront costs than diesel equivalents
  • Many fleet operators, particularly SMEs, report low confidence in costs, technology maturity, infrastructure availability and financial models for zero-emission HDVs
  • Weak or delayed demand threatens the viability of any domestic manufacturing or supply-chain investment
  • Multiple stakeholders express low confidence that current 2035 and 2040 zero-emission targets will be enforced as stated
  • Changes or delays to policy signals reduce incentives for manufacturers, suppliers and operators to invest in zero-emission HDVs or related infrastructure
  • Several interviewees raise concerns about the survivability of small OEMs, start-ups and infrastructure providers over the next 5–10 years. This creates risk for operators and public bodies committing to vehicles or infrastructure with long asset lives
  • Transition to zero-emission HDVs requires specialist skills in high-voltage and hydrogen systems. Competition from other sectors (e.g. aerospace, energy, defence) risks diverting skilled labour away from HDV manufacturing and support
  • Whilst changes have been made to maximum weight limits for HDV tractor units, to allow for the extra weight of batteries, this change has not been made for trailer units. This is a threat to companies involved in refrigerated trailer manufacture that would like to use batteries to provide the refrigeration but are constrained by the weight limits

EV charging infrastructure supply chain SWOT

Strengths

  • Scotland has several established EV charging systems integrators with direct experience in bus and emerging HGV depot charging, including end-to-end capability across design, planning, installation management, operations, and maintenance
  • Companies such as FOR EV, Envevo, eVolt Charging (SWARCO) and Cleaner EV are already delivering high-power depot charging, with HDV activity forming a growing share of their business and employment in Scotland
  • Some companies report that HDV charging already accounts for a significant proportion of Scottish jobs, with expectations of further growth to 2030
  • Scottish operators and suppliers have practical experience delivering depot charging infrastructure for buses and, to a lesser extent, HDVs. Examples include electrification of bus depots (e.g. First Bus depots in Glasgow and Aberdeen) and early HDV depot installations (e.g. John G Russell, forestry and logistics sites)
  • Depot charging is identified in multiple sources as the dominant charging model for HDVs to 2030, aligning Scottish experience with expected market structure
  • Scotland has a number of Independent Distribution Network Operators (IDNOs) and grid-connection specialists with Scottish offices (e.g. Energy Assets, GTC, Last Mile, SSE/Optimal Power Networks) that support HDV charging delivery
  • A reasonable local supply chain exists for surveys, engineering design, and project development, which are required early in HDV charging projects
  • Interviewees noted positive roles played by Transport Scotland, Innovate UK and ZEHID in mapping routes, supporting demonstrations, and generating operational data for HDV charging and fleets
  • Scotland is perceived as a good testbed for the development and deployments of depot-focused HDV charging due to geography, duty cycles, and fleet characteristics
  • Evidence from international and UK studies shows that depot and semi-private charging will dominate HDV charging to 2030, with public en-route charging a much smaller share. Scotland’s strongest current capabilities, depot charging, fleet software, grid connections and integration services, align with this projected market structure.
  • Some companies report rapid growth in Scottish employment linked to EV and HDV charging, particularly in design, engineering and operations roles.
  • Experience from the bus sector has transferred into HGV charging projects, reducing early-stage delivery risk
  • Scottish-based providers offer a range of commercial models, including, capital purchase, charging-as-a-service, long-term operating and maintenance contracts, asset-sharing and third-party access to depot infrastructure. The availability of multiple models reduces adoption barriers and, therefore, helps to drive market uptake

Weaknesses

  • There are no HDV charging hardware OEM manufacturers based in Scotland, and limited UK manufacturing more broadly, reducing opportunities for local value capture beyond integration, installation, and services
  • Much of the HDV vehicle and charger OEM ecosystem is based outside Scotland, limiting pull-through into local supply chains
  • Stakeholder feedback identifies a limited number of civils contractors in Scotland with the certification, experience, and competence to deliver large-scale, high-power HDV charging installations, particularly in hazardous or fuel-station environments
  • Stakeholder feedback also reports that very few Scottish contractors currently identify as being active in HDV charging installations, and HDV charging skills are not widely held
  • The HDV charging market is early-stage and fragmented, with limited numbers of electric HGVs in operation; operators lacking confidence due to limited shared experience. This is limiting market demand
  • Grant-driven demand has previously distorted market timing, with stop-start funding leading to delayed investment decisions
  • HDV charging infrastructure in Scotland remains very limited in number, with most activity focused on small pilots, early depot installations or bus depots, rather than widespread freight or haulage coverage
  • Public en-route HDV charging infrastructure is sparse, with most freight operations expected to rely on depot charging that is not yet widely available
  • Depot electrification for HDVs faces space constraints, particularly where high-power chargers displace operational or parking space
  • There is a lack of shared knowledge and structured education for haulage operators, many of whom are new to electrification and cautious due to previous poor experiences or lack of trusted advice
  • Charging infrastructure capacity remains unevenly distributed, with weaker coverage in rural, island and remote areas
  • Maintenance and uptime requirements are more difficult to meet in these locations due to distance, workforce availability and cost
  • Training provision in Scotland for large-scale EV charging installations is limited, with no colleges identified as offering relevant qualifications (beyond courses focused on domestic or small commercial charging)
  • Interviewees highlighted shortages of suitably trained High Voltage design engineers, electrical engineers and power engineers, creating risks to scale-up and maintenance capacity, particularly outside the Central Belt
  • Grant schemes for depot and fleet charging are described as short-notice, time-limited and inconsistent, creating uncertainty and delaying investment
  • First-come-first-served funding structures tend to favour large operators, limiting access for SMEs
  • HDV charging infrastructure is capital intensive, with uncertain utilisation rates in the early market.
  • Public charging hubs are described as a high-risk investment, particularly where uptake is uncertain or policy signals are unclear.
  • Concerns were expressed about the long-term survivability of smaller charging start-ups, increasing perceived risk for fleet operators.
  • Evidence points to a lack of shared planning and information between charge-point developers, site owners and HDV operators. This means that infrastructure siting decisions are not always aligned with actual freight routes or operational patterns, increasing risk of under-utilisation

Opportunities

  • Global HDV charging capacity is projected to grow approximately twenty-fold by 2035, driven by increasing electrification of buses and trucks
  • Under both IEA scenarios, total deployed HDV charger stock increases significantly between 2023 and 2035, with depot charging representing the dominant share of installations
  • Truck depot chargers are projected to grow more rapidly than bus depot chargers to both 2030 and 2035, despite bus depot charging being more established today
  • By 2030, Europe is expected to require over 300,000 public and private HDV charge points, with infrastructure investment estimated at €7 billion by 2030 and €40 billion cumulatively by 2040
  • Most HDV charging infrastructure investment to 2030 is expected in private depots and semi-public hubs such as logistics and industrial sites, representing the majority of forecast capital expenditure
  • Overnight depot charging is expected to grow fastest for HDVs with predictable routes and daily mileages below 200 km, including city buses and urban delivery fleets
  • These market drivers and trends suggest opportunities for design, grid connection, installation, operation and maintenance services focused on fleet depots rather than public roadside charging. This will create demand for higher-power chargers (including megawatt-scale), depot upgrades and associated grid works, even if deployment remains uneven in the near term
  • The European Commission Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Regulation (AFIR) creates legally binding requirements for the rollout of high-power public HDV charging along the TEN-T network between 2025 and 2030, supporting demand for compliant charging infrastructure
  • The Clean Transport Corridor Initiative reinforces AFIR implementation by coordinating cross-border HDV charging deployment across major European freight corridors
  • Multiple commercial models are emerging, including charging-as-a-service, OEM-led advisory models, and specialist charging point operator-led public hubs, creating opportunities across equipment supply, financing, installation, and operations
  • Increasing scale and complexity of depot charging creates demand for fleet charging management software, including scheduling, power management, access control, billing and data reporting
  • Increased charger utilisation rates significantly reduce levelised infrastructure costs per kWh, improving the economic case for infrastructure deployment
  • Some fleet operators (e.g. bus depots) are opening depot charging infrastructure to third parties during off-peak periods. This suggests opportunities in shared-use models, site management, customer access systems and on-site operations, subject to safety and contractual constraints
  • Interviews and market evidence point to likely future HDV charging at ports, logistics hubs, rail freight terminals and motorway service areas, often as stand-alone sites rather than extensions of existing fuel stations. This creates potential demand for planning, civil engineering, grid reinforcement, site development and long-term operation, though projects could be complex and capital intensive
  • Expansion of EV and HDV charging will require more trained engineers and technicians for design, installation and maintenance. As there is limited current training provision there are opportunities in training delivery, certification support and maintenance services, particularly for large-scale and high-power installations
  • Interviewees suggest opportunities to increase employment, with companies reporting plans to scale to 100+ HDV-related roles by 2030 (from a current baseline of 10s of jobs), particularly in design, engineering, systems integration and operations
  • Some Scottish-based charging infrastructure companies report early export activity, primarily in design, project management and systems integration, often following UK customers into overseas markets
  • These opportunities are service-led rather than hardware-led and remain secondary to the UK market

Threats

  • Limited availability of grid connection capacity and the cost of grid upgrades are identified as key barriers, particularly for high-power and megawatt-scale charging installations
  • Strengthening of substations is required at a significant proportion of identified en-route charging locations, adding cost and complexity to deployment
  • Competition for grid capacity (including from data centres and other large users) is reported as a growing risk.
  • Availability of finance for fleet operators to invest simultaneously in HDVs and charging
  • High upfront capital requirements, particularly for public high-power charging hubs, create exposure to utilisation risk if fleet uptake is slower than projected and, therefore, potentially undermining business cases for both public and private charging sites
  • Approvals for charging stations and physical space constraints at depots, logistics hubs, highway sites, and safe parking areas are cited as barriers to deployment
  • Public charging sites, while fewer in number, require very high power levels, increasing complexity of siting and permitting
  • Alternative solutions such as battery swapping and electric road systems are referenced as potential substitutes for wired charging in some markets, particularly outside Europe, creating uncertainty over long-term infrastructure configurations
  • Megawatt chargers represent a small proportion of total charger numbers but a disproportionate share of installed power, increasing exposure to technology standardisation and cost risks
  • Frequent changes, delays or short-notice grant schemes create uncertainty for investors, charging providers and fleet operators
  • Lack of long-term policy clarity on vehicle phase-out dates, grant continuity and infrastructure support discourages speculative investment in charging hubs, particularly for HDVs
  • There are some concerns about the long-term survivability of smaller charging providers and start-ups, particularly in a capital-intensive, low-utilisation early market
  • Market exits or consolidation could leave operators dependent on a small number of large providers, increasing cost and risk
  • Shortages of appropriately trained electricians, engineers and maintenance personnel threaten delivery timelines and ongoing reliability
  • Limited training provision for large-scale and megawatt charging systems increases the risk of bottlenecks as deployment scales
  • Charging infrastructure remains less viable in rural, island and remote areas, where grid reinforcement, maintenance response times and utilisation are more challenging
  • Public-sector service-level requirements can further increase costs and delivery risk in these locations
  • With no domestic charger hardware manufacturing and reliance on imported equipment, Scotland risks capturing mainly service-level value, even if deployment accelerates
  • Large international charging networks and energy companies may dominate future HDV charging hubs, limiting local supply-chain participation

Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain SWOT

Strengths

  • There have been a number of hydrogen mobility and refuelling projects (e.g. buses, refuse vehicles, council fleets) delivered in Scotland, particularly in Aberdeen, providing real-world operational learning and proof of concept
  • Companies such as Logan Energy and Hydrasun operate as EPC-style integrators, delivering end-to-end hydrogen refuelling solutions including design, procurement, installation, commissioning and servicing, with experience across multiple projects
  • Large, multi-partner initiatives such as the Th2istle Project in the north east of Scotland plan to integrate hydrogen production, mobility applications (including HDVs), and agriculture, construction and industrial uses supporting the development of local clusters of hydrogen production and use
  • Hydrogen refuelling projects have benefited from European, UK and Scottish public funding, through Horizon Europe and national demonstrator programmes, enabling early market activity despite weak commercial demand
  • Stakeholders highlighted Scotland’s renewable electricity base as strategically attractive for green hydrogen production, supporting the long-term viability of hydrogen production for refuelling infrastructure
  • Scotland has engineering and manufacturing companies capable of producing hydrogen-compatible components, including valves, gauges and pressure-rated equipment. These companies already supply some hydrogen applications internationally, even where domestic hydrogen mobility demand is limited.
  • Scottish hydrogen refuelling integrators and component suppliers are active in some international markets, particularly in Europe and Asia but generally more so in a hydrogen coordinator capacity. Activity in HDV hydrogen refuelling is limited.

Weaknesses

  • Scotland has a very limited number of active hydrogen refuelling infrastructure providers, many of whom are already operating at or beyond capacity. This constrains delivery capability, limits competition, and increases costs and lead times
  • The Scottish market depends heavily on a small number of companies (e.g. system integrators and EPC-style providers). When individual companies exit, pause activity, or fail to deliver, there are few alternative domestic suppliers available
  • While Scotland has capable engineering companies upstream, most critical refuelling components are sourced from outside Scotland. Even project sponsors and councils reported limited visibility of Scottish supply chain participation, weakening local economic impact
  • With no domestic manufacture of complete refuelling stations or core systems, Scotland risks capturing value mainly in integration, construction and maintenance, even if hydrogen refuelling deployment increases
  • Project owners highlighted a shortage of hydrogen-skilled engineers and technicians in Scotland, affecting delivery, maintenance, and long-term operability of refuelling assets
  • Scottish engineering companies reported an inability to commit to hydrogen product development or certification due to unclear or shifting standards (e.g. BSI), limiting their participation in refuelling infrastructure projects
  • Hydrogen refuelling projects have been developed on a fragmented, project-by-project basis, with limited coordination between production, infrastructure, vehicles, and end users, increasing risk and reducing learning and knowledge transfer
  • Failed or stalled hydrogen HDV refuelling projects in Scotland have reduced confidence among councils and public bodies in the domestic supply chain’s ability to deliver reliably

Opportunities

  • Hydrogen refuelling is viewed as most viable for specific HDV applications where utilisation rates are high (e.g. buses, refuse vehicles, city logistics, clustered depot fleets) and where centralised refuelling can be coordinated and duty cycles are predictable
  • UK government funding of approximately £200 million through the ZEHID programme supports vehicle deployment, infrastructure build-out, and real-world trials, creating opportunities for manufacturers and Tier 1-3 suppliers to participate in funded projects and supply chains
  • Scottish and UK-based integrators can generate economic benefits by acting as system designers and integrators, assembling largely imported components into bespoke refuelling solutions and providing ongoing operations and maintenance services
  • Refuelling infrastructure is seen as a critical enabler for downstream hydrogen applications. Successful deployment, where hydrogen refuelling is co-located with production, could unlock demand for hydrogen vehicle deployment
  • Several companies active in Scotland already deliver hydrogen refuelling or storage projects internationally (Europe, Asia), suggesting that capabilities developed domestically could be applied in more advanced or faster-moving overseas markets
  • International policy frameworks (e.g. EU AFIR, national hydrogen strategies) mandate hydrogen refuelling along key freight corridors and set HDV decarbonisation targets to 2040. These frameworks create long-term, externally driven opportunities for hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

Threats

  • Fleet operators have, to date, only limited interest in hydrogen vehicles due to high costs, limited vehicle availability, and operational uncertainty. This is suppressing demand for refuelling infrastructure regardless of Scottish capability
  • Hydrogen refuelling stations are capital intensive, with compressors and storage systems representing major cost components. These costs are particularly difficult to justify at low utilisation levels typical of early HDV deployment
  • Hydrogen production costs, closely linked to electricity prices, remain high, with parity to diesel estimated at ~£9/kg. This weakens the commercial case for refuelling infrastructure and is largely outside the control of the Scottish supply chain
  • Stakeholders reported delayed UK Government strategy publication, withdrawn or paused funding, and shifting UK and Scottish government priorities, leading to cancelled projects and stalled final investment decisions
  • Battery-electric HDVs and charging infrastructure are cheaper, faster to deploy, and scaling rapidly. Multiple stakeholders noted that electrification now covers most HDV use cases, increasingly restricting hydrogen to niche applications
  • Hydrogen HDV OEMs are limited in number, with some exiting the market or being acquired. This reduces vehicle choice, increases risk for financiers, and undermines confidence in long-term infrastructure utilisation
  • Other countries (e.g. Germany, Netherlands, parts of Asia) have clearer strategies, stronger infrastructure rollouts, and better market coordination, drawing investment and supplier focus away from Scotland
  • Core refuelling equipment (e.g. high-throughput compressors, dispensers, cryogenic systems) is supplied by a small number of international manufacturers. This limited supplier base is leading to long lead times and is increasing the risk of delays, cost escalation and maintenance downtime
  • As hydrogen refuelling infrastructure requires specialist skills, project delivery and maintenance depend on a limited pool of experienced companies and individuals. If these companies downsize or exit the market, there are few readily available alternatives

Industry views on how to maximise the economic opportunities

HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing supply chain

The main obstacle to zero emission HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing is the lack of clarity about when legislation will come into force that mandates that sales of new HDVs must be zero emission. The uncertainty about timing and location of charging and hydrogen refuelling infrastructure is also a barrier. This is preventing the customers of the HDV manufacturing supply chain from ordering zero emission vehicles. If these obstacles can be addressed, then other considerations regarding total cost of ownership (TCO) and new financing models can also be addressed.

Discussions with OEMs indicate that additional support will be required to up- or re-skill their staff to work with both BEVs and HFCEVs. For example, one of the conversion manufacturers that was interviewed has to use the OEM that provides the chassis to power down the HGV prior to working on it (e.g. for maintenance and repair) and power up the vehicle afterwards. Delivering these skills is likely to require specialist training facilities, perhaps building on that already provided by the further education (FE) sector for zero emission private and light goods vehicles. In addition, there will need to be consideration of how training is delivered to new entrants to the workforce, who will require knowledge of conventional diesel and zero emission powertrains, during the period where both are in use.

HDV charging infrastructure supply chain

All of the charging infrastructure stakeholders interviewed highlighted the need for policy and regulatory certainty. This includes certainty around long term, stable funding to support operators with the costs of zero emission vehicles and charging infrastructure. It also includes clarity about when the HDV manufacturers will be required to place only zero emission vehicles on the new sales market.

Co-ordinated planning of future HDV depot charging needs was also highlighted as a required action. This information could be communicated to grid operators to identify where grid reinforcement work would be required and help plan for future connections demand.

Growing the Scottish HDV charging device manufacturing capability was also highlighted as an action, including parts, components and finished original equipment. This could involve pursuing both inward investment opportunities and providing innovation support to existing and new Scottish companies interested in entering this sector.

Interviewees reported that it would be beneficial to improve the awareness of the HDV charging infrastructure supply chain in Scotland amongst HDV operators. One stakeholder suggested a ‘show and tell’ type event at an existing public HDV charging site.

Actions related to developing skills and competencies were also highlighted by several stakeholders in this supply chain. More funding for Graduate Apprenticeships was highlighted as a helpful supporting action. Examples of skills in short supply included high voltage design engineers. Developing accessible high voltage charging installation training for companies currently active in low voltage EV charger installation was also highlighted as a way to increase capacity in the supply chain. This could involve improving links between charger manufacturers, colleges and private training providers. Increasing capacity in the civil engineering contractor part of the supply chain was also highlighted as important. This would include raising awareness of the business opportunity and the route to developing skills and competencies to carry out civils work in high voltage environments.

HDV hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain

Consultations repeatedly identified the need for clear, long-term policy that positively enforces net zero targets including phase-out of internal combustions engine vehicles. This underpins confidence in all the included supply chains. At present, the role of hydrogen refuelling infrastructure in reducing HDV emissions is unclear due to a lack of acknowledgement in policy strategy, driving uncertainty and risk for investors and the supply chain. A clear and sequential positioning of hydrogen HDVs and refuelling infrastructure in policy will provide enough clarity for the public and/or private sector to begin project planning to develop a trunk network with hotspot and highway nodes. In the meantime, support for mobile refuelling solutions would benefit market development. This would help the supply chain to capabilities in ongoing operations and maintenance to develop skills and competences.

The development of industry standards for hydrogen components for refuelling applications would benefit the component manufacturers that underpin the supply chain and could, potentially, open other energy transition opportunities for companies that can operate to these standards.

Promoting Scottish supply chain companies to fleet operators and providing details of the key Government / Transport Scotland contact points for the hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain were also identified as useful actions.

How to cite this publication:

Taylor, J., Creamer, D., Leigh, E., Morrison, M. (2026) ‘Scotland’s HDV supply chain and net zero’ ClimateXChange

© The University of Edinburgh, 2026
Prepared by Optimat Limited on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk

If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

Governments across the world are introducing policy targets to decarbonise heavy-duty vehicles (HDVs) – those with a gross vehicle weight of over 3.5 tonnes. This transition presents significant opportunities for Scottish businesses.

With this in mind, this research aims to identify the current and future economic impacts of HDV decarbonisation across three key supply chains:

  • HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing
  • HDV charging infrastructure
  • Hydrogen refuelling infrastructure

The report examines the scale, strengths, weaknesses and growth potential of the above supply chains, including how demand could evolve to 2030 and 2035. The report findings are visualised in an accompanying infographic.

Key findings

For further information, please read the full report.

  • Strong global policy and market drivers are accelerating the decarbonisation of HDVs.
  • The pace of transition varies across different vehicle types, with low-carbon fuels expected to play a role alongside zero-emission technologies.
  • Scotland’s HDV and niche vehicle manufacturing capability is concentrated in a relatively small number of specialist companies.
  • The HDV charging infrastructure supply chain is predominantly service-based and is expected to continue growing as vehicle electrification increases.
  • The hydrogen refuelling infrastructure supply chain is currently small, with the greatest growth opportunities expected after 2035 and in specific use cases.
  • Stimulating market demand will be essential to support supply chain growth, alongside targeted supply-side actions to strengthen Scottish capabilities and maximise economic opportunities.

If you require the report or annex in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

Scotland’s businesses, infrastructure, communities and natural environment face increasingly severe climate change impacts. Yet, the actions required to adapt to those changes – how they will evolve over time, what they will cost, and who should pay – remain poorly understood.  

This report provides the first estimate of Scotland’s climate adaptation investment needs through to 2040 across five sectors:  

  • agriculture;  
  • communities (focused on flooding);  
  • the natural environment (focusing on woodland creation, peatland, nature restoration); 
  • transport (focusing on trunk roads, motorways, railways); and  
  • water (focusing on public water and wastewater services).  

This work is intended to support the Scottish Government in building an evidence base ahead of the fourth Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP4). 

Estimating future adaptation cost is inherently challenging. It requires assumptions about future warming, the level of climate risk that society are willing to tolerate, and the associated scale of adaptation and residual damages. Deep uncertainty in climate projections, socioeconomic change, asset vulnerability, and political priorities make precise modelling both challenging and resource intensive.  

As a result, the findings in this report should be treated as pragmatic, evidence-based approximations that indicate the order of magnitude of investment needs—not definitive targets

Estimated climate adaptation investment need  

Adaptation investment needs across the sectors and subsectors assessed in this study are estimated at £7.8–£14.2 billion between 2026 and 2040, or £566–£1,027 million per year.  

Previous estimates from the Climate Emergency Response Group, Paul Watkiss Associates, and the Office for Budget Responsibility suggested Scotland’s total adaptation costs would range from £196 million to £1,340 million per year from 2030 onwards. These are based on UK wide analyses and international benchmarks. Sector specific estimates in this study fall within that range. However, because this analysis covers fewer sectors than the Scottish National Adaptation Plan, the findings suggest that Scotland’s full adaptation investment needs may be higher than previously anticipated. 

The results in this report carry low confidence and should be viewed as indicative, not precise.  The sector-specific figures represent order of magnitude estimates designed to inform policy discussion and future research, rather than definitive costings. 

The macroeconomic effects of investing in climate adaptation  

This research also looks at macroeconomic modelling to estimate the wider economic effects of similar levels of adaptation spending.  

A full assessment of the macroeconomic costs and benefits of adaptation were beyond the scope of the study. However, the study did model the direct economic effects of adaptation spending across sectors. It also explored how different approaches to cost recovery affect economic activity, employment, and household incomes. 

The modelling consistently shows that adaptation spending generates a positive economic stimulus during the investment period, supporting jobs and output particularly in construction, engineering, and land-based supply chains. However, the way costs are recovered – whether through income-tax, charges or through public spending cuts – matters considerably. 

How will costs be borne by households, businesses, and the public sector? 

The researchers made additional analysis of how adaptation costs might be shared between the public and private sectors. 

The study investigated how adaptation is currently funded in each of the sectors. Climate adaptation in Scotland is currently funded predominantly by the public sector. However, households and businesses pay more than previously understood, through Council Tax and Non-domestic rates. Households and businesses also bear some costs directly, for example through property-level insurance and on-farm investments, but this remains modest in most sectors. 

This balance is unlikely to shift fundamentally. Most of the adaptation investment – including flood protection, transport resilience, and natural flood management – generates little or no direct financial return and is therefore structurally dependent on public funding. Analysis suggests that approximately three-quarters of adaptation investment needs will require public financing regardless of innovations in private finance mechanisms. 

Scope to boost private sector participation 

The study reviewed the innovative funding and financing models being used internationally and within Scotland. Analysis found that there is modest potential to increase private sector participation in adaptation funding and financing across all five sectors, and a range of innovative mechanisms are emerging. These include parametric insurance in agriculture, biodiversity credits and voluntary carbon markets in the natural environment, green and resilience bonds for flood and transport infrastructure, and catchment co-investment models in water.  

Recommendations 

The research report includes several recommendations for further research. These include developing adaptation targets and risk tolerance thresholds, strengthening the evidence base for the “triple dividend”, and creating frameworks for prioritising actions that account for rural vulnerability, social equity, and Just Transition principles. 

For additional recommendations and details of how the investment estimate where reached, please read the report.  

If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

Research completed: March 2026

DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7087

Executive summary

Background and purpose

Scotland’s businesses, infrastructure, communities and natural environment face increasingly severe climate change impacts. Yet, the required adaptation actions – how they will evolve over time, what they will cost, and who should pay – remain poorly understood.

This report provides the first estimate of Scotland’s climate adaptation investment needs through to 2040 across five sectors (and eight subsectors):

  • agriculture;
  • communities (flooding);
  • the natural environment (woodland creation, peatland, nature restoration);
  • transport (trunk roads, motorways, railways); and
  • water (public water and wastewater services).

It then presents two further discrete analyses: macroeconomic modelling to estimate the wider economic effects of similar levels of adaptation spending, The five sectors were chosen to reflect the diverse approaches required to assess indicative adaptation costs. We examine four aspects of climate adaptation investment: required investment, its macroeconomic impacts, public-private funding splits, and the potential to mobilise private capital. This work is intended to support the Scottish Government in building an evidence based ahead of the fourth Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP4).

Estimating future adaptation cost is inherently challenging. It requires assumptions about future warming, the level of climate risk that society are willing to tolerate, and the associated scale of adaptation and residual damages. Deep uncertainty in climate projections, socioeconomic change, asset vulnerability, and political priorities make precise modelling both challenging and resource intensive. As a result, the findings in this report should be treated as pragmatic, evidence-based approximations that indicate the order of magnitude of investment needs—not definitive targets.

Why adaptation investment matters

Failing to invest in mitigation and adaptation carries significant economic costs. Estimates for this study suggest climate change could reduce GDP by 0.3-0.4% a year in the 2030s, rising to 1.2-1.6% by the 2050s and 1.6-3.3% by the 2070s. Other studies project higher impacts but these depend on the models and assumptions used. The Scottish Environment Protection Agency estimate that flooding alone already costs Scotland an estimated £500 million per year. Adaptation can reduce these damages, but it also requires upfront investment, is rarely fully effective, and involves trade‑offs between expenditure and residual risk. The key question is therefore not whether to invest in adaptation, but how much and who should pay.

Adaptation investment also delivers wider benefits, often described as the “triple dividend”: avoided losses, economic gains, and social and environmental co-benefits such as biodiversity improvements, carbon sequestration, and better mental health. These co-benefits further strengthen the economic case for adaptation.

Climate costs are projected to rise significantly beyond 2040. The research and strategic priorities below are therefore time-sensitive: early action on adaptation can reduce long-run costs and delivers benefits that delayed investment may not recover.

Estimated climate adaptation investment need for Scotland in five sectors

Adaptation investment needs across the five sectors and eight subsectors assessed in this study are estimated at £7.8–£14.2 billion between 2026 and 2040, or £566–£1,027 million per year. Sector and subsector level results are shown in Table 1.

Previous estimates from the Climate Emergency Response Group, Paul Watkiss Associates, and the Office for Budget Responsibility – based on UK wide analyses and international benchmarks – suggested Scotland’s total adaptation costs would range from £196 million to £1,340 million per year from 2030 onwards. The sector specific estimates in this study fall within that range. However, because this analysis covers fewer sectors than the Scottish National Adaptation Plan, the findings suggest that Scotland’s full adaptation investment needs may be higher than previously anticipated.

The study also compared the estimated annual adaptation investment needs to current allocations in the Scottish budget. It found that only the agriculture sector is likely meeting its adaptation needs. The communities (flooding), transport, and nature sectors will likely require additional investment to maintain current risk levels. We could not assess the water sector due to a lack of available information on existing adaptation spending.

The results in this report carry low confidence and should be viewed as indicative, not precise. Confidence levels vary by sector (Table 1) due to fragmented data, limited understanding of asset vulnerability, and the lack of clear adaptation targets to scale investment needs. Where Scottish specific data was unavailable, we crosschecked estimates with international comparisons, which also have limitations because of differing risks and institutional contexts. These figures therefore represent order of magnitude estimates designed to inform policy discussion and future research, rather than definitive costings.

Sector

Sub-sector / approach

Investment estimate (£m)

Investment estimate (£m/yr)

2026/27 budget (£m/yr)

Confidence

Investment estimate source

Agriculture

 

£2,347m – £3,091m

£167.6m– £220.8m


£167.6m – £220.8m



Low


Scottish Government Budget

Communities

Capacity building

£102m

£7.3m


£6.9m


Medium

Scottish Government Budget

Property flood protection

£885m – £1,102m

£63.2m – £78.7m


£42m


Low

Scottish Government & DEFRA, HM Government

Property flood resilience

£10.5m – £52m

£0.8m – £3.7m

Unknown

Medium

JBA Risk Management2025

Natural environment

Woodland creation

£115m

£8.2m


£2.3m


Low – Medium

Scottish Government Draft Climate Change Plan

Peatland restoration

£236m

£16.8m


£5.6m


Low – Medium

Scottish Government Draft Climate Change Plan

Natural restoration

£73m

£5.2m


£5.2m


Low – Medium

NatureScot

Transport

Rail[1]

£1,582m – £4,734m

£113m- £338.1m


≈ £87.8m


Medium

Network Rail Scotland

Trunk roads and motorways

£1,418m – £2,213m

£101.3m – £158.1m


£82.3m


Very low

Scottish Government Budget

Water

Scottish Water[2]

£1,067m – £2,466m

£82.1m – £189.7m

Unknown

Medium

Scottish Water

Total

 

£7,835.5m – £14,182.8m

£565.5m – £1,026.6m

   
Table 1: Climate adaptation investment estimates for 14 years 2026/27 to 2039/40 across five sectors and their key sub-sectors (2026/27 prices). Where available, current budget (or estimates) are presented alongside estimated investment need, with a RAG rating indicating whether current spend meets the estimated need (green), falls within 20% below it (amber), or is more than 20% below it (red). A confidence rating is assigned to each investment estimate, alongside the primary source from which the investment estimate was derived.

The macroeconomic effects of investing in climate adaptation

A full assessment of the macroeconomic costs and benefits of adaptation were beyond the scope of the study. However, the study did model the direct economic effects of adaptation spending across sectors. It also explored how different approaches to cost recovery affect economic activity, employment, and household incomes.

The modelling consistently shows that adaptation spending generates a positive economic stimulus during the investment period, supporting jobs and output particularly in construction, engineering, and land-based supply chains. However, the way costs are recovered matters considerably. Income-tax-based recovery is progressive but dampens household consumption and reduces activity in consumer-facing sectors. Charging-based approaches – such as higher food prices in agriculture or water bills in the water sector – tend to be regressive, falling disproportionately on lower-income households for whom essential goods represent a larger share of budgets. Recovery through public spending cuts generates the most widespread economic losses, particularly across service sectors. Funding design is therefore important to consider alongside investment scale.

These results should not be interpreted as a full cost-benefit assessment of adaptation. The modelling captures the demand-side effects of spending and cost recovery, but does not account for avoided climate damages, residual risks, or the broader triple dividend of adaptation.

How will costs be borne by households, businesses, and the public sector?

The study investigated how adaptation is currently funded in each of the sectors. Climate adaptation in Scotland is currently funded predominantly by the public sector. Central and local government fund and finance most adaptation-relevant expenditure across transport, flood management, water infrastructure, agriculture, and the natural environment. This is largely through existing budget lines that deliver multiple objectives alongside adaptation. However, households and businesses pay more than previously understood, through Council Tax and Non-domestic rates. Households and businesses also bear some costs directly, for example through property-level insurance and on-farm investments, but this remains modest in most sectors.

This balance is unlikely to shift fundamentally. Most of the adaptation investment – including flood protection, transport resilience, and natural flood management – generates little or no direct financial return and is therefore structurally dependent on public funding. Analysis suggests that approximately three-quarters of adaptation investment needs will require public financing regardless of innovations in private finance mechanisms.

Scope to boost private sector participation

The study reviewed the innovative funding and financing models being used internationally and within Scotland. Analysis found that there is modest potential to increase private sector participation in adaptation funding and financing across all five sectors, and a range of innovative mechanisms are emerging. These include parametric insurance in agriculture, biodiversity credits and voluntary carbon markets in the natural environment, green and resilience bonds for flood and transport infrastructure, and catchment co-investment models in water. However, several important caveats apply:

  • Scaling private investment will not happen through market forces alone. It will require concerted public policy action, enabling conditions, and in many cases public co-financing to de-risk private investment. The private sector’s role is best understood as complementary to, rather than a substitute for, public adaptation finance.
  • There is a critical distinction between private financing (where private capital provides upfront funding) and private funding (where costs are ultimately borne by the private sector rather than transferred back to government or consumers). Many instruments that appear to increase private participation in practice shift the funding burden, rather than share it. Policy ambitions to mobilise private capital should be assessed against this distinction.
  • High benefit-cost ratios in the adaptation literature typically reflect societal and environmental returns, including non-market values that generate no cash flow. Private investors assess financial returns, incremental revenues and recoverable costs, which are considerably lower. Treating strong societal co-benefit ratios as evidence of private investment attractiveness risks generating unrealistic expectations about the scale of private finance that can realistically be mobilised.

Recommendations

The report lays out the following key recommendations, in no particular order:

Table 2: Key recommendations for further research and strategic priorities.

Theme

Research priority

Strategic priority

Adaptation targets, objectives & risk tolerance

  • Develop quantified adaptation targets and sector specific risk tolerance thresholds. Use these to conduct gap analyses and support SNAP4.
  • Recognise that sectors are at different stages of the adaptation investment cycle and develop sector-differentiated investment strategies accordingly.

Asset level vulnerability & investment pipelines

  • Develop spatially referenced vulnerability inventories across all sectors to prioritise sites, assets, and interventions, integrating existing datasets such as SEPA flood risk assessments.
  • Build investment-ready pipelines capable of attracting both public and private finance at scale, moving from risk assessment towards costed, prioritised investment programmes.

Financial transparency & attribution

  • Develop methods to isolate adaptation specific spending in agriculture and assess funding adequacy.
  • Improve budget reporting so adaptation spending is clearly distinguished from mitigation and other objectives.
  • Embed adaptation objectives within existing spending programmes (e.g., infrastructure maintenance, housing retrofit) through improved budget tagging and apportionment guidance.

Triple dividend evidence base

  • Avoided losses: Strengthen evidence on avoided damages across sectors.
  • Economic stimulus: Quantify employment, supply chain, and distributional impacts.
  • Co-benefits: Assess wider social and environmental co-benefits.
  • Use fuller quantification of the triple dividend to build the economic case for public investment in adaptation.

Distributional impacts

  • Analyse how different financing mechanisms (tax, price, charges) affect different groups.
  • Identify compensatory policies to ensure fair and equitable funding.

Cross‑sector collaboration

  • Explore catchment‑scale approaches that deliver multiple co‑benefits.
  • Map how adaptation priorities can be embedded within civil contingencies, biodiversity governance, spatial planning, and infrastructure regulation.
  • Create mechanisms for sharing research and delivery across sectors, building on existing networks such as the CRIS Forum.

Prioritisation

 
  • Develop prioritisation frameworks that account for rural vulnerability, social equity, and Just Transition principles.

Private finance mobilisation

 
  • Develop a coherent national approach identifying appropriate mechanisms for each sector, the enabling conditions required, and how public co-financing can de-risk private investment.
  • Draw on international experience with blended finance, green bonds, and nature finance.

Monitoring and evaluation

 
  • Develop an adaptation investment monitoring and evaluation framework, aligned with SNAP3 but capturing financial flows and asset-level outcomes.

Glossary

Annual Average Loss (AAL)

The expected average financial loss from flood events in any given year, calculated across all possible flood scenarios weighted by their probability of occurrence.

Adaptation pathways

A planning approach that sequences adaptation actions over time, allowing for adjustments as climate change and its impacts become better understood.

Bottom-up costing

An approach to estimating adaptation investment needs that builds cost estimates from detailed, project-level information gathered from engineers, contractors and technical specialists, or from specific policy objectives where budget lines can be scaled up.

Computable General Equilibrium model (CGE model)

An economic modelling framework that simulates the interactions between different sectors of an economy to assess the broader macroeconomic impacts of policy changes or external shocks, such as climate change.

2026/27 Climate Taxonomy

A classification system, published alongside the Scottish Government budget, that identifies budget lines according to their impact on climate change mitigation and adaptation.

Community Benefit Funds (CBFs)

A community benefit fund is a voluntary, typically annual, financial contribution provided by developers to local communities hosting major projects, such as renewable energy sites.

Consumer Price Index (CPI)

Presents the percentage change in prices that consumers pay for goods and services.

Control Period (CP)

Network Rail’s fixed five-year funding and planning cycle that sets budgets and outputs for the railway (e.g. CP7: 1 April 2024 – 31 March 2029).

Expected Annual Damages (EAD)

The average annual financial cost of flood damage calculated across return periods, accounting for both the likelihood and severity of events.

Gross Value Added (GVA)

A measure of the value of goods and services produced in an area, industry or sector of an economy, used here as a proxy for scaling adaptation investment estimates across countries.

Major Capital Investment (MCI)

Large-scale, transformational infrastructure schemes where continued operations would otherwise become impossible as a result of a changing climate.

Natural Flood Management (NFM)

An approach to reducing flood risk that works with natural processes, for example through wetland creation, tree planting or river restoration, to slow the flow of water and reduce peak flood levels.

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD)

An international, intergovernmental forum of 38 developed market-based economies established in 1961 to stimulate economic progress and world trade. Headquartered in Paris, it provides data, policy analysis, and standards to promote prosperity, equality, and well-being.

Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR)

The Office for Budget Responsibility was created in 2010 to provide independent and authoritative analysis of the UK’s public finances.

Operations, Support, Maintenance and Renewals (OSMR)

The category of Network Rail Scotland investment covering day-to-day operational response to weather, preventative and reactive maintenance, and asset renewals.

Property Flood Resilience (PFR)

Measures applied at the individual property level to reduce the risk of flooding or minimise flood damage, such as flood doors, air brick covers, or non-return valves.

Potential Vulnerable Areas (PVAs)

Areas identified by SEPA as being at significant risk from flooding, which form the basis for Flood Risk Management Planning in Scotland.

Representative Concentration Pathway (RCP)

A greenhouse gas concentration trajectory used in climate modelling to represent different possible futures based on varying levels of emissions (e.g. RCP 4.5 is a moderate emissions scenario; RCP 8.5 is a high emissions scenario).

Residual damage

The climate-related losses or damages that remain even after adaptation measures have been implemented, reflecting the limits of adaptation effectiveness.

Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA)

Scotland’s environmental regulator, responsible for flood risk assessment, flood warning, and producing Scotland’s Flood Risk Management Plans.

Scottish National Adaptation Plan 3 (SNAP3)

The third Scottish National Adaptation Plan, covering 2024–2029, setting out actions to achieve five national outcomes for climate resilience across society, the economy and the environment.

Scottish National Adaptation Plan 4 (SNAP4)

The fourth Scottish National Adaptation Plan will cover 2029 – 2034, setting out actions to better adapt Scotland to the changing climate.

Strategic Review 27 (SR27)

Scottish Water’s regulatory investment planning period covering 2027–2032, within which adaptation investment needs are assessed and costed.

Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems (SUDS)

Drainage infrastructure designed to manage surface water in a way that mimics natural drainage, reducing flood risk, improving water quality and enhancing the urban environment.

Top-down costing

An approach to estimating adaptation investment needs that uses economic models and sector-level damage assessments to derive aggregate cost estimates, typically without detailed project-level information.

Triple dividend

The three categories of benefit that adaptation investment can deliver: (1) avoided climate losses; (2) wider induced economic benefits such as infrastructure investment stimulus; and (3) social and environmental co-benefits such as biodiversity gains and improved mental health.

UK Climate Projections 2018 (UKCP18)

The most recent set of probabilistic climate projections for the UK, produced by the Met Office, used to inform climate risk assessments and adaptation planning across multiple sectors.

Value transfer

A method of estimating costs or benefits by applying findings from existing studies in comparable contexts (e.g. other countries or regions) to a new setting, adjusted for relevant differences such as economic scale or population.

Introduction

Overview, aim and scope

Tackling the climate emergency is a priority area for the Scottish Government – alongside eradicating child poverty and growing the economy and delivering high quality sustainable public services (Scottish Government, 2025a). As part of tackling the climate emergency, three questions have emerged associated with the need to better understand:

  • The costs of the Scottish Government climate change ambitions for adaptation and the residual damage of necessary trade-offs.
  • The macroeconomic effects of climate impacts and adaptation.
  • How these costs are being met today, and options for how these costs will be met by different groups, including public and private sectors.

This project provides an initial exploration of some of these issues. In doing so, it supports the Scottish Government in developing an evidence base on the potential costs of climate adaptation across a range of sectors. This is important information to assist in strategically planning and driving forward future adaptation action, in line with Scotland’s National Adaptation Plan.

The analysis focuses on three interconnected research objectives:

  1. Estimate adaptation investment needs for five sectors – agriculture, communities (focusing on flooding), natural environment (woodland creation, peatland restoration and nature restoration), transport (trunk roads and motorways and railways), and water (supply and treatment) – until 2040. This should be aligned with the with adaptation objectives defined in the Scottish National Adaptation Plan 3 (SNAP3) 2024–2029;
  2. Assess the likely investment split, over time, between the public sector, private sector businesses and individuals for each sector; and
  3. For each sector, identify the potential to support private sector participation in funding and financing adaptation, highlighting barriers to scale, and recommending policy instruments to mobilise private capital.

Context: climate risks in Scotland

Scotland’s businesses, infrastructure, communities and environment are becoming increasingly exposed to climate change. These impacts carry serious economic consequences.

The estimated impact of climate change on the UK’s economy differs depending on the climate scenarios used and wider socio-economic assumptions made within modelling. This study assessed the results for Scotland using results from a major EU project (Bosello et al., 2020). Across several climate scenarios, these suggests that from 2030 Scotland’s economy could be 0.3 – 0.5% smaller each year. By 2050, losses could rise to 1.2 – 1.6%, increasing further to 1.5 –3.3% by the 2070s. These are shown in Figure 1, and have been used as the basis for supporting subnational assessments of economic impacts in Scotland (e.g. Climate Ready Clyde, Highland Adapts, South East Scotland and Forth Valley).

Figure 1: Projected impact of climate change on GVA in Scotland for a range of future climate scenarios using Shared Socioeconomic Pathways 2 (SSP2). High Investment Mobility. SSP2 is also known as ‘middle of the road’ and assumes the world follows a path in which social, economic and technological trends to not shift markedly from historical patterns…

A second study, Rising et al. (2022), included additional risks, such as low-probability high-impact events, projecting that under current policies – and compared to a 2000 baseline – the total cost of climate change damages to the UK are projected to increase from 1.1% of GDP at present to 3.3% by 2050 and up to 7.4% by 2100 (Rising et al., 2022). Furthermore, the Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR) estimate that the cost of climate change could even reduce the UK level of GDP by 8% by 2070 if the world was to warm by 3oC by the end of the century (Office for Budget Responsibility, 2025).

While adaptation can significantly limit climate related damages, fully eliminating climate risk is neither technically feasible nor economically rationale (Rexer & Sharmer, 2024). This means that even robust adaptation actions will leave some residual risk, highlighting the need to target measures that deliver the greatest benefit relative to their cost.

The Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009 requires a National Adaptation Plan to be published every five years, aligned with the latest UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA). The latest, SNAP3, covers 2024 – 2029. SNAP3 sets out outcomes, delivery objectives and policy actions. It the first UK Adaptation Plan to also be supported by a monitoring and evaluation framework to track progress. However, specific objectives around risk reduction, as well as associated costs or budgetary allocations remain undefined in Scotland and across the UK.

As the Scottish Government prepares to receive the upcoming fourth UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA4) and Well Adapted UK report, there is growing recognition of the need to be more specific about the assumptions underpinning adaptation planning, and the costs and benefits. The Climate Change Committee (CCC) recommends that the Scottish Government introduce quantified, timebound adaptation targets to better track progress and strengthen accountability, consistent with preparing for +2°C warming by 2050 while managing risks associated with up to +4°C by the end of the century (Scottish Government, 2025b). However, setting such targets requires clarity on the level of climate risk that government and society are willing to tolerate.

This raises the important question of the acceptable level of risk, and for whom. Different communities, sectors and social groups will be affected in different ways. Given these complexities, developing adaptation targets will likely require broader engagement, including opportunities for the public and stakeholders to contribute to discussions about acceptable levels of risk. It also involves considering who pays – raising questions of equity and risk ownership. As such, adaptation target setting can be closely linked to Just Transition principles.

Defining the level of climate risk that is acceptable is therefore closely associated with the question of how much adaptation investment is needed, and who should pay for it.

Yet current evidence on these questions for Scotland is limited. There are partial estimates of adaptation investment need within the literature, but no agreed sector-specific adaptation targets, no systematic estimates of the investment required to meet them, and no established framework for understanding how costs should be shared between the public sector, private sector, and individuals.

This gap matters: without a clearer picture of adaptation investment needs, it is difficult to plan strategically, allocate budgets effectively, or make the case to mobilise private capital alongside public expenditure. But it is also challenging due to the deep uncertainty of climate change – including our warming trajectories and socioeconomic change.

This report seeks to begin closing that gap. Drawing on a range of analytical methods and the best available evidence across five sectors – agriculture, communities (flooding), transport, water, and the natural environment – it provides indicative estimates of Scotland’s adaptation investment needs to 2040, an assessment of public-private investment splits, and an exploration of opportunities to increase private sector participation in financing Scotland’s adaptation.

This report is structured as follows:

  • Section 2 sets out a general account of the economics of adaptation. This sets out the conceptual framework for estimating investment needs, and approaches exploring the public-private investment split. It also positions the existing evidence base for Scotland.
  • Section 3 presents our approach and methods.
  • Section 4 provides sector-specific results for agriculture, communities (floods), the natural environment, transport, and water. It explores adaptation investment needs, macroeconomic effects and wider impacts, and funding and financing arrangements across all five sectors.
  • Section 5 presents a summary of our analysis
  • Section 6 outlines recommended research and strategic priorities.

The economics, costing and financing of adaptation

The economics of adaptation

In simple terms, adaptation costs and benefits can be estimated by first assessing the current and future impacts of climate change, then evaluating how much these impacts can be reduced and at what cost (Boyd and Hunt, 2004; UNFCCC, 2009). Adaptation measures can substantially reduce damages, but even well-designed strategies involve trade-offs: investing more in adaptation may deliver greater risk reduction but also increases cost. As a result, reducing risk to zero is neither technically feasible nor economically desirable, and some residual risk will always remain (Rexer & Sharma, 2024).

The scale of costs and benefits depends heavily on chosen objectives. For example, whether aiming for economic efficiency, reducing risks to acceptable levels, or maintaining today’s relative level of climate risk despite worsening conditions. In practice, estimating adaptation costs is highly complex because of deep uncertainty, with issues of socioeconomic change, future emissions, climate models, regional scenarios, impacts, adaptation responses, and political priorities combining to make modelling challenging (Wilby and Dessai, 2010; Taylor et al., 2025; Valverde et al., 2022). These uncertainties make it challenging to assess costs and benefits, creating the potential for over or underestimation of investment.

Despite this, there are some examples. These include national design standards for flood risk (e.g.to a 1-in-200-year event in Scotland, or up to 1-in-10,000-year in the Netherlands (Westerhof et al., 2023)), and emerging work on resilience in warming trajectories more broadly. The UK Government’s Long Term Investment Scenarios explore the optimum levels of investment under different climate scenarios and then use that to guide the spending envelope in the UK’s Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management (Environment Agency, 2021). And on reference scenarios, the Climate Change Committee has advised the UK Government to plan for 2 degrees of warming and prepare for 4, while in France the French Government has adopted a reference trajectory of four degrees.

Furthermore, adaptation investment can deliver multiple co-benefits, collectively known as the ‘triple dividend’ (Global Commission on Adaptation, 2019):

  • The first dividend relates to avoided losses from successful adaptation. For example, a home that doesn’t flood because flood defences were built.
  • The second relates to induced economic benefits such as the stimulus to the economy. For example, from capital investment in infrastructure development projects.
  • The third includes social and environmental benefits. For example, afforestation projects that slow water runoff to rivers provide flood mitigation but also deliver biodiversity gains, carbon sequestration, and mental health benefits through green space access.

Considering all three dividends has the potential to improve the economic rationale of investing in climate change adaptation (Figure 2). In this report, while our analyses partially explore triple dividend benefits, it is beyond the scope of work to comprehensively consider wider savings made on triple dividends (see Section 8 on next steps).

Figure 2: The economics of adaptation. The orange line shows projected climate change impacts on GDP (%) without adaptation; the teal line shows residual damages with adaptation. The gap between them represents the gross benefits of adaptation – subtracting the cost of adaptation yields the net benefits, comprising components such as avoided losses and economic, social and environmental co-benefits. Shaded areas indicate indicative uncertainty ranges only. The benefit breakdown is illustrative and not to scale. Adapted from Boyd and Hunt (2004), Global Commission on Adaptation (2019), and Watkiss et al. (2026a).

Apportioning adaptation costs

A key challenge in estimating adaptation investment needs is defining what constitutes ‘adaptation’ and how to attribute costs when activities serve multiple purposes. Climate adaptation rarely occurs in isolation – it is typically integrated into broader investment programmes, delivered alongside other policy objectives, or embedded within routine infrastructure maintenance and renewal. This raises practical questions for cost estimation: should we count the full cost of a project that includes adaptation as one of several objectives, or only the incremental cost of climate-proofing measures above a baseline investment?

To address this, the study adopted the adaptation cost taxonomy developed by the Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs), which has been widely applied internationally to track adaptation finance and compare investment needs across countries (MDB, 2022). This taxonomy categorises adaptation investments into three types based on the role adaptation plays in the overall investment (Figure 3):

Figure 3 Taxonomy of adaptation costs. Adapted from Watkiss et al. (2026a) based on Multilateral Development Banks (2023).

  • Building climate adaptation into proposed programmes and investments (climate proofing). For example, to include climate change in the design standards for new road investments. In this case, adaptation is not a major objective. Instead, assessments investigate the incremental costs of adaptation, over and above the core programme / investment costs.
  • Targeted/pure adaptation programmes and investments (targeted adaptation). In this case, the primary objective of the policy, programme or project is adaptation to climate change. For example, investing in coastal flood protection to address sea-level rise. In this case, the total costs of the investment are counted as adaptation.
  • Investments with multiple benefits that include adaptation (mixed objectives). Sitting between the two extremes above are a set of cases where adaptation is one of several objectives of the policy, programme or project (a secondary or significant objective). For example, investing in peatland restoration will lead to greater resilience of the peatland (to climate change) as well as off-site benefits (water management) but this investment is primarily associated with biodiversity and ecosystem services. In this case a proportion of the cost is attributed to adaptation, but this is often difficult to do accurately and involves more subjective decisions.

These distinctions are important for climate adaptation investment estimation and the economic rationale for investment. However, this categorisation can create potential for confusion in practice. Activities that might have been pursued primarily for economic development, environmental restoration, or other policy goals can be classified as ‘adaptation’ if they deliver climate resilience benefits – even when adaptation was not the original or primary driver. This raises important questions about additionality: would the investment have proceeded anyway without climate considerations?

Approaches to costing adaptation investment

International approaches

There is no single ‘correct’ method for costing climate adaptation. Instead, there are a variety of approaches, and the most appropriate approach depends on the context. Factors such as specific objectives, analysis level, measure types, and critically, the available data and resources all influence the choice (World Bank, 2024; Taylor et al., 2025).

Climate adaptation objectives can be framed in several ways – by setting targets based on future warming levels, engineering resilience standards, specific risk reduction goals, economic thresholds, or process-based requirements (World Bank, 2024). Each framing influences the scale of action, investment needs, and acceptable levels of residual risk. These choices shape how ambitious adaptation efforts must be, the types of projects prioritised, and the balance between public, private, and household responsibilities. Higher resilience standards typically require greater upfront investment, while economic optimal or process-based approaches may lower costs but leave more risk unaddressed (Taylor et al., 2025).

Costing methodologies exist on a spectrum: ‘top-down, science-first’ approaches use economic models and sector-level damage assessments to estimate aggregate costs, while ‘bottom-up, policy-first’ approaches build estimates from detailed project-level information gathered from contractors, engineers, and technical specialists, focused on answering specific near-term questions. There are also hybrid methods that blend top-down and bottom-up approaches. The World Bank identifies various tools and approaches for both sets of methods including top-down sector integrated assessment models (IAMs), computable general equilibrium (CGE) models, through to bottom-up sector-based costing, climate adaptation markups, and budget tagging approaches at the more granular level (World Bank, 2024).

The most accurate estimates for appraisal or project delivery come from bottom-up costing based on detailed contractor quotes. However, this approach requires substantial resources, data availability, time, and technical capacity to progress projects through to a level of maturity which can provide this, and this is not always available (Taylor et al., 2025).

European estimates

Multiple European countries have recently attempted to quantify their national adaptation investment needs, each developing similar, yet distinct, methodologies suited to their institutional context and data landscape. To inform the approach to Scotland, this study reviewed literature from these studies and drew key lessons from each, as follows:

Austria took a parallel approach (Knittel et al. 2017), adopting a top-down budget review using expert interviews to assign flexible apportionments of current spending to climate adaptation (such as 60% for flood infrastructure for example) and bottom-up costing of 67 National Adaptation Strategy measures grouped into cost bands. The two methods produced different results, €488m/yr versus €385m/yr respectively, revealing they measured fundamentally different things: current government activity versus strategic intent (Knittel et al., 2017).

France compiled existing estimates across 15 policy areas, gathering what stakeholders had already produced and providing unit-cost benchmarks from completed projects. It was openly acknowledged this represented ‘what exists’ in planning discussions rather than rigorous comprehensive costing (Dolques et al., 2025).

Spain aggregated funding from multiple sources, historical environmental spending, COVID recovery allocations, and department budgets, applying different percentages based on how directly measures addressed adaptation (100% for flood defences, 40% for ecosystem restoration, 10% for co-benefits). This reached €1.55bn for 2021-2025, though many costs remained undefined and excluded (MITECO, 2020).

Bulgaria grouped measures into Low/Medium/High-cost bands (up to €1m, €1-100m, over €100m) but using specific figures where detailed studies existed, such as €347.81m for irrigation from cost-benefit analysis (Dale & Zhekova, 2019).

Croatia took a strategic approach, developing a prioritised 20-year portfolio of adaptation investments (€3.6bn) through climate modelling and stakeholder workshops, then justifying the annual cost (€183m) by showing it was less than current average damages from extreme weather (€295m) (Croatian Parliament, 2020).

EU level analysis by Neumann et al. (2025) compiled national studies, adjusted them for different emission scenarios and hazards, then extrapolated to countries lacking data using sector economic output as a proxy. Transport estimates drew on seven national studies while agriculture relied on only three, highlighting persistent data gaps (Neumann et al., 2025). A separate EU level study (European Commission, 2026) conducted a bottom-up analysis, which reviewed member state risk assessments, identified and costed relevant measures and then scaled them to the EU. This suggests annual investment needs of €69bn/year to 2050, dominated by infrastructure and ecosystem investments.

There have also been estimates for the UK. These have focused on the costs of adaptation today by categorising actions in the National Adaptation Plan (NAP) in line with Multilateral Development Bank (MDB) taxonomies and estimating investment needs (Watkiss et al., 2026a), though there have been some estimates for future costs as part of the forthcoming Well Adapted UK report (e.g. in Watkiss et al, 2026b and others).

All these studies were transparent about the limitations of the methods used, acknowledging uncertainty rather than presenting false precision. They demonstrated that pragmatic, evidence-led approaches are essential given current data constraints, and framed estimates as ‘evolving documents’ requiring iterative refinement, not as definitive adaptation investment estimates.

Existing estimates for adaptation investment need

Globally, climate finance flows have grown significantly, with total flows reaching US$1.9 trillion in 2023 and private contributions exceeding US$1 trillion for the first time. However, the vast majority of this is directed towards mitigation, with Climate Policy Initiative (2025) estimating only 3.4% is going towards adaptation. The latest United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) estimates show that developing countries will need at least US$320bn/yr – $400bn/yr for adaptation by 2035, which is roughly ten times higher than today’s international public adaptation finance flows (Watkiss and England, 2025).

To date, there has been limited research specific to Scotland on climate change adaptation investment need. Estimates are instead deduced from broader studies, ranging from £196–£1,340m per year:

  • A recent World Bank study suggests that near-term adaptation investment for the EU27 could amount to 0.1% – 0.4% of GDP annually by 2030 (World Bank, 2024). Scotland’s Climate Emergency Response Group (CERG) applied these values to Scotland, estimating £196 £784m per year by 2030 (CERG, 2024).
  • Indicative estimates for the UK suggest adaptation costs of around £5bn/yr to 2030 for a subset of priority risks, rising to £10bn/yr or more when all 61 CCRA3 risks and proactive adaptation measures are included (Watkiss, 2022). These figures are expected to increase significantly after 2030 as the number of high magnitude climate risks grows from 12 to 21 by the 2050s. Yet these estimates remain partial and indicative, with substantial gaps in sectoral coverage, inconsistent assumptions, and a bias toward engineering solutions rather than social or institutional adaptation (Watkiss, 2022). Using Watkiss (2022) values, and assuming Scotland accounts for 7.5% share of UK economic output as a proxy (Harari & Murray, 2024), implies adaptation costs of approximately £375 – £750m per year.
  • Analysis by the Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR) suggests adaptation costs of around 0.3% of GDP per degree of warming (OBR, 2021). The OBR also highlights that adaptation costs are likely to rise unevenly over time, with larger and more frequent economic shocks expected later in the century. Using 2024 prices, these costs are equivalent to £670 £1,340m per year for Scotland under 1 – 2°C of warming respectively.

Scotland’s specific vulnerabilities and policy landscape mean these broader UK estimates may not accurately reflect Scotland’s climate adaptation investment need. For example, Scotland faces a distinctive combination of climate hazards and geographic contexts. This includes a higher proportion of woodland and peatland, topographic challenges, and 93 inhabited islands, that may not be captured by downscaling UK-wide estimates based on Scotland’s share of GDP. The CCRA3 Scotland summary is also the only national summary to identify flooding as the most severe and costliest hazard to businesses, further highlighting the limitations of direct comparison to UK-level estimates.

Investment need will also vary within Scotland, with some regions more vulnerable to climate risks. Nascent estimates of the public sector adaptation gap in Glasgow City Region (Climate Ready Clyde, 2021) suggested a gap of £187m in 2018/19 alone for the region’s local authorities and the health board, equivalent to around 2% of combined local authority and NHS expenditure across the region’s eight councils and two health boards. No other regional estimates in Scotland have been published.

While national climate adaptation investment estimates are lacking, some public bodies, such as Scottish Water and Network Rail Scotland, have conducted bespoke asset climate vulnerability assessments and initial adaptation cost estimates to facilitate strategic business planning (e.g., Network Rail Scotland, 2024; Scottish Water, 2025). Others have more limited research on specific adaptation investment need. Therefore, while some sector specific information exists, it is fragmented.

As well as absence of Scotland-wide adaptation estimates, there is a lack of robust estimates of the wider returns from adaptation investment. These include avoided climate damages, economic benefits, and broader socio-environmental gains that comprise the ‘triple dividend’ of adaptation.

Who pays for adaptation?

Financing versus funding

A critical but often overlooked distinction in climate adaptation investment is the difference between financing and funding (Watkiss and England, 2025). Financing refers to where the upfront money comes from, whether public grants, government borrowing, sovereign green bonds, or private capital, and the financial instruments and terms involved. Funding, by contrast, refers to who ultimately pays for the adaptation over the lifetime of the investment, whether through public budgets, taxation, or user charges. This distinction matters because private sector involvement can help close the financing gap without necessarily closing the funding gap: costs may simply be transferred back to governments or households rather than genuinely shared.

This is illustrated in Figure 4, which shows options for delivery of a programme of coastal flood protection in a developing country context. Here, the delivery is provided by the private sector, who build the contract. The financing can be provided in many ways, including from public budget, tax rises, or private sector financing through the capital markets. These are important since there is much greater potential for private sector financing than for developing business. For example, it is possible to attract significant amounts of private sector financing to support public sector investment, but ultimately government repays with interest. Therefore, it is important to consider whether we are seeking to boost private sector funding (i.e. the proportion of companies and businesses that actually contribute to the costs of adaptation), or merely the financing.

Figure 4: A simple example of the financing, funding, and delivery of adaptation for coastal protection. Source: Watkiss and England. 2025.

The role of public and private sectors

In recent years, there have been substantial efforts to better understand the factors which can inform whether such activities should be funded by the private or public sectors. These include whether the costs and benefits of activities are public or private as well as the level of financial returns they offer. These can be none/limited (and are therefore typically public), below-market or market level returns (OECD, 2023). The level of market returns for many adaptation options have been classified in Table 3, and these have been reviewed and updated to be relevant to the sectors in scope of this study:

Table 3 – Adaptation activities and potential returns in developed countries for the sectors explored in the study. Updated from Watkiss and England, 2025 and OECD, 2023.

Sector and activity

Typical nature of investment

Typical level of return

Public

Below market

Market

Coastal, river and surface water flood

Protection (coastal and river floods)

Public

ü

  

Early warning services

Public

ü

  

Natural flood risk management / NbS

Public

ü

  

Property Level Flood Resilience and Resistance

Private

ü

ü

ü

Water

Integrated water resources management (IWRM)

Public

ü

  

Supply and distribution

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Demand management, inc. efficiency measures

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Agriculture

Research and Development

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Extension services

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Climate-smart agriculture

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Irrigation

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Trade and trade infrastructure

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Infrastructure

Transport (road and rail)

Mixed

ü

ü

 

Biodiversity and Ecosystems

Protected areas

Public

ü

ü

 

Capacity building, institutional strengthening, awareness

Public

ü

ü

 

Forestry

Mixed

ü

ü

ü

Building on this approach, UNEP (2025) outline a useful typology (adapted into Figure 5) for understanding where public and private actors are best placed to act, based on the combination of level of returns and whether the costs and benefits are public, private or joint. These can be used to help classify a broad range of activities which are funded by either the public sector, private sector, or a mix of both.

Type A actions are public goods, such as major flood protection schemes, that generate little or no financial return and are therefore typically initiated and funded by government. Type B actions involve a mix of public and private costs and benefits, and where returns are typically below market. For example, supporting climate-smart agriculture. These typically involve blended finance arrangements. Type C actions sit within existing well-functioning markets and generate commercial returns, such as industrial cooling systems, and would be expected to be entirely privately financed and funded.

Figure 5: Simplified categorisation of adaptation types (A-C) and opportunities for private sector engagement. Adapted from UNEP (2025).

Barriers to adaptation finance

Private sector investment in climate adaptation remains persistently low, despite adaptation often delivering high economic returns for society (World Bank, 2024).

The core problem is that while the societal benefits of adaptation can be substantial, the financial returns that matter to private investors are much lower. Adaptation frequently reduces losses or damages and generates limited revenues, making it difficult to construct a viable business case for private finance. This is especially the case, given the opportunity cost of capital, and difficulties of modelling climate-related disruption in cashflows and returns (Watkiss and England, 2025). There are also issues of discounting, where costs arise today, but benefits occur far in the future and are therefore higher. The private sector also uses higher discount rates than the 3% in the public sector (HM Treasury, 2026), compounding this issue.

Many studies reporting high benefit-to-cost ratios for adaptation are measuring economic or societal returns, which include non-market benefits such as environmental value. Private investors, however, assess financial returns, incremental revenues and cash flows, which are considerably lower. This distinction is frequently misunderstood and leads to unrealistic expectations about the role private finance can play (Watkiss and England, 2025).

Watkiss and England (2025) identify five main categories of barrier to adaptation finance:

  1. Information barriers, including insufficient data on climate risks and limited investor understanding of adaptation as an asset class.
  2. Market failures, including public good characteristics and underdeveloped adaptation markets.
  3. Behavioural barriers, including low perceived urgency and limited willingness to pay for risk reduction.
  4. Policy and governance barriers, including weak or conflicting regulation and poor cross-sector coordination.
  5. Financial and bankability barriers, including long payback periods, small project sizes, high complexity, and limited replicability.

Scaling private investment into publicly identified adaptation priorities remains a significant challenge, particularly for smaller, fragmented projects involving many actors and beneficiaries.

Boosting private sector opportunities

Globally, current private sector contributions to climate adaptation are very small (approximately 3% of total needs). Even with substantial innovation and concerted effort, the private sector is expected to deliver only around 15% of required adaptation by 2035, with even less in least developed countries and small island developing states (Watkiss & England, 2025). However, this varies significantly based on country and sector structure. Recent analysis of the UK’s third National Adaptation Plan finds much higher numbers, suggesting around 45% of total adaptation costs are borne by private households and businesses (Watkiss et al., 2026a), in part driven by the privatised nature of the water sector in England. As Scottish Water is publicly owned, the equivalent figure for Scotland is likely to be lower, with a greater share of adaptation costs falling to the public sector.

As a result, climate adaptation is currently funded predominantly by the public sector, both globally and within the Scotland. Central and local government fund most adaptation-relevant expenditure across transport, flood management, water infrastructure, agriculture and the natural environment, largely through existing budget lines that deliver multiple objectives alongside adaptation, climate-proofing, or pure adaptation investment (e.g. for flood protection). Across all sectors, households and businesses also bear some adaptation costs directly. For example, through property level insurance or on-farm investments. However, this remains modest.

Crucially, scaling up private sector participation will not happen through market forces alone. It will require concerted public policy action, enabling conditions, and in many cases public co-financing to de-risk private investment. The private sector’s role is therefore best understood as being complementary to, rather than a substitute for, public adaptation finance (Watkiss and England, 2025).

Governments can adjust the financial characteristics of adaptation activities to increase private sector participation, either at the market level or at the level of individual investments. At the market level, this can include improving existing markets (e.g. through better provision of climate risk information), creating new markets (e.g. through water credits), or supporting public provision where markets fail (Greenhill et al., 2026). At the level of individual investments, policy and regulation or blended finance arrangements can be used to alter financial characteristics and improve commercial viability (World Bank, 2019; Watkiss and Ward, 2025). Where neither approach is sufficient, there remains scope to diversify the range of public financing sources and instruments. This is illustrated in the decision tree in Appendix A.

Climate justice considerations

Another significant consideration within the costs of adaptation are the distributional aspects, and the need for a “just resilience”. The CCC report to Scottish Government on climate adaptation and just transition in 2022 highlighted that fairness in adaptation is strongly linked to just transition concepts, and it is crucial to consider distributional effects to ensure effective and fair adaptation (CCC, 2022). Several characteristics that lead to increased vulnerability and reduced adaptive capacity to climate risk were identified, and include low-income groups, the very young and the elderly, and those in rural regions. The CCC recommended that policy to help address adverse distributional impacts should be routed in an understanding of the distributional effects of climate risks and opportunities.

While climate risks are unevenly distributed and demand equitable responses (European Environment Agency, 2025), they also involve costs. Such costs can be explored from several perspectives. A simplified set of approaches is shown in Table 4, ranging from most targeted to those most socialised, though in reality the approach may be context specific.

Table 4: Indicative approaches to guide who should pay for adaptation: Adapted from Paul Watkiss Associates.

Approach

Description and examples

Justification

Costs borne by those at risk

Those directly exposed to risks bear the costs of adaptation (e.g. PFR)

Beneficiaries should pay costs

Costs socialised amongst users

Investment in water / rail networks for adaptation through water bills and ticket sales

Efficiency, user pays

Maximise social welfare – prioritise dense population

Use of Cost-Benefit analysis to maximise (e.g. flood defences in England)

Social welfare, cost effectiveness

Costs socialised across society

Adaptation of nature and biodiversity, flood protection

Public goods, fairness or equity

Adaptation responsibility based on historic and current emissions

Highest emitters pay for adaptation (e.g. Green Climate Fund, Adaptation Fund)

Adaptation costs driven by historic emissions / most wealthy

The CCC recommended that policy to help address adverse distributional impacts should be rooted in an understanding of the distributional effects of climate risks and opportunities.

Early work underway globally is considering some of the principles behind the costs of adaptation. The Government of New Zealand (2025), set out some early principles in its National Adaptation Framework such as ensuring pre-and post-climate event costs are shared across society and over time, and that the public sector is used to incentivise private sector action, and to take market-based approaches that adjust over time. While beyond the scope of this report, it is noted that such considerations may have the potential to significantly vary relative distribution of costs.

Knowledge gaps and challenges

Evidence gaps in Scotland’s adaptation investment landscape

It is important to note here that adaptation investment, globally, is poorly understood, and many countries are, like Scotland, working to quantify their national adaptation investment needs. Scotland faces multiple knowledge gaps around climate adaptation investment. These include:

  • No clear understanding of the total investment required across sectors, including whether this will involve millions or billions of pounds, or how this spending will be distributed with time.
  • No detailed picture of what climate adaptation investment could deliver for different sectors.
  • No specific, measurable, achievable, relevant and time-bound (SMART) adaptation objectives under SNAP3.
  • No assessment of associated costs of not adapting, and/or expected residual damages.
  • No budget allocation for each SNAP3 objective.

These knowledge gaps make it difficult to determine whether a financing gap exists or how large that gap might be in Scotland.

Broader knowledge gaps in Scotland and beyond include:

  • Lack of robust estimates of the wider returns from adaptation investment, including avoided climate damages, economic benefits, and broader social and environmental gains that comprise the ‘triple dividend’ of adaptation.
  • Limited research exploring opportunities for blended public-private funding partnerships to support climate change adaptation spending.

Further research on these broader topics is key to ensuring and prioritising just and equitable climate adaptation solutions in Scotland.

Box 1: Challenges and limitations

Estimating Scotland’s climate adaptation investment need is inherently challenging. This work provides an initial method, approach, and set of assumptions to estimate climate adaptation spending across sectors. It is intended as a first step that will require further development. The figures presented should therefore be treated as indicative, order of magnitude estimates rather than precise calculations. Readers and peers are encouraged to build on this analysis by adding new assumptions, incorporating additional sub-sectors or hazards, or testing alternative scenarios and risk-tolerance thresholds.

The key data limitations and challenges underlying these estimates include:

Baseline spending: Incomplete information on current adaptation expenditure across Scotland makes it difficult to establish a reliable baseline from which to measure progress or scale up investment.

Asset vulnerability: Comprehensive inventories of climate-vulnerable assets are lacking in most sectors, and there is limited understanding of how vulnerability will evolve as the climate changes.

Climate and socio-economic uncertainty: Projections of how Scotland’s climate will change over the coming decades remain uncertain, as does the evolution of the broader socio-economic and political landscape.

Risk tolerance: Without clearly defined government risk tolerance thresholds or adaptation objectives for each sector, it is difficult to establish an ‘end goal’ against which investment needs can be scaled.

Scope limitations: The analysis focuses on selected sub-sectors and key hazards; many relevant adaptation actions and climate risks across Scotland’s wider economy are not included.

Methodological assumptions: Estimates rely on assumptions regarding appropriate adaptation objectives for 2040 and whether spending continues at current levels or scales up in line with growing climate risks.

Study methods

Our approach

Scotland faces similar challenges in estimating climate adaptation investment need to those across Europe, and the fragmented data landscape means no single method could be applied consistently across all sectors. The study therefore adopted a pragmatic, multi-stage and multi-method approach:

  1. estimating adaptation costs for each sector using the most appropriate costing method given available evidence;
  2. feeding these into a macroeconomic model to explore the economic impacts of different financing routes;
  3. mapping current governance arrangements to understand how adaptation is being paid for today; and,
  4. exploring the potential to increase private sector participation.

Due to resource and data limitations, the three analyses were conducted separately, with differing underlying assumptions. The cost estimates, macroeconomic modelling, and funding analysis are therefore not directly comparable with one another. Each is intended as a broad exploratory assessment, and further integrated analysis would be needed to draw firm conclusions across all three components.

Throughout, developing robust estimates also required identifying which SNAP3 targets and objectives are relevant to each sector and considering wider socio-economic context beyond climate risk alone. The detailed steps are shown below.

Step 1: Adaptation costing

Adaptation objective setting

We adopted 14 of the 23 objectives set out in SNAP3 (Scottish Government, 2024a). The selected objectives covered four of the five broader SNAP3 outcome areas identified by the Scottish Government: Public Services (PS), Economy, Business & Industry (B), Nature Connects (NC), and Communities (C) (Scottish Government, 2024a). Objectives relevant to the fifth SNAP3 outcome area, Connected and Engaged Society (CE), were not included in the scope of this analysis. The specific sectors, objectives and corresponding outcome explored within our analysis area are summarised in Table 5.

Table 5: Climate change adaptation outcome area and objectives from SNAP3 that align with the five sectors considered in our work were selected and, where relevant, amended. Sectors not explored – due to resource constraints – are crossed through in the objectives below.

Sector

SNAP3 outcome area and objectives

Agriculture

B2: Farming, forestry, fishing, and aquaculture businesses are supported to adapt production and operations in a way that benefits livelihoods, resilience, and the economy in a changing climate.

Communities

C1: Regional collaborations are driving inclusive, effective and place-based adaptation across all of Scotland.

C2: Communities and individuals are supported, informed, and able to take locally led adaptation action, supporting local priorities and resilient, healthy, and equitable places.

C3: Communities and individuals are able to prepare for, respond to and recover from emergencies in a way that builds future climate resilience, complements the work of emergency responders and protects those with vulnerabilities to multiple risks.

C4: New buildings are designed for a future climate, and opportunities for adaptation in existing buildings are taken during maintenance or retrofit.

C6: Coastal communities are preparing for and adapting to coastal erosion and sea level rise.

PS2: People can access the public services they need, and critical assets, systems and networks are resilient to the impacts of the changing climate. 

Natural environment

B2: Farming, forestry, fishing, and aquaculture businesses are supported to adapt production and operations in a way that benefits livelihoods, resilience, and the economy in a changing climate.

Nature-based solutions are protected and enhanced to enable healthier, cooler, water resilient and nature-rich places.

NC1: Landscape scale solutions are implemented for sustainable and collaborative land use including protecting and enhancing Scotland’s soils.

NC3: Development planning (including Local Development Plans and associated delivery programmes) takes current and future climate risks into account and is a key lever in enabling places to adapt.

NC4: Nature networks across every local authority area are improving ecological connectivity and climate resilience, alongside other transformative national actions to halt biodiversity loss by 2030.

NC6: Resilient natural carbon stores and sinks (such as peatland, forests and blue carbon) are supporting Scotland’s net zero pathway, alongside timber production, biodiversity gains, flood resilience and the priorities of local communities.

Transport

PS4: The transport system (trunk roads, rail, aviation, ferries, ports and canals) is prepared for current and future impacts of climate change and is safe for all users, reliable for everyday journeys and resilient to weather-related disruption.

PS2: People can access the public services they need, and critical assets, systems and networks are resilient to the impacts of the changing climate. 

Water

PS2: People can access the public services they need, and critical assets, systems and networks are resilient to the impacts of the changing climate. 

PS3: Partnerships for water resource planning and rainwater drainage networks are active in prioritised catchments to support climate resilient places and drought and flooding resilience.

 

The sectors and sub-sectors included in our study are defined as follows:

Table 6 Sectors and sub-sectors explored within this analysis

Sector

Sub-sector

Agriculture

  • N/A.

Communities

  • Flood protection schemes.
  • Property flood resilience.
  • Wider capacity building.

Natural environment

  • Woodland creation.
  • Peatland restoration.
  • Nature restoration.

Transport

  • Trunk roads and motorways.
  • Rail network.

Water

  • Scottish Water – water and wastewater services

Note that, due to resource constraints, a range of other key sectors – for example, energy, telecommunications, and health – have not been explored in this report. Furthermore, even within the sectors we have examined, we have not conducted full sectoral analyses. For example, within transport, adapting ferries, aviation, and canals was not included in the analysis due to resource constraints. Consequently, the results should be interpreted accordingly.

Context setting

To estimate the uplift or scaling factors for adaptation investment needs to 2040, we considered how wider socio‑economic conditions, such as population change, economic growth and sectoral investment trends, might evolve over time. These factors can be important. For example, estimating future flood defence needs can require assumptions about future population distribution, while economic growth and inflation trajectories influence both the cost of adaptation measures and the scale of potential economic losses.

In practice, this broader socioeconomic context was only relevant to a limited part of our analysis. Most estimates relied on sector specific data and updated risk information – such as SEPA’s revised flood risk mapping or current housing stock – rather than the national socioeconomic scenarios developed for CCRA3. As a result, although we originally intended to use the central CCRA3 socioeconomic scenarios to inform investment scaling, these were largely not required in the final workflow.

If needed for future updates, this contextual information can be revisited, but for the purposes of this assessment it played only a minor supporting role.

Apportioning adaptation spend

Following the MDB taxonomy introduced in Section 2.2, this study applied different cost attribution approaches across the five sectors depending on the type of adaptation investment and available evidence. The specific methods used for each sector are detailed below and further elaborated in the sector-specific analyses (Section 4).

Climate-Proofing (Incremental Costs)

For infrastructure investments where adaptation is integrated into planned programmes but not the primary objective, we estimated incremental costs above baseline investment, for example:

  • Transport (trunk roads and motorways): We applied relevant climate-proofing uplifts from the literature to Scottish Government 2026/27 budget lines for road maintenance and renewal. These uplifts reflect the additional investment required to design infrastructure for future climate conditions rather than historical baselines. For example, upgraded drainage capacity to handle more intense rainfall, enhanced slope stabilisation for increased landslide risk, or heat-resistant surfacing materials. The baseline represents the investment that would proceed regardless of climate change; the uplift captures the incremental adaptation cost.

Mixed Objectives (Apportioned Costs)

For investments delivering multiple benefits including adaptation, we apportioned costs based on expert judgment in consultation with Paul Watkiss Associates, who have extensive experience applying the MDB taxonomy internationally. For example:

  • Woodland creation: Forestry investment delivers multiple benefits including timber production, carbon sequestration (mitigation), biodiversity, recreation, and climate adaptation (ecosystem resilience, water regulation, reducing downstream flood risk). We reviewed stated objectives in Scottish Government forestry programmes and applied expert judgment from Paul Watkiss Associates, aligned with on-going UK level adaptation investment need research, to determine what proportion of woodland creation costs should be attributed to adaptation.
  • Peatland restoration: Peatland restoration similarly delivers carbon sequestration, biodiversity recovery, water quality improvements, and adaptation benefits (enhanced water storage and flow regulation reducing flood peaks, maintaining ecosystem function under climate stress). We assessed the relative emphasis on these objectives in Scotland’s peatland restoration programmes and apportioned costs, accordingly. These apportionments were cross-checked through expert review with Paul Watkiss Associates.
  • Nature restoration: We applied similar logic to wider nature restoration funding, examining whether investments prioritise climate resilience objectives (e.g., creating ecological corridors to enable species migration under climate change, restoring coastal habitats for natural flood defence) or primarily target biodiversity and ecosystem health goals, and attributed costs proportionally.

Different analysts might reasonably apply different attribution percentages to the same mixed-objective investments, as there is no objectively correct answer to how investment should be apportioned across multiple objectives, including the distinction between climate adaptation and mitigation. The percentages applied in this study are therefore documented transparently in the sector-specific analyses (Section 4) and supplementary data.

Targeted adaptation (pure adaptation)

For dedicated adaptation investments where climate risk reduction is the primary or sole objective, we counted total programme costs:

  • Flood protection schemes: We examined historic budget allocations from Scottish Government expenditure data and uplifted these to current construction prices using appropriate indices. Estimates drew on SEPA’s updated flood risk mapping and UK-wide research on flood defence costs, scaled to Scotland’s exposure and asset base.
  • Property-level flood resilience (PFR): We scaled recent UK research on PFR costs and uptake rates in proportion to Scotland’s residential and non-residential building stock at flood risk, using SEPA flood risk data to estimate the exposed population.
  • Capacity building (communities): We engaged with Scottish Government policy teams to identify planned and potential future investment in community-level adaptation capacity, resilience planning, and climate literacy programmes where adaptation is the primary objective.

Sector-specific considerations

A pragmatic, multi method strategy was adopted that used the most appropriate costing approach for each sector, determined by data availability and evidence maturity. The core approaches drawn upon were:

  • Drawing on existing sectoral analysis of initial adaptation investment estimates for specific plausible future scenarios (e.g., water and rail).
  • Applying relevant climate proofing uplifts from the literature to relevant Scottish Government 2026/27 budget lines (Scottish Government 2026b), reflecting changing climate risks (e.g., trunk roads and motorways).
  • For each plan or budget line, including the Scottish Government Draft Climate Change Plan (CCP) (2025) and the Scottish Government 2026/27 budget (Scottish Government, 2026b), the multiple objectives were examined to identify the proportion of investment directly related to adaptation (e.g., agriculture, woodland creation, peatland restoration, and nature restoration).
  • Examining and uplifting historic budget allocations to current construction index prices (e.g., flood protection schemes).
  • Drawing on wider UK research and scaling estimates in proportion to Scotland’s building stock or relevant assets (e.g., flood-protection schemes and property level flood resilience).
  • Engaging with Scottish Government policy teams to discuss likely investment changes for spending with adaptation relevance (capacity building within communities).
  • Applying value transfer methods by exploring how adaptation cost estimates compare when scaled to the Scottish context, drawing on Neumann et al. (2025) as an international benchmark for agriculture and transport infrastructure, and on UK Government (2025) analysis for flood protection schemes.
  • Undertaking expert review to cross-check estimates against parallel analysis being undertaken for the Climate Change Committee’s Well Adapted UK report, due for publication in Spring 2026.

For further detail on methodological approach used, please see the sector-specific analyses, the appendices B and C (for additional information on Network Rail Scotland and Scottish Water’s analysis respectively), and supplementary data.

Step 2: Estimating macro-economic effects of spending

Macro-economic effects

Fully modelling the costs and benefits of adaptation, including all potential avoided damages, productivity improvements, health gains, and environmental co-benefits, is extremely resource intensive and was beyond the scope of this project. Instead, the Centre for Energy Policy at the University of Strathclyde used a Computable General Equilibrium (CGE) model of the Scottish economy to explore one deliberately narrow but important question: what are the direct economic effects of additional climate adaptation investment in Scotland, and what economic activity does this spending stimulate?

CGE models are widely used by governments and research institutions, including HM Treasury and the Scottish Government, to understand how changes in one part of the economy ripple through the rest. For this study, a model was used that represents the Scottish economy across 30 broad sectors and is built on Scottish Government Input-Output tables from 2019, chosen to reflect the structure of the economy before the disruptions of Covid-19 and the war in Ukraine. The model traces how adaptation spending affects prices, production, employment, and incomes across sectors, and how these effects in turn influence government revenues and public finances. It also accounts for how wages and employment interact. It allows for migration in and out of Scotland depending on relative economic conditions. Finally, it divides households into five income groups to understand how different parts of society might be affected.

For this research, we assumed that climate change adaptation is a form of capital spending that does not create additional production capital for production sectors. Instead, it allows them to maintain the same production capacity, which would be at risk in the face of climate change.

Understanding the modelling approach: spending and cost recovery

To make the modelling approach clearer, it is helpful to think of adaptation in two phases:

Phase 1: Sectoral spending for climate adaptation measures
In Phase 1 the scope of the work is to model how the spending flows through the Scottish supply chains. We model how the sector makes additional purchases of goods and services to deliver adaptation measures (for example, construction materials, engineering services, flood defences, or restoration work). This spending initially flows through Scottish supply chains, creating economic activity in the sectors that deliver the work and in households that benefit from the associated wages and employment.

Phase 2: Cost recovery
Over time, the sectors and/or government need to recover the costs of adaptation. Each sector may have a different cost recovery approach, depending on its business models and economic structure. We modelled three stylised approaches to illustrate the broad channels through which different funding choices affect the economy:

(1) “Government pays, funded through income tax” (used for Communities, Rail and Trunk roads) may have the following implications:

  • Income tax rates rise to cover adaptation costs.
  • Household disposable incomes fall, especially for higher earners.
  • Consumer spending is dampened across society.
  • This approach is typically progressive, as those earning more pay a larger share.
  • Government spending in other areas (health, education, etc.) is preserved.

(2) “Government pays, funded through government spending cuts” (used for Natural environment) may have the following implications:

  • Public spending declines towards all sectors to cover adaptation costs.
  • Public administration/defence, education, and tertiary sectors suffer most.
  • This approach tends to be mixed.

(3) “Industry pays, funded through higher prices” (used for Agriculture and Water) may have the following implications:

  • The adapting sector faces a cost they have to cover, which firms pass on to consumers through higher prices.
  • Higher prices reduce export competitiveness (assuming similar price increases are not also happening abroad), which reduces demand for Scottish goods.
  • This approach tends to be regressive, as lower-income households spend a relatively larger share of their budgets on essential goods and services.

Important caveats
All approaches are highly stylised and are used to illustrate the broad economic channels and trade-offs that different funding choices create. In reality, adaptation funding is likely to involve a blend of government and industry contributions, as well as other mechanisms such as borrowing, grants, or targeted levies. The scenarios presented here should be treated as illustrative, helping to understand the direction and scale of potential impacts rather than precise forecasts.

More detail on the methodological approach and more detailed analysis of selected sectors can be found in Appendix D.

Note: The macroeconomic modelling cannot be taken as an assessment of the costs and benefits of adaptation. While the modelling captures the direct economic stimulus of adaptation spending and the effects of cost recovery, it does not model residual damages. Neither does it quantify the full range of avoided climate damages, increased resilience, reduced disruption to businesses and households, improved business continuity, health gains, long-term productivity benefits, or environmental co-benefits that underpin the wider “triple dividend” of adaptation. The results should therefore be interpreted as a conservative and partial estimate, representing only one dimension of the economic effects – the demand-side impacts of the spending and its financing – rather than the full spectrum of costs and benefits of adaptation.

Steps 3 and 4: Estimating current and future private sector contributions

In each of the sectors represented in the report, there are existing models which are being used to cover the costs of adaptation today. To explore the current and future potential splits, the project documented the broad governance models of each sector today. We then carried out a qualitative evaluation of the potential use of blended finance, regulation and policy and innovative models. We note that these vary significantly based on the broad structure of the sector, and appetite for change.

Our focus has been on the theoretical potential to increase private sector contributions (noting that this may not be ultimately desirable). This is based on the need to prioritise public sector expenditure on those areas which cannot be met by private sector or households directly. The range of models explored includes:

  • Innovative models using private finance to provide upfront capital
  • Models which increase private sector funding for adaptation
  • Provision of adaptation goods and services (which ultimately reduce costs for public and private sector activities

To identify potential innovations, we drew on the Paul Watkiss Associate database of innovative accelerators (England et al., 2023; United Nations Environment Programme, 2024), as well as recent wider work exploring financing options (Watkiss and England, 2025). Further supplemental models were identified through desk-based searches during this project. We undertook a rapid review and used expert judgement to extract innovative approaches that they felt were potentially relevant in a Scottish context.

Due to the limited resources available for the project, the review has inevitably been ‘light touch’ but serves as the basis for further exploration and discussion to inform the development of SNAP4, as well as the future business models of public bodies such as Scottish Water or Network Rail.

Prices

All prices in the report are presented in 2026/27 prices. For the period 2025/26 to 2026/27, a nominal growth rate of 2% per annum has been applied, consistent with the Bank of England’s long-run inflation target. See the supplementary data for further detail.

Sector-specific analysis

The results derived are detailed below. For each sector – agriculture, communities (flooding), transport, water and natural environment – we highlight (1) key risks and adaptation opportunities, (2) information regarding current investment in climate adaptation, (3) the estimates of adaptation investment need, (4) the wider (co)-benefits of such spend, (5) the current governance, and (6) funding and financing arrangements.

Agriculture

Key climate risks and adaptation opportunities

Agriculture in Scotland faces a complex and intensifying range of climate-driven pressures. More frequent extreme rainfall events are already causing excess waterlogging, which has been shown to be a greater current risk to wheat yields than heat or water stress (risk N6 in CCRA3). Hotter, drier summers are reducing the suitability of high-quality arable land due to drought risk. The 2018 drought illustrated how quickly these pressures cascade through supply chains, with reduced malt barley yields and distilleries halting production due to low river flows. Fluvial flooding on major river catchments such as the Tay and Tweed continue to damage agricultural land, and projections suggest the area of Scotland’s best-quality farmland at risk from flooding could rise by over 30% by the 2080s under a +2°C scenario. Warmer conditions are also driving increases in pests, pathogens and invasive species (CCRA3 risk N7), from potato blight and cyst nematodes to Bluetongue virus, posing escalating threats to crops, livestock and soil health (Sniffer, 2021). Together, these pressures are expected to push agricultural climate risk, as stated in the CCRA3, from medium to high in the coming decades (Sniffer, 2021).

Addressing these risks requires an integrated, forward-looking approach to land-use planning and farm management. Key priorities identified by CCRA3 (2021) include updated land capability assessments using UKCP18 data to guide decisions on where agricultural systems remain viable, alongside improved skills and knowledge exchange, crop diversification, and better soil and water management. Expanded pest and disease monitoring, stronger biosecurity, and wider uptake of integrated pest management are also highlighted, as is the need to align adaptation with net zero strategies to avoid introducing new vulnerabilities. Stronger research, improved coordination between government and land managers, and a more strategic cross-sector approach will be essential to safeguard Scotland’s long-term agricultural productivity as climate pressures intensify (Sniffer, 2021).

Current spending and context

It is not possible to outline how much capital the Scottish Government currently allocates specifically toward climate adaptation of agriculture. This is because climate adaptation investment is currently folded into budget lines with multiple other objectives such as emissions reductions, increased biodiversity and wider farm support. However, the Scottish Government 2026/27 Climate Taxonomy highlights that £221m worth of allocated budget within agriculture have a positive impact on adaptation. Similarly, to our knowledge, there is no available evidence on private sector investment for adaptation of agriculture within Scotland.

Adaptation investment need

Budget lines from the Scottish Government’s 2026/27 Climate Taxonomy with a positive impact on adaptation were used as the primary basis for estimating mixed-objective investment need for agriculture (Table 7). Spending was assumed to continue in nominal terms to 2040, with no uplift applied for increasing climate risk over the period. It should also be noted that some budget lines with positive adaptation impacts may not have been captured, for example, the Farm Advisory Service and Knowledge Transfer and Innovation Service sits under ‘Business Development’ in the Scottish Budget and has not been included, despite likely supporting adaptation through improved uptake of resilient practices.

It is important to note that these budget lines deliver multiple benefits alongside adaptation, including climate mitigation, soil health improvements, biodiversity gains, and wider farm business productivity. Disentangling the proportion of each line attributable specifically to adaptation is particularly challenging in agriculture, where weather and climate resilience – and therefore adaptation – are integral to sectoral success. For this reason, no specific proportion of any budget line was allocated to adaptation in isolation; instead, the whole budget line was included. Estimated costs should therefore be understood as representing a bundle of co-benefits of which adaptation is one component.

Table 7: Budget lines from the Scottish Government Climate Taxonomy 2026/27 that were included in adaptation investment need analysis for agriculture, and associated adaptation rating (Positive – High or Positive – Low) which represents the likely impact (and extent of impact) of the budget line on adaptation, e.g. ‘Positive – High’ is a positive impact that is likely to be highly beneficial.

Budget lines included in analysis

2026/27 budget (£m)

Adaptation rating

Pillar 1 – Greening Payments

£142m

Positive – High

Agricultural Modernisation Fund

£26m

Positive – Low

Scottish Rural Network

£0.87m

Positive – Low

Agri Environmental Measures Resources

£21m

Positive – High

Agri Environmental Measures Capital

£4.7m

Positive – High

Public Good Advice

£2m

Positive – Low

Veterinary Grants

£0.8m

Positive – Low

Animal Diseases

£23.5m

Positive – Low

Table 8 outlines our estimate of mixed objective investment need – including adaptation – for agriculture. This estimate ranges from £168m/yr for budget lines associated with a high positive impact on adaptation to £221m/yr where budget lines with a low positive impact on adaptation are also included.

We cannot give an estimate of adaptation investment need for agriculture in isolation. However, if the current level of spend is maintained out to 2040, total investment in budget lines associated with a positive impact on adaptation in agriculture would amount to between £2,347m – £3,091m, or equivalent to £167.6m – £221m per year over the period 2026–2040 (Table 8).

Table 8: Lower and upper estimates of the mixed-objective investment need (including climate adaptation) for agriculture, based on budget lines in the Climate Taxonomy 2026/27 with a positive impact on adaptation. Values are in 2026/27 prices.

Lower estimate

Upper estimate

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

£167.6m/yr

£2,347m

£221m/yr

£3,091m

These estimates were triangulated by scaling adaptation cost estimates from Neumann et al. (2025) to the Scottish context as an international benchmark. Neumann et al. (2025) estimated EU agricultural adaptation costs at approximately 0.04% – 0.06% of GDP per year under moderate to high emissions scenarios. Applying this range to Scotland’s GDP yields an indicative figure of £90m – 142m/yr (2026/27 prices). Scotland’s agricultural GVA (approximately £2.2bn, around 1% of GDP) is broadly comparable to the EU average (approximately 1.2% of EU GDP), supporting the plausibility of this transfer as a cross-check (Scottish Government, 2025c; Eurostat, 2026). However, this comparison should be treated with caution: the nature and projected intensification of climate hazards vary considerably across EU member states and diverges from Scotland’s risk profile in important respects. These figures were therefore used as an indicative benchmark to assess how our estimates compare at an international level, and are not included in our reported adaptation investment need figures.

We also conducted separate exploratory research to highlight the challenges and opportunities of using bottom-up analysis to cost climate change adaptation investment need for specific agriculture actions (see Case study 1).

Case study 1: Exploratory bottom-up analysis of agricultural adaptation actions

While budget tagging reveals how much is being spent, it does not indicate what this delivers for climate resilience or whether current levels are sufficient. As an exploratory supplement to the primary budget-line estimates, indicative cost estimates were developed for 33 adaptation actions identified in a Scottish Government RESAS report, to showcase how investment need estimates could iteratively improve to become asset- and action-based going forward. This analysis should be regarded as a proof-of-concept; further data collection and expert elicitation would be needed to improve future estimates and develop associated adaptation pathways.

Costs were sourced from academic and grey literature, with confidence ratings assigned to each source, and scaled to Scotland’s agricultural land area using land-use archetypes from the CCC’s Rural Land Use Types report (Thomson et al., 2025). Complete scaled cost estimates were produced for 19 of the 33 actions. Where data permitted, an exploratory cost-benefit analysis was undertaken for selected actions, including diversified crop rotations, examining potential impacts on yields, soil erosion, and fertiliser use.

The exploratory CBA for diversified crop rotations suggests potential monetised benefits totalling £856m–1.1bn between 2026 and 2040 for reduced soil erosion, increased crop yields and reduced fertiliser usage. Relative to an estimated total action cost of £3.5bn, this represents 25–31% of the potential investment directly benefiting agricultural productivity. Furthermore, other public good benefits not explored from diversified crop rotations could include other benefits such as increased biodiversity and improved water retention that were not explored here.

These figures assume each action is applied across all eligible land, which is an over estimation. Further information on the results, assumptions made, confidence ratings, and recommended further research steps are provided in Appendix E and the supplementary data.

Macroeconomic effects and wider impacts

Macro-economic impacts

We assumed the agriculture sector requires approximately £2.3bn of adaptation investment between 2026 and 2040, around £150m/yr (based on rounding down the analysis in Section 4.1.3). This spending is distributed across construction, the agriculture sector itself, all other manufacturing, and wholesale/retail (vehicles).

Without cost recovery (a modelling device to isolate the spending effect): The programme generates GDP and employment gains during the spending period, with around 80% concentrated in the sectors directly delivering the works – construction, all other manufacturing, wholesale/retail (vehicles), and agriculture itself. Positive spillovers reach consumer services as household incomes rise. Employment and GDP impacts track each other closely because the agriculture adaptation supply chain involves relatively capital-intensive activities such as specialised equipment and infrastructure. As with other sectors, these benefits fade after spending concludes.

With “industry pays” cost recovery (a stylised scenario): When farmers bear adaptation costs and pass them to consumers via higher food prices, the effects are regressive. By 2040, the lowest-income households face price increases of 0.09%, compared with 0.07% for the highest-income households, because food represents a much larger share of poor households’ budgets. Higher food prices erode real incomes and household consumption across all income groups, while reduced export competitiveness further dampens GDP and employment. Because agriculture is one of Scotland’s most labour-intensive sectors – employing 8.5 workers per £1m of output, well above the economy-wide average of 6.6 – the concentrated negative impacts trigger significant job losses that spill across the wider economy. Scotland’s labour mobility means workers leave rather than accept wage cuts, prolonging the employment losses.

Policy implications: An “industry pays” approach financed through higher food prices risks regressive impacts on low-income households and substantial employment losses. While adaptation spending itself stimulates construction and manufacturing, the method of cost recovery determines whether these gains are preserved or eroded, and which parts of society bear the burden.

Current governance, funding and financing arrangements

Agriculture is a market sector but is heavily supported by the public sector (Figure 6). See Appendix F for further information on how this support is planned to change.

A key challenge in the agriculture sector is disentangling the adaptation costs from the other objectives, as the sector involves a mix of activities. There are some dedicated adaptation activities, but other agri-environment objectives include actions to improve productivity, with private costs and benefits, but supported by public activities. Furthermore, it is also challenging to differentiate adaptation actions from wider activities to boost yields or achieve other objectives.

Therefore, rather than looking at activities, the study took an alternative approach which explored the relative income sources for farms. Scottish Government produces estimates on the annual income from farms, including their makeup (Scottish Government, 2025d) shown in Appendix F. These show that agricultural activity in Scotland is typically lossmaking, except for dairy and general cropping, and that agricultural support payments make up a significant share of all farm income. The survey excludes sectors which do not receive support, such as pigs, poultry and horticulture.

The results suggest that loss-making farms may struggle to invest in adaptation measures and that the majority of the ability to invest in adaptation is likely to come through support payment income. We assume that adaptation action is mainstreamed into general agricultural support.

To derive estimates of private sector contribution we started by assuming that for farm types where agriculture is not profitable, all agricultural adaptation is paid for by the public sector. For those sectors where agricultural income is profitable, we assume 50% co-investment, assuming farmers can contribute to those areas which support adaptation. For those sectors excluded for support payments, we assume adaptation costs are 100% private. These assumptions were then applied to output of holdings by farm type from the 2025 Scottish Agricultural Survey. The results suggests that 33% of investment in adaptation is likely to be from the private sector. However, given the overlap with many other objectives and activities (including flood management), the uncertainty on the types of interventions and how they vary by farm type, as well as the fact that many of the grant schemes require co-investment from farmers. the confidence in such apportionment is low.

Figure 6 Financing, funding, and delivery arrangements for adaptation in agriculture.

Innovation that could boost private sector participation

Agriculture is one of the sectors where there is the greatest amount of innovation. There are a range of opportunities to leverage private finance for agriculture adaptation – especially as part of the wider agricultural reform programme. In general, blended finance offers a significant opportunity to incentivise further opportunities for investment in adaptation. For example, it can mainstream adaptation into loan requirements for agricultural investment, or support investment in dedicated adaptation activities. In Scotland, elements of nature restoration on farmland could be financed through biodiversity credits. Blended public-private models such as the Scottish Government £1m Agritourism Investment Scheme – offering grants of up to £50,000 covering 40% of eligible capital costs – can support farm diversification and rural resilience (Savills, 2026).

These can also be complemented by other models which support investment, including from suppliers interested in value chain resilience, or using offtaker agreements.

There are also specific models for investment that target particular activities or parts of the supply chain. For example, use of Public Private Partnership (PPPs) for climate resilient seeds, or the use of digital platforms to provide weather and advisory services) to support farm activities. In addition, parametric insurance offers faster, more transparent cover for systemic risks including drought, flooding, frost and yield shortfalls. It pays out automatically when pre-agreed environmental thresholds are met, rather than requiring loss assessment (Descartes, 2026). Parameters must be carefully designed to avoid leaving farmers exposed to events that fall outside agreed trigger conditions.

Shared rural infrastructure offers a further avenue for cost-effective private investment. Co-operative models – for example, shared grain stores and drying equipment – spread capital costs across multiple businesses while building collective resilience to weather-related yield losses. Similarly, investment in commercial deer carcass processing infrastructure, including improved Approved Game Handling Establishments (AGHEs), could support the economic viability of deer management, which delivers biodiversity, habitat restoration, and natural flood risk management benefits alongside commercial returns. Where shared infrastructure generates both adaptation outcomes and commercial revenues across multiple beneficiaries, blended public-private financing is well suited and could be supported through existing rural development funding mechanisms (World Bank, 2019).

Finally, there are newer and more experimental models being developed, such as the use of Resilience Credits; summarised in Table 9. While conceptually similar to carbon credits, they are more challenging to operationalise due to the conceptual challenges of adaptation, such as avoided future losses and the local place-based context of adaptation and resilience.

Table 9: Examples of innovative models for private participation in agriculture, with cost recovery model. Source: Updated from Watkiss and England (2025).

Model

Examples

Cost recovery model

Blended finance

Many examples of public and private investment, e.g. World Bank (2019), Scottish Government Agri-Environment schemes

User pays but can generate value addition through financial return (adaptation goods and services)

Concessional Credit Lines (e.g. SNIB)

Many examples of below-market loans and guarantees

Offtaker agreements / Supply chain finance

AMRU Rice (McNally et al., 2024)

Ex-post proof sharing

Warehouse receipt financing

Value chain integration

International Finance Corporation’s (IFC’s) Global Warehouse Finance Program (IFC, n.d.)

Digital platforms (weather and advisory

GeoKrishi (GeoKrishi, n.d.)

Resilience credits (reward investment in adaptation)

IFAD (Puri and Chowdhury, 2023)

Seed value chain

Tolerant seed multiplication (IFC, 2019)

PPPs for seed companies

FAO public–private blended finance facility for climate-resilient rice landscapes (Damon, 2023)

Communities

Key climate risks and adaptation opportunities

Flooding is the largest climate-driven threats to communities and the built environment in Scotland, with exposure increasing across riverine, coastal and surface water systems (SEPA, 2025). Surface water flooding is the most widespread form of flooding as more frequent extreme rainfall events are overwhelming drainage networks and intensifying surface water flooding. Approximately 400,000 properties are currently at risk from a 1-in-200-year flood event (SEPA, 2025). Flooding already costs Scotland an estimated £500m every year – and that figure will likely grow (SEPA, 2025). Beyond physical damage, flood events trigger persistent mental health impacts, particularly where households face prolonged displacement or repeated flooding. In addition, the burden falls disproportionately on socially vulnerable coastal, urban and rural communities (Sayers et al., 2018; Song et al., 2025). As climate change and population growth converge, exposure is projected to extend into areas with no historical flooding experience.

Addressing these risks requires a coordinated, forward-looking approach to spatial planning, infrastructure design and community-level adaptation. Key priorities identified by CCRA3 (2021) include stricter controls on development in flood-exposed areas, greater enforcement of Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS), wider uptake of Property Flood Resilience (PFR) measures, and better integration of natural flood management alongside traditional defences. CCRA3 (2021) also highlight improved flood forecasting, public warning systems and more targeted investment in vulnerable communities, alongside updated planning policies that embed climate-ready design principles. As surface water flooding is projected to increase under all climate scenarios, a strategic approach combining planning, infrastructure, social policy and community engagement will be critical to safeguarding people and places (Sniffer, 2021).

Current spending and context

Flood protection schemes

The Scottish Government has maintained a long-term baseline of £42m/yr for flood protection schemes since at least 2015/16, supplemented by a one-off top-up of £150m. Together this totals £570m invested in flood resilience over 2016–2026 (Scottish Government, 2024a; Scottish Government, 2025e). Local authorities also contribute to the cost of building major flood schemes. In the national ‘cycle 1’ scheme, it is estimated that the Scottish Government pays for 80% of the costs and local authorities pay for the remaining 20% of the costs. If costs increase after a specific point in the process, local authorities must pay for those increases. Local authorities also pay for ongoing maintenance once the flood schemes have been built (Audit Scotland, 2025).

Of the 40 flood protection schemes in ‘cycle 1’ (2016–2021) originally deemed eligible for funding, eight were subsequently abandoned and one was separated into a dedicated taskforce, leaving 31 viable schemes. As of early 2026, 21 of these have been completed. One is currently under construction, and a further six schemes are expected to have main construction contracts in place by March 2026. Three remain eligible for funding. However, projected costs across the programme have escalated significantly. For example, the Hawick scheme rose from £37.4m to £78.6m, Musselburgh from £8.9m to £106m, and Dumfries Whitesands from £18.9m to £68.6m (Internal Scottish Government Data – collected from local authorities in November 2024).

On average this investment has protected approximately 600 additional homes per year from flooding between 2016–2026 (Scottish Government, 2025e). However, climate change is exposing an estimated additional 3,000 properties to flood risk each year (SEPA, 2025), meaning that even if the flood protection scheme cycle was fully delivered, it would struggle to keep pace with the scale of need.

Property flood resilience

Property flood resilience (PFR) measures are an important complement to wider flood protection schemes, with particular suitability for managing surface water flooding (Pettit et al., 2020). PFR measures include resistance measures that prevent water entry and resilience measures that reduce damage and speed recovery. Currently, only a small share of Scotland’s flood protection budget is directed towards PFR, despite its potential to provide cost-effective protection for properties exposed to frequent flooding. JBA Risk Management (2025) identifies 4,679 PFR-eligible properties in Scotland with a payback period of 3–5 years, drawn from a wider total of 116,073 properties considering Great Britain, England, Wales and Scotland. However, this represents only a fraction of the likely need – at least 81,000 homes have been identified as suitable for PFR more broadly (Petitt et al., 2020). This figure predates SEPA’s updated flood risk assessment and may therefore underestimate current exposure. This suggests that the near-term investment requirement for properties where PFR is highly cost-effective is relatively modest and well-defined. However, the investment need across the broader pool of suitable properties is considerably less certain, requiring further research.

Capacity building

Climate Action Hubs, Adaptation Scotland, and Climate Ready Regions are the three main Scottish Government programmes delivering systemic capacity building for adaptation beyond infrastructure interventions. These programmes are intended to support communities, businesses, and public bodies to understand and respond to a wide range of climate hazards including flooding, heat, drought, sea level rise, and storms. The Adaptation Scotland Programme works across a broad range of sectors beyond communities. A proportion of Climate Action Hubs activity relates to mitigation rather than adaptation. In both cases, full budget allocations have been retained as spending cannot be reliably disaggregated between adaptation, mitigation, and other functions.

Drainage partnership funding – representing important capacity building at the catchment level – is included within adaptation cost estimates for the water sector and is not included here to avoid double-counting.

Adaptation investment need

This analysis focuses on flood risk management to assess climate adaptation investment needs for communities, covering flood protection schemes, property flood resilience (PFR), natural flood risk management, and wider capacity building. Some flood adaptation measures, such as improved hydrological modelling and early warning systems, have not been costed here and would add to the overall investment need. Other hazards affecting communities – including coastal erosion, drought, heatwaves and wind – fall outside the scope of this analysis and could be explored in further work.

Flood risk management entails a wide range of activities. Our research sought to cover expenditure across four main spending lines: (a) flood protection schemes, (b) property flood resilience (PFR), (c) natural flood risk management (implicitly included in the natural environment budget), and (d) wider capacity building.

This was challenging for two reasons: firstly, it was difficult to establish how Scotland’s current budget is allocated across these spending lines. Secondly, there was an absence of quantified targets or risk-tolerance levels against which investment needs could be scaled. For example, if the Scottish Government were to commit to protecting all high flood risk social housing, it would be possible to identify the number of eligible properties and estimate protection costs accordingly, but without such targets, scaling investment needs requires assumptions that introduce additional uncertainty. As a result, multiple complementary methods were used to assess investment need, with the caveat that there may be a small degree of double-counting between individual estimates. Estimating potential avoided losses from flood risk investment was also particularly challenging in this sector.

Flood protection schemes

To estimate future investment requirements for flood protection schemes, we take two approaches:

  • We uplift the historic baseline funding of £42m/yr, in place from at least 2015/16 (Audit Scotland, 2025), using the ONS construction price index. This yields an estimated £63m/yr and a total projected requirement of £882m for the period 2026 to 2040 (Table 5).
  • We take DEFRA flood protection commitments of £7.9bn for England between 2025 and 2035 (UK Government, 2025) and scale to Scotland based on dwelling stock. This yields an equivalent figure of £79m/yr, or £1,102m over 2026–2040. This value-transfer approach rests on assumptions of comparable housing stock, property type, and flood risk exposure with the wider UK and should be treated with appropriate caution.

Both figures are presented in Table 10 to reflect the inherent uncertainty in projecting long-term flood protection expenditure. Together, these approaches indicate an adaptation investment need for communities via flood protection schemes of £885m – £1,102m over the period 20262040.

Table 10: Property flood protection scheme climate adaptation estimates 2026–2040, assuming uplift of Scotland’s historic £42m/yr guaranteed spend for the historic Scottish budget scaled, and 10% of wider UK pledge to be proportionate to Scottish dwellings.

Flood protection schemes

Historic Scottish budget scaled

DEFRA pledge (Scotland equivalent)

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

£63.2m/yr

£885m

£78.7m/yr

£1,102m

This estimate is likely conservative, as it captures only Scottish Government central funding. Local authorities also contribute toward flood protection investment. For example, within ‘cycle 1’ local authorities contributed an estimated 20% of the investment need and the cost of maintenance (Audit Scotland, 2025).

Property flood resilience

Investment need for property flood resilience (PFR) was estimated by applying unit costs from JBA Risk Management (2025) to the 4,679 PFR-eligible properties in Scotland identified as having a payback period of approximately 3–5 years. This focus on properties with the strongest return on investment reduces the risk of double-counting with the wider flood protection budget, while reflecting the economic case for targeted intervention. Unit costs of approximately £2,250 per property for limited PFR measures (e.g., temporary flood barriers for doors, air brick covers, toilet bungs) and £11,000 for standard measures (e.g., permanent flood doors, extensive waterproofing / re-pointing of external walls) were applied accordingly.

By multiplying the average cost per property for limited measures (£2,250) and for standard measures (£11,000) by properties eligible with a short payback period (4,679 properties), calculations indicate an adaptation investment need for communities via property flood resilience measures of £10.5m £51.5m over the period 20262040, equivalent to £0.75m/yr £3.68m/yr (Table 11).

Table 11: Property flood resilience climate adaptation investment need where payback time is likely approximately 5 years, using JBA Risk Management (2025) data

Property flood resilience

Limited measures

Standard measures

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

£0.75m/yr

£10.5m

£3.68m/yr

£51.5m

The economic case for investment is reinforced by JBA Risk Management (2025) analysis of Annual Average Losses (AAL), which indicates that delivering standard PFR measures across all 4,679 eligible properties could reduce AAL from £22.8m to £11.1m – a saving of £11.7m per year, suggesting the full cost of standard intervention would be recovered through avoided flood damages within approximately five years.

Capacity building activities

Capacity building investment need was estimated by reviewing expected funding pathways for three programmes, in consultation with Scottish Government policy teams. Climate Action Hubs are estimated at £6m/yr (£84m to 2039/40); Adaptation Scotland at £0.4m/yr (£6m to 2039/40); and Climate Ready Regions at £0.55m/yr rising to £0.9m/yr between 2026 and 2029, remaining at £0.9m/yr through to 2039/40 (£12m to 2039/40). Case study 2 highlights one of the Climate Ready regions funded initiatives. Furthermore, it should be noted that capacity building investment need spans risks beyond flooding – including storms, drought, wildfires, and heatwaves – and encompasses some capacity building for climate mitigation that could not be disentangled from adaptation spend. Together, our calculations indicate adaptation investment need for communities via capacity building amount to £102m between 2026–2040 (Table 12).

Table 12: Estimated climate adaptation investment need for capacity building activities within the communities’ sector between 2026–2040. Costs in 2026/27 prices.

Capacity building activities

 

Standard measures

Action

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

Climate action hubs

£6m/yr

£84m

Adaptation Scotland

£0.4m/yr

£6m

Climate ready regions

£0.55m – £0.9m/yr

£12m

 

Total:

£102m

These figures assume current spending levels, increasing nominally, are sufficient to meet future adaptation capacity building needs – an assumption that may warrant revisiting as Scotland’s adaptation requirements become better understood.

Case Study 2: University of Strathclyde Raingarden Parklet Case Study

The Raingarden Parklet, led by Hope in Place CIC and supported by Civic, is an innovative piece of green urban infrastructure designed, created, and built in Glasgow. It represents a new approach to sustainable urban drainage systems (SuDs). It aims to reduce peak run off during intense rainfall. while simultaneously creating social value through education, training, and pathways into green jobs.

The modular unit measures 4.5m × 1.5m × 1.2m and costs approximately £10,000 to design and manufacture. The University of Strathclyde secured £15,000 through Climate Ready Regions funding via Climate Ready Clyde, covering the parklet and a proportion of the £15,000 – £20,000 installation costs.

The final location outside the Andersonian Library was selected through stakeholder consultation against criteria including flood risk, footfall, and connection to local drainage infrastructure. It demonstrates what can be achieved in a single car parking space and offering a visible symbol of Glasgow’s shift towards greener, healthier streets.

Beyond flood resilience, the pilot delivers co-benefits across public realm enhancement, green skills and employment, and justice system reform. The parklet was constructed in HMP Barlinnie using recycled materials, with profits funding a training pathway towards a ‘Green Skills Factory’ at the new HMP Glasgow and the project fostering broader community-university collaboration. This has the potential to act as a catalyst for further investment in modular, scalable adaptation solutions that deliver integrated benefits for society, the environment, and the economy.

Example of a raingarden parklet. Image credit: Ben Raw.

Total adaptation investment need for communities through flood measures.

In total, the adaptation investment need estimate for communities – focusing predominantly on flood management – is £997.5m – £1,256m between 2026–2040, equivalent to £71.2m/yr – £89.7m/yr (Table 13).

Table 13: Estimated climate adaptation investment need for flood protection schemes, property flood resilience and capacity building between 2026 – 2040. 2026/27 prices.

Sub-sector

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

Flood protection schemes

£63.2 – £78.7m/yr

£885 – £1,102m

Property flood resilience

£0.75 – £3.68m/yr

£10.5 – £52m

Capacity building

Approx. £7.29m/yr

£102m

Total

£71.2 – £89.7m/yr

£997.5 – £1,256m

Macroeconomic effects and wider impacts

Macroeconomic impacts

The communities sector adaptation package, covering regional hubs, property flood resilience and flood protection schemes, amounts to around £978m between 2026 and 2040, approximately £65m/yr. This is slightly lower than the figures quoted in section 4.2.3.4 because of rounding and the pricing being in different years.

Without cost recovery (a modelling device to isolate the spending effect): By 2040, Construction records an output gain of £38m and roughly 575 jobs, while architectural services and “all other services” add £9m in output and 120 jobs. Modest positive impacts appear in wholesale and retail trade, fabricated metals, manufacturing and primary sectors, reflecting supply-chain linkages. The overall effect is a modest but broadly positive local economic boost centred on construction, professional services and local services.

With “government pays” cost recovery (a stylised scenario): When the Scottish Government recovers costs through higher income tax, construction retains most of its gains, recording £35m in output and around 530 jobs. Architectural services and supply-chain activities such as fabricated metals and steel also remain positive. However, consumer-facing sectors reverse direction. Retail (excluding vehicles) shifts from a £1.7m gain and 36 jobs in the no-recovery case to a £2.8m loss and 59 fewer jobs once taxes rise. Similarly, “all other services” flips from an £8.6m gain and 114 jobs to a £15m loss and 187 fewer jobs. Financial services, travel, transport, manufacturing and energy sectors also turn negative as squeezed household incomes reduce demand. In simple terms, higher income taxes reduce disposable incomes, which reduces consumer spending, putting pressure on retail, hospitality and service jobs.

Policy implications: Even relatively modest adaptation programmes provide meaningful local benefits in construction and professional services. However, income-tax recovery dampens broader gains: it is more progressive than raising prices for essential goods, but it still reduces household budgets and activity in consumer-facing sectors. Policymakers need to weigh these short-term sectoral effects against the long-term flood protection and community resilience benefits.

Wider impacts

The economic case for adaptation investment in flood resilience for communities is strong. Defra estimates that every £1 spent on flood defences prevents around £8 in economic damage (UK Government, 2025). Furthermore, the expected annual cost of flooding impacts in Scotland is now approximately £260m/yr (Scottish Government, 2025e), with multi-hazard events, such as the associated flooding from 11 named storms between November 2015 and March 2016, negatively impacting the UK economy by 0.08% of GDP (Office for Budget Responsibility, 2024). Consequently, the potential avoided losses from sustained investment in flood protection schemes remain substantial. Note, further research is required to develop a full understanding of the wider co-benefits associated with investing in flood protection schemes, PFR and wider capacity building.

Current governance, funding and financing arrangements

Flood risk management is currently predominantly funded by the public sector as illustrated in Figure 7. This includes direct funding from Scottish government for schemes. Responsibilities are set out under the Flood Risk Management (Scotland) Act 2009. Most flood investment is provided by Scottish Government, who provide £42m/yr. However, this is provided at an intervention rate of 80%, with an additional 20% from local authorities from general ringfenced funding. Assuming this is spent, an additional £8.4m a year is provided by local authorities. Allocating the same percentage of private sector contribution (37%) as for transport, suggests that around £3.1m (37% of £8.4m) a year is contributed by households and businesses.

Some levels of PFR are funded by households, both domestically and through Flood Re’s Build Back Better scheme (a joint initiative between the UK insurance industry, see Innovation section, below), but this is relatively low. Details of the number of properties ceded to flood Re, or properties provided with PFR, are not publicly available. The Flood Re market study assumes around 500 – 550 residential properties a year going through (Borio and Kassian, 2023). This suggests around £540,000 a year in contributions, though both the Borio and Kassian (2023) study and Pettit et al. (2020) highlight most of these schemes are publicly funded or subsidised. Therefore, for the purposes of the study, we assume the total contribution to floods indirectly via Council Tax and Non-Domestic Rates to be roughly 7%.

Figure 7: Financing, funding, and delivery arrangements for adaptation in flood protection schemes and property flood resilience.

Innovation that could boost private sector participation

Opportunities to leverage private investment in adapting to changing flood risk in Scotland could include:

Scotland Bond Issuance programme: Scottish Government is in the process of putting in place the mechanisms to facilitate the issuance of bonds, having obtained a credit rating and appointing banks and legal advisors (Scottish Government, 2026a). This has been used in the UK to provide upfront financing for Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management, with UK Government reporting on use of proceeds. Similar mechanisms could be used to provide a significant boost to available capital investment.

The FloodRe ‘build back better’ scheme: For communities impacted by flooding, it is likely their properties will be eligible for the FloodRe ‘build back better’ scheme, a joint initiative between the UK insurance industry and the UK Government, which offers householders the chance to install property flood resilience measures up to the value of £10,000 when repairing their properties after a flood (FloodRe, 2023). No data is currently published on use, but uptake is thought to be low.

Scotland’s current resilience organisations: These span Regional and Local Resilience Partnerships, Community Resilience Committees, and Category 1 and 2 responders (Brett et al., 2026). They represent a cost-effective foundation for building adaptation capacity without requiring entirely new delivery structures. Embedding adaptation within local authority contingency planners, local resilience partnerships, and community councils offers a pragmatic route to scaling capacity building across Scotland’s communities and institutions. Private sector organisations, particularly utility and transport operators operating as Category 2 responders, are well positioned to potentially contribute co-funding and expertise to this capacity building as part of their existing statutory obligations and business continuity responsibilities.

There are multiple opportunities to increase both private sector funding and financing. Financing opportunities relate to the use of a range of debt financing instruments, such as green bonds, to support adaptation. There have also been examples where development banks have provided commercial funds to help local authorities address fiscal space constraints. In addition, there have been some examples in England where the use of PPPs has been used to unlock private sector financing for flood defences. In a similar vein, Land Value Capture and Tax Increment Financing provides an option to unlock future revenue streams through increases in land value or development through investment in flood defences. Parametric insurance has also been used to provide upfront protection for coral reefs which serve as flood defences as well as payouts for recovery.

There are also schemes which encourage private sector funding (summarised in Table 14), such as direct contributions to flood risk management schemes. Evidence from the National Audit Office suggests that around 9% of total contributions to flood defences in England came from businesses (National Audit Office, 2023) – but also from more local schemes, such as the use of climate resilience districts or water funds. There is also the potential for the use of tourism taxes and levies, as well as dedicated levies for climate resilience, such as those in Greece or Italy (Venice). There are also models which leverage revenue streams from co-investment such as in the Netherlands where revenues from wind turbines have been used to partially fund dikes.

Table 14: Examples of innovative models for private participation in flood protection, with cost recovery model. Source: Authors, updated from Watkiss and England, 2025.

Model

Examples

Cost recovery model

Green bonds / resilience bonds

UK green bonds (gilts) include coastal projects (UK Debt Management Office, n.d.) European Bank for Reconstruction and Development climate resilience bonds (Bennett, 2019)

Government pays

Public Private Partnership (PPPs)

UK Broadlands (Jacobs, n.d.) / US Fargo

Mixed

Parametric insurance

Quintana Roo (Green Finance Institute, 2024a)

User pays (public and private sources)

Local water use charges or taxes

Copenhagen Cloudburst (City of Copenhagen, 2012)

User pays (local public and private)

Land Value Capture / Tax Increment Financing

Mission Rock Bhutan Phuentsholing Township Development (ADB, 2018)

User pays

Mitigation co-benefits

RWE wind turbines on dikes, Netherlands (Windpowernl, 2022)

Co-benefit streams – energy sales

Private co-funding of flood defences

UK Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management Strategy

Business pays

Increased private contribution to PFR

UK assessment (Wood Environment & Infrastructure Solutions UK Limited, 2019)

User pays (private) (Possible insurance benefit).

Climate resilience districts

US (California, Connetticut),

Businesses pay

Tourist taxes / Levies

Hawaii (Jacobo, 2025), Venice, Greece

User pays

Concessional Finance

National Wealth Fund, Wales

Government pays

Natural environment

Key climate risks and adaptation opportunities

Peatland

Scotland’s peatlands face serious and accelerating degradation from multiple climate pressures. Heavier rainfall increases erosion and carbon-rich sediment loss, while warmer, drier summers accelerate oxidation and peat loss – with degraded lowland peatlands already losing 1–2 cm of soil depth annually. Heightened wildfire risk adds further pressure, and many peatlands remain inadequately monitored, meaning the true extent of degradation may be underestimated. Climate risk is projected to rise from medium to high, with the potential for irreversible loss of peatland functions including carbon storage, biodiversity support and water regulation (Sniffer, 2021).

Reversing this degradation requires more comprehensive monitoring of peat condition, integrated land-use policies prioritising protection and restoration, and targeted guidance for land managers on re-wetting, water management and erosion prevention. Peatland adaptation must also align closely with mitigation strategies. For example, directing woodland expansion onto mineral soils rather than peat, and stress-testing net zero measures against future climate risks. Better research on climate impacts to carbon stores, more systematic soil carbon monitoring, and strategic cross-sector land-use planning across agriculture, forestry and coastal zones will be essential to safeguard water quality, flood regulation and the reliability of Scotland’s greenhouse gas projections as the climate shifts (Sniffer, 2021).

Forestry

Scotland’s forestry sector faces serious and interconnected climate threats (risks N6, N8 and N9 in CCRA3). Rising temperatures and increasing drought, particularly in central and eastern regions, are reducing growth rates, affecting timber quality and shifting species viability. Commercially important species such as Sitka spruce are losing ground to more drought-tolerant alternatives. Broadleaved species face severe stress from more frequent extreme weather. Warmer conditions are also accelerating the arrival and spread of pests, pathogens and invasive species, including Phytophthora ramorum, Dothistroma needle blight and bark beetles, compounded by increasing deer damage. Overall risk is projected to rise from medium to high under future warming, while potential opportunities from longer growing seasons and expanded species suitability remain largely unrealised due to adaptation barriers (Sniffer, 2021).

Building forestry resilience requires integrated action across several fronts. Strategic land-use planning must embed both adaptation and mitigation objectives, with clearer decisions about which forest types and locations remain viable as conditions change. Improved surveillance and biosecurity at ports of entry, better soil and water management, strengthened wildfire preparedness, and diversified woodland species and structures will all help spread risk and improve long-term productivity. Warmer temperatures do create opportunities for previously unsuitable species such as Douglas fir and fast-growing bioenergy trees, but realising these benefits requires deliberate research and field trials. Enhanced cross-sector coordination, better knowledge exchange with land managers, and targeted research into future-adapted management systems will be essential to maintain carbon storage, support Net Zero transitions, and preserve the ecological and economic value of Scotland’s woodlands as the climate shifts (Sniffer, 2021).

Nature restoration

There are also multiple adaptation opportunities within the nature restoration that align with wider biodiversity and carbon mitigation targets. Case study 3 outlines on-going research NatureScot is conducting to explore catchment scale nature restoration cost estimates.

Case study 3: Catchment scale nature restoration, NatureScot

Context

  • NatureScot is working with SEPA, Scottish Water, FLS and Scottish Forestry to review and prioritise landscape / catchment scale nature restoration projects across Scotland (Scottish Biodiversity Strategy Action 2.1) and align this with SNAP3 objective NC2 on landscape scale approaches to climate adaptation and river basin management planning.

Preliminary cost estimates

NatureScot have started to estimate the costs of restoring catchments across Scotland and work is underway to refine these. Early in financial year 2026/27 they hope to have indicative costs for catchment scale restoration across Scotland, likely to be in the region of £5bn. Through 2026/27 they will develop a costed pipeline of projects out to 2045, refining the cost estimates at project scale to inform an Investment Plan for delivery.

Current methods use GIS analysis and cost assumptions based on existing projects. During 2026/27, the projects themselves will estimate costs to inform a more accurate cost estimate.

Key challenges and opportunities for climate adaptation at a catchment scale:

  • Lack of evidence on the costs of natural flood management
  • Lack of evidence to support quantification of benefits and to inform a business case
  • Lack of long-term commitments to the funding streams that currently pay for restoration and insufficient funding for the scale of the challenge
  • Immature nature finance market which is not yet delivering private investment at the scale required. 

Current spending and context

Current Scottish Government spending includes specific investment in nature based climate solutions. For 2026/27, the Scottish Budget allocates £28m for peatland restoration, supporting the restoration of over 10,000 hectares of degraded peatland. A further £37m is committed to woodland creation, aimed at delivering more than 12,000 hectares of new woodland (Scottish Government, 2026b). In addition, £26m is allocated through the Climate Taxonomy for nature restoration activities, supporting wider ecological recovery and contributing to long-term climate adaptation and resilience objectives (Scottish Government, 2026c).

Adaptation investment need

Cost estimates for the natural environment draw on the Scottish Government’s draft Climate Change Plan (CCP) and Scottish Budget Climate Taxonomy (2026/27), with expert-elicited proportions assigned to reflect the share of costs attributable to adaptation. These proportions, 25% for peatland restoration, 6.25% for woodland creation, and 20% for wider nature restoration, were derived by examining the mixed objectives of each budget line and assigning a share to adaptation relative to co-benefits such as carbon mitigation, biodiversity gain, and flood alleviation. For peatland restoration, for example, carbon mitigation is the primary objective of the CCP spend, with flood reduction and biodiversity functioning as secondary objectives; the adaptation proportion reflects this hierarchy. These proportions were cross-checked through expert review with Paul Watkiss Associates, drawing on comparable apportionment approaches used in parallel Climate Change Committee analysis for England (Watkiss et al., 2026a). No uplift for increasing climate risk was applied to these estimates up to 2040. It should be noted that other relevant actions – including wildfire management and enhanced monitoring of peatland and woodland restoration – have not been costed here and would add to the overall investment need.

Peatland

Scotland’s draft CCP projects peatland restoration ramping up from approximately 15,400 ha/yr in 2026 to just over 22,500 ha/yr from 2030 onwards, totalling 319,489 ha by 2040, contributing toward the wider Scottish Government target of 400,000 ha of peatland restoration by 2040. Total peatland restoration costs were estimated using the draft CCP central estimate of £2,894/ha (capital and resource combined), assuming a mix of peat types restored across 2026 – 2040, with capital costs derived from Glenk et al. (2025) using 2022 grant data uplifted to current prices using ONS GDP deflators. Applied to the CCP’s restoration target, this yields a total cost of £925m (£66m/yr) in 2025/26 prices for 2026–2040. A 25% adaptation apportionment was applied on the basis that, while the off-site adaptation benefits of peatland restoration represent a relatively modest share of overall benefits, there are also meaningful on-site benefits to the peatlands themselves. The UK National Adaptation Plan similarly cites climate resilience as one of four core benefits of restoration (Watkiss et al., 2026a).

We estimate climate adaptation investment need for peatland restoration at £236m to 2040, equivalent to £16.8m/yr. It is important to note that peatland restoration costs are subject to considerable uncertainty, varying significantly by peat type, depth, location, site accessibility, and contracting arrangements. Okumah et al. (2019) report a median restoration cost of £1,009/ha, with a range of £3,707 between minimum and maximum estimates. Glenk et al. (2025) report costs ranging from £191/ha at the 5th percentile to £4,483/ha at the 95th percentile. This wide cost distribution means peatland restoration estimates should be treated with particular caution. Further research to better constrain unit costs would meaningfully improve the robustness of future investment needs assessments.

Woodland creation

Scotland’s draft CCP projects woodland creation ramping up from 12000 ha/yr in 2026 to 18,000 ha/yr from 2029 onwards, totalling 258,000 ha between 2026–2040. For woodland the study used the central estimates of total costs provided by the Scottish Government. These estimates include the total capital, maintenance and administration costs between Scottish Government and businesses at a total of £1,799m to 2040.

Apportioning a share of this expenditure to climate adaptation is not straightforward. The primary objective of woodland creation is carbon mitigation, and woodlands can in some cases increase certain climate risks. For example, this can be through disease spread, fallen trees from storms, and increased vegetation growth affecting critical infrastructure (e.g., Bebber et al., 2025; Network Rail Scotland, 2024). Identifying the adaptation-specific component therefore required an evidence-based approach.

To apportion a share of expenditure, we drew on the Economic and Natural Capital Assessment (ENCA) database to compare the economic value of flood control benefits delivered by woodland creation and peatland restoration, expressed in £/ha/yr. Flood control was the only comparable adaptation benefit available to us in consistent monetary terms across both habitat types. The evidence indicates that flood control benefits from woodland creation are approximately four times lower than those from peatland restoration per hectare (Broadmeadow et al., 2023; Morris and Camino, 2011). Having assigned a 25% adaptation apportionment to peatland restoration on this basis, we therefore applied a proportionally scaled figure of 6.25% to woodland creation. This apportionment was cross-checked through expert review with Paul Watkiss Associates.

We recognise that this approach captures only one dimension of adaptation value – flood control – and that other potential adaptation benefits of woodland creation, such as shade provision, slope stabilisation, and reduced surface runoff, are not reflected in the apportionment. This figure should therefore be treated as a conservative estimate and is identified as a priority area for further research and methodological development.

We estimate climate adaptation investment need for woodland creation at £8.2m per year or £115m between 2026–2040.

Nature restoration

Finally, there is an additional budget line in the Scottish Budget 2026/27 (Scottish Government, 2026b) relating to nature restoration. The Climate Taxonomy identifies a nature restoration budget line of £26m/year, relating to policy development and implementation to manage and restore Scotland’s biodiversity and landscapes. This also includes provision of the Nature Restoration Fund and continued commitment to the Central Scotland Green Network (Scottish Government, 2026c), at a consistent level of funding. By assessing the multiple objectives of nature restoration, we assume 20% of these benefits are related to adaptation. We estimate climate adaptation investment need for nature restoration at £5.2m/yr for a total of £73m between 2026–2040.

Total adaptation investment need for natural environment

We estimate climate adaptation investment need for peatland restoration, woodland creation and nature restoration at £16.8m/yr, £8.2m/yr and £5.3m/yr respectively, totalling £30.2m/yr, or approximately £423.8m between 2026–2040 (Table 15).

Table 15: Estimated climate adaptation investment need for peatland restoration, woodland creation and nature restoration between 2026–2040. These costs represent a proportion of the total spend from the Climate Change Plan or the Scottish Budget that is related to adaptation for woodland creation (6.25%), peatland restoration (25%) and nature restoration (20%) accordingly. In 2026/27 prices.

Sector

% Apportionment

Cost p.a. (£m/yr)

Total up to 2039/40 (£m)

Peatland restoration

25%

£16.8m/yr

£236m

Woodland creation

6.25%

£8.2m/yr

£114.7m

Nature restoration

20%

£5.2m/yr

£73.1m

Total

 

£30.2m/yr

£423.8m

Macroeconomic effects and wider impacts

Macroeconomic impacts

For natural environment, we’ve modelled the total spending outlined in the Climate Change Plan and nature restoration budget (as opposed to the adaptation portion of £423.8m – see Section 4.3.3.4). This totals just over £3bn between 2026–2040, around £200m/yr.

Without cost recovery (a modelling device to isolate the spending effect): The programme generates substantial gains in “other primary” activities – forestry and land-use sectors – where output rises by around £92m and employment by roughly 1,050 jobs by 2040. Agriculture adds £1m in output and 14 jobs. Construction gains £11m in output and 170 jobs, while “all other services” contributes around £29m and 380 jobs. The overall effect is a broad-based but especially land-focused expansion, reflecting the labour-intensive and locally embedded nature of restoration activities.

With “government pays” via expenditure cuts in all areas (a stylised scenario): When costs are recovered through public spending cuts, widespread reversals occur, particularly in service sectors. “All other services” shifts from a gain of £29m and nearly 380 jobs to a loss of roughly £102m and around 1,300 jobs. Education moves from a gain of £2.8m and 60 jobs to a loss of nearly £25m and over 520 jobs. Public administration records a decline of about £43m and nearly 480 jobs. Retail, financial services and transport flip from modest gains to losses. Even the core land-use sectors are affected: “Other primary” moves from a gain of around £92m to a small loss, and construction swings from a gain of £11m and 170 jobs to a loss of around £14m and 200 jobs. Manufacturing gains are largely erased. The aggregate effect under income-tax funding is contractionary by 2040, meaning that while restoration work still channels activity into land-use sectors, the broader economic impact turns negative once cost recovery is factored in.

Policy implications: Land-based adaptation can boost rural employment and supply chains significantly, but spending-cut recovery creates widespread service-sector losses that outweigh the direct stimulus. This highlights an acute trade-off between using spending cut and preserving activity in consumption-dependent and public-service sectors. The results exclude long-term ecosystem, carbon sequestration, flood risk reduction and recreation benefits, which are particularly important for Scotland’s climate and biodiversity goals.

Wider impacts

Woodland creation and peatland restoration generate multiple co-benefits beyond direct climate adaptation. These include carbon storage, biodiversity gain, water quality improvement, air quality, temperature regulation, flood regulation, recreation, and physical health. Resource constraints prevented a comprehensive review of all co-benefits; however, we have estimated the value of a selected range, assuming that the peatland restoration and woodland creation targets for 2026 –2040 set out in the draft CCP (see section 4.3.3) are successfully completed, to current climate resilience standards, and established by 2050.

Should the 319,488 ha of peatland targeted under the draft CCP be successfully restored between 2026 and 2040, this could generate approximately £267m/yr in flood control and storm buffering benefits, £191m/yr in water quality benefits, and £199m/yr in biodiversity benefits (Table 16).

Should the 258,000 ha of woodland targeted for creation between 2026 and 2040 be successfully established to climate-resilient standards, a range of co-benefits could be realised by 2050, once the woodland has had time to develop. These include flood storage (£29m/yr–£54m/yr), recreation and health benefits (£383m/yr), biodiversity benefits (£46m/yr), and avoided mental health costs (£48m/yr) (Table 16).

These figures carry considerable uncertainty, reflecting both the pace of establishment and the assumptions underpinning each co-benefit category. They nonetheless demonstrate that the economic case for woodland creation as a climate adaptation investment strengthens substantially when co-benefits are considered. It also demonstrates that the investment need estimates presented above likely understate the full economic value of this expenditure.

Table 16 Estimated value of a range of co-benefits (£m/yr) for 258,000ha of established woodland, and 319,488ha of established peatland restoration in 2026/27 prices.

Sub-sector

Co-benefit

Total benefits (£m/yr)

Source

Woodland creation

Flood storage

£29m/yr – £54m/yr

Broadmeadow et al. 2023

Additional recreation and health

£391m/yr

Scarpa, 2003

Biodiversity

£46m/yr

Willis et al., 2003

Avoided mental health costs

£50m/yr

Shanahan et al., 2016

Peatland restoration

Flood control and storm buffering

£267m/yr

Morris and Camino, 2011

Water quality

£191m/yr

Morris and Camino, 2011

Biodiversity

£199m/yr

Morris and Camino, 2011

Current governance, funding and financing arrangements

Peatland restoration

To deliver the Scottish Government targets for peatland restoration, Scottish Government funds five delivery partners to undertake peatland restoration to meet these targets: NatureScot, Loch Lomond and Trossachs National Park Authority, Cairngorms National Park Authority, Forestry and Land Scotland and Scottish Water seen in Figure 8 (Scottish Government 2023a). There have been some elements to crowd fund in private sector finance but for now this investment is presumed to be purely public. Beyond public funding, there has been minimal investment in peatland restoration from private sources to date, including through voluntary carbon markets (Scottish Government, 2023a).

Figure 8: Financing, funding, and delivery arrangements for adaptation in peatland restoration. Adapted from Paul Watkiss Associates.

Woodland creation

The governance landscape for woodland creation is complicated, summarised in Figure 9. It is overseen and delivered by two executive agencies – Scottish Forestry and Forest and Land Scotland. Scottish Forestry is the government agency responsible for forestry policy, regulation and grant schemes. Forestry and Land Scotland are the operational land-management agency for the forest estate. However, much planting occurs on private land and for commercial purposes. Investment in new woodland creation is supported by grants through the Forestry Grant Scheme. This supports the creation of new woodland, as well as management of existing woodlands and investments in forest infrastructure such as protection.

An evaluation of the previous phase of the Forestry Grant Scheme for Scotland highlighted that the grants are unlikely to cover the total cost of the investment (Scottish Forestry, 2025). This means there will be residual costs associated with long term management and felling that will need to be met by the private sector. However, there is no data on the proportion of this investment. Given this, we have not been able to generate reliable investments in the split of public and private sector investment in adaptation. The governance arrangements for nature restoration more broadly have not been mapped in detail due to the limited resources for the study.

Figure 9: Financing, funding, and delivery arrangements for adaptation in woodland creation.

Innovation that could boost private sector participation

While nature and ecosystems have broadly public characteristics, there are a range of mechanisms (see Table 17) that can support private sector involvement in adaptation and provision of ecosystem services.

The first cluster relate to the benefits derived from ecosystems. These include dedicated payment for ecosystem services schemes, but also carbon and biodiversity credits, or for loss reduction, noting that these are co-benefits and that the locations of planting need to coincide with those needed for risk reduction, and that in such schemes the revenues are too small and benefits arise (Watkiss and Hunt, 2024; England et al., 2025). The Scottish Government, NatureScot and SEPA are supporting CreditNature, selected through the CivTech innovation accelerator, to develop a voluntary biodiversity credit market for Scotland. This will be guided by the British Standards Institute’s Nature Investment Standards programme and the Scottish Government’s Natural Capital Markets Framework (Scottish Government, 2023b; Scottish Government, 2024b; NatureScot, 2026). Similarly, in England, the introduction of Biodiversity net gain is also supporting the development of a market and is beginning to unlock new investment in ecosystem restoration (e.g. Avon Needs Trees).

There are some examples of private and corporate investment. Philanthropic investment has included around £50m over three years for rewilding across privately managed Scottish estates (BBC, 2019). Diageo has committed up to £5m over five years to restore up to 3,000 hectares of degraded peatland by 2030 – illustrating how businesses with supply chain dependencies on healthy ecosystems can become adaptation co-funders (Diageo, 2026). However, these are likely to be relatively modest and opportunistic.

A second cluster relates to investment based on sustainability outcomes, whereby the terms of financing are preferential based on the impact. This includes payment for ecosystem services, sustainability linked loans, as well as direct investments in nature-positive businesses and redeemable equity. There have been efforts by the Scottish National Investment Bank to provide concessional credit lines to support. For example, the SNIB recently provided a £50m cornerstone investment to the Gresham House Forestry Fund, 60% of which will be invested in Scotland, and which includes commitment to climate resilience (Scottish National Investment Bank, 2026).

Finally, there are also a cluster of insurance-based innovations. For example, in Colombia, the City of Bogota has extended previous work by The Nature Conservancy (TNC) on Water Funds. This provides a proactive fund where beneficiaries pay into funds which support proactive risk reduction as well as offering parametric insurance for response and recovery. In Mexico, the Quintana Roo coral reef scheme sees local businesses and tourists paying in alongside government to support reef protection and receive parametric insurance. In addition, the NATURANCE and PIISA Horizon Europe projects examining how disaster risk financing can be combined with nature-based solutions to develop scalable insurance products (Climate-ADAPT, 2026).

Table 17: Examples of innovative models for private participation in natural environment, with cost recovery model. Source: Authors, updated from Watkiss and England, 2025.

Model

Examples

Cost recovery model

Anticipatory parametric insurance for damage reduction

Paramos Wildfire Facility, Colombia

User pays

Blockchain carbon credits for ecosystem services

AirEco (Indonesia) (SEED, n.d.)

User pays

Online platform with blockchain tokens, and enhanced Monitoring, Reporting, and Verification

Global Mangrove Trust (Thailand) (SEED, 2018)

User pays

Voluntary carbon markets (with NbS projects)

REDD+ examples, such as Mai Ndombe REDD+ project (Democratic Republic of Congo) and Lariba REDD+ project (Zimbabwe) Reforestation/afforestation projects such as CommuniTree Carbon Program (Nicaragua) Regenerative agriculture projects such as Nature Carbon (Cerrado Biome) (Brazil)

Private sector pays

Biodiversity credits/offsets

Ambatovy Minerals Project (Madagascar) (World Bank Group, 2016) Lom Pangar Hydropower Project (Cameroon) Savimbo (Colombia, Colombian Amazon) (Dasgupta, 2024) WWF Pilot Projects (Tanzania) (WWF, n.d.)

Private sector pays but can generate value addition through financial return

Payment for Loss Reduction

Restoration Insurance Service Company (RISCO) (Philippines, Mexico, Brazil, Malaysia) – mangroves (CPI, n.d.)

User pays

Sustainability premium and traceability app

Monsoon Tea Company (Thailand) (GSMA, 2024)

User pays

Investment fund for nature-positive businesses

Tropical Resilience Fund (Africa, Latin America, East/Southeast Asia) (Global Innovation Lab for Climate Finance, n.d., a)

Private sector pays

Payment for ecosystem services

The Nature Conservancy (TNC) Water Funds Portfolio (TNC, 2024) BIOFIN – capacity building in identifying and implementing relevant ecosystem services payments (BIOFIN, 2024a) Forest Resilience Bond (California, US) (Green Finance Institute, 2024b) UN-REDD Programme Initiatives

User pays

Sustainability Linked Loans

ING’s Nature Framework and SLLs (Europe) (ING, 2025)

User pays

Direct investment in NbS-generating businesses/ projects (equity-based)

Cacao Oro de Nicaragua (sustainable agroforestry for cacao production) (GIZ, 2023) African Conservation and Communities Tourism (ACCT) Fund (eco-tourism supporting conservation) (GIZ, 2023)

User pays

Impact bonds (e.g. conservation impact bonds)

Deshkan Ziibi Conservation Impact Bond (DZCIB) (Canada) (Arjaliès, 2024)

Government or philanthropic organization pays

Blended Finance for NbS

SNIB FORESTRY

Amazon Biodiversity Fund (Brazil) (Ivory, 2025) Tropical Forest Forever Facility (Brazil/World Bank) (weADAPT 2025)

Consumer/end user pays and gets access to better services, cost savings, or enhanced ecosystem benefits.

Redeemable equity

Regenera Ventures Fund (Mexico) (Brasil-Leigh et al., 2024)

User pays

Certification and Standardization

Certification of NbS portfolios (Morocco, Senegal) (GEF, 2021)

Government and businesses pay

Insurance and risk-transfer mechanisms

Quintana Roo Coral Reef Insurance (Mexico) (GIZ, 2023)

Consumers pay via tourism, and taxpayers via government, while benefiting from public goods – tourism assets, reduced disaster risk, and ecosystem health.

Platform / ecosystem development

SCALE (global)

Government pays

Transport

Key climate risks and adaptation opportunities

Road networks

Scotland’s road network faces a complex and intensifying set of climate-driven pressures threatening long-term reliability, safety and connectivity. More intense rainfall is accelerating surface water flooding, overwhelming drainage systems and causing recurring closures on trunk and local roads alike. In upland and rural areas, where single-access routes are common, even short-lived disruptions can isolate communities and disrupt supply chains. Saturated soils and steep topography are heightening landslide risk, most visible along routes such as the A83 at the Rest and Be Thankful, where repeated slope failures have led to long detours and escalating maintenance costs. Extreme temperatures add further stress, damaging pavements and bridges in summer while winter storms bring wind hazards, fallen debris and ice-related disruption (Sniffer, 2021).

Strengthening resilience will require a more strategic, forward-looking approach to maintenance, planning and design. Key priorities include identifying road corridors most vulnerable to flooding and slope failure, scaling up green-blue infrastructure and Sustainable Drainage Systems, improving drainage capacity, and applying soft-engineering approaches such as vegetation management to stabilise slopes. Better condition monitoring, data sharing and early-warning systems for rainfall, wind and landslide risk can support more proactive hazard management. For new infrastructure, mainstreaming climate adaptation into design standards will be essential to avoid costly retrofits, while stronger resilience indicators and more consistent climate risk assessment across local road authorities will be critical to closing Scotland’s current adaptation gap (Sniffer, 2021).

Rail networks

Scotland’s rail network, spanning over 1,700 miles and 360 stations across diverse and challenging terrain, is already experiencing the impacts of a changing climate, with risks projected to intensify over the coming decades (Network Rail Scotland, 2024). Observed changes include warmer average temperatures, altered rainfall patterns, and an increase in the frequency and severity of extreme weather events.

More intense and prolonged rainfall increases the likelihood of surface water and river flooding, as well as saturated ground conditions, contributing to earthwork instability. Embankments and cuttings, many of which are Victorian era assets, are becoming increasingly vulnerable to failure, leading to disruption, safety risk and higher maintenance demand. Storms and high winds continue to cause disruption through fallen trees, debris and damage to exposed assets, while coastal routes face longer term risks from erosion, sea level rise and increased wave action (Network Rail Scotland, 2024).

Higher temperatures are an emerging and growing risk, with hotter and more frequent heat events increasing the incidence of rail buckling, overhead line sag and emergency speed restrictions, affecting network performance and reliability (Network Rail Scotland, 2024).

Wind, flooding and snow are consistently the most disruptive and costly weather hazards on the Scottish network, with weather related disruption incurring significant Schedule 8 compensation costs (payments made to train operators following unplanned disruption) over the past decade (Network Rail, 2024). Around 90% of Network Rail assets are as they were when installed before the year 2000 and were not designed to contend with the more aggressive weather conditions now being experienced or forecast for the future under climate change (Network Rail, 2024).

Network Rail Scotland’s key adaptation priorities include delivering revised climate change risk assessments to identify future vulnerable locations, developing a long-term adaptation strategy using an adaptation pathways approach, and enhancing monitoring and assurance of resilience actions across the network (Network Rail Scotland, 2024).

In addition to spending on infrastructure, there may be some spending being undertaken on rolling stock companies (ROSCOs), but this is not available and therefore excluded from estimates of adaptation investment need.

Current spending and context

Specific information on the cost of climate proofing trunk roads and motorways within Scotland is currently not available. However, the Scottish Budget 2026/27 allocates approximately £82m to adaptation and resilience for trunk roads and motorways (Scottish Government, 2026c). This budget line covers trunk road adaptation schemes to improve network resilience to climate change and severe weather, casualty reduction measures, and Traffic Scotland operational commitments.

Furthermore, Network Rail Scotland has already spent £103.1m of primary resilience interventions to date in control period 7 2024–2029 (CP7). The largest shares have been directed at earthworks (£59.8m) and drainage (£27.7m), reflecting the priority placed on managing slope instability and flood risk across the network.

Adaptation investment need

Transport adaptation investment need was assessed across two sub-sectors: trunk roads and motorways, and rail. Other transport modes, including ferries, canals, aviation, and active travel, have not been included in this analysis and would add to the overall investment need.

Road networks

There is limited information regarding future investment need for climate adaptation on the road network. Strategic Transport Projects Review 2 (STPR2) estimates indicate a capital cost banding of £1bn – £2.5bn over the life of the review from 2022–2042 (Jacobs & AECOM, 2022), reflecting the anticipated scale of investment required to adapt the trunk road and motorway network to climate change. However, this figure was explicitly indicative rather than a precise cost estimate, based primarily on adaptation to flooding at highly exposed locations and not accounting for the full range of relevant climate hazards, including landslides, high winds, scour, and high temperatures. Transport Scotland anticipated that a dedicated Trunk Roads Climate Change Adaptation Plan would establish more robust costs in due course and does not consider the STPR2 figures sufficiently reliable for planning purposes.

To estimate adaptation investment need for trunk roads and motorways, we explored current Scottish Government budget lines with a neutral or positive adaptation influence were identified from the Scottish Budget 2026/27 and associated Climate Taxonomy (Scottish Government, 2026b; 2026c). The Transport Portfolio contains 15 budget lines associated with the Trunk Road Network, of which four, relating to network depreciation and PPP payments, were excluded as not relevant to climate adaptation, leaving 11 budget lines for analysis (Table 18).

Table 18: Budget lines from the Scottish Government Climate Taxonomy 2026/27 that we included in adaptation investment need analysis via exploring the additional ‘climate proofing’ spend or the whole budget.

Budget lines included in analysis

2026/27 budget (£m)

Climate proofing / whole budget

Capital Land and works

£223.26m

Climate proofing

Tay Road Bridge Capital Grant

£3.09m

Climate proofing

Tay Road Bridge Resource Grant

£2.2m

Climate proofing

Adaptation and resilience

£82.32m

Whole budget

Bridge Strengthening and Repairs

£149m

Climate proofing

Woodside Viaduct

£23.7m

Climate proofing

Trunk Roads Structural Repairs

£142m

Climate proofing

Routine and Winter Maintenance

£172.34m

Climate proofing

Safety Camera

£8.2m

Climate proofing

Other Trunk Road Expenditure

£14.28m

Climate proofing

Road Safety

£19.36m

Climate proofing

Two approaches were applied to these budget lines. For ten of the eleven lines, a climate-proofing uplift was applied to estimate the additional investment required to maintain network resilience under a changing climate. Uplift factors of 2.5% and 10%, representing the lower and upper bounds of the additional cost of climate-proofing infrastructure, were drawn from scaling factors in the Asian Development Bank (2014) and World Bank (2019). Crucially, the uplift itself – that is, the difference between the original and uplifted budget – represents the estimated additional spend attributable to climate-proofing, rather than the total uplifted budget. For the adaptation and resilience budget line, the full budget allocation was retained, as this line is wholly directed at adaptation activity.

Applying the climate proofing approach and budget lines outlined in Table 17, the estimated adaptation investment needed for trunk roads and motorways is between £101.2m–£158.06m/yr, amounting to approximately £1,417.52m–£2,212.82m over the period 2026–2040 (Table 19).

Table 19: Climate change adaptation investment need for trunk roads and motorways between 2026-2040. Presented in 2026/27 prices.

Transport (road)

Period

Lower estimate (2.5% uplift) (£m)

Upper estimate (10% uplift) (£m)

Total (2026– 2040) (£m)

£1,417.52m

£2,212.82m

Total (2026–2040 p.a.) (£m/yr)

£101.25m

£158.06m

Local road networks, maintained by local authorities rather than Transport Scotland, are not captured in this analysis. These represent an additional and likely material cost that is expected to grow as climate risk intensifies but fell beyond the scope of the present study. Several methodological limitations are also worth noting. Some budget line descriptions overlap, introducing a degree of potential double-counting (see supplementary data for more detail). The 2.5% and 10% uplift range is derived from international infrastructure literature and may not fully capture the specific risk profile of Scotland’s trunk road network. Applying a larger uplift – as some international studies have suggested may be appropriate for higher emissions scenarios – would yield considerably higher estimates, suggesting the figures presented here may be conservative.

These estimates were triangulated by scaling adaptation cost estimates from Neumann et al. (2025) to the Scottish context as an international benchmark. Neumann et al. (2025) estimated EU transport adaptation costs at approximately 0.04%–0.06% of GDP per year under moderate to high emissions scenarios. Applying this range to Scotland’s GDP yields an indicative figure of £90m – £142m/yr (2026/27 prices), which is broadly consistent with the trunk roads and motorways estimate presented above. However, this comparison should be treated with caution: the nature and projected intensification of climate hazards vary considerably across EU member states and diverges from Scotland’s risk profile in important respects. Furthermore, Neumann et al. (2025) does not provide a breakdown between road and rail spending, limiting the precision of this transfer. These figures were therefore used as an indicative benchmark to assess how our estimates compare at an international level, and are not included in our reported adaptation investment need figures.

Transport Scotland is also actively working to better understand the scale of investment needed for adapting trunk roads to be resilient to climate change. For example, they are developing the Vulnerable Locations Operational Group (VLOG) prioritisation tool to identify climate-vulnerable locations across the trunk road network and better constrain the costs of necessary upgrades and renewals (see case study 4). Consequently, the indicative adaptation investment estimates outlined in this report are expected to be further refined as this ongoing analysis matures.

Case Study 4: Vulnerable Locations Operational Group (VLOG) prioritisation tool

The Vulnerable Locations Operational Group (VLOG) prioritisation tool, developed by Transport Scotland, identifies which parts of Scotland’s trunk road network are most vulnerable to climate change and where investment is most needed. By bringing together asset information to assess exposure, sensitivity, and adaptive capacity, the tool provides a consistent, evidence-based approach to understanding climate risks and prioritising funding across the wide range of geotechnical and geometric challenges throughout Scotland’s network.

The tool uses a scoring and ranking system that evaluates locations against a range of factors including whole-life asset costs, effectiveness of risk reduction, environmental benefits, social impacts, and economic consequences of route disruption. This allows different locations and interventions to be compared fairly and transparently, with quality checks, peer review, and alignment with existing appraisal and business case processes built in to ensure decisions can be reviewed and approved through established governance structures.

Over time, the VLOG tool will help Transport Scotland baseline and monitor how climate-related risks evolve as projects progress and conditions change. For adaptation planning specifically, understanding which locations are most vulnerable and what interventions deliver the greatest risk reduction is essential for ensuring investment is targeted where it will have most impact – moving beyond reactive maintenance towards proactive, planned adaptation. Critically, the tool will enable more asset-based adaptation investment need estimates, moving beyond the indicative budget-line approach used in this report towards a robust, location-specific evidence base for future climate resilience planning across Scotland’s trunk road network.

Image: Example of VLOG prioritisation tool dashboard outlining climate-vulnerable sites.

Rail networks

Interpretation of Network Rail Scotland Investment estimates

The rail investment figures presented here represent indicative, scenario‑based estimates developed by Network Rail Scotland to explore the potential scale of climate adaptation investment required to maintain current levels of service and safety under future climate conditions.

The upper end of the range reflects a plausible future pathway that includes what are currently hypothetical transformational capital interventions at particularly vulnerable locations, which may or may not be required depending on how climate risks evolve over time, and how Network Rail chooses to sequence interventions that are required based on its adaptation pathways programme.

As with other sectors, the absence of agreed levels of service and climate risk‑tolerance targets means these figures are best understood as order‑of‑magnitude planning assumptions, intended to inform strategic discussion rather than define investment requirements.

Investment need estimates

Investment need estimates for the Scottish rail network were drawn directly from high-level analysis Network Rail Scotland’s internal climate adaptation assessment. This draws on climate-based modelling, expert judgement, and current spending patterns to project costs across two categories of spend: (a) operations, support, maintenance and renewals (OSMR), which covers the ongoing costs of maintaining a climate-resilient network; and (b) major capital interventions (MCI), which covers larger-scale infrastructure investment at vulnerable locations. Full details of the underlying methods, assumptions, and calculations are provided in Appendix B.

Total potential adaptation investment requirements for the Scottish rail network are estimated at between £113m–£338.1m/yr, amounting to £1,581.8m–£4,733.6m when operations, support, maintenance and renewals (OSMR) and major capital interventions (MCI) are included over the period 2026–2040 (all figures in 2026/27 prices) (Table 20). This spend would cover increased operational and maintenance activity in response to more frequent severe weather. Such activity includes additional seasonal treatment trains, emergency speed restrictions, and reactive repairs following weather-induced failures, targeted renewals to address accelerated asset degradation across drainage, earthworks, and track. At the upper end, it includes hypothetical transformational capital schemes at locations where incremental intervention alone cannot sustain current service levels, such as infrastructure re-alignment in response to coastal erosion.

The wide range between lower and upper bounds, particularly for MCI, reflects the inherent difficulty of projecting major capital requirements over long time horizons. Network Rail Scotland note that ongoing work under their Adaptation Pathways Programme is expected to narrow these ranges as vulnerable locations become better characterised. These figures represent one plausible investment scenario focused on continued service delivery; alternative investment scenarios could reasonably be explored.

Table 20: Estimated climate change adaptation investment need for Network Rail Scotland, 2026–2040, based on CP7 remaining spend, CP8 and CP9 allocations under a continued service scenario, and pro-rated 2039/40 spend. All figures uplifted to 2026/27 prices (assuming 2% nominal growth per annum) from 2023/24 base prices provided by Network Rail Scotland.

Transport (rail)

 

Operations, support, maintenance and renewals (OSMR)

Operations, support, maintenance and renewals (OSMR) + major capital interventions (MCI)

Period

Lower estimate (£m)

Upper estimate (£m)

Lower estimate (£m)

Upper estimate (£m)

Total (£m)

£998.2m

£1,815.3m

£1,581.8m

£4,733.6m

Total (£m/yr)

£71.3m/yr

£129.7m/yr

£113m/yr

£338.1m/yr

Case Study 5: Extreme rainfall and landslides at the Falls of Cruachan

The Oban branch of the West Highland Line plays a vital role connecting rural communities around Oban with the rest of Scotland, running alongside the A85 trunk road through mountainous terrain with limited diversionary routes when disruption occurs. The Northwest Highlands are the wettest area of Great Britain. Parts of the railway line – particularly near the Falls of Cruachan – are highly susceptible to landslides due to prolonged heavy rainfall, steep topography, and proximity to unstable slopes. In December 2022, approximately 100 tonnes of material moved down Ben Cruachan’s slopes onto the railway and A85, caused by a blocked culvert overtopped during adverse weather.

Temporary repairs to reopen the railway, including slope stabilisation, signalling repairs, and new track, cost approximately £0.5m. A more permanent fix is now underway at a cost of £3m, encompassing drainage renewal, soil nailing, erosion protection, and lightweight catch fences. Control period 7* plans also include approximately £5m for ongoing vegetation removal and maintenance of the line’s stone signals, which date to 1882 and are approaching life expiry.

Further investment will be required in later years to provide a longer-term solution as increasing frequency of adverse weather events heightens landslide risk. Network Rail Scotland’s current view is that resilience work will combine low-to-medium capacity catch fences with modern instrumented barrier technology along the four-mile length. This is at an estimated cost of circa. £5m in CP8, alongside continued improvement of drainage asset maintenance to better manage water movement during heavy rainfall events. Longer-term options under consideration through Network Rail Scotland’s climate change adaptation pathways programme include a combination of nature-based solutions, such as enhanced vegetation management to stabilise slopes, alongside engineered interventions, reflecting a broader shift towards integrated, pathway-based approaches to managing climate risk on vulnerable parts of the network.

*A control period is Network Rail’s fixed five-year funding and planning cycle that sets budgets and outputs for the railway (e.g., CP7 1 April 2024 – 31 Mar 2029).

Image: Landslide over railway at Falls of Cruachan.

Macroeconomic effects and wider impacts

Macro-economic impacts

Trunk roads and motorways

For macroeconomic modelling we assume trunk roads and motorways require the adaptation investment between 2026–2040 of approximately £90m/yr. These have differing pricing years compared to section 4.4.3.1. This spending flows primarily to construction and wholesale/retail (vehicles), with significant additional activity in public administration, architectural services and a wide range of supply-chain sectors.

Without cost recovery (a modelling device to isolate the spending effect): By 2040, construction gains £12.7m in output and 191 jobs, while wholesale/retail (vehicles) adds £29m in output and 516 jobs. Supply-chain effects spread to fabricated metals, manufacturing, energy and primary sectors, and household consumption spillovers boost retail, financial and travel services. No major sector is worse off during the construction period; the programme delivers broad-based increases in output and employment across the economy.

With “government pays” cost recovery (a stylised scenario): When costs are recovered through higher income tax, the core delivery sectors retain net gains. Construction still adds £3.6m in output and 43 jobs, wholesale/retail (vehicles) retains £26.6m in output and 472 jobs, and public administration adds £5.5m and 55 jobs – because they remain central to the works. However, many consumer-facing sectors flip to losses. Retail (excluding vehicles) loses £3.7m in output and 88 jobs, while “all other services” records a loss of £24.3m and 385 jobs. Manufacturing and primary sectors similarly shift from gains to losses as higher income tax squeezes household spending and raises labour costs, reducing demand and competitiveness.

Policy implications: Without cost recovery, roads adaptation delivers a strong temporary stimulus across the economy. With income-tax funding, construction and vehicle-related sectors still gain, but many consumer and trade-exposed sectors lose activity and jobs. Policymakers must balance fiscal sustainability against these short-term economic effects and against the long-term resilience benefits of climate-ready road infrastructure.

Rail Network

Using the lower estimate for investment in operations, support, maintenance and renewals (OSMR) and major capital interventions (MCI), rail network climate adaptation requires approximately £100m/yr of investment from 2026–2040. The spending flows primarily to wholesale/retail (vehicles) for rolling stock maintenance and replacement, construction for network reinforcement, and public administration for programme management.

Without cost recovery (a modelling device to isolate the spending effect): The programme creates a demand stimulus that peaks at 0.5% GDP growth (around £100m) and 1,500 FTE jobs by 2040. The sectors delivering the works experience the largest gains, with positive spillovers to consumer services as higher household incomes boost spending. Prices rise only modestly as workers migrate to Scotland to meet labour demand, easing wage pressures. All sectors benefit or remain unaffected during the investment period, though these impacts fade roughly 15 years after spending ends.

With “government pays” cost recovery (a stylised scenario): When the Scottish Government recovers costs through higher income tax, the GDP and employment gains are largely eroded and turn temporarily negative in many sectors. Higher income tax reduces household disposable incomes, particularly for higher earners, dampening the consumption that drove much of the initial stimulus. At the same time, employers partly absorb the tax rise through wage bargaining, raising their production costs and pushing prices higher for longer, which weakens Scotland’s export competitiveness. The core delivery sectors – wholesale/retail (vehicles), construction, and public administration – retain smaller gains because they remain central to the works, but consumer-facing services such as “all other services” experience significant job and output losses.

Policy implications: Income-tax funding can protect long-term rail resilience, but it imposes short- to medium-term costs in terms of growth, employment and real incomes, particularly for higher-income households. Policymakers need to weigh these costs against the avoided disruption and economic losses from climate-damaged rail infrastructure.

Current governance, funding and financing arrangements

Road networks

Delivery arrangements for road infrastructure investment are shown in Figure 10, the majority of which is funded through the public sector. Transport Scotland pays for investment on the trunk road network and contracts a range of companies to ensure Scottish trunk roads are safe, efficient and well management (Transport Scotland n.d). This includes both maintenance contracts (provided by Amey and Bear Scotland), but also a range of Design, Build, Finance and Operations (DBFO) contracts. Local roads are managed by local authorities, who pay for investment in the local road network. Scottish Government (including Transport Scotland) spent £3bn on transport in 2023/24. Local Authorities spent £1.17bn in 2023/24 (Transport Scotland, 2025).

While all adaptation costs for the trunk road network are met from government, local costs are met by local government from a mix of sources. Local Government spent £27bn in 2024/25 from four sources of income. Excluding service income (which is ringfenced for uses such as early learning and childcare but not transport) the remaining £16bn came from Scottish Government grant (63%), council tax (18%) and non-domestic rates (19%) (Scottish Government, 2026d). Assuming that adaptation costs are evenly apportioned across funding sources, applying these shares to the relative share of the total investment, we estimate that private sector contributes around 10% of the costs of adaptation, split evenly between households and businesses.

Figure 10: Financing, funding, and delivery arrangements for adaptation in road networks.

Rail networks

The rail sector is a complicated set of governance arrangements (summarised in Figure 11), since rail infrastructure, services and rolling stock are managed by separate organisations. Network Rail manages railway infrastructure. It generates a range of income from access charges, commercial income and an electricity for traction programme. The majority of rail services in Scotland are publicly provided by ScotRail through Scottish Rail Holdings Ltd (SRH Limited), an arm’s length company owned and controlled by Scottish Government (Transport Scotland, n.d), though other franchise operators (e.g. Avanti) run services serving the wider UK.

Whilst the study has not generated estimates of required adaptation spend for rolling stock, this is also important. Rolling stock is privately owned and leased from Rolling Stock Operating Companies (ROSCOs), who have invested over £20bn in rolling stock since 1995 (Mather, 2025). Payments are made from the train operating companies to ROSCOs for the lease of the stock – in 2024/25 these totalled about £2.7bn in the UK (Office of Road and Rail, 2025). Scotland intends to also continue securing financing for the stock, and a lease model (Scotrail, 2026).

Figure 11: Financing, funding, and delivery arrangements for adaptation in the Scottish rail sector.

There are already significant efforts ongoing to consolidate the sector. The UK Government is bringing franchises into public ownership as contracts expire, it is consolidating track management and rail services under Great British Rail to provide overall coordination of track and timetable franchising under one guiding arm. All franchises are expected to be due back in public ownership by the end of 2027. Under this model, Scottish ministers will set a rail strategy for Scotland and fund GBR to provide Infrastructure in Scotland (Department for Transport, 2025), while ScotRail will continue to deliver services. The government expects the leasing of rolling stock from ROSCOs to continue where such investments offer value for money (Mather, K., 2025). Figure 11 represents the funding arrangements following this transition.

To provide an initial view on the split of funding for adaptation, the study used the aggregate income and expenditure for the UK Rail Sector for Scotland (ORR, 2025). This breaks down the relative total income from different sources for the overall sector, and the expenditure, excluding internal money flows. This shows that in 2024/25, government funding made up 66% of all rail sector income, with the remainder coming from passenger income (29.6%) and the remainder coming from industry (1.8%) and freight industry (2.8%). However, looking over time, there has been significant variation in this split, with 50% of income at one point coming from private income. At present, it is assumed Network Rail does not apportion or ringfence income, meaning that adaptation costs are assumed to be split between public and private sector in the same proportions.

Innovation that could boost private sector participation

For transport, road user charging, including city centre congestion charging and expanded parking zones, could generate revenues to help fund climate-resilient infrastructure upgrades. Toll financing on major road networks or adaptation projects offers a further avenue, with potential for private operators to contribute to or co-finance expensive resilience interventions in exchange for revenue streams from infrastructure users. Similarly, there is the potential to mainstream adaptation costs into rail ticket prices. This could be to fund maintenance but can also be blended into PPPs to provide support to capital investment.

There is also the potential to leverage wider infrastructure investment. SSEN Transmission’s commitment of over £200m to Highland roads and bridges demonstrates how major private infrastructure developers can contribute meaningfully to transport resilience as a condition of their wider operations (SSE, 2026).

Finally, there are a typical spread of debt financing models which could be used, such as the use of green bonds or sustainability linked loans. There also more innovative investment approaches such as Collective Investment Vehicles (CIVs), which enable diversification of risk and attract private capital for adaptation investments. One prominent example is the Urban Resilience Fund. Managed by Meridiam and supported by the Rockefeller Foundation, this is a €500m investment fund, split between Africa and OECD countries, and includes a €20m catalytic capital fund for project preparation. Other examples are given in Table 21.

Table 21: Examples of innovative models for private participation in Transport, with cost recovery model. Source: Authors, updated from Watkiss and England, 2025.

Model

Examples

Cost recovery model

Collective Investment Vehicles

Urban Resilience Fund, Meridam

Government pays

Climate-smart PPPs for Roads

Kuala Lumpur Smart Tunnel, Malaysia

Government pays

Tolls

World Bank PPP guidance

User pays

Hypothecated taxes (e.g. Congestion charging, road user charging)

London

User pays

Climate Insurance-linked Infrastructure Financing

Climate Insurance-Linked Resilient Infrastructure Financing (CILRIF)

User pays

Sustainability-linked bonds / debt finance

Song and Medda, 2021

Government pays

Climate resilience districts / Business Improvement districts

US (California and Connetticut)

Local businesses and households pay

Water

Key climate risks and adaptation opportunities

Scotland’s water supply systems face increasing climate-driven pressures. Rising temperatures, shifting rainfall patterns and growing demand are placing new stresses on water resources (Sniffer, 2021). Projections indicate that under +2°C and +4°C scenarios, several regions could experience supply-demand deficits by mid-century (Scottish Water, 2024). Reservoirs in Scotland are increasingly vulnerable to extreme rainfall, high inflows and warmer temperatures, which can erode embankment integrity and reduce water quality. While current adaptation measures keep public water supply risk in the low category, more than half of Scotland’s population could be at risk of water scarcity by 2050 during very dry periods (Scottish Government, 2023c). River flooding currently affects 279 Scottish Water assets during frequent storm conditions, with a further 11 Scottish Water assets projected to face increased fluvial exposure beyond 2050. Surface water flood risk is also set to grow, with 8 Scottish Water assets at increased risk by 2050, rising to 171 by 2080 (Scottish Water, 2024).

The wastewater system faces similar pressures, with more intense rainfall driving sewer overflows, inundating treatment works and raising pollution risk (Sniffer, 2021). River flooding already affects 720 of Scottish Water’s wastewater assets during frequent storm conditions, with a further 194 projected to face increased fluvial exposure beyond 2050 (Scottish Water, 2024). Surface water flood risk is set to escalate further, from 65 wastewater assets at increased risk by 2050 to 463 by 2080 (Scottish Water, 2024).

Reducing these risks requires maintaining and strengthening Scotland’s proactive approach to water management through long-term, evidence-based investment. Future resilience will depend on integrating climate projections into reservoir inspection regimes, infrastructure planning and risk assessments, ensuring systems are designed for higher peak flows and more volatile conditions. Demand-side measures, including leakage control, metering and behavioural change, will be increasingly critical, as CCRA3 shows that only scenarios incorporating additional adaptation result in sustained supply-demand surpluses. For wastewater, targeted investment in flood-exposed sites, expansion of green-blue infrastructure, and upgrades integrating SUDs and nature-based solutions will be essential. A more systematic approach aligning water resource planning with climate risk modelling, alongside strategic catchment-wide thinking, will be critical to ensuring Scotland’s water systems remain robust and secure as climate pressures intensify (Sniffer, 2021).

Private water supplies (Lawson and Davies, 2025) serve approximately 3.5% of Scotland’s population, mostly in more remote rural areas. Risk to private supplies is less well understood, but they are likely to be particularly vulnerable to water scarcity events (DWQR, 2024). Requirements and effective measures to support climate resilient private water supplies are far less understood than public water systems, even though private water supplies are more vulnerable. At a supply-level, private water supply owners are responsible for investment to upgrade the system – and they are responsible for reporting issues such as water availability to their local authority. Private water supply owners may be eligible for a Scottish Government grant of up to £800 to improve their existing private water supply (mygov.scot, 2025), though this initiative is not focused on climate resilience. For example, a switch from surface to bore supply is considered to offer climate resilience (Rivington et al., 2020).

Climate adaptation in the water sector can also overlap with initiatives in the natural environment, particularly nature-based solutions aiming to slow run-off and increase water quality like the Loch Katrine programme (see case study 6).

Case Study 6: Loch Katrine Catchment Management, Scottish Water

Loch Katrine, located within the Loch Lomond and Trossachs National Park, is the primary source of drinking water for Glasgow. Climate modelling of key water quality parameters, under 2050 and 2080 scenarios, projects a deterioration in raw water quality beyond the treatment capacity of existing works, driven by the warmer, drier summers and more intense rainfall events associated with climate change. Without intervention, this trajectory would necessitate significant capital upgrades to Glasgow’s water treatment infrastructure.

Scottish Water, in partnership with long-term tenant Forestry and Land Scotland (FLS), has developed a 10-year Land Management Plan (LMP) for the 9,500-hectare Loch Katrine catchment, approved by Scottish Forestry in 2024 (Forestry and Land Scotland, 2023). Scottish Water will invest £11m across multiple investment periods in two core programmes: (1) 4,600 hectares of native woodland creation, largely through rewilding and natural regeneration, expanding woodland from the loch shores into higher elevations; (2) up to 2,000 hectares of peatland restoration and management – through rewetting, reprofiling, and encouraging sphagnum moss to restore the peatland’s capacity to retain water and slow surface runoff.

Peatland restoration receives co-funding through Peatland ACTION, the Scottish Government’s national programme backed by a £250m commitment to restore 250,000 hectares of peatland by 2030.

Image: Loch Katrine. Taken from Scottish Water: Loch Katrine Woodland Creation and Peatland Restoration – Scottish Water.

By stabilising soils and locking carbon into the landscape rather than allowing it to run off into the water environment, the catchment management measures aim to halt the modelled deterioration in raw water quality. Healthy woodland and functioning peatland slow surface runoff, reduce the volume of organic matter reaching the loch, and improve the resilience of the catchment to both drought and extreme rainfall. In doing so, the LMP is expected to offset the need for significant capital investment in treatment process upgrades that would otherwise be required, making it a proactive, nature-based alternative to reactive infrastructure expenditure. Beyond the water quality rationale, the LMP is projected to deliver over 700,000 tonnes of CO₂e sequestered over 60 years and a 40% improvement in biodiversity across the site (Scottish Water, 2026d).

Loch Katrine illustrates how proactive catchment management can function as a cost-effective climate adaptation strategy, deferring capital infrastructure costs while delivering carbon, biodiversity, and water quality co-benefits.

Current spending and context

We do not have specific information on Scottish Water’s current climate adaptation investment. However, several ongoing programmes demonstrate adaptation relevant investment. For example, Scottish Water is developing a major demand reduction programme in response to projected summer water shortages, including an estimated 260Ml/d deficit by 2050 under a 1-in-150-year drought scenario. A £1.8m domestic smart monitoring trial launched in Dundee in 2025 (2,300 monitors) is testing whether providing households with real time usage data can reduce consumption, with results expected in 2028 (Scottish Water, 2026b). This builds on a successful pilot with 3,000 business users in Inverness and Orkney and underpins a planned £60m national rollout of smart meters for 130,000 business customers (Scottish Water, 2026a). The rollout aims to achieve an 80Ml/d reduction by 2039 through reduced customer side leakage, improved network leakage detection, and behaviour change. These initiatives help reduce pressure on water resources during hotter, drier summers and strengthen overall system resilience.

Adaptation investment need

Investment need estimates were drawn from Scottish Water’s Strategic Review (SR)27 of Charges Business Plan (2027/28–2032/33) and associated technical appendix, combined with their longer-term indicative adaptation investment estimate of £2 – 5bn to 2050 (Scottish Water, 2026a; Scottish Water, 2026c). The portion of the longer-term estimate falling within the 2033–2040 research window was incorporated alongside the SR27 allocation. Note that 2026/27 is not included as these data were not available. Full details of these underlying methods, assumptions, and calculations can be found in Appendix C.

Total climate change adaptation investment requirements for Scottish Water over 2027– 2040 are estimated at between £82.1m – £189.7m per year, equivalent to £1,067.3m –£2,465.9m in 2026/27 prices (Table 22). We do not include 2026/27 as this information is not available. For SR27 (2027/28 – 2032/33), the lower estimate is £357.9m and upper estimate is £471.3m. This SR27 investment spans operational resilience (including standby generators at 52 sites to guard against storm-related power outages); asset resilience measures to address drought pressure on water supply and sewer flood risk from increasingly extreme rainfall; and catchment-scale transformation through pioneer catchment pilots and drainage partnerships. The upper estimate for SR27 also includes retained risks such as water quality and the water environment (Scottish Water, 2026a). Scottish Water has developed a long-term indicative adaptation investment estimate of £2 – 5bn to 2050. Deducting the SR27 allocation, the remaining estimate of required investment is distributed equally across annual periods from 2033/34 to 2049/50, with the portion falling within the research window (2033/34–2039/40) incorporated here.

The widening range between lower and upper adaptation estimates in later periods reflects the inherent uncertainty in projecting long-term adaptation investment need as climate risks intensify. It should also be noted that there is potential for some double counting with peatland-related climate adaptation grants for Scottish Water catchments possibly also included elsewhere in this analysis.

Table 22: Climate change adaptation investment need estimate for Scottish Water 2027– 2040 using the information from the draft SR27 business plan (including the technical annex on adaptation). All figures uplifted to 2026/27 prices (assuming 2% nominal growth per annum) from 2024/25 base prices provided by Scottish Water.

Period

Lower estimate (£m)

Upper estimate (£m)

2026/27

Not included in analysis

Not included in analysis

2027/28 – 2032/33

£357.9m

£471.3m

2033/34 – 2039/40

£709.4m

£1,994.6m

Total (£m)

£1,067.3m

£2,465.9m

Total (£m/yr)

£82.1m/yr

£189.7m/yr

Macroeconomic effects and wider impacts

Macro-economic stimulus

For macroeconomic modelling, we assumed there is £1bn adaptation investment between 2026 and 2040, approximately £67m/yr. The spending flows primarily to construction for infrastructure upgrades, with additional demand for engineering services, fabricated materials manufacturing and equipment suppliers. Note, this modelling was developed by Centre for Energy Policy at the University of Strathclyde, Scottish Water have not provided these figures.

Without cost recovery (a modelling device to isolate the spending effect): By 2040, construction gains £36m in output and 536 jobs, while architectural services add £1.8m and 27 jobs. Fabricated metals, manufacturing and wholesale/retail (vehicles) see modest supply-chain gains. The water/sewerage sector itself records a small direct gain of £1.1m and 5 jobs, and “all other services” benefits from household income spillovers, adding £10.5m and 140 jobs. The overall effect is a modest but broadly positive stimulus centred on construction and engineering supply chains.

With “industry pays” cost recovery (a stylised scenario): When Scottish Water recovers costs through higher water charges, the water/sewerage sector experiences the largest proportional loss across all scenarios examined. It shifts from a gain of £1.1m and 5 jobs to a loss of £37.5m and 156 jobs. Construction retains a reduced gain of £22m and 332 jobs because it remains central to delivering the infrastructure works, but most other sectors flip to negative impacts. “All other services” loses £24m and 345 jobs, while retail (excluding vehicles), financial services, education, manufacturing and electricity all record output and employment losses. In the CGE model, higher water charges raise business costs economy-wide, reducing competitiveness, while also acting as a regressive consumption tax on households since water is an essential service that low-income households cannot avoid.

Policy implications: An “industry pays” approach via water charges concentrates severe impacts on the water/sewerage sector itself and raises costs across all businesses and households, with regressive effects. Alternative or blended funding approaches merit serious consideration to avoid undermining both the sector and the broader economy, while recognising that these results exclude the substantial avoided benefits in terms of water security, public health and climate resilience.

Wider impacts

The economic case for adaptation investment in the water sector is strong. Evidence reviewed as part of the third UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA3) finds high benefit-to-cost ratios (BCRs) across a range of water sector measures (Watkiss, 2022). Water efficiency measures deliver the highest returns, with an average BCR of just over 10:1. So every £1 invested in water efficiency measures returns over £10 in net economic benefits. Upland peatland restoration shows similarly high but more variable returns, reflecting the site-specific nature of these investments. This is directly relevant to catchment management approaches such as the Loch Katrine Land Management Plan outlined in Case Study 6. Furthermore, flood preparedness and protection average a BCR of around 5:1, while making new infrastructure resilient averages 4:1 (Watkiss, 2022). Beyond these direct economic returns, adaptation investments frequently generate important co benefits. As well as reducing potential losses from climate change, they often deliver direct economic gains and social or environmental benefits. It is important to note that these BCRs are indicative. Actual returns are highly site and context specific, and uncertainty around the future scale of climate change means quantification of benefits remains challenging.

Current governance, funding and financing arrangements

Water provision in Scotland is in public ownership, Scottish Water is a public corporation providing potable water to 97% of households and businesses in Scotland and wastewater services to 93% (Scottish Government, 2026e). The Scottish Water business plan indicates that around 90% of all the cost of providing water and wastewater services is met by customer charges, with the remainder (£170m a year) met by Scottish Government (Scottish Water, 2025a).

Scottish Water’s regulated business supplies water and wastewater services to households and is also the wholesaler to the water retail market for businesses in Scotland. For the financial year 2024/25, around 73% of the total income was from households, with the remainder from wholesale businesses (Scottish Water, 2025b). See Table 23 for recent regulated business revenue.

Table 23: Scottish Water regulated business revenue. Decreases shown in brackets. Source: Scottish Water (2025b)

 

FY25 (£m)

FY24 (£m)

Increase/(decrease) (£m)

Household

£1,154m

£1,050m

£104m

Wholesale

£410m

£382m

£28m

Other

£15m

£17m

£(2)m

Total revenue

£1,579m

£1,449m

£130m

Beyond its core regulated business, Business Stream, Scottish Water’s retail subsidiary, competes as a licensed provider in both the Scottish and English markets, holding around a 20% share of the English market. It operates under a Governance Code agreed with the Water Industry Commission for Scotland and has its own independent board and management team. Non-regulated commercial activities, including renewable energy and innovative water technologies, are undertaken separately through Scottish Water Horizons (Scottish Water, 2025b).

The organisation has previously used Private Finance Initiative (PFI) models to finance infrastructure investment. However, these have run their course and over the next SR period, all but one of the PFI contracts will return to public ownership. The intention in the business plan is to keep all lending the same, and for additional investments in the network to be covered by user charges.

For the purposes of this study, we assume that the majority of the costs of adaptation are paid through Scottish Households and businesses, since the relative surplus from the other activities are relatively low (Business stream group had an £18m surplus before tax). The arrangements are set out Figure 12.

Going forward, Scottish Water expects the nominal borrowing from Scottish Government to stay the same, and the increased expenditure to be funded through households and businesses. The current business plan projects the proportion of expenditure to rise from 90% to 94% (Scottish Water, 2026c).

Figure 12: Financing, funding, and delivery arrangements for water and wastewater adaptation investment in Scotland.

Innovation that could boost private sector participation

In the water sector, options to boost private sector participation are more constrained given that Scottish Water operates as a publicly owned utility and the majority of investment is already funded through consumer bills.

There are also a spectrum of options relating to private financing (Table 24). The first is a basket of financing arrangements (Sustainability linked finance, Collective Investment Vehicles) that can be used but require long-term commitments to repayment or creation of revenue streams. However, in reality, their potential is likely to be limited since borrowing terms from Scottish Government are likely to be highly attractive, and future investment may also be linked to the plans for a new Scottish government bond. Full privatisation, while theoretically a financing option, is not considered a realistic or desirable pathway in the Scottish context.

There are also models which support private financing of specific assets, such as Public private partnerships (PPPs). However, while PPPs have previously been used to finance investment in Scottish Water infrastructure, the current direction of travel, bringing such infrastructure into public use, suggests limited appetite in practice.

Finally, there are alternatives which enhance contributions from businesses and consumers due to water-related benefits. In relation to billing, there are also alternative options for enhancing cost recovery through water tariffs. Many households in Scotland do not have water meters and are charged for installation, so such a programme could incentivise use and more accurately reflect usage. There is also the potential to enhance contributions from large businesses and landowners. For example, in Scotland, Diageo are already investing in upstream peatland restoration for flood management at their distillery. These may be able to be extended to cover akin to water funds which co-invest to improve efficiency and costs. It also noted that the hydrogen and digital sectors are also likely to increase water demand, and so may offer further potential. Developing clearer frameworks for how such investments are valued and attributed across multiple beneficiaries would help unlock this potential at greater scale.

Table 24: Examples of innovative models for private participation in water with cost recovery model. Source: authors, updated from Watkiss and England (2025).

Model

Examples

Cost recovery model

PFI/ PPP

Kigali Bulk Water Project (Rwanda) (Blended Finance Taskforce and Systemiq, n.d.)

User pays and government pays

Water Funds

Norfolk Water Fund TNC

User pays

Collective Investment Vehicles

Water Equity Global Access Fund IV (Heading For Change, n.d.)

User pays

Sustainability-linked finance

Pennon Group Green Finance Framework (UK) (Pennon, 2024)

User pays

Syndicated Loans

Enhancing Water and Sanitation Resilience with IDB Invest and partners (Brazil) (IDB Invest, 2025

User pays

Securitization, Guarantees and Credit Enhancement

Water Finance Facility (Kenya) Pooled Water Fund (Blended Finance Taskforce and Systemiq, n.d.)

User pays

Project aggregation

Climate Adaptation Notes

User pays

Micro finance

Water Credit Initiative (Water.org, n.d.)

User pays

Supply chain finance

Sanivation (Africa) (Sanivation, n.d.)

Government pays and private sector pays / new revenue model

Metering

CityTaps (Kenya) (The Global Innovation Fun, n.d.)

User pays through more accurate charging

Summary of findings

The evidence base on the cost of climate adaption in Scotland -and how this will change with time – is limited.

This study aimed to develop and test a preliminary approach that could be used to inform the potential indicative costs of climate adaptation across a range of sectors in Scotland.

We use a multi method approach to explore four dimensions: investment needs, the macroeconomic effects of such needs, public-private funding splits, and scope to mobilise private capital. Here, we present the key findings from the work which focussed on areas within five sectors: agriculture, communities (flooding), natural environment (woodland creation, peatland restoration and nature restoration), transport (trunk roads and motorways and railways), and water (public water and wastewater services).

Investigating climate change adaptation investment need

Investment needs were estimated using a pragmatic, multi-method approach tailored to the data availability and evidence maturity of each sector. Methods included drawing on existing sectoral analyses, applying climate-proofing uplifts to Scottish Government budget lines, scaling from UK-wide research, and using expert judgement to apportion investment with mixed objectives directly to adaptation.

We find that climate adaptation investment need for the five analysed sectors totals £7.8–£14.2 billion for 2026–2040, or £566–£1,027 million per year (Table 25).

Table 25: Summary of estimated climate change adaptation investment need for areas within the five sectors included in our study, for the period 2026 – 2040 (2026/27 prices). Where available, current budget (or estimates) are presented alongside estimated investment need, with a RAG rating indicating whether current spend meets the estimated need (green), falls within 20% below it (amber), or is more than 20% below it (red). An expert-elicited investment need estimate confidence rating is assigned to each sector/sub-sector estimate, alongside the primary source from which it was derived. *Note Scottish Water estimates are for 13 years from 2027– 2040.

Sector

Sub-sector / approach

Investment estimate (£m)

Investment estimate (£m/yr)

2026/27 budget (£m/yr)

Investment estimate confidence

Investment Estimate Source

Agriculture

 

£2,347m – £3,091m

£167.6m/yr – £220.8m/yr

£167.6m/yr – £220.8m/yr

Low

Scottish Government Budget

Communities

Capacity building

£102m

£7.3m

£6.9m

Medium

Scottish Government Budget

Property flood protection

£885m – £1,102m

£63.2m – £78.7m

£42m

Low

Scottish Government & DEFRA, HM Government

Property flood resilience

£10.5m –£52m

£0.8m- £3.7m

Unknown

Medium

JBA Risk Management 2025

Natural environment

Woodland creation

£115m

£8.2m

£2.3m

Low – Medium

Scottish Government Draft Climate Change Plan

Peatland restoration

£236m

£16.8m

£5.6m

Low – Medium

Scottish Government Draft Climate Change Plan

Natural restoration

£73m

£5.2m

£5.2m

Low – Medium

NatureScot

Transport

Rail[3]

£1,582m –£4,734m

£113m –£338.1m

≈ £87.8m

Medium

Network Rail Scotland

 

Trunk roads and motorways

£1,418m –£2,213m

£101.3m – £158.1m

£82.32m

Very low

Scottish Government Budget

Water*

Scottish Water[4]

£1,067m –£2,466m

£82.1m – £189.7m

Unknown

Medium

Scottish Water

Total

 

£7,835.5m £14,182.8m

£565.5m £1,026.6m

   

The macroeconomic effects of investing in climate adaptation

While a full assessment of the macroeconomic costs and benefits of adaptation was beyond the scope of this report, the study used a Computable General Equilibrium (CGE) model of the Scottish economy to explore the direct economic effects of adaptation spending across sectors and consider how different approaches to cost recovery affect economic activity, employment, and household incomes.

The modelling shows that adaptation spending can generate a positive economic stimulus during the investment period across all sectors studied. However, the way costs are recovered matters considerably, with effects varying by sector and recovery mechanism:

  • Agriculture: Adaptation spending would stimulate construction, manufacturing, and agricultural supply chains. However, recovering costs through higher food prices would disproportionately affect lower-income households and risk significant job losses given agriculture’s labour-intensive nature.
  • Communities: Flood adaptation would generate meaningful local gains in construction and professional services. If costs were recovered through income tax, broader consumer spending would be dampened, with retail and service sectors potentially flipping from gains to losses.
  • Natural environment: Land-based restoration would generate substantial rural employment gains, particularly in forestry and land-use sectors. Recovery through public spending cuts could produce widespread losses across service, education, and public administration sectors that outweigh the direct stimulus.
  • Transport (roads and rail): Adaptation spending would deliver broad-based construction and supply-chain gains. Income-tax recovery could erode much of this stimulus, particularly affecting consumer-facing sectors and export competitiveness.
  • Water: Recovering costs through higher water charges would concentrate severe impacts on the water sector itself and could act as a regressive tax on households and businesses for whom water is an unavoidable essential service.

These results should not be interpreted as a full cost-benefit assessment of adaptation. The modelling captures the demand-side effects of spending and cost recovery, but does not account for avoided climate damages, residual risks, or the broader triple dividend of adaptation.

Current funding and financing arrangements

For each of the areas within the five sectors included in our study, we calculated indicative estimates of the current and future contributions from the private sector towards adaptation investment. These are highly speculative and represent a first pass attempt at quantifying the current and potential contributions of the private sector to adaptation costs.

We find that currently investment is predominantly public across most sectors and sub-sectors. Private contributions range from negligible (peatland restoration) to around a third (agriculture). Water represents a notable exception where approximately 90% of costs are met through household and business customer charges. These are shown below, alongside the typical levels of financial returns for the activities (Table 26).

Table 26: Current and future maximum potential of private sector contributions to adaptation. Private sector contributions include households, businesses and financial institutions. Source: Updated from Watkiss and England, 2025.

Sector

Nature of Investment in baseline (Scotland)

Typical level of financial returns without innovation

Private sector contributions (funding and finance)

Public

Below-market

Commercial Returns

Current

Future (Potential)

Agriculture

Mixed

X

X

X

33%

35%

Communities – Flood protection.

Mixed (Public for protection, early warning and NBS, private for household measures)

X

  

7%

15%

Natural environment – Peatland

Public

X

  

0%

5 10%

Natural environment – Forestry

Mixed

X

X

x

Not quantified

Not quantified

Natural environment – Nature restoration

Public

X

  

0%

10%

Transport – Rail

Mixed

X

X

 

40%

45%

Transport – Road

Mixed

X

X

 

10%

15%

Water

Private

 

X

X

90%

100%

Innovations that could boost private sector participation

Opportunities to increase private sector contributions vary considerably by sector (Table 25). They include blended finance and parametric insurance in agriculture; green bonds, land value capture, and property-level flood resilience schemes for flooding; biodiversity and carbon credits alongside payment for ecosystem services in the natural environment; road user charging, tolls, and collective investment vehicles in transport; and water funds and sustainability-linked finance in the water sector, though options here are more constrained given Scottish Water’s public ownership model.

It was not possible to apply these estimates to the total figures for adaptation spend due to methodological differences in scope. However, the results suggest that for the five sectors explored, there is modest potential to boost private sector participation in adaptation funding and financing. While the numbers are modest in percentage terms, this nonetheless highlights real opportunity to increase private contributions, which will become increasingly important as costs are projected to rise significantly. Scottish Government and associated non-departmental public bodies should therefore consider this as part of the development of SNAP4.

Who pays for adaptation?

A clear structural tension running through all five sectors is the question of who pays for adaptation. Private finance can help meet upfront costs but rarely reduces the underlying funding burden. Costs are frequently transferred back to government or consumers, meaning private sector participation should be understood as complementary to, rather than a substitute for, public funding. This is reinforced by the nature of Scotland’s adaptation priorities. The majority of these fall within Type A and B categories (see Section 2.2 and Figure 3), implying that approximately three-quarters of investment needs must be publicly funded. Scaling private participation will therefore require active policy intervention, enabling conditions, and public co-financing to de-risk investment – it will not emerge through market forces alone.

How adaptation costs are ultimately recovered also has significant distributional consequences: income-tax funding spreads cost progressively but suppresses household consumption, while price-based approaches risk being regressive in essential sectors such as agriculture. Funding design is therefore as consequential as investment scale.

Across all sectors, the co-benefits of adaptation investment – avoided losses, economic stimulus, and socio-environmental gains – can substantially strengthen the economic rationale for action, particularly from a public sector perspective. However, these benefits are rarely fully monetised, meaning investment cases are systematically understated. Crucially, while co-benefits reinforce the public sector case for sustained funding, they do not necessarily translate into financial returns for private investors. This distinction helps explain the persistent gap between headline benefit-cost ratios and the limited appetite of private capital for adaptation investment.

Uncertainties and challenges

Our findings are a first attempt to quantify Scotland’s climate adaptation investment need across five sectors and should be interpreted accordingly. Significant uncertainties and methodological limitations attach to each dimension of the analysis.

Adaptation investment need estimates

Costing approaches vary considerably, from detailed sector/subsector assessments (rail, water), to climate-proofing uplifts on budget lines (roads), to apportionment of mixed-objective spend (natural environment), to value transfer approaches (communities – flood protection schemes). The breadth of approaches limits comparability across sectors and introduces varying degrees of uncertainty, as reflected in the confidence ratings in Table 23. The investment estimates presented in this report are indicative and order-of-magnitude in nature.

Key challenges and wider sources of uncertainty include:

Undefined risk tolerance thresholds

  • Without agreed adaptation objectives or acceptable risk levels for each sector, investment need cannot be scaled against a definitive end-goal. The figures we present reflect assumptions about continued or modestly scaled-up spending rather than what might be required to meet specific resilience outcomes.

Partial sectoral coverage

  • Many sectors such as energy, telecommunications, and health were not included in our analysis due to resource constraints. Furthermore, the sectors included in our analysis are only partially covered. For example, for transport, we included only rail infrastructure and motorway and trunk roads, we did not include local road networks, ferries, aviation, canals, and active travel. The communities sectoral analysis focused on flood risk management only. Adaptation investment needs for storm, drought, coastal erosion, heat risks and other factors that will affect communities were not considered.

Deep uncertainty in underlying drivers

  • Future climate trajectories, socio-economic and geopolitical change all remain uncertain.

Mixed objective apportionment

  • Apportionment fractions, (for example, the adaptation share attached to peatland restoration, woodland creation, and agricultural support) carry considerable uncertainty. They were derived through exploring the listed multiple objectives of each investment area and then using expert elicitation to attach an estimate apportionment, rather than empirical evidence.

Risk of double-counting

  • In some areas, the same expenditure may be captured under more than one sector. For example, peatland grants administered through Scottish Water catchment programmes may overlap with peatland restoration budgets counted within the natural environment sector.

Public-private investment split

The estimates of current and potential private sector contributions to adaptation funding are highly speculative and should be treated as illustrative rather than definitive. This relates to the following challenges:

Limited baseline data

  • Private sector adaptation expenditure is largely unrecorded across all five sectors. In agriculture, it is folded into support payment income streams; in transport, it is estimated from aggregate local government finance data; in water, it reflects consumer billing structures rather than genuine private risk-bearing. These limitations make cross-sector comparisons unreliable.

Definitional ambiguity between financing and funding

  • Instruments such as green bonds, sustainability-linked loans, or PPP arrangements can mobilise upfront private capital, but costs are typically repaid through public budgets, regulated consumer charges, or government guarantees. Private participation therefore tends to alter the timing and vehicle of finance without necessarily reducing the public funding burden.

Rapidly shifting governance landscape

  • The consolidation of rail services under Great British Rail, development of Scottish Government bond issuance mechanisms, and evolving frameworks for biodiversity and carbon credits could all materially alter funding arrangements over the period to 2040, making future contribution estimates uncertain.

Structural limits on private participation

  • Most of Scotland’s adaptation priorities fall within Type A or B categories (public goods or mixed-benefit activities with below-market returns). This means the majority of climate adaptation investment needs are likely to require public funding regardless of innovation in finance mechanisms.

Capturing wider co-benefits

The economic case for adaptation investment is substantially strengthened when the full triple dividend is considered. However, this report’s treatment of co-benefits is partial:

Limited co-benefits quantification in several sectors

  • Across all sectors, we have not explored the avoided losses of adaptation due to resource constraints.
  • Excluding economic stimulus, we have provided minimal evidence for the wider social, economic and environmental co-benefits of adaptation.
  • Where estimates are provided, notably for peatland restoration and woodland creation, these draw on literature values that carry their own uncertainty ranges and depend heavily on the pace and scale of successful delivery. More research is needed to capture the co-benefits of adaptation investment across Scotland.

Attribution challenges

  • Where adaptation investment delivers multiple outcomes, assigning economic value to the adaptation-specific component requires further subjective apportionment. The same hectare of restored peatland contributes to carbon sequestration, biodiversity gain, flood management, and water quality improvement simultaneously, making clean attribution inherently imprecise.

Conflation of societal and financial returns

  • High benefit-cost ratios in the literature typically reflect economic and environmental returns measured at a societal level, including non-market values that generate no cash flow. Private investors assess financial returns, incremental revenues and recoverable costs, which are considerably lower. Consequently, treating strong societal co-benefit ratios as evidence of private investment attractiveness risks overstating the potential for private finance mobilisation.

Recommended priorities

Recommended research priorities

While this project provides a first estimate of Scotland’s adaptation investment needs, it has identified significant gaps that require further data, research and analysis.

  • Adaptation objectives and risk tolerance
    • Develop specific, quantified adaptation targets and sector-specific risk tolerance thresholds aligned with climate scenarios and socioeconomic assumptions.
    • Use these objectives to enable meaningful gap analysis between current spending and investment need, and to support the development of SNAP4.
  • Asset-level vulnerability and investment pipelines
    • Develop comprehensive, spatially referenced vulnerability inventories across all five sectors included in this analysis.
    • Move from broad climate vulnerability assessments to spatially specific prioritisation of sites, assets, and interventions, building on existing work such as the Transport Scotland VLOG prioritisation tool and the Network Rail Scotland Adaptation Pathways Programme.
    • Integrate existing data sources, including Coastal Climate Adaptation Plans, SEPA flood risk assessments, and emerging sectoral tools, into the development of future adaptation investment plans.
  • Financial transparency and attribution
    • Improve the granularity in public budget reporting, including clearer disaggregation of adaptation spend from mitigation, and other objectives.
    • Undertake dedicated methodological work in agriculture to isolate the adaptation-specific component of spending and assess whether current budgets levels are appropriate for changing climate risks.
  • Triple dividend
    • Avoided losses: build the evidence base on avoided losses associated with adaptation investment across all sectors in Scotland, drawing on top-down modelling approaches and/or sector-specific data sources where available.
    • Economic stimulus: quantify the economic stimulus effects of adaptation investment, including employment, supply chain, and distributional impacts. CGE modelling offers a promising approach for capturing these macroeconomic and regional effects.
    • Social and environmental co-benefits: assess the wider social and environmental co-benefits of adaptation investment across sectors. This research could include a combination of reviewing existing literature and associated data, wider stakeholder engagement and/or practical field-based research for sectors such as natural environment and agriculture.
  • Distributional impacts
    • Conduct targeted research on the distributional consequences of different financing approaches – income-tax, price-based, and charge-based – and on compensating policy measures to support more equitable funding design.
  • Cross-sector collaboration
    • Develop mechanisms and spaces to share adaptation research and delivery across sectors, building on existing forums such as the Climate Ready Infrastructure Scotland (CRIS) Forum.
    • Further explore efficiency gains from catchment-scale management approaches, where investment simultaneously delivers water quality, biodiversity, flood management, and carbon sequestration benefits.
    • Map how adaptation priorities can be embedded within existing cross-cutting frameworks spanning civil contingencies, biodiversity governance, spatial planning, and infrastructure regulation, with Local Resilience Partnerships and the Scottish Wildfire Forum as existing entry points.

Prioritisation

A further challenge that cuts across all sectors is how to prioritise adaptation investment when resources are constrained. Standard cost-benefit frameworks tend to favour investment in areas of dense population, maximising the number of beneficiaries per pound spent, for example directing flood protection spending towards urban centres. However, several of the sectors and sub-sectors assessed in this report are most acutely exposed to climate risk in rural and remote areas. This includes transport routes, agricultural land, peatland, and water supplies serving dispersed communities. This creates a structural tension between economic efficiency and equity and raises important questions about who adaptation investment is designed to protect. Future work should explore how prioritisation frameworks can be developed that explicitly account for rural vulnerability, social equity, and Just Transition principles alongside conventional cost-benefit criteria ensuring that investment decisions do not systematically disadvantage the people and environment that face the greatest climate exposure.

Recommended strategic priorities for adaptation investment

A national strategy for adaptation investment must begin by recognising that different sectors are at different stages of the adaptation investment cycle. For example, in communities, the priority is shifting from capacity building towards delivery, mobilising resources for property flood resilience and scaling flood protection schemes at pace. In transport, the immediate need is moving from risk assessment and vulnerability mapping towards robust costing and prioritised investment programmes. In the natural environment, the strategic focus could be to further develop the private finance ecosystem, accelerating the maturity of biodiversity credit and voluntary carbon markets to draw in private capital at scale.

Across all sectors, there is value in ensuring that adaptation objectives are embedded within existing spending programmes. For example, infrastructure maintenance, rural development funding, housing retrofit, and land management schemes. This requires improved budget tagging, clearer apportionment guidance, and stronger policy levers to ensure that co-funded programmes deliver credible adaptation outcomes alongside their primary objectives.

Private finance mobilisation also requires a more coherent national approach. While opportunities exist across all five sectors, they are currently fragmented, small-scale, and unevenly distributed. A clearer national strategy should identify which mechanisms are most appropriate for each sector, what enabling conditions are required, and how public co-financing can be used most effectively to de-risk private investment. This could include drawing on international experience with blended finance, green bonds, and nature finance markets, while remaining realistic about the fundamental limits of private capital in funding what are, in most cases, public goods. Underpinning all of this is the need for an improved monitoring and evaluation framework for adaptation investment specifically. As adaptation investment programmes scale up, a consistent and transparent approach to tracking expenditure, outputs, and outcomes across sectors will be essential for accountability, learning, and iterative improvement, aligned with the SNAP3 requirements but going further to capture financial flows and asset-level progress.

A summary of the recommended strategic priorities for adaptation investment is provided in Box 2 below.

Box 2: Summary of strategic priorities for adaptation investment

  • The development of quantified adaptation targets and asset-level vulnerability inventories are the most important near-term research priorities, providing the foundations for robust investment need estimates and long-term adaptation pathways.
  • The improvement of financial attribution through improved budget tagging, clearer disaggregation of adaptation from co-objectives, and fuller quantification of the triple dividend, is important for making a credible and comprehensive economic case for sustained public investment.
  • Cross-sector collaboration, both in sharing research and delivery costs and in embedding adaptation within existing governance networks, offers significant efficiency gains that are currently underexploited.
  • Investment strategies must be sector-differentiated, reflecting where each sector sits in the adaptation cycle, and focused on building investment-ready pipelines capable of attracting both public and private finance at scale.
  • A shared monitoring and evaluation framework, specifically focused on adaptation investment, aligned with SNAP3, but capturing financial flows and asset-level outcomes, is a precondition for accountability and iterative improvement as the Scottish adaptation programme expands.

Acknowledgements

We would firstly like to thank the Scottish Government and ClimateXChange for their continued support with this project.

We would also like to thank the organisations and individuals that contributed information and/or case studies to this report, including: Scottish Water, Network Rail Scotland, Transport Scotland, FloodRe, University of Strathclyde, Hope in Place CIC and NatureScot.

Additionally, we would like to thank the individuals that contributed to preparing this report and analysis, including David Sturgess and Adam Hughes-Buchanan (both University of Strathclyde) and Andrew Moxey and Paul Watkiss (both Paul Watkiss Associates).

Finally, we would like to acknowledge the support from ATTENUATE project for their contributions on the conceptual framing, costing and financing (funded by UK Research & Innovation; grant number UKRI282). ATTENUATE is a collaborative project focused on unlocking private sector funding for climate adaptation, building the case for greater public sector investment, and addressing governance barriers to investment and is supported by the UKRI-Defra ‘Maximising UK Adaptation to Climate Change’ programme. For more information, see www.lse.ac.uk/granthaminstitute/projects/attenuate.

References

Asian Development Bank (2026) Climate Adaptation Investment Plan for the Water Sector in Bhutan.

Audit Scotland (2025) Flooding in Communities: Moving Towards Flood Resilience. Edinburgh: Audit Scotland. Available at: https://audit.scot/uploads/2025-08/nr_250828_flooding_in_communities.pdf (Accessed: 10/02/26).

BBC (2019). Anders Povlsen: Why a Danish billionaire bought the Highlands. Available at: https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-scotland-47803110#:~:text=They%20have%20embarked%20on%20an,100m%20is%20far%20from%20understated (Accessed 24/02/26, 13:00).

Bebber, D. P., Maclean, I. M., Mosedale, J. R., & Youngman, B. D. (2025). Potential impacts of plant pests and diseases on trees and forests in the United Kingdom. Plants, People, Planet, 7(5), 1538-1550.

Bosello, F., Standardi, G., Parrado, R., Dasgupta, S., Guastella, G., Rizzati, M., Pareglio, S., Schleypen, J., Boere, E., Batka, M., Valin, H., Bodirsky, B., Lincke, D., Tiggeloven, T., & van Ginkel, K. (2020). D2.7: Macroeconomic, spatially‑resolved impact assessment (Version 0.6, revised March 2022). COACCH Project, Horizon 2020 Grant Agreement No. 776479. https://www.coacch.eu/wp-content/uploads/2018/03/D2.7_revMAR2022.pdf

Borio, I., & Kassian, J. (2023). Property flood resilience: Market study. Flood Re. https://www.floodre.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/20759_Flood_Re_PFR-Report_2023.pdf

Boyd, R., and A. Hunt. (2004). “Costing the Impacts of Climate Change in the UK: Overview Guidelines. (Metroeconomica).” UK Climate Impacts Programme Technical Report. http://www.ukcip.org.uk/images/stories/Pub_pdfs/Costings%20overview.pdf.

Brett, L., Cha, Y., & White, C. J. (2026). Impactful Weather and Multi‐Hazard Events: Lived Experiences From Rural Scotland. Climate Resilience and Sustainability, 5(1), e70035.

Broadmeadow, S., Nisbet, T., Valatin, G. (2023). Revised valuation of flood regulation services of existing forest cover to inform natural capital accounts. Forest Research. Available at: https://cdn.forestresearch.gov.uk/2023/01/Revised-valuation-of-flood-regulation-services-of-existing-forest-cover-2023.pdf

Climate-ADAPT, 2026. Nature for Insurance, insurance for nature (NATURANCE). Available at:https://climate-adapt.eea.europa.eu/en/metadata/projects/nature-for-insurance-insurance-for-nature (Accessed 24/02/26, 13:25).

Climate Change Committee (CCC) (2022). The just transition and climate change adaptation.
Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2022/03/CCC-The-just-transition-and-climate-change-adaptation.pdf (Accessed: 09/03/2026).

Climate Ready Clyde (2021). Glasgow City Region Climate Adaptation Strategy and Action Plan: Finance Adaptation Gap Estimates 2018/19. Climate Ready Clyde Secretariat, supported by Paul Watkiss Associates. Available at: https://climatereadyclyde.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/15-Finance-Adaptation-Gap-Estimates.pdf

Climate Policy Initiative (CPI) (2025) ‘Global Landscape of Climate Finance 2024. Insights for COP29’. Available at: https://www.climatepolicyinitiative. org/publication/global-landscape-of-climate-finance-2024/

Croatian Parliament (2020) Strategy for Adaptation to Climate Change in the Republic of Croatia for the Period up to 2040 with a View to 2070. Zagreb: Hrvatski sabor. Available at: https://narodne-novine.nn.hr/clanci/sluzbeni/2020_04_46_921.html (Accessed: 10/11/25, 15:00).

Dale, N., & Zhekova, S.(2019). National Climate Change Adaptation Strategy and Action Plan. Republic of Bulgaria. Available at: https://www.moew.government.bg/static/media/ups/categories/attachments/Strategy%20and%20Action%20Plan%20-%20Full%20Report%20-%20%20ENd3b215dfec16a8be016bfa529bcb6936.pdf  

Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs (DEFRA) and Environment Agency (2025) Hundreds of Thousands of Homes and Businesses to Benefit from Largest Flood Defence Investment Programme in History. London: HM Government. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/news/hundreds-of-thousands-of-homes-and-businesses-to-benefit-from-largest-flood-defence-investment-programme-in-history (Accessed 10/02/26, 10:00).

Department for Transport (2025) Railways Bill factsheet: introducing and designing Great British Railways. Published 5 November 2025. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/railways-bill/railways-bill-introducing-and-designing-great-british-railways (Accessed: 23/03/2026).

Descartes (2026). Parametric Insurance for the Agricultural Industry. Available at: https://descartesunderwriting.com/industries/agriculture (Accessed 24/02/26).

Diageo (2026). Peatlands. Available at: https://www.diageo.com/en/esg/sustainability/peatlands (Accessed 24/02/26, 16:00).

Dolques, G., Dépoues, V. and Thomazeau, F. (2026) Adapting France to +4°C: Current Resources, Additional Needs, and Funding Options. Paris: Institute for Climate Economics (I4CE). Available at: https://www.i4ce.org/wp-content/uploads/2025/10/Adapting-France-to-4%C2%B0C.pdf (Accessed: 06/11/25, 10:00).

Drinking Water Quality Regulator for Scotland (DWQR) (2024) Private Water Supplies: Drinking Water Quality in Scotland 2023. Published September 2024. Available at: https://dwqr.scot/media/xpxnhhxz/private-water-supply-annual-report-2023.pdf

England, K., Watkiss, P., & Hunt, A. (2023). Adaptation finance case study 2023: Craigleith Retail Park demonstrator. Adaptation Scotland. https://adaptation.scot/app/uploads/2024/09/adaptation-finance-case-study-2023.pdf

England K., Moxey, A. and Watkiss, P. (2024) Economic assessment of climate risks and opportunities for South East Scotland. Task 1: High level analysis of economic impacts and costs of adaptation. Available at: https://climatereadyses.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/2a-PWA-2025-Economic-Implications-of-Climate-Change-for-ESES-Part-1.pdf

Environment Agency (2021) Long‑term Investment Scenarios (LTIS) 2019. Updated 1 July 2021. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/flood-and-coastal-risk-management-in-england-long-term-investment/long-term-investment-scenarios-ltis-2019

Eurostat, 2026. Gross domestic product at market prices (Updated 20/02/2026). Available at:https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/databrowser/view/TEC00001/bookmark/table?lang=en&bookmarkId=e3030c9f-8b66-48ae-b1be-43199d1060eb&c=1622804233798 (Accessed 10/01/2026).

FloodRe (2023). What is Build Back Better? Available at: https://www.floodre.co.uk/faq/what-is-build-back-better/ (Accessed 15/01/2026)

Forestry and Land Scotland (2023) Loch Katrine Land Management Plan 2023–2033: Central Region. Forestry and Land Scotland. Available at: https://forestryandland.gov.scot/media/ehcnlz1v/loch-katrine-central-land-management-plan-2023-33.pdf (Accessed: 31/03/2026)

Global Commission on Adaptation (GCA) (2019). Adapt Now: A Global Call for Leadership on Climate Resilience. Global Centre on Adaptation and World Resources. Available at: https://gca.org/reports/adapt-now-a-global-call-for-leadership-on-climate-resilience/ 

Government of New Zealand (2025) National Adaptation Framework. Available at: https://environment.govt.nz/publications/national-adaptation-framework/

Greenhill, S., Hsiang, S., Balboni, C., Barrage, Bolliger I. W., , Boomhower, J., Diaz, D., Hannah Druckenmiller, Teevrat Garg, Miyuki Hino, Harrison Hong, Carolyn Kousky, Jeremy Martinich, Ishan Nath, Kimberly L. Oremus, R. Jisung Park, Toan Phan, Jonathan Proctor, Will Rafey, Marcus C. Sarofim, Schlenker, W., and Simon, B. (2026) Using markets to adapt to climate change. Science 391,662-664.DOI:10.1126/science.aea7431 https://www.science.org/doi/10.1126/science.aea7431

Harari, D. and Murray, A. (2024) Scotland’s Economy. Debate Pack CDP-2024-0126. London: House of Commons Library. Available at: https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/CDP-2024-0126/CDP-2024-0126.pdf (Accessed: 12/12/26, 11:00).

HM Treasury (2026) The Green Book: Appraisal and Evaluation in Central Government. Updated 5 February 2026. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/the-green-book-appraisal-and-evaluation-in-central-government/the-green-book-2026

Jacobs and AECOM (2022) Strategic Transport Projects Review: Protecting out climate and improving lives. Appendix I: Recommendation Appraisal Summary Tables. December 2022. Available at: recommendation-31-trunk-road-and-motorway-network-climate-change-adaptation-and-resilience.pdf

JBA Risk Management (2025). Reducing Flood Risk: Which Homes Are Most Suitable for PFR? Phase 1: National‑Level Analysis. 2025. Flood Re. Available at: https://www.floodre.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/JBA-Flood-Re-Phase-1-Report.pdf

Knittel, N. et al. (2017) The Costs of Climate Change Adaptation for the Austrian Federal Budget. PACINAS Working Paper #04. Available at: http://anpassung.ccca.at/pacinas/wp-content/uploads/sites/3/2017/07/10_Knittel-et-al-WP4-2017.pdf (Accessed: 06/11/25, 9:30).

Lawson, E. and Davies, D. (2025) Scotland’s water industry: overview of regulation and key challenges. SPICe Briefing SB 25‑52. 28 October 2025. Available at:https://bprcdn.parliament.scot/published/2025/10/28/50cd1cc7-b177-4564-b032-afc96aeeebc7/SB%2025-52.pdf

Mather, K. (2025) Rolling Stock: Procurement. Written question 92441, tabled on 18 November 2025. Available at: https://questions-statements.parliament.uk/written-questions/detail/2025-11-18/92441/ (Accessed: 23/03/2026).

Multilateral Development Bank (2023). 2022 Joint Report on Multilateral Development Banks’ Climate Finance. Available at: https://doi.org/10.18235/0005182

Ministry for Ecological Transition and the Demographic Challenge (MITECO) (2020) National Climate Change Adaptation Plan: Work Programme 2021–2025. Madrid: MITECO. Available at: https://www.miteco.gob.es/content/dam/miteco/es/cambio-climatico/temas/impactos-vulnerabilidad-y-adaptacion/pt1-pnacc_tcm30-535273.pdf

Morris, J., & Camino, M. (2011). Economic assessment of freshwater, wetland and floodplain (FWF) ecosystem services. UK National Ecosystem Assessment Working Paper, Cranfield University.

mygov.scot. (2025). Apply for a private water supply grant. Available at: https://www.mygov.scot/private-water-supplies/apply-for-grant (Accessed 20/03/2026, 15:00)

National Audit Office. (2023). Resilience to flooding [Press release]. Available at: https://www.nao.org.uk/press-releases/resilience-to-flooding/ (Accessed 23/03/2026 at 10:00).

NatureScot (2026) FIRNS – The Facility for Investment Ready Nature in Scotland. Available at: https://www.nature.scot/funding-and-projects/firns-facility-investment-ready-nature-scotland (Accessed: 24/02/26, 17:00).

Network Rail (2024) Weather Resilience and Climate Change Adaptation (WRCCA): Summary of Regional Plans for 2024–2029. Available at: https://www.networkrail.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/CP7-WRCCA-Plans-combined-summary-of-all-regions-April-2024.pdf (Accessed 01/04/2026).

Network Rail Scotland (2024). Climate Ready Plan 2024–2029. Scotland’s Railway. Available at: https://www.networkrail.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/Scotlands-Railway-CP7-Climate-Ready-WRCCA-Plan.pdf (Accessed:09/03/2026).

Neumann, T., Martinez Botia, L., de Goër de Herve, M., Zink, V., Tröltzsch, J. & Tarpey, J. (2025). Knowledge development and application concerning costs of adaptation compared to costs of inaction: Final report. European Environment Agency.
Available at: https://www.ecologic.eu/sites/default/files/publication/2026/Knowledge-adaptation-costs-70812.pdf (Accessed: 07/01/2026).

OECD (2023) ‘Scaling Up Adaptation Finance in Developing Countries: Challenges and Opportunities for International Providers, Green Finance and Investment’, OECD Publishing, Paris, https://doi.org/10.1787/b0878862-en.

Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR) (2021) Fiscal Risks Report. CP 453. London: HM Treasury. Available at: https://obr.uk/docs/dlm_uploads/Fiscal_risks_report_July_2021.pdf

Office for Budget Responsibility. (2024). Estimating the direct fiscal costs of flooding. Available at: https://obr.uk/box/estimating-the-direct-fiscal-costs-of-flooding/ (Accessed 23/03/2026).

Office for Budget Responsibility. (2025). Fiscal risks and sustainability (CP 1343). Presented to Parliament by the Exchequer Secretary to the Treasury, July 2025. ISBN 978‑1‑5286‑5653‑5. Available at: https://obr.uk/docs/dlm_uploads/Fiscal-risks-and-sustainability-report-July-2025.pdf

Office of Rail and Road (2025) Rail industry finance (UK): April 2024 to March 2025. Available at: https://dataportal.orr.gov.uk/media/ptafpcco/uk-rail-industry-finance-2425.pdf (Accessed: 23 March 2026).

Pettit, A., Kerr, H., JBA Consulting (2020). Property Flood Resilience – Scottish Baseline Study. ClimateXChange. Available at: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/493.

Rexer, Jonah Matthew & Sharma, Siddharth (2024). “Climate Change Adaptation : What Does the Evidence Say ?,” Policy Research Working Paper Series 10729, The World Bank.

Rising J, Dietz S, Dumas M, Khurana R, Kikstra J, Lenton T, Linsenmeier M, Smith C, Taylor C, Ward B (2022) What will climate change cost the UK? Risks, impacts and mitigation for the net zero transition. London: Grantham Research Institute on Climate Change and the Environment, London School of Economics and Political Science. Available at: https://www.lse.ac.uk/granthaminstitute/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/What-will-climate-change-cost-the-UK-risks-impacts-mitigation-1.pdf.

Sayers, P., Penning-Rowsell, E. C., & Horritt, M. (2018). Flood vulnerability, risk, and social disadvantage: current and future patterns in the UK. Regional environmental change, 18(2), 339-352.

Rivington, M., Akoumianaki, I and Coull, M. (2020). Private Water Supplies and Climate Change The likely impacts of climate change (amount, frequency and distribution of precipitation), and the resilience of private water supplies. CRW2018_05. Scotland’s Centre of Expertise for Waters (CREW). Available online at: crew.ac.uk/publications.

Savills (2026) Savills Welcomes Launch of Scotland’s Agritourism Investment Scheme as Timely Catalyst for Rural Diversification. Available at: https://www.savills.co.uk/insight-and-opinion/savills-news/388031/savills-welcomes-launch-of-scotland-s-agritourism-investment-scheme-as-timely-catalyst-for-rural-diversification (Accessed: 23/02/26, 14:00)

ScotRail (n.d.) About ScotRail. Available at: https://www.scotrail.co.uk/about-scotrail (Accessed: 23/03/2026).

ScotRail (2026) ScotRail launches finance procurement phase for new trains, Last updated: 27 February 2026. Available at: https://www.scotrail.co.uk/about-scotrail/news/scotrail-launches-finance-procurement-phase-new-trains-0 (Accessed: 23/03/2026).

Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) (2025). National Flood Risk Assessment 2025: Understanding Current and Future Flood Risk in a Changing Climate. December 2025. Available at: https://beta.sepa.scot/media/2kliy0j5/national-flood-risk-assessment-2025.pdf

Scottish Forestry (2025) An evaluation of the Forestry Grant Scheme 2015–2021. Available at: https://www.forestry.gov.scot/sites/default/files/pub-documents/PDF_Grants_and_Funding_Reviews_and_Evaluation_FGS_13082025_V1.0.pdf

Scottish Government. (2023a). £250 million funding package spend for peatland restoration: EIR release. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/gbp250-million-funding-package-spend-for-peatland-restoration-eir-release/ (Accessed 15/03/2026).

Scottish Government (2023b). Mobilising private investment in natural capital. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/research-and-analysis/2023/04/mobilising-private-investment-natural-capital/documents/mobilising-private-investment-natural-capital/mobilising-private-investment-natural-capital/govscot:document/mobilising-private-investment-natural-capital.pdf

Scottish Government. (2023c). Tackling the impacts of climate change and water scarcity. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/news/tackling-the-impacts-of-climate-change-and-water-scarcity/

Scottish Government. (2024a). Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024–2029. Available at:
https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-2024-2029-2/documents/

Scottish Government. (2024b). Natural capital market framework. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/advice-and-guidance/2024/11/natural-capital-market-framework/documents/natural-capital-market-framework/natural-capital-market-framework/govscot:document/natural-capital-market-framework.pdf

Scottish Government (2025a). Programme for Government 2025 to 2026. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/programme-government-2025-26/pages/5/ (Accessed 09/03/2026).

Scottish Government (2025b) Scottish National Adaptation Plan Annual Progress Report 2024–2025. SG/2025/108. Edinburgh: Scottish Government. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/progress-report/2025/06/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-annual-progress-report-2024-2025/documents/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-annual-progress-report-2024-2025/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-annual-progress-report-2024-2025/govscot%3Adocument/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-annual-progress-report-2024-2025.pdf

Scottish Government (2025c) GDP Quarterly National Accounts, Scotland: 2024 Quarter 4 (October to December). Edinburgh: Scottish Government. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/statistics/2025/04/gdp-quarterly-national-accounts-2024-q4/documents/publication-download/publication-download/govscot%3Adocument/GDP%2BQNAS%2B-%2BPublication%2B-%2B2024Q4.pdf

Scottish Government (2025d). Scottish farm business income: Annual estimates 2023–2024. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-farm-business-income-annual-estimates-2023-2024/pages/breakdown-of-farm-income/ (Accessed 23/03/2026).

Scottish Government (2025e) National Flood Resilience Strategy. Edinburgh: Scottish Government. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2024/12/national-flood-resilience-strategy-3/documents/national-flood-resilience-strategy/national-flood-resilience-strategy/govscot%3Adocument/national-flood-resilience-strategy.pdf

Scottish Government (2026a) Next step on bonds plan. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/news/next-steps-on-bonds-plan/

Scottish Government (2026b) Scottish Budget 2026 to 2027. Edinburgh: Scottish Government. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-budget-2026-2027/ https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-budget-2026-2027/documents/

Scottish Government (2026c) Scottish Budget 2026 to 2027: climate change taxonomy. Edinburgh: Scottish Government. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-budget-2026-2027-climate-change-taxonomy/documents/ (Accessed: 13/01/26)

Scottish Government. (2026d). The funding of local government in Scotland, 2026–2027. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/funding-local-government-scotland-2026-27/pages/2/

Scottish Government (2026e) Water services – investing in and paying from 2027: consultation. Published 6 January 2026. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/water-services-investing-paying-2027/pages/2/ (Accessed: 23/03/2026).

Scottish National Investment Bank. (2026). Gresham House Forestry Fund. Available at: https://www.thebank.scot/portfolio/gresham-house-forestry-fund (Accessed 23/03/26).

Scottish Water (2024) Scottish Water Climate Change Adaptation Plan. Available at: 290224ScottishWaterAdaptationPlan.pdf (Accessed 31/03/2026).

Scottish Water (2025b) 2024/25 Scottish Annual Report and Accounts. Performance and prospects. Available at: https://www.scottishwater.co.uk/-/media/ScottishWater/Document-Hub/Key-Publications/Annual-Reports/SCW2799-Annual-Report-2025_Interactive-FULL-V12-NOT-Signed-AG.pdf

Scottish Water (2026a) SR27 Business Plan 2027-2033 Technical Appendices. Dunfermline: Scottish Water. Available at: https://www.scottishwater.co.uk/help-and-resources/document-hub/key-publications/delivery-and-business-plans (Accessed: 23/03/2026).

Scottish Water (2026b). Dundee domestic smart monitoring trial. Available at: https://www.scottishwater.co.uk/In-Your-Area/Investments-in-Your-Area/150125-Dundee-Smart-Monitoring (Accessed 12/02/2026, 16:00).

Scottish Water (2026c) Final Business Plan 2027–2033: Investing in Scotland’s Future. Available at: https://www.scottishwater.co.uk/-/media/scottishwater/document-hub/key-publications/delivery-and-business-plans/business-plan-sr27/260226scottishwaterfinalbusinessplan2027to033.pdf (Accessed: 23/03/2026).

Scottish Water (2026d) Loch Katrine Woodland Creation and Peatland Restoration. Available at: https://www.scottishwater.co.uk/In-Your-Area/Investments-in-Your-Area/070125-Loch-Katrine-woodland-creation (Accessed 31/03/2026).

Shanahan, D., Bush, R., Gaston, K. et al. (2016) Health Benefits from Nature Experiences Depend on Dose. Sci Rep 6, 28551. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1038/srep28551.

Sniffer (2021). Evidence for the third UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA3) – Summary for Scotland. Available at: CCRA-Evidence-Report-Scotland-Summary-Final-1.pdf

Song, C., Atun, F., Blanford, J. I., & Anthony, C. (2025). Impact of flooding on the social and mental health of older adults-A scoping review. Water Security, 25, 100190.

SSE (2025) SSEN Transmission First Business to Sign the Highland Social Value Charter. Available at: https://www.sse.com/news-and-views/2025/11/ssen-transmission-first-business-to-sign-the-highland-social-value-charter/ (Accessed: 24/02/26, 15:00).

Taylor, R., England, K. and Eggert, A. L. (2025) Developing an Adaptation Investment Plan. Guidance for facilitators. Deliverable 3.1 of the CLIMATEFIT project.

Thomson, A. et al. (2025) UK Rural Land Use Archetypes – Part 2: Transforming Rural UK Land-Use to High-Carbon Store, Climate Resilient, Nature Rich and Economically Productive Systems. Prepared for the Climate Change Committee. Wallingford: UK Centre for Ecology & Hydrology (UKCEH). Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/UK-Rural-Land-Use-Archetypes-%E2%80%93-Part-2.pdf

Transport Scotland. (n.d.). The trunk road network. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/transport-network/roads/the-trunk-road-network/#64509

Transport Scotland (n.d.) Scotrail Franchise. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/public-transport/rail/scotrail-trains-limited-and-caledonian-sleeper-limited/

Transport Scotland (2025) Scottish Transport Statistics 2024. Chapter 10 Finance. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/scottish-transport-statistics-2024/

United Nations Environment Programme (2024). Adaptation Gap Report 2024: Come hell and high water — As fires and floods hit the poor hardest, it is time for the world to step up adaptation actions. Nairobi. Available at: https://doi.org/10.59117 /20.500.11822/46497.

Valverde, M.J., Tamayo Tabares, E., Umana, G., Neumann, T., Arvis, B., Cauchy, A., Bourkane, I., Tarpey, J., McDonald, H. & Tröltszch, J. (2022). Costs of Adaptation vs Costs of Inaction. Final Report. Prepared for the European Environment Agency. Ecologic Institute, 24 February 2022. Available at: https://www.ecologic.eu/sites/default/files/publication/2024/2633-10-Cost-of-Adaptation-vs-Cost-of-Inaction-web.pdf

Watkiss, P (2022). The Costs of Adaptation, and the Economic Costs and Benefits of Adaptation in the UK. Policy Paper.

Watkiss and England (2025): Adaptation finance and the private sector: opportunities and challenges for developing countries. Zurich Climate Resilience Alliance. Available at: https://www.mercycorps.org/sites/default/files/2025-09/zcra-private-finance-evidence.pdf

Watkiss, P., England., K., Hunt, A., Watkiss, O and Sayer. P. (2026a) The Costs of Adaptation: Analysis of the National Adaptation Programme 3. Supporting research to the Climate Change Committee. March 2026

Watkiss, P., England., K., Hunt, A., Watkiss, O and Sayer. P. (2026b) The Costs of Adaptation for UK Transport and Land Systems. Supporting research to the Climate Change Committee. March 2026

Westerhof, S. G., Booij, M. J., Van den Berg, M. C. J., Huting, R. J. M., & Warmink, J. J. (2023). Uncertainty analysis of risk-based flood safety standards in the Netherlands through a scenario-based approach. International Journal of River Basin Management, 21(3), 559–574. https://doi.org/10.1080/15715124.2022.2060243

Willis, K.G. et al. (2003) The Social and Environmental Benefits of Forests in Great Britain. Report to Forestry Commission Edinburgh. Newcastle: Centre for Research in Environmental Appraisal & Management (CREAM), University of Newcastle. Available at: https://www.forestry.gov.scot/sites/default/files/pub-documents/PDFReport_EconomicResearch_Social_Environment_Benefits_Forests_Main_Report_01072003.pdf

Woodland Carbon Code (2026) The Quality Assurance Standard for UK Woodland Carbon Projects. Available at: https://www.woodlandcarboncode.org.uk/ (Accessed: 09/12/26, 10:00)

World Bank (2019). Bangladesh Climate-Smart Agriculture Investment Plan: Investment Opportunities in the Agriculture Sector’s Transition to a Climate Resilient Growth Path. World Bank. Available at: http://hdl.handle.net/10986/32742

World Bank (2024). Climate Adaptation Costing in a Changing World. Washington, DC: World Bank. Available at:
https://documents1.worldbank.org/curated/en/099050224072021662/pdf/P179070140a07209a1b5d012d978862b4ff.pdf

Appendices

Decision tree for assessing private sector potential in adaptation. Image source: ADB, 2026.

Detailed methods: Network Rail Scotland

Network Rail Scotland calculated future adaptation investment needs using UKCP18 climate projections under two scenarios: RCP 6.0 (medium emissions, ~2°C warming by c.2055) and RCP 8.5 (high emissions, ~2°C by c.2045, ~4°C by c.2080). The analysis assumed maintaining current service levels and asset condition at Control Period 7 (CP7) * exit levels, aligned with CCC guidance from October 2025. However, it is important to note that this represents just one potential ‘investment future’. Ultimately there are multiple other plausible futures (including changes to service provision targets, transport modal shift, prioritisation of investment in rail, changes to safety tolerance levels, or other external factors) that would all likely have different adaptation investment needs associated with them.

Currently, Network Rail Scotland uses two complementary approaches to track weather and climate resilience investment for CP7. The top-down approach assesses standardised intervention types and applies nationally agreed percentages to reflect their contribution to resilience (e.g., 100% of cost attributed to drainage renewals would count towards ‘resilience’, recognising that this type of intervention is fundamentally about the management of water on their infrastructure. Whereas only 50% of the cost associated with overhead line renewals would contribute to resilience, recognising that the driver of renewal is likely condition of asset, but that the renewed asset is inherently more resilient to hot weather). A bottom-up approach uses expert-led qualitative engineering assessment to identify specific schemes contributing to network resilience. Together, the two approaches established a CP7 baseline of £400m total in asset interventions that deliver a weather and/or climate resilience benefit (2024/25–2028/29).

Network Rail Scotland’s future potential adaptation investment calculations are structured across multiple cost categories: operations and support (operational response to extreme weather, seasonal treatment trains, emergency speed restrictions); maintenance (preventative and reactive maintenance, inspections, monitoring); network resilience renewals catch-up (addressing current renewal backlog); network resilience renewals additional (business-as-usual renewals responding to enhanced asset degradation from climate change); and location-specific renewals (targeted interventions at sites with specific weather and climate challenges). Furthermore, estimates for major capital interventions – large-scale transformational schemes where continued operations would otherwise be impossible as a result of changing climate – are also calculated, though with a large uncertainty range.

For each category, subject matter experts developed cost ranges based on considerations such as historical data, operational experience, climate projections, asset models maintained by Network Rail Technical Authority, and anticipated increases in weather event frequency and severity. Estimates were produced for both operations, support, maintenance, and renewals (OSMR), as well as OSMR combined with the additional inclusion of major capital interventions. The estimates produced represent additional investment required in each of CP8 (2029/30–2033/34) and CP9 (2034/35–2038/39) above CP7 baseline levels.

For our research period 2026/27–2039/40, we assumed the following: CP7 remaining spend from 2026/27 onwards; full CP8 investment estimates; full CP9 investment estimates; and, a pro-rated single year for 2039/40 (one-fifth of CP9 costs). All figures from Network Rail Scotland were quoted in 2023/24 prices and uplifted to 2026/27 prices. These figures assume maintaining a broadly similar service level and asset condition to that of CP7 and should be interpreted as one plausible investment future only.

Network Rail Scotland are undertaking active work to refine and improve these cost estimates. As part of their Adaptation Pathways Programme, they are working at pace to understand what potentially vulnerable locations may require future adaptation investment – the outputs of this work will allow them to narrow the indicative investment cost ranges included in this study. 

* A Control Period is Network Rail’s fixed five‑year funding and planning cycle that sets budgets and outputs for the railway (e.g., CP7: 1 Apr 2024 – 31 Mar 2029).

Detailed methods: Scottish Water

Scottish Water uses a wide range of climate and operational models to understand how future weather will affect its services in the Strategic Review (SR) SR27. This includes UKCP18 climate projections, water-resource models to assess drought impacts, catchment-deterioration models to understand future water-quality risks, rainfall-uplift and flood-modelling tools developed with UKWIR, Newcastle University and the Met Office, and mapping of flood and coastal-erosion exposure using SEPA flood maps and Dynamic Coast. Together, these tools allow Scottish Water to test resilience under both +2°C and +4°C global-warming scenarios.

Using these models, Scottish Water assessed 126 climate-related risks. Each risk was evaluated for both likelihood and impact, covering potential effects on customers, compliance, finances, health and the environment. This structured assessment helps the organisation prioritise where adaptation is most urgent and where investment will deliver the greatest resilience benefits.

Scottish Water’s adaptation actions fall into three categories: operational resilience, asset resilience, and service transformation. Most adaptation is embedded within core investment programmes, for example upgrading water-supply systems, wastewater networks and treatment works to cope with future rainfall and drought conditions. Some actions are key-driver investments where climate change is the primary reason for action, while others are retained risks where climate impacts are recognised but investment is not yet justified. A smaller set of actions are transformational, such as blue-green infrastructure, catchment-scale nature-based solutions and customer behaviour-change programmes.

For long-term planning, Scottish Water planning experts and technical consultants used early qualitative risk assessments to develop an indicative £2–5bn investment estimate for climate adaptation up to 2050. For the research period 2027/28–2039/40, SR27 spend (2027/28–2032/33) is taken directly from Scottish Water’s draft SR27 business plan. For the period 2033/34 onwards, the remaining budget — calculated by deducting the SR27 allocation from the lower and upper bounds of the £2–5bn long-term estimate — is distributed equally across annual periods from 2033/34 to 2049/50, with only the portion falling within the research window (2033/34–2039/40) included in the totals presented here. All figures provided by Scottish Water in 2024/25 prices have been uplifted to 2026/27 prices assuming 2% nominal growth per annum

Detailed methods and analysis: Modelling the economy-wide impacts of climate change adaptation spending.

Methodology:

For this work we have used the AMOSENVI, computable general equilibrium (CGE) model of the Scottish economy. The model captures all the sectors of the Scottish economy, aggregated into 30 broader sectors to allow us to trace the interactions between sectors and identify the drivers behind the results we observe. This is one of the key strengths of CGE modelling; it allows us to capture how the spending of different sectors to adapt to climate change affect prices and through that the wider Scottish economy.

Our model uses the 2019 edition of the Scottish Input-Output (IO) tables, published annually by the Scottish Government. This version is the latest currently available, where the Scottish economy is not affected by the Covid-19 pandemic or the Russian invasion of Ukraine and the impact it had on international energy prices. This way, 2019 data allow us to study how climate change adaptation spending might impact a version of the Scottish economy unaffected by major international incidents.

In our model, we assume that Scottish workers have the power to bargain for their wages, which is inversely related to the unemployment rate in the Scottish economy. This way, when unemployment is low, workers have the ability to bargain for higher wages and vice versa. However, we also assume that Scotland is an open economy, meaning that workers can freely migrate in and out of Scotland. When Scottish unemployment is lower and real wages are higher compared to the rest of UK (RUK) and the rest of the world (ROW), workers migrate to Scotland, increasing the labour supply. The opposite is true when Scotland experiences high unemployment and low real wages.

Wages are mostly important for the consumption of households. In this version of AMOSENVI, households are disaggregated to quintiles based on their gross income, with HG1 including 20% of the lowest income households and HG5 including 20% of the highest income households. Not all households are affected in the same way from changes in the economy, such as the climate adaptation spending, so this disaggregation allows us to capture the distributional impacts across the different household income groups. Households consume based on their disposable income, which is affected, apart from the wage and employment levels, from taxation such as income tax.

Income tax is a key, but not the only, source of revenue for the Scottish Government, which our model also includes. The income tax rate is normally fixed, but we also include scenarios where the income tax rate is adjusted to cover the cost of climate change adaptations in different sectors. Apart from raising revenue, the government also purchases goods and services from Scotland, RUK and abroad. Typically, government spending is fixed in real terms. However, for this work we use the government spending as a mechanism to model the adaptation spending.

Modelling adaptation spending

For the purpose of this work, we assume that climate change adaptation is a form of capital spending that does not create additional production capital for production sectors. Instead, it allows them to maintain the same production capacity, which would be at risk in the face of climate change.

This assumption has two main implications:

  • The breakdown of each sector’s spending matches where they would spend their investments to create new capital or to maintain their existing capital.
  • Climate change adaptation is a one-off spending. Once it is concluded and the associated cost is recovered, there is not further impact to the Scottish economy, which is gradually returning to its pre-spending level.

The latter assumption can be altered to assume the need for recurring spendings to address the challenges of climate change on an ongoing basis. However, to model the ongoing spending, more information is necessary to estimate how the adaptation cost might change over time and as climate change intensifies. Hence, we have opted to model a one-off spending based on the information currently available to us.

In terms of the spending, we model it as additional government purchases by the Scottish Government. Subsequently, we model the cost recovery in two main ways, depending on the sector that is adapting to climate change. We model a ‘government pays’ approach, where government covers the adaptation cost and raises the income tax to raise the necessary funds. Alternatively, we model an ‘industry pays’ approach, where the government still makes the necessary purchases of goods and services and then increases the indirect business tax rate of the adapting sectors so that they cover the adaptation cost.

Table D1: Climate adaptation spending in different parts of the Scottish economy (in 2025 prices).

Sector

Sub-sector

Investment estimate 2026-2040 (£m)

Investment estimate 2026-2040 (£m/yr)

Agriculture

£2,269m

£151m/yr

Communities

Regional hubs​

£98m​

£6.6m/yr​

Property flood resilience​

£867m

£58m/yr

Flood protection schemes​

£578m​

£39m/yr​

Natural environment c

Woodland creation​

£1,769m

£118m/yr

Peatland restoration​

£909m

£61m

Nature restoration​

£358m

£24m/yr

Transport

Rail​

£1,538m

£103m/yr

Trunk roads and motorways​

£8,170m

£545m/yr

Water

Scottish Water​

£1,009m

£67m/yr

We model the adaptation cost for 5 production sectors, as well as some more generic adaptation spending that is not linked to any specific production sector. The sectors, as well as the cost and who pays for it are reflected on Table D1. Please note that our original information included estimates in different price years. To improve the comparability between the different results, we adjust all the values in Table 1 and the values reported in our results to 2025 prices, using the UK GDP deflators.

Adaptation of Rail transportation

Constantly exposed to the elements, transportation services and their necessary equipment are facing the implications of climate change more than other sectors in the Scottish economy. Updates in different parts of the network and the trains themselves will be necessary to ensure that disruptions and safety concerns are kept to a minimum. Figure D1 presents how the adaptation spending of ‘Rail transportation’ is distributed across different Scottish sectors.

A pie chart showing the breakdown of 'Rail transportation' adaptation spending across industry sectors. The largest segment is Wholesale and Retail (vehicles) at 45.89%, followed by Construction at 17.51%, Public administration and defence at 14.77%, and All other services at 9.46%. Smaller segments include All other manufacturing at 3.70%, Wholesale excluding vehicles at 2.66%, Education at 2.30%, Architectural services etc at 1.91%, Fabricated metal at 1.29%, Agriculture at 0.29%, Coal, lignite and Mining Support at 0.21%, and Coke, petroleum and petrochemicals at 0.02%. Figure D1. Breakdown of ‘Rail transportation’ adaptation spending

As we can see in Figure D1, ‘Rail transportation’ needs to spend a significant amount on construction services, to maintain and reinforce the rail network to cope with the effects of climate change. The most significant share of the spending though is directed to ‘Wholesale & Retail – vehicles’. This sector is most focused on the sales, maintenance and repair of vehicles, including trains and carriages, which is obviously crucially important for the expansion of the and maintenance of the trains. It is reasonable to expect then that similarly large spendings will be required in adapting to climate change. Besides those two sectors, some spending on engineering and relevant specialised services is expected, currently included in ‘All other services’.

The impacts in the absence of cost recovery

Climate adaptation spending introduces a demand shock to the Scottish economy that leads to gross domestic product (GDP) and employment gains. The gains are originally observed in the sectors delivering the rail adaptation activity. Shortly after, the additional employment required to deliver the adaptation and the wage gains that this employment requirements drive, trigger an increase in household consumption that fuels further GDP and employment gains. See Figure D2.

Figure D2. Scottish GDP, employment and CPI impacts from climate change adaptation spending in Rail Transportation

The GDP gains peak at the end of the spending period in 2040[5], as are the employment gains. By 2040, the Scottish GDP grows by 0.54% (£99m in 2025 prices) along with the creation of 1,490 full-time equivalent (FTE) jobs (0.063% employment gains). Interestingly, the economy-wide prices, reflected by the consumer price index (CPI) are peaking in the first year of the adaptation spending, when we observe the Scottish CPI increasing by 0.026%. This price increase is fuelled by the demand for workers, which pushes the cost of workers upwards. Subsequently, more workers migrate to Scotland to benefit from the increased employment opportunities and the higher wages. The expansion of the labour force eases the pressures on wages, so we observe smaller price increases despite the increased employment and household consumption.

The gross value added (GVA) and employment impacts are not distributed uniformly across all the sectors. As shown in Figure D3 for 2040, most GVA is generated in sectors heavily involved in delivering the climate adaptation of ‘Rail transportation’. Further gains are achieved in sectors where households spend their additional income, such as ‘All other services’. In all other sectors the gains are negligible.

Figure D3. 2040 gross value-added impacts per sector due to climate adaptation spending in Rail Transportation

We observe a similar picture in relation to employment (see Figure D4). Some small differences are present, depending on the labour intensity of each sector, but broadly the picture resembles what we see for GVA. An important thing to point out is that in the absence of cost recovery considerations, all Scottish sectors benefit, or at least are unaffected, by the climate adaptation spending for ‘Rail transportation’.

However, all these impacts are temporary. Figure D2 indicates that shortly after the end of the climate adaptation spending, the gains are eroded with the economy returning to the original levels[6]. Approximately 15 years after the end of the spending period, almost none of the benefits from the adaptation spending can be observed.

Figure D4. 2040 employment impacts per sector due to climate adaptation spending in Rail Transportation

The effect of cost recovery via the income tax

The results change both qualitatively and quantitatively if we also consider how the costs will be recovered. For ‘Rail transportation’, because of the nature of the infrastructure that will need to be adjusted, we assume that it will be the government paying for the adaptation and therefore recovering the cost. We have considered the adjustment of the income tax rate as a mechanism to raise the funds required to deliver climate change adaptation in ‘Rail transportation’.

Figure D2 demonstrates that when the adaptation costs are recovered via increases in the income tax, the GDP and employment gains are reversed and the Scottish economy is, temporarily, negatively affected. Income tax increases affect the economy in two main ways. First, a higher income tax restricts the disposable income of households. The lowest income quintile, HG1, is largely unaffected by the income tax increase, while the highest income households of HG5 are observing the highest, in both percentage and absolute terms, real income losses. This reduction in households’ real disposable income, erodes any potential gains emerging from increased household consumption.

Second, the income tax increase is to some extent internalised by the employers as part of the wage bargaining process. Therefore, even though the real take home wage of employees decreases due to increased unemployment, the labour cost to businesses increases, pushing their production cost upwards. This is reflected in the higher, and longer-lasting, CPI impacts when the costs are recovered via the income tax. The higher economy-wide prices further erode household consumption, while also reducing the competitiveness, and by extension the exports, of Scottish sectors, further contributing to the negative economy-wide outcomes.

Of course, similarly to the ‘no recovery’ case, the impacts are not distributed evenly across all the sectors (see Figure D3 and Figure D4). The heavy involvement of ‘Wholesale/Retail – vehicles’, ‘Construction’ and ‘Public admin/defence’ in delivering the adaptation spending, somewhat insulates them against the effects of the income tax increases and allows them to still achieve, smaller scale, GVA and employment gains. Other sectors like ‘All other services’ experience a radical reversal of their GVA and employment impacts, reflecting the combined effects of higher labour costs and lower household consumption.

Adaptation of the Agriculture sector

Undoubtedly, one of the sectors that are most likely to be affected by climate change, and therefore requiring significant spending to adapt to the potential changes, is agriculture. However, it is an umbrella sector encompassing a wide range of products, farming techniques and technologies. Hence, the range sectors involved in adapting agriculture production to the challenges of climate change is expected to be broad. Figure D5 demonstrates this wide range of sectors.

Figure D5. Breakdown of ‘Agriculture’ adaptation spending

The breakdown for ‘Agriculture’ adaptation spending is quite different to the spending for ‘Rail transportation’. Here, ‘Construction’ is expected to play a more significant role, which is to be expected as new infrastructure will be required to ensure the ongoing agricultural production. Other large spendings are expected in part of the ‘Agriculture’ sector itself, as well as on ‘All other manufacturing’ and ‘Wholesale/Retail – vehicles’.

Agriculture adaptation without cost recovery

In may ways, the climate adaptation spending for ‘Agriculture’ leads, qualitatively, to the same impacts as in the ‘Rail transportation’ case, in the absence of cost recovery. Quantitatively though the impacts are different, driven in part by the large spending required for the adaptation of ‘Agriculture’ and the different composition of sectors involved. The qualitative similarities of the two adaptation cases can be visually confirmed by comparing Figure D6 to Figure D2.

Figure D6. Scottish GDP, employment and CPI impacts from climate change adaptation spending in Agriculture

One notable difference between the two cases is that employment more closely tracks the GDP impacts, both time-wise and as a percentage change. The smaller gap between the employment and GDP impacts in the ‘Agriculture’ case suggests that the sectors involved in the adaptation spending of this sector are more capital- and less labour-intensive compared to the sectors involved in the adaptation of ‘Rail transportation’.

Furthermore, the distribution of the GVA and employment gains across the different sectors is also different to the ‘Rail transportation’ case (see Figure D7 and Figure D8), as is greatly influenced by the breakdown of the sectors that deliver the ‘Agriculture’ adaptation (shown in Figure D5). Despite the differences in the distribution, some qualitative characteristics remain the same, in that a small number of sectors contribute around 80% of the total GDP gains and that again 80% of the employment gains are concentrated in the same small number of sectors.

Figure D7. 2040 gross value-added impacts per sector due to climate adaptation spending in Agriculture

Figure D8. 2040 employment impacts per sector due to climate adaptation spending in Agriculture

Accounting for ‘who pays’ for the ‘Agriculture’ adaptation

In the ‘Rail transportation’ case we assumed that the sector itself, and the infrastructure developments that may be required, meant that the government was likely to pay the adaptation cost and recover it via fiscal instruments, such as changes in the income tax rate.

‘Agriculture’ though is different, with many small producers contributing to the sector rather than consisting of a handful of firms. This being the case, it is very likely that the farmers themselves will have to cover the adaptation cost and subsequently pass it to the consumers via the price of their farming goods. This ‘industry pays’ approach leads to different impacts across the wider economy. A key difference is that an ‘industry pays’ approach is regressive in nature. Indeed, looking at the CPI for each household group we can see that, by 2040, the lowest income households in HG1 experience broader price increases of 0.088%, while the highest income households in HG5 experience price increases of 0.073%. The difference is driven in part by the spending in agricultural produce, which is a larger share of the total consumption of low-income households; hence, any price increases in agriculture products leads to greater CPI pressures to this specific income quintile.

Generally, agriculture products are an important component of the consumption of all households and a price increase to recover the adaptation spending can trigger the significant economy-wide CPI pressures observed in Figure D6. These economy-wide price increases erode the purchasing power of all households and lead to reduced household consumption, reduced GDP and employment. Coupled with the export losses that increased prices trigger, lead to the negative picture presented in dashes in Figure D6.

A further important implication of the ‘industry pays’ approach here is that it affects one of the most labour-intensive sectors in the Scottish economy, employing 8.5 FTE workers per £m of output. With concentrated impacts on the sector, we see in Figure D8 that significant employment losses are triggered, contributing to the larger net employment losses across the Scottish economy.

In an economy where movement of labour in and out of the economy is challenging, the unemployment increase associated with job losses would trigger labour cost reduction processes that would help cushion the negative impacts to the economy. However, we assume that workers can move freely in and out of Scotland. Increased unemployment and reductions in the real wage, fuelled by the CPI increase, incentivise workers to leave Scotland, ultimately easing the changes in the unemployment rate. But this prevents the cushioning labour cost reductions from materialising, leading to reduced employment, reduced purchasing power per worker, but also higher labour costs for the businesses. The combination of all these effects leads to the significant economy-wide losses, throughout the cost recovery period.

 

  1.  

Agriculture: Climate adaptation exploratory analysis

This case study presents an exploratory analysis of the costs associated with climate adaptation actions for Scottish agriculture. It draws on thirty-three actions identified as suitable for the Scottish context in a report published for the Scottish Government’s Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services (RESAS). Available evidence, targets, and contextual information – see supplementary data – were used to estimate the potential deployment of each action across Scotland. Costs were scaled using land use archetypes from the Climate Change Committee’s Rural Land Use Types report (Thomson et al., 2025). The resulting estimates should be regarded as first-pass figures requiring further expert elicitation to be refined. Where the scope of the analysis permitted, an exploratory cost-benefit analysis was undertaken for selected actions, examining potential impacts on yields, soil erosion, disease risk, productivity, and biodiversity.

Action Identification

The thirty-three adaptation actions drawn from the RESAS report span arable, pastoral, and universal categories, and carry ratings for both impact and complexity across three levels: low, medium, and high. Prior to costing, two actions were excluded on the grounds that they are implicitly captured within the overarching action ‘diversifying Ccrop rotations’: namely, ‘crop introductions and diversification’ and ‘use of more resistant crop varieties’.

Cost information

Cost information was sourced from academic and grey literature, with a confidence rating (low, medium, or high) assigned to each source. Of the thirty-three actions, cost estimates were successfully obtained for twenty-one. The remaining twelve could not be costed due to an absence of relevant literature with associated expenditure data. In addition, two further actions identified during the literature review process — biocontrol and organic conversion — were incorporated into the analysis on the basis that sufficient cost data were available. Both were considered of material relevance to Scottish agriculture. All costs were adjusted to 2026/27 prices and converted to pound sterling where necessary. Further detail regarding the specific assumptions underpinning individual cost estimates is provided in the supplementary data.

Scaling costs

To scale unit adaptation costs (typically expressed in £/ha) to the applicable Scottish agricultural land area, the Climate Change Committee’s Rural Land Use Types report was employed (Thomson et al., 2025). This report disaggregates Scotland’s total agricultural land stock into ten archetypes, of which the six largest were selected for this analysis, together accounting for 97.9% of Scottish agricultural land: highly degraded lowland organic soils (117,300 ha); degraded upland grazing land and forest on organic soils (619,900 ha); hilly farmland on improved and semi-natural grassland on non-organic soils (106,400 ha); open pasture on the upland fringe (814,300 ha); acid grasslands on hilly uplands (767,400 ha); and arable on sandy soils (511,900 ha).

The report further disaggregates each archetype by land cover, as illustrated in Figure E1, across categories including arable and horticulture, acidic grassland, and coniferous woodland. These breakdowns were used to delineate the proportion of each archetype applicable to the scaling of adaptation action categories: arable, livestock, grassland, and universal.

Where data on the current extent of action deployment were available, this was deducted from the target area prior to scaling, ensuring that cost estimates reflect remaining deployment requirements rather than total potential coverage. The general scaling methodology proceeded as follows: the per-hectare cost of each action was multiplied by the applicable target area and, where actions were costed on an annual basis, further multiplied by the fourteen-year adaptation period to produce a total cost estimate covering 2026/27 to 2039/40. In certain cases, e.g., the application of green pesticides, the number of applications per year was incorporated into the calculation before extrapolation across the full period. Full details of the assumptions and methodologies applied to individual actions are provided in the supplementary data.

Figure E1: Land Cover Map categories in 2021 by archetype. The percentage of the archetype covered by organic soil is given above each bar – fig.4 from Thomson et al. (2025) – used to assist adaptation action cost scaling.

Complete scaled exploratory cost estimates for the fourteen-year period were produced for nineteen adaptation actions in total, presented in full in Supplementary Table X with associated confidence ratings and contextual information. A subset of six illustrative actions is excerpted in Table E1.

Table E1: Six example adaptation actions with associated scaled costs.

RESAS action

RESAS category

Action cost estimate

Target area (ha)

Scaled cost (2026-40)

Diversified crop rotations – Impact: HIGH, complexity: LOW

Arable

£254/ha implementation and £495/ha/yr running [7]

482035

£3,462,939,440

Alterative tillage techniques – Impact: HIGH, complexity: MEDIUM

Arable

£814/ha implementation and £42/ha/yr running[8]

431272

£604,643,344

Adjusting or reducing stocking rates – Impact: HIGH, complexity: LOW

Livestock

£69.46/ha/yr [9]

1755415

£1,707,035,763

Virtual fencing technology – Impact: MEDIUM, Complexity: MEDIUM

Livestock

£3791 set up + £57 per collar [10]

N/A

£531,990,570

Enhanced production on marginal land – Impact: LOW, complexity: HIGH

Grassland

Government budget for LFA is £65.5M for 2026/27 [11]LFA is 86% of total agricultural land (5.16M ha12]) = 4.44M haCost per hectare of LFA: £14.76/ha/yr13

1419739.6

£293,374,991

Agrivoltaics – Impacts: MEDIUM, Complexity: HIGH

Universal

Capital expenditure £7950/ha AND operational expenditure: £4300.96/ha/yr

14

3237

£220,645,055

Exploratory cost-benefit analysis

Exploratory cost-benefit analysis (CBA) was undertaken for the adaptation action ‘diversified crop rotations’, examining potential monetary benefits resulting from this action. These included increased crop yields of between 10% and 25%; reduced losses from soil erosion of up to 90%; and fertililser usage savings of 30%.  

The result, shown in Table E2,outlines the potential monetised benefits between 2026 and 2040 of £1.1bn- £856M. This means that 24.7% to 31.4% of the total could be returned by increased crop yields, reduced losses and reduced fertiliser cost.

This is not an exhaustive CBA but indicative of the potential of these actions relative to a do-nothing scenario.

Table E2: Exploratory cost benefit analysis for diversified crop rotation

Cost benefit description​

+25% yield value

+10% yield value

Crop yield increase of 10-25% [15]1.53B total crop output (2024) [16]

£382,500,000.00​

£153,000,000.00​

Reduced losses of up to 90% in yield value from soil erosion (calculated using +10% and +25% yield value)​Approx 19.2% of Scottish arable land at risk of soil erosion[17]Assume therefore, that 19.2% of crop output value (1.53B) at risk consequently.Soil erosion causes losses in crop productivity of 0.43% [18]

£19,894,896.00​

£17,507,508.48​

30% fertilizer cost saving relative to cost of fertilizers currently widely in use.19Total UK spend on fertilizer 2023 = £1.36 Billion 20Scotland share of UK agricultural land = ~12%

£685,440,000.00

£685,440,000.00

Total monetised benefits

£1,087,834,896.00

£855,947,508.48

Diversified crop rotations scaled cost (base)

£3,462,939,440.00

NET COST of diversified crop rotations after accounting for savings in fertilizer usage, reduced losses from soil erosion and increased yield value, all as a direct result of this action​ (= Base cost – Total monetised benefits)

£2,375,104,544.00

£2,606,991,931.52

Several important limitations should be noted when interpreting these results:

  • Cost estimates assume that each action is applied across all land eligible for that measure, which is likely to overestimate real-world uptake; results should therefore be interpreted as upper-bound estimates.
  • In practice, interventions would be carefully selected and targeted, and not all actions would necessarily be deployed across the full eligible area.
  • Limited data on the current extent of adaptation adoption makes it difficult to accurately determine the remaining deployment gap for individual actions.
  • Cost data were unavailable for several actions that are nonetheless considered significant for Scottish agricultural adaptation; these would benefit from dedicated expert costing exercises.
  • The analysis does not account for the potential impact of increasing climate risk on the cost or effectiveness of adaptation actions over the period.

Scaling was not feasible for certain actions due to data limitations. Costing shelterbelts, for example, would require data on the total perimeter of agricultural land. Costing enhanced livestock housing design would require detailed information on existing infrastructure and the degree of upgrade required. In the latter case, the only cost data identified were sourced from European literature, providing a range of €5,000 to €100,000 per unit — figures that may not be directly transferable to the Scottish context.

Wider policy and economic context for agriculture:

Policy context

The Agricultural and Rural Communities (Scotland) Act 2024 set out the legal framework for transforming Scotland’s farm support system, replacing former Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) schemes with a four‑tier framework by 2027. The reforms aim to shift agricultural support toward delivering environmental and climate outcomes while still underpinning food production and rural livelihoods. Central to this shift is the Whole Farm Plan, which requires farmers to baseline their environmental performance and adopt practices that reduce emissions, restore nature, and improve efficiency. Implementation will be gradual: initial changes begin in 2025, consolidation of payments and “Enhanced Greening” follow in 2026, and by 2027-28 the full framework, alongside new agri‑environment, forestry, and capital support measures, will be in place.

Overall, the new system moves from unconditional payments to support linked to specific outcomes across Tiers 1–4, balancing farm productivity with climate adaptation, mitigation, and biodiversity goals. Tier 1 provides core direct income support, evolving from the Basic Payment Scheme but tied to meeting baseline environmental and regulatory standards. Tier 2 rewards enhanced environmental delivery, including greening measures and likely future integration of the Less Favourable Area Support Scheme (LFASS). Tier 3 offers elective, targeted support for specific environmental or land‑management actions, replacing schemes like AECS and FGS. Tier 4 delivers complementary capital grants, skills development, and advisory services to help businesses adopt new practices. While the approach builds on what many farms already do, Tier 2 and Tier 3 are expected to drive the greatest climate‑adaptation impacts – though separating adaptation from mitigation remains a challenge in practice. The subsidy landscape is likely to continue evolving as budgets and schemes consolidate under the new structure. More information available at: 0624 Future Support Briefing.pdf

Economic context

Figure F1: Breakdown of contributions to farm income by farm type, 2023-24. Source: Scottish Government, 2025d.

How to cite this publication:

Brett, L., White, C.J., England, K., Calvillo Munoz, C., Roberts, J.J. (2026) ‘Investigating climate change adaptation investment need across five sectors in Scotland (2026 – 2040)’, ClimateXChange. DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7087

© The University of Edinburgh, 2026
Prepared by the University of Strathclyde on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk

  1. The figures represent one scenario-based estimate of potential adaptation-related spend required to maintain current service levels under future climate conditions – there are many potential future scenarios, each returning different potential investment requirements.

  2. Note Scottish Water estimates are for 13 years from 2027/28 – 2039/40.

  3. The figures represent one scenario-based estimate of potential adaptation-related spend required to maintain current service levels under future climate conditions – there are many potential future scenarios, each returning different potential investment requirements.

  4. Note Scottish Water estimates are for 13 years from 2027/28 – 2039/40.

  5. We have modelled the impacts based on the available estimates on adaptation spending over the next 15 years, until 2040. If further adaptation spending is required then the economy-wide impacts will continue. In that case more analyses will be needed to explore the implications of extended adaptation spending.

  6. The modelled shock to the economy has completed, so in the absence of a shock the economy returns back to the baseline.

  7. https://ieep.eu/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/The-costs-and-benefits-of-transitioning-to-sustainable-agriculture-IEEP-2024.pdf

  8. https://ieep.eu/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/The-costs-and-benefits-of-transitioning-to-sustainable-agriculture-IEEP-2024.pdf

  9. https://www.gov.wales/sites/default/files/publications/2023-12/atisn19234doc1.pdf

10. https://doi.org/10.33988/auvfd.837485

11. https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-rural-development-programme-2014-2020-ex-post-evaluation-annex-scheme-summary-report/pages/11/

12. https://www.gov.scot/publications/results-from-the-scottish-agricultural-census-june-2024/pages/most-of-scotlands-area-is-used-for-agriculture/

13. https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/corporate-report/2026/03/scottish-budget-2026-2027/documents/scottish-budget-2026-2027/scottish-budget-2026-2027/govscot%3Adocument/scottish-budget-2026-2027.pdf (Table 11/02)

14. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0038092X24004390

15 (PDF) Benefits of Crop Rotation (UK Scenario) 25032025

16. Value of output remains stable – Total income from farming estimates: 2018-2024 – gov.scot

17. https://www.gov.scot/publications/developing-method-estimate-costs-soil-erosion-high-risk-scottish-catchments/pages/8/

18. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/full/10.1002/ldr.2879

19 (PDF) Benefits of Crop Rotation (UK Scenario) 25032025

20. Value of output remains stable – Total income from farming estimates: 2018-2024 – gov.scot

The Scottish Government has made successive commitments to delivering a just transition to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland. The Scottish Government and others have made progress in developing monitoring and evaluation (M&E) frameworks to consider the fairness of transition processes and outcomes. However policymakers have found that these were not ready to be implemented in practice. 

On behalf of the Scottish Government, ClimateXChange commissioned a research fellow, embedded in the government’s Climate Change Analysis team, to develop a just transition M&E framework that prioritises rigour and practical use.  

This research is independent and should not be considered Scottish Government policy. 

The framework  

The proposed framework is made up of four outcomes, each with a set of indicators – Communities and Places, People and Equity, Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities, Environment and Biodiversity. 

There are 50 outcome indicators in total. 15 of these are identified as summary indicators intended to provide a high-level overview of progress that can be more easily communicated than the full indicator set. 

In addition to outcome indicators, this research includes 23 indicators focused on key locations, or hotspots, where the transition to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland is likely to have significant impact.  

Hotspots are defined as places either experiencing significant industrial change, for example Aberdeen and Grangemouth, or hosting major net zero developments, such as Shetland and Dumfries and Galloway. 

This project also examines possible anticipatory approaches for early warning identification and monitoring of hotspots, transition risks and opportunities. 

The proposed framework emphasises the essential role of regular stakeholder engagement to inform all dimensions of M&E.  It can be used as a tool for qualitative data collection, an approach for monitoring and indicator interpretation, a real-time tool for risk mitigation and a method for the anticipation of potential transitions. 

Recommendations 

The research report includes a number of recommendations to further develop the framework and just transition monitoring and evaluation. These include testing and refining through data collection, developing qualitative engagement tools, filling critical data gaps and using communications tools such as data visualisation tools to engage with external stakeholders on just transition progress.  

For detailed recommendations and next steps and to learn about the development of the proposed framework, please read the report.  

If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783. 

Research completed March 2026

DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/7089

Executive summary

Background and aims

The Scottish Government has made successive commitments to delivering a just transition to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland. As part of this, it is important to understand, as far as is practicable, the extent to which transition processes and outcomes are just. Recent years have seen proactive efforts by the Scottish Government and others to develop monitoring and evaluation (M&E) frameworks for a just transition in Scotland. These made progress but the Scottish Government found they were not yet ready to be implemented in practice.

ClimateXChange commissioned this research on behalf of the Scottish Government to deliver a proposal for a just transition M&E framework that prioritises rigour and practical applicability. The project was led by the University of Edinburgh and delivered by a ClimateXChange Research Fellow embedded in the Scottish Government.

This report is independent: it is not Scottish Government policy, nor does it reflect Scottish Government policy positions.

Results – The framework

This project developed an M&E framework for a just transition to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland, informed by a Theory of Change approach. The proposed framework is made up of four outcomes, each with a set of indicators (number of indicators in parentheses):

  • Communities and Places (12),
  • People and Equity (13),
  • Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities (17),
  • Environment and Biodiversity (8).

There are 50 outcome indicators in total. The framework also identifies 15 summary indicators which are selected from the 50 outcome indicators. These are intended to provide a high-level overview of progress that can be more easily communicated than the full indicator set.

Figure 1 provides an overview of outcome indicators in the M&E framework. These are categorised by outcome, target population, summary indicators and data availability. Some of the proposed indicators cannot be monitored with existing data.

In addition to outcome indicators, this framework proposes a set of 23 indicators for monitoring key sites of transition, or ‘hotspots’. Hotspots are defined as places directly impacted by industrial change or by net zero developments. This project also examines possible anticipatory approaches for early warning identification and monitoring of hotspots, transition risks and opportunities.

Stakeholder engagement is identified as fundamental for just transition M&E. It is presented as a tool for qualitative data collection, an approach for monitoring and indicator interpretation, a real-time tool for risk mitigation and a method for the anticipation of potential transitions.

Framework limitations

  • Data availability, timeliness and scale: There are data gaps for some key just transition concerns. Data availability, quality and coverage also vary at local, regional and national scale. In addition, they do not always match the scale of concern (e.g., local authority data does not represent the sub-local authority Grangemouth and Falkirk towns). Most indicators are published with a time delay and will not reflect transition impacts in real time.
  • Framework structure, design and development: This project provides a detailed approach to monitoring a just transition in Scotland and to interpreting outcome indicators. Further work is needed to support evaluation of why a just transition is / is not being achieved.
  • The proposed M&E framework emphasises the essential role of regular stakeholder engagement to inform all dimensions of M&E. Effective stakeholder engagement in resource constrained contexts can be challenging and may limit implementation.

Recommendations for just transition M&E

  • Start now: test and refine the proposed approach through data collection and indicator interpretation across outcome and hotspot indicators. This will enable an assessment of the practical applicability of the framework and its ability to capture just transition concerns in the Scottish context.
  • Identify the conditions necessary for just transition delivery and develop approaches to evaluation. This will include attention to issues of governance, responsibility and policy responsiveness to just transition M&E.
  • Develop qualitative engagement tools and analytical approaches as part of just transition M&E, to support the identification of transition risks, indicator interpretation and evaluation.
  • Implement more integrated approaches to data collation and sharing across Scottish Government and with external stakeholders.
  • Fill critical data gaps, including but not limited to (i) workforce transitions in high emitting sectors, (ii) business vulnerability and adaptation to climate change and net zero, (iii) household vulnerability and resilience to climate change and (iv) land use change implications for a just transition.
  • Test and refine anticipatory uses of just transition M&E to identify and monitor sites of transition before transitions are underway. This can support the anticipation of risks and opportunities and inform responsive policymaking.
  • Use M&E to improve communication with external stakeholders about transition efforts towards net zero and climate resilience, including successes and challenges. Consider the use of data management and visualisation tools such as dashboards, websites and reports for data management, communication and reporting.

Figure 1. Outcome indicators in the just transition M&E framework. Categorised by outcome, target population, summary indicators and data availability.

Glossary

Just Transition

“For the Scottish Government a just transition means becoming a net zero, climate resilient economy in a fair way that seeks to tackle inequality and injustice. Just transition is about both the outcome – a fairer, greener future for all – and the way we get there in partnership with those most likely to be impacted by the change.” (Scottish Government, 2026a, p.32)

Net zero

“A situation in which any greenhouse gas emissions put into the atmosphere are balanced out by the greenhouse gases removed from the atmosphere, so that the “net” effect is zero emissions. Scotland has committed to ‘net zero’ emissions by 2045.” (Scottish Government, 2026a, p.33)

Climate resilience

In this report, climate resilience refers to the results of adapting to a changing climate. “Adaptation to climate change involves the deliberate and systematic adjustment of systems and processes to effectively address both anticipated and actual climate change impacts.” (Scottish Government, 2026a p.32)

Hotspots

Sites of transition identified on the following basis:

  • Places reliant on a high-emitting industry and undergoing industrial change
  • Places hosting net zero developments (renewable energy infrastructure and land use change) and their aggregated impacts

Monitoring and evaluation

A practice by which responsible actors can track, measure and assess progress towards identified goals, while analysing the degree to which implemented actions supported the delivery of said goals.

Indicator

An indicator is a specific, measurable variable which can be monitored over time, often to show trends. An indicator should support assessment of progress towards achieving overall aims. Indicators can be qualitative or quantitative and may be tracked at different timeframes (e.g. annually, biannually, every 5 years).

Abbreviations

CCC

Climate Change Committee

CCP

Climate Change Plan

EU

European Union

JT

Just Transition

JTC

Just Transition Commission

M&E

Monitoring and Evaluation

NSTA

North Sea Transition Authority

SEPA

Scottish Environmental Protection Agency

SIMD

Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation

STUC

Scottish Trade Union Congress

SNAP3

Scottish National Adaptation Plan 3

SPRI

Scottish Pollutant Release Inventory

ToC

Theory of Change

UK

United Kingdom

List of figures and tables

Figure 1. Structure and parts of the full Just Transition M&E framework. 12

Figure 2. Visualisation of the four outcomes of a JT to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland. 14

Figure 3. Outcome indicators in the JT M&E framework. Categorised by outcome, target population, summary indicators and data availability. 15

Table 1: Methods used in the development of the JT M&E framework. 7

Table 2. Outcomes, M&E framework for a JT to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland. 13

Table 3: Summary indicators for the JT M&E framework. 18

Table 4: Communities and Places outcome for the JT M&E framework. 21

Table 5: People and Equity outcome for the JT M&E framework. 23

Table 6: Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities outcome for the JT M&E framework. 25

Table 7: Environment and Biodiversity outcome for the JT M&E framework. 27

Table 8: Hotspot indicators, by hotspot ‘type’ and data source. 36

Introduction

The Scottish Government has made successive commitments to integrating Just Transition (JT) into its policymaking processes and outcomes. JT principles were integrated into the Climate Change Act (Scottish Parliament, 2019) and the Just Transition Commission (JTC) was established with an independent scrutiny role. The Government also published a National JT Planning Framework (2021); draft sectoral JT plans for energy (Scottish Government, 2023), transport (Scottish Government, 2025a) and agriculture and land use (Scottish Government, 2025b); and the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan (Scottish Government, 2025c). Most recently, JT indicators were included in the Climate Change Plan (CCP) published in March 2026 (Scottish Government, 2026b). The Government also committed support for a JT through the Just Transition Funds for Grangemouth and for the North East and Moray (Scottish Government, 2025c; Scottish Government, 2026c).

JT monitoring and evaluation (M&E) approaches remain in their infancy for various reasons. Defining what is captured within the scope of JT is challenging. In addition, there are difficulties in developing national-level frameworks which also reflect the experiences and needs across people and geographies. There are challenges around the temporal nature of the transition, including the ways in which responsibilities, costs and benefits are spread across generations. The transition to net zero and climate resilience also faces uncertain impacts and unintended consequences, including from unpredictable economic, geopolitical and climatic shocks. From a practical perspective, there are clear data weaknesses and gaps for JT monitoring in Scotland (e.g., Drabble et al. 2024). Finally, there are limited examples of applied frameworks for JT M&E worldwide.

Scotland is embarking on the transition to net zero and climate resilience from a baseline of inequality and existing, legacy injustices (Drabble et al. 2024). The cumulative impacts of climate change, climate adaptation and decarbonisation risk entrenching injustices and creating new ones. At the same time, the systems-wide net zero transition is also an opportunity to correct historical injustices while improving equity, wellbeing and justice in Scotland; goals aligned with the Scottish Government’s JT outcomes in the National JT Planning Framework (2021). It is essential that the Scottish Government can understand, as far as is practicable, how the transition is unfolding, and whether the associated processes and outcomes are just.

Recent years have seen proactive efforts to develop JT M&E approaches in Scotland. Research by the Just Transition Lab in Aberdeen and Aberdeenshire advanced understandings of place-based JT monitoring grounded in local priorities (Shapovalova et al. 2023). The second JTC published various place-based reports (e.g., in Shetland (Voar, 2024), Dumfries and Galloway (2025a) and Aberdeen and the North East (2025b)), showcasing the unique characteristics of net zero transitions in different parts of Scotland. The JTC also published a national JT Theory of Change (ToC) and M&E framework (Drabble et al. 2024). The latter was subsequently translated into the Grangemouth local context (Jenkins et al. 2025). While these works took JT M&E further and provided a broad overview of JT and M&E concerns, the Scottish Government found they were not yet ready to be implemented in practice.

This project was commissioned by ClimateXChange on behalf of the Scottish Government. The aim was to develop a rigorous and pragmatic JT M&E framework that could be made operational by the Scottish Government. As such, it builds on existing work and departs from it, informed by additional empirical stakeholder engagement and a review of the most recent evidence.

The project was led by the University of Edinburgh and delivered by an independent ClimateXChange Research Fellow embedded in the Scottish Government. This report sets out a proposed JT M&E framework and recommendations for JT M&E implementation for the Scottish Government. The report is independent: it not Scottish Government policy, nor does it reflect Scottish Government policy positions.

Conceptualising JT ‘Monitoring and Evaluation’

The term ‘Monitoring and Evaluation’ (M&E) encompasses a range of practices for tracking, measuring and assessing progress towards identified goals. M&E also analyses the degree to which implemented actions supported the delivery of those goals (HM Treasury, 2026; HM Treasury, 2020; Adindu, 2010; Estrella and Gaventa, 1998). The use of M&E frameworks is widespread, often to assess the impact of specific delivery programmes or interventions (e.g., Adindu, 2010).

A ‘JT’ is often not contained to a single policy or project and for some, is an overarching societal goal. Responsibilities and influence over a JT are spread across a variety of stakeholders and its achievement is often conditioned by a broader, shifting context. In this way, it can be comparable to the Sustainable Development Goals (United Nations, n.d.) or aspirational visions of national wellbeing, as reflected in Scotland’s National Performance Framework (currently archived and under revision) (Scottish Government, n.d.).

In Scotland, both Scottish Government policy (e.g., Scottish Government, 2021a) and JTC published reports (e.g., Just Transition Commission, 2024, 2025a, 2025b; Voar, 2024; Drabble et al. 2024; Jenkins et al. 2025) define the JT in expansive terms. This includes a spread of intersecting concerns including employment; community participation and empowerment; the distribution of benefits; industrial change and existing socio-economic inequalities, across scales and sectors. Further increasing complexity, the JT is characterised both as a “process” and “outcome” (Scottish Government, 2021a, p.5; e.g., Jenkins et al. 2025, p.27). So, a JT is as much about the just-ness of how the transition develops, as about the impacts it creates.

In the context of specific delivery programmes, policies or interventions, ‘monitoring’ is the “process of continuously tracking the progress and performance of an intervention, to provide data on whether it is being delivered as intended” (HM Treasury, 2026, p.72). It involves tracking specific data points over time that relate to the overall goal. The cross-cutting, multi-dimensional and multi-stakeholder nature of JT makes such an approach challenging. In the Scottish Government, many policy areas relate to, impact and condition JT delivery, from economic development through to poverty, agriculture, planning or technological development (e.g., Scottish Government, 2021a). Although there is a central JT Unit within the Scottish Government, there is no single, neatly bounded programme for JT delivery.

In a policy context, evaluation can be defined as: “a systematic assessment of the design, implementation and outcomes of an intervention. It involves understanding how an intervention is being, or has been, implemented and what effects it has, for whom and why” (HM Treasury, 2020, p.5). Evaluation is also broader, however, referring to “the process of judging or calculating the quality, importance, amount, or value of something” (Cambridge dictionary, n.d.). It is possible to evaluate what happened, how it happened and/or why it happened. These three types of evaluation are different, require different approaches and all apply in the context of assessing progress towards a JT.

This project understands ‘monitoring’ and ‘evaluation’ as interdependent practices necessary to comprehend the just-ness of the transition to net zero and climate resilience in Scotland. This interdependent approach underpins the conceptualisation and structure of the proposed JT M&E framework. Indicators were selected based on key, monitorable areas related to JT outcomes. Indicator selection was also underpinned by the framework’s evaluation objectives, based on a dual understanding of evaluation as assessing what is happening, and why. Said another way, the framework was designed to enable both an assessment of the just-ness of the transition, and an assessment of why particular impacts have come about.

The framework takes inspiration from ‘Theory of Change’ (ToC). In simple terms, ToC can be defined as “the hypothesis about the way that a program brings about its effects” (Dhillon and Vaca, 2018, p.65). ToC has been identified as a useful tool to design transformational social interventions (Simeone et al. 2023) and has been used by the Scottish Government to inform M&E frameworks for complex, multi-dimensional phenomena. Examples include the third Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3) M&E framework (Scottish Government, 2024a), and the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan (Scottish Government, 2025c). Drabble et al. (2024) also used a ToC approach to inform their development of a JT M&E framework for Scotland.

ToC informed M&E frameworks often contain two key dimensions: outcomes and mechanisms. Outcomes are medium term goals, or ‘what success looks like’; while the mechanisms or enablers are the ‘conditions for success’ (Drabble et al. 2024, p. 42). Because mechanisms focus on the conditions for successful delivery of the outcomes, they can support evaluation of why progress is being made.

Drawing on ToC and the JT M&E framework developed by Drabble et al. (2024), the proposed M&E framework is designed to include both outcomes and mechanisms. Within this structure, this project has prioritised (a) outcome identification and refinement and (b) indicator development for monitoring. As currently developed, the framework therefore enables JT monitoring and supports evaluation of what is happening in relation to JT outcomes, but not how or why. The framework’s design enables the future integration of mechanisms to support evaluation of why JT progress is underway. This responds to the project specification to develop:

  1. High-level quantitative metrics for JT M&E in Scotland,
  2. Qualitative evaluation proposals to support indicator monitoring, including attention to place-based activity and the experiences of the most vulnerable to negative transition impacts, and
  3. A proposal for an integrated and practical approach to JT M&E that combines quantitative and qualitative approaches in a coherent theoretical framework.

Project methods and report structure

Methods

The methods used to inform the proposed M&E framework and related recommendations are summarised in Table 1.

Method

Detail

Purpose

Policy review

Including:

  • Scottish Government policy, prioritising JT policy and related policy areas
  • M&E frameworks in JT and related policy areas in Scottish Government
  • Examples of JT M&E approaches across governments worldwide
  • To increase familiarity with the Scottish Government JT policy landscape and policy M&E approaches and expertise.
  • To learn from and build on available existing JT M&E, approaches as relevant to the Scottish context.
  • To inform the shape and language of the final framework, including through the identification of gaps, inconsistencies, and underdeveloped opportunities.

Literature review

Including:

  • JT M&E approaches by non-government stakeholders for Scotland and further afield
  • Identified JT M&E academic literature
  • To provide insight into existing JT M&E work, alongside methods for JT M&E.
  • To learn from and build on available approaches as relevant in the Scottish context.

Semi-structured and unstructured interviews, exchanges

With external stakeholders and public agencies (Appendix A):

  • On existing M&E practices and frameworks
  • On JT priorities and indicators

Total: 16

  • To gain practical insight into available methods, frameworks and practices to understand, analyse and evaluate impact.
  • To refine the focus of outcomes and indicators and identify available data sources.

Iterative engagement across Scottish Government areas

Continuous, routine and ad hoc meetings and follow up discussions with team members across government areas.

To support indicator development, data identification and recommendations drawing on cross-government expertise.

Workshop

In-person workshop with purposefully selected stakeholders and Scottish Government team members (held on the 17 November 2025).

To support indicator identification and refinement across outcomes and attention to affected and vulnerable groups in the transition and climate change context.

Internal sessions

Internal sessions with Scottish Government team members responsible for the future direction and implementation of JT M&E (organised in February 2026).

To increase JT M&E framework familiarisation within Scottish Government and inform reflections and recommendations on implementation in a policy context.

Table 1: Methods used in the development of the JT M&E framework.

The Research Fellow was embedded within the Scottish Government Climate Change Analysis Team in close collaboration with members of the JT Unit. This enabled engagement across government teams, attendance at relevant internal webinars and workshops and direct involvement in discussions on a variety of relevant JT topics. It also informed the methods detailed in Table 1, including through access to support on policy and data identification, workshop design and facilitation, or iterative discussions on M&E framework development. A full list of interviewees, workshop attendees and areas engaged across the Scottish Government is included in Appendix A.

Report structure

Section 2 outlines the evidence reviewed, focusing on Scottish Government policy and JT M&E proposals across policy and academia worldwide. Section 3 presents the key findings from this research. Sections 3.1 and 3.2 detail the core of the proposed M&E framework including JT outcomes, indicator and data selection methods, and outcome indicators. Section 3.3 presents a ‘hotspot’ monitoring approach and indicators, integrating place-based JT M&E within a national M&E framework. It also proposes anticipatory approaches to monitoring as part of JT M&E. Section 3.4 includes detail on interpreting framework indicators. Section 4 sets out framework limitations and reflections on JT M&E. Section 5 presents a set of recommendations and concludes this report.

Evidence review

The Scottish Government published a National JT Planning Framework in 2021 (Scottish Government, 2021a). This included eight JT outcomes focused on empowering communities; skills development and fair work; addressing existing socio-economic inequality; supporting a strong and productive economy; supporting climate adaptation; protecting the environment; ensuring decarbonisation, and furthering human rights while avoiding the creation of new injustice (Scottish Government, 2021a, p.31). The Government also committed to developing sector-specific JT plans for four ‘net zero sectors’: energy (2023), transport (2025a), agriculture and land use (2025b) and buildings and construction (not yet published). In tandem, the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan was published in 2025.

The National JT Planning Framework, draft sectoral JT plans and the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan are structured differently and vary in detail and level of indicator development. The sectoral plans and Grangemouth industrial plan all refer to four themes which cluster JT concerns in Scotland: Communities and Places; People and Equity; Jobs Skills and Economic Opportunities, and Environment, Biodiversity and Adaptation[1][2].

In parallel, the second JTC has focused on JT M&E, including through recommendations in their Annual Report (2024) and in their final report in 2026 (Just Transition Commission, 2024, 2026a). They have published numerous JT M&E reports, including by Drabble et al. (2024) who developed a ToC for a JT in Scotland and a national JT M&E framework. The authors detailed JT priorities in the Scottish context, articulating both outcomes (what success looks like) and mechanisms (how to get there). They developed indicators, identified data sources and data gaps and provided a baseline assessment of indicator progress on a traffic light scale (improving – maintaining – declining).

The national JT M&E framework by Drabble et al. (2024) was translated into the Grangemouth local context by Jenkins et al. (2025). This reiterates the importance of place-specific transitions and accordingly, contextualised M&E. Shapovalova et al.’s (2023) work on monitoring a JT in Aberdeen and Aberdeenshire also focused on place-based transitions. Through stakeholder engagement, the authors identified four JT themes and an accompanying suite of indicators, which were analysed in relation to the local context.

The Scottish Government has also commissioned ClimateXChange projects to review and learn from the evolving JT M&E landscape and inform sectoral JT plans. These include a summary of existing approaches to JT M&E (Bergseng, 2023) and three reports by SYSTRA (2023a, 2023b, 2023c). The SYSTRA reports provide JT perspectives into sectoral areas of energy, transport and the built environment and construction.

Drawing boundaries around what is/ is not JT policy is an ongoing challenge. Climate change impacts and actions relating to the transition are cross-cutting issues, as are considerations of justice. Beyond explicit JT policy, there are various Scottish Government policy areas directly relevant to issues of JT. Illustrative examples of strategies and monitoring frameworks which overlap with JT considerations include: the National Performance Framework, the CCP (2026), the SNAP3 M&E framework (2024), the Public Engagement Strategy for Climate Change (Scottish Government, 2021b), the draft Environment Strategy (Scottish Government, 2025e), the Biodiversity Strategy M&E framework (Scottish Government, 2024b), the National Transport Strategy 2 (2020) and related M&E frameworks (Transport Scotland, 2021, 2022, 2024), the National Strategy for Economic Transformation (2022) and the Green Industrial Strategy (Scottish Government, 2024c).

Across Scottish Government JT policies, reports and related policy arenas, there is some convergence around ToC informed approaches to M&E. Most clearly, the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan includes JT outcomes and ‘transition levers’ (the mechanisms), which capture ‘how the Just Transition will be delivered’ (Scottish Government, 2025c, p.11). In the space of climate adaptation, SNAP3’s M&E framework uses a ToC informed approach with outcomes, objectives and indicators, including a monitored annual baseline and identified climate adaptation ‘enablers’. The ToC has also been mobilised in JT M&E efforts beyond Scotland.

Beyond Scotland

Efforts to monitor and evaluate progress towards a JT are emerging worldwide. The diverse models reflect varying interpretations of the JT both conceptually and in a policy context. In the European Union (EU) context, for instance, JT M&E is proposed in relation to environmental policy (Heyen et al. 2021). The authors present a suite of output, result and impact indicators including measures linked to EU social domains and environmental impacts. More broadly, the EU defines ‘JT regions’ as carbon intensive regions currently supported by the Just Transition Fund (EU, 2024). This contrasts with the more expansive understanding of JT by the Scottish Government.

Kelly et al. (2025) developed a JT M&E approach for the Irish government based on JT ‘domains’. These are broadly sector-oriented (electricity; agriculture and land use; buildings; transport and connectivity, and environment) along with two cross-sectoral domains: skills and employment, and participation and community engagement. The sectoral approach echoes sectoral JT plans under development in Scotland. In Kelly et al. (2025), these are integrated into the core structure for a nation-wide JT monitoring framework for Ireland. The framework is funded by the Environment Protection Agency and sits in relation to environmental policy, as per the EU.

The Spanish Government’s understanding of JT is primarily focused on economic and employment aspects of the transition, alongside additional social concerns (Spanish Government, 2020). In addition, Spain takes an ‘at-risk area first’ approach to JT, which prioritises attention to declining coal and emissions-intensive dependent regions through the implementation of place-based ‘Just Transition Agreements’ (Spanish Government, 2020). From an M&E angle, Spain has been reporting on JT progress for circa five years. Their monitoring and reporting approach is output oriented and focuses primarily on whether policy commitments have been delivered (yes/no), and on data such as the amount of funds invested into different projects (Spanish Government, n.d.). There is lesser attention to Spain’s progress towards a JT overall from an outcome-oriented perspective. Their reports provide detailed, qualitative case studies about place-based ‘Just Transition Agreements’ implementation and delivery (Spanish Government, 2023).

Although not specifically a JT framework, the National Wellbeing Framework for Wales provides an applied example of monitoring multi-dimensional, complex phenomena on an outcome basis, as it has been reported against since 2017[3]. This framework is made up of seven high-level goals (or outcomes) and identifies a suite of 50 indicators which map across the different goals. In this framework, a single indicator may be used to monitor progress across various goals. From these 50 indicators, 16 are selected as milestone indicators to provide a high-level overview of how Wales is doing in relation to wellbeing goals (Welsh Government, 2022a, 2022b). The cross-cutting approach to indicator relevance, along with framework visualisations and reporting experience make this a useful example for JT M&E framework development.

The Taranaki region in New Zealand used a ToC approach to identify JT outcomes for a vision of Taranaki in 2050 (Venture Taranaki, 2020). This framework includes monitoring, causality analysis, policy tracking and evaluation. It is conceptualised in detail but appears at an early stage of implementation, with limited indicator development. Tarfa et al.’s (2024) Monitoring, Reporting and Verification framework for a Just and Gender Inclusive Transition in Nigeria also used a ToC approach. The authors present an overarching JT goal, a vision and eight high-level outcomes, the latter of which are broken down into actions, intermediate outcomes and ultimate outcomes. Indicators cover environmental dimensions like emissions or chemical spillage and pollution, and social dimensions ranging from positive community impacts, reducing social inequalities or the redistribution of oil and gas revenues to social projects.

The Monitoring, Evaluation and Learning framework for tracking a JT in South Africa (ICAT, 2024) is also grounded in a ToC. The authors include restorative justice, procedural justice and distributive justice as underpinning their understanding of JT. This framework incorporates enabling conditions, outputs, milestones and outcomes through which to reach overall JT impact. It identifies 54 priority indicators across these categories. Outcome indicators are focused on fossil fuel consumption, emissions reductions, training and employment creation, and participation measures, at times reporting at smaller geographical levels or by demographic groups.

Research by Oliver et al. (2025) into JT M&E in the Welsh context offers a different approach to ToC and outcome-based frameworks. Drawing on concepts of resilience and vulnerability, the authors identify what would affect a person’s ability to prepare for, respond to, benefit from, and recover from different climate change policies and scenarios. On this basis, they conceptualise a composite, weighted vulnerability index focused on vulnerability to climate change mitigation and rank Welsh local authorities accordingly.

JT M&E has also been explored in academia, often in collaboration with policy or industry. Examples include Htitich et al.’s (2024) methodology for developing a Just Transition Score tool in collaboration with the Social Progress Index, or Kelly et al.’s (2020) composite indicator to identify households at risk of energy poverty. From a policy development and evaluation perspective, Bird et al. (2024) developed a tool to assess ‘Just Energy Transition Plans’, while Kaljonen et al. (2024) set out an approach to combine policy mixes to support JT delivery. McCauley et al. (2023) suggested a JT ranking method through a suite of indicators which they related to theoretical justice tenets. Live, industry-based examples of JT monitoring include the World Wildlife Fund’s tool and scorecard to rank national JT plans (World Wildlife Fund, n.d.); the World Benchmarking Alliance’s JT Methodology (2025) which uses a ‘scoring and weighting’ approach that provides a very high-level numerical score on JT; or the Transition Plan Taskforce’s (2024) review of 13 existing disclosure frameworks that are relevant to transition planning and disclosures.

Summary

The evidence reviewed illustrates a variety of approaches, models and frameworks for JT M&E. These emphasise the use of overarching goals/aims/outcomes, and the different types of monitoring approaches available. Monitoring may be focused on outcome/impact, policy delivery or output tracking. Justice theory (e.g. Heyen et al. 2021; Kelly et al. 2025) and conceptual structures like the ToC explicitly and implicitly underpin several of the reviewed examples. Others, like Oliver et al. (2025), take a composite index approach instead.

Various sources highlight the importance of quality data gathering and indicator development (e.g. Kelly et al. 2025; Tarfa et al. 2024) along with attention to demographic data breakdowns and to the distributional implications of the transition (e.g. Hayen et al. 2021; Oliver et al. 2025; Kelly et al. 2025). The evidence also emphasises the value of M&E and reporting for communication with stakeholders (e.g., ICAT, 2024). In this vein, Kelly et al. (2025, p.25) also recommend the development of a dashboard as a ‘suitable destination framework for communicating and presenting indicators and trends’.

Various reports also refer to the dynamic nature of climate change and the transition. They emphasise the importance of reviewing JT M&E frameworks alongside broader contextual trends over time (e.g., ICAT, 2024). Reports also stress the importance of harnessing an M&E framework and tools for prospective analysis (Oliver et al. 2025), equipping JT M&E and policy with foresight – or anticipatory – capacity (Kelly et al. 2025). This includes anticipatory attention to key ‘at risk’ areas (e.g. Hayen et al. 2021; Spain, 2024; Lázaro Touza et al. 2025).

The Framework

The full structure of the proposed M&E framework (‘the framework’) is illustrated in Figure 1. The objectives of the framework, informed by the evidence, Scottish Government and stakeholder input are to:

  • Monitor impacts of the transition across Scotland and provide a stocktake of how Scotland is doing from the perspective of justice,
  • Support policy tracing and causality evaluation across mechanisms and policies, in relation to JT outcomes,
  • Support anticipation of risks and opportunities of the transition before they happen, including in ‘hotspot’ areas,
  • Through the three objectives detailed above, inform policy development,
  • Communicate progress in relation to a JT, to (i) hold the government to account and (ii) improve communication of the impacts of the transition.

Figure 1. Structure and parts of the full Just Transition M&E framework.

As illustrated in Figure 1, the framework structure is informed by a ToC approach and includes both outcomes and mechanisms, as well as hotspots. Hotspots are defined as places directly impacted by industrial change or by net zero developments, further detailed in section 3.3.

The remainder of this section focuses on outcomes, hotspots and their indicators, as outlined in section 1.1. Section 3.1 details outcome development, followed by outcome indicators in 3.2. Section 3.3 presents the hotspots approach, anticipatory methodologies for hotspot identification and hotspot indicators, followed by recommendations for indicator interpretation in Section 3.4.

Outcomes

This project understands outcomes as ‘what success looks like’ or what characterises a JT in the Scottish context. Within JT policy in Scotland, the definitions and language surrounding JT (and JT M&E) have iteratively evolved since the publication of the National JT Framework in 2021. There have been varying definitions of what outcomes embody a JT in Scotland and for the Scottish Government, and there are arguably inconsistencies. The Scottish Government’s draft sectoral JT plans, for instance, do not refer to the eight outcomes in the National JT Framework (2021)[4]; and neither does the JT section within the CCP (2026). Draft sectoral JT plans, the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan and the Draft CCP (2025) all refer to four themes: Communities and Places; People and Equity; Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities and Environment, Biodiversity and Adaptation. These themes are described as relating to, or grouping JT outcomes (e.g., Scottish Government, 2023; Scottish Government, 2025a)[5].

This project reviewed and mapped references to outcomes, outcome clusters, proxy outcomes, objectives, themes and priority areas (whichever way defined) within existing JT publications by the Scottish Government and in Drabble et al. (2024). Appendix B summarises the terminology and categorisations used in the documents reviewed. This highlighted clear convergence in JT policy and Drabble et al. (2024) around the four themes outlined above. On this basis, this project developed a refined set of four overarching outcomes characterising a JT to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland. These are named according to the four themes and are introduced in Table 2.

The four outcomes below synthesise the key JT areas of concern in Scotland. They were identified and refined based on the evidence review, stakeholder feedback and internal engagement with Scottish Government teams.

Outcomes

Communities and Places: The transition to net zero and climate resilience increases agency, social cohesion and community wealth across Scotland through collaboration, empowerment and socio-economic benefit.

People and Equity: The transition to net zero and climate resilience addresses existing inequalities across Scotland and avoids creating new ones, supporting a more equal society overall.

Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities: Scotland ensures a managed transition away from high-emissions industries and practices and delivers a diversified, prosperous and climate resilient economy grounded in worker participation, fair work, skills development and thriving business.

Environment and Biodiversity: Through the transition to net zero and climate resilience, Scotland acts within planetary boundaries and restores the natural environment for current and future generations of people and planet.

Table 2. Outcomes, M&E framework for a JT to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland.

There is inevitable overlap across outcomes. In this framework they are positioned in relation to each other and with no hierarchy (Figure 2). At the same time, each outcome signifies a distinct focus area which enables the thematic grouping of certain indicators per outcome (for a similar approach, see Shapovalova et al. (2023)).

Figure 2. Visualisation of the four outcomes of a JT to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland.

Outcome indicators

Figure 3 provides a visual overview of proposed outcome indicators grouped by outcome, including their target populations for data monitoring. It also signposts the summary indicators (intended to provide a high-level overview of the transition), and identifies the indicators with no data currently available. The remainder of this section presents the indicator development approach followed by an overview of summary indicators and outcome indicators. Additional information on indicators including their desired trend, data timeframes and a quality assessment can be found in Appendix C.

Figure 3. Outcome indicators in the JT M&E framework. Categorised by outcome, target population, summary indicators and data availability.

Indicator development and data selection

Indicator selection was guided by the following priorities: conceptual rigour, relevance and representativeness of a JT in Scotland, data availability, timeliness and responsiveness to the project specification.

Drawing on the evidence review, outcomes were defined first. This established high level JT priorities in the Scottish context. A long list of indicators was developed from policy, reports and academic literature, with attention to their relevance across the four outcomes. This list was complemented with stakeholder input. The workshop and semi-structured interviews were specifically designed to focus on indicator development. To support discussions during these engagements, the four outcomes were sub-divided into descriptive focus areas (available in Appendix D). Informal conversations and meetings with external stakeholders and the Scottish Government further informed indicator development and data identification. The indicator long list was queried and refined to merge, move and remove indicators based on relevance and data availability[6]. Full indicator details and a quality assessment can be found in Appendix C. Further detail on the indicator selection process is available upon request.

The final list of indicators was also informed by data availability. The search for available data involved desk-based research and stakeholder engagement across government teams and with external stakeholders. Tables 1, 2 and 3 in Appendix A summarise the stakeholders and different government areas engaged throughout. Drawing on Taranaki Venture (2020) and SNAP3 (Scottish Government, 2024a), criteria influencing indicator development and data selection included:

  • Relevance to the outcomes to be measured,
  • Timeliness,
  • Sample sizes for Scotland (when data is collected at UK scale),
  • Possible breakdowns by socio-economic and geographic scales (where relevant),
  • Data availability and accessibility.

Reporting for most indicators is recommended at a ‘Scotland-wide’ target population level. Additional target populations are included for some indicators based on an understanding of their relevance for specific geographies or groups. Target populations for data monitoring (relevant across all outcomes and indicator tables) include:

  • Scotland-wide: Data for Scotland as a whole,
  • Demographic groups: Age, sex, gender, ethnicity, disability, income (as relevant/ available per data source),
  • Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD): By SIMD percentile (e.g., locations identified as the 20% most deprived areas of Scotland) (SIMD, 2020),
  • 6-fold urban-rural classification and islands: Geographical data breakdown according to the Scottish Government’s Urban Rural Classification. This distinguishes between large urban areas, other urban areas, accessible small towns, remote small towns, accessible rural and remote rural areas (Scottish Government, 2024d). Alongside the rural-urban classification, this target population group includes monitoring islands separately,
  • Local Authorities as relevant to the indicator.

Data identification and indicator refinement were undertaken simultaneously. Efforts focused on identifying indicators where data was readily available, to ensure the feasible implementation of the framework and avoid further delays to JT monitoring. The framework also includes some indicators for which data is currently not available, yet which cover key JT areas of concern. Possibilities for indicator refinement and data collection were also explored for these indicators, the details of which can be found in Appendix E.

Finally, indicators within the framework both draw on and at times, depart from existing Scottish Government JT M&E publications. Appendix F details the parallels and differences between this framework and in particular, JT indicators in the CCP (2026).

Summary indicators

The proposed 15 summary indicators provide a high-level overview of the just-ness of Scotland’s transition across the four JT outcomes. As a small set of indicators, they offer cross-cutting insight into the JT. This may also be useful at reporting stage and for JT communication with internal and external stakeholders.

Summary indicators are selected from across the four outcomes and should be reported on at a Scotland-wide level. Additional reporting by demographic groups is also recommended for three indicators in the list: those about policy influence, opportunities for young people in Scotland and about individuals’ ability to adapt to climate change. These three indicators are selected as proxies for issues of participation, recognition and distribution of impacts and opportunities across groups in Scotland, today and in the future. Table 3 sets out the proposed 15 summary indicators.

Outcome

Summary Indicator

(all reported on at Scotland-wide level)

Target population

Communities and Places:

The transition to net zero and climate resilience increases agency, social cohesion and community wealth across Scotland through collaboration, empowerment and socio-economic benefit.

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence (i) the Scottish Government’s approach to delivering net zero, and (ii) local policy and planning decisions relating to net zero

Demographic groups

Number of community groups involved in climate action/sustainability activities, as recorded by the Climate Action Hubs (and case studies).

 

Operational capacity of community and locally owned energy installations in Scotland. Include breakdown (i) by type of ownership (ii) by location and (iii) as a proportion of total renewable energy installed (that year/ overall).

 

People and Equity:

The transition to net zero and climate resilience addresses existing inequalities across Scotland and avoids creating new ones, supporting a more equal society overall.

Percentage of dwellings in Fuel Poverty

 

Percentage of people reporting that they can afford their individual transport costs

 

Proportion of people who agree that the transition to net zero and climate resilience will support a more positive future for young people and future generations in Scotland

Demographic groups

Level of adaptation action being taken by people in Scotland

Demographic groups

Premature deaths due to exposure to fine particulate matter (PM2.5)

Demographic groups

Jobs Skills and Economic Opportunities:

Scotland ensures a managed transition away from high-emissions industries and practices and delivers a diversified, prosperous and climate resilient economy grounded in worker participation, fair work, skills development and thriving business.

Employment (full-time equivalent) in the low carbon and renewable energy economy (LCREE) in Scotland 

 

Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Economy (LCREE) estimated direct and indirect turnover

 

High emitting industry worker participation in decisions affecting them

 

Sense of uncertainty/ confidence in the transition amongst workers in high emitting industries

 

Proportion (%) of employees earning less than the Real Living Wage

 

Environment and Biodiversity:

Through the transition to net zero and climate resilience, Scotland acts within planetary boundaries and restores the natural environment for current and future generations of people and planet.

Emissions of the eight priority Air Quality pollutants (ammonia, carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, non-methane volatile organic compounds, particulate matter, sulphur dioxide and lead) for Scotland

 

Scotland’s carbon footprint expressed in million tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent per year

 

Table 3: Summary indicators for the JT M&E framework.

Communities and Places

Table 4 provides an overview of proposed indicators to monitor progress towards the Communities and Places (CP) outcome. This table includes indicator number, indicator, target population (which may include more than one population, indicated as ‘population #2, population #3’) and the data source. Indicators with no currently available data are clustered at the end of the table (CP 9-12). Summary indicators are marked with an asterisk in the CP column (e.g., CP1*). The same approach is used for all outcome tables presented in Sections 3.2.3 – 3.2.6.

Communities and Places (CP)

CP

Indicator

Population

Population #2

Data source

CP1*

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence (i) the Scottish Government’s approach to delivering net zero, and (ii) local policy and planning decisions relating to net zero

Scotland-wide

[Demographic group breakdown in P&E]

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

CP2

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence net zero and climate adaptation developments happening in their local area

Scotland-wide

[Demographic group breakdown in P&E]

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

Ad hoc qualitative – with stakeholders

CP3*

Number of community groups involved in climate action/sustainability activities, as recorded by the Climate Action Hubs (and case studies)

Scotland-wide

Local Authorities (qualitative)

Climate Action Hubs quarterly reporting to Scottish Government

Qualitative – with community action stakeholders

CP4

Geographical coverage of regional adaptation collaborations [once full coverage, updates on implementation]

Scotland-wide

Local Authorities not involved in adaptation partnerships

Adaptation Scotland reporting to Scottish Government

CP5

The proportion of people reporting that changes to their local place due to net zero infrastructure and/or land use change[7] have maintained or improved the quality of their local area

Scotland-wide

 

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

CP6

Area of community assets (in hectares)

Scotland-wide

 

Community Ownership in Scotland 2024 – gov.scot

CP7*

Operational capacity of community and locally owned energy installations in Scotland. Include breakdown (i) by type of ownership (ii) by location and (iii) as a proportion of total renewable energy installed (that year/ overall)

Scotland-wide

 

Energy Saving Trust

CP8

Average value of community benefits committed from renewable energy projects commissioned in the last 36 months, where a community or developer form is attached to a project

Scotland-wide

 

Local Energy Scotland community benefits register 

 

Indicators with no currently available data

Population

Population #2

Suggested method/ data source for collection

CP9

Engagement experiences of the fishing sector with offshore energy developments

Scotland-wide

 

Qualitative engagement with key stakeholder groups e.g., Regional Inshore Fisheries Group and existing forums.

CP10

Distribution of marine space across activities, including % available for fishing

Scotland-wide

 

Marine Directorate – NMPi

CP11

Number of woodland creation projects registered with the Woodland Carbon Code (WCC) and peatland restoration projects registered with the Peatland Code (PC) owned by community groups and small landholdings; and as a % of total registered projects

Scotland-wide

 

UK Woodland Carbon Code registry

UK Peatland Code registry

Case studies – qualitative engagement with stakeholders e.g., Scottish Forestry, Peatland Action, Community Land Scotland.

CP12

Socio-economic benefits from woodland creation and peatland restoration

Scotland-wide

 

Qualitative engagement with key stakeholder groups e.g., Community Land Scotland, Scottish Forestry, Peatland Action, Scottish Land Commission, and with projects under development. The WCC has a benefits self-reporting tool from which data may also be available for the Scottish Government.

Table 4: Communities and Places outcome for the JT M&E framework.

People and Equity

Table 5 provides an overview of proposed indicators to monitor progress towards the People and Equity (PE) outcome. Earlier versions of the framework included absolute poverty, relative poverty and the GINI coefficient as indicators within this outcome (in keeping with Drabble et al. (2024) and the JTC’s Annual Report (2024)). Following discussions with Scottish Government analysts, these were removed from any one outcome. Instead, they are identified as high level, contextual trends against which to analyse JT progress across all four outcomes. Further detail on the value of using poverty and inequality data as contextual trends for indicator interpretation is provided in Section 3.4.2.

People and Equity

PE

Indicator

Population

Population #2

Population #3

Data source

PE1*

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence (i) the Scottish Government’s approach to delivering net zero, and (ii) local policy and planning decisions relating to net zero

Demographic groups

 

 

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

PE2

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence net zero and climate adaptation developments happening in their local area. Include breakdown by (a) ocean and (b) land projects

Demographic groups

 

 

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

Ad hoc qualitative engagement with sectoral stakeholders

PE3*

Percentage of dwellings in Fuel Poverty

Scotland-wide

(ii) 6-fold rural/urban

(iii) Island local authorities

 

Scottish House Condition Survey

PE4

Housing with EPC C or above across housing/tenure types

Scotland-wide

(ii) 6-fold rural/urban
(iii) Island local authorities

 

Scottish House Condition Survey

PE5*

Percentage of people reporting that they can afford their individual transport costs 

Scotland-wide

(ii) 6-fold rural/urban
(iii) Island local authorities

Income

Scottish Household Survey

PE6

Number of people reporting they do not use public transport (buses) due to connectivity issues

Scotland-wide

(ii) 6-fold rural/urban classification groups
(iii) Island local authorities

 

Scottish Household Survey

PE7

  1. Proportion of adults within 5-minute walk of greenspace
  2. Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas

Scotland-wide

Demographic groups

 SIMD percentile (if data is available)

Scottish Household Survey

Ordnance Survey

PE8*

Proportion of people who agree that the transition to net zero and climate resilience will support a more positive future for young people and future generations in Scotland

Scotland-wide

 

 

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

PE9*

Level of adaptation action being taken by people in Scotland

Scotland-wide

Demographic groups

 SIMD percentile

Scottish Climate Survey

PE10

Hospitalisations by heat

Scotland-wide

Demographic groups (available by age and sex)

SIMD percentile

Public Health Scotland

PE11

Proportion of householders with prior flood claims who can receive quotes from 5 or more insurers

Scotland-wide

  

Flood-Re

PE12

Proportion of people living in a flood risk area who report an inability to implement flood risk measures

Scotland-wide

  

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

 

Indicators with no currently available data

Population

Population #2

Population #3

Suggested method/ data source for collection

PE13*

Premature deaths due to exposure to fine particulate matter (PM2.5) (number of premature deaths)

Scotland-wide

Demographic groups

SIMD percentile

Public Health Scotland

Table 5: People and Equity outcome for the JT M&E framework.

Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities

Table 6 provides an overview of proposed indicators to monitor progress towards the Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities (JSEO) outcome. Indicators dependent on UK Sectoral Industrial Classification (SIC) codes may be subject to change and refinement following the revision of UK SIC codes currently underway (Office for National Statistics, 2026). This may result in new sectoral categorisations and sub-categories by activities directly related to ‘net zero’ (e.g., renewable energy) which could support targeted sectoral breakdowns for indicators such as JSEO8, “proportion [%] of employees earning less than the Real Living Wage”.

Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities

JSEO

Indicator

Population

Population #2

Data source

JSEO1*

Employment (full-time equivalent) in the Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Economy (LCREE) in Scotland 

Scotland-wide

 

ONS – LCREE statistics

JSEO2

Total employment in Energy (including renewables)

Scotland-wide

 

Growth sector statistics – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

JSEO3

Employment in forestry and marginal employment changes from woodland creation

Scotland-wide

 

Scottish Forestry reporting to Scottish Government

JSEO4*

Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Economy (LCREE) estimated direct and indirect turnover

Scotland-wide

 

ONS – LCREE statistics

JSEO5

Businesses with 10+ employees with (i) a climate strategy (ii) biodiversity strategy (iii) publishing an annual sustainability report

Scotland-wide

 

Business Insights and Conditions Survey (Environment Wave)

JSEO6

Number of people in Modern Apprenticeships reporting that their apprenticeship is in a ‘net zero or green sector’ (i) 3-month and (ii) 15-month after finishing

Scotland-wide

Demographic groups

Skills Development Scotland – Apprentice Voice

JSEO7

Trade union membership density in Scotland

Scotland-wide

 

Department for Business and Trade – UK Government

JSEO8*

Proportion (%) of employees earning less than the Real Living Wage

Scotland-wide

 

Annual Survey of hours and earnings

JSEO9

The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the transport sector[8]. [SIC H: Transportation and storage]

Scotland-wide

 

Annual Survey of hours and earnings

JSEO10

The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the energy sector. [SIC B: Mining and Quarrying; SIC D: Electricity, Gas, steam and air conditioning supply]

Scotland-wide

 

Annual Survey of hours and earnings

JSEO11

The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the construction sector. [SIC F: Construction]

Scotland-wide

 

Annual Survey of hours and earnings

JSEO12

The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the agriculture sector. [SIC A: Agriculture, forestry and fishing]

Scotland-wide

 

Annual Survey of hours and earnings

 

Indicators with no currently available data

Population

Population #2

Suggested method/ data source for collection

JSEO13

Number of renewable energy supply chain businesses in Scotland

Interim proxy: £ value of ScotWind projects committed to Scottish-based suppliers

Scotland-wide

 

Selected industry statistics for business based on pre-identified SIC code sectors.

Proxy: Supply Chain Development Statements (accessed via Crown Estate Scotland)

JSEO14

Business resilience and ability to adapt to climate change and the transition

Interim proxy (in CCP 2026): Proportion of small businesses in Scotland reporting the level of energy prices as an obstacle

Scotland-wide

 

N/A

Proxy: Scotland Small Business Survey

JSEO15

Number of workers experiencing redundancy in high emitting industries in Scotland receiving support/ reporting that their employers are implementing transition plans for workers

Scotland-wide

 

Survey and qualitative engagement with key stakeholders.

JSEO16*

High emitting industry worker participation in decisions affecting them

Scotland-wide

 

Survey and qualitative engagement with key stakeholders.

JSEO17*

Sense of uncertainty/ confidence in the transition amongst workers in high emitting industries

Scotland-wide

 

Survey and qualitative engagement with key stakeholders.

Table 6: Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities outcome for the JT M&E framework.

Environment and Biodiversity

Table 7 provides an overview of proposed indicators to monitor progress towards the Environment and Biodiversity (EB) outcome.

Environment and Biodiversity

EB

Indicator

Population

Data source

EB1*

Emissions of the eight priority Air Quality pollutants (ammonia, carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, non-methane volatile organic compounds, particulate matter, sulphur dioxide and lead) for Scotland and by industrial sector

Scotland-wide

National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory

EB2

Improvements to water quality across types in Scotland

Scotland-wide

SEPA – Aquatic classification and water classification hub

EB3*

Scotland’s carbon footprint expressed in million tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent per year

Scotland-wide

Scottish Government – Chief Economist Directorate

EB4

Global biodiversity impact (Measures the effect of Scotland’s resource use on biodiversity domestically and abroad)

Scotland-wide

Material Flow Accounts

EB5

Soil sealing

Scotland-wide

NatureScot

EB6

Regeneration of vacant / derelict urban land (% of which is regenerated through environmental restoration, for climate adaptation and by net zero initiatives)

Scotland-wide

Scottish Land Commission/SEPA, qualitative engagement with energy developers.

EB7

Number of hectares of newly protected land and marine features across Scotland

Scotland-wide

NatureScot

 

Indicators with no currently available data

Population

Suggested method/ data source for collection

EB8

Carbon and social footprint of materials used for net zero developments in Scotland

Interim proxy: Carbon Intensity of Materials (Circular Economy Strategy (2026) (Scottish Government, 2026d): indicates whether a nation is consuming more sustainable alternatives, independent of trends in overall GHG impact.

Scotland-wide

Data not available. Developers increasingly conduct project lifecycle assessments during the planning process. This may be a starting point for data collection.

Proxy: Material Flow Accounts

Table 7: Environment and Biodiversity outcome for the JT M&E framework.

Monitoring local transitions: hotspot indicators and anticipating risk

In parallel to monitoring indicators for the four, high-level JT outcomes for Scotland, the proposed framework includes a focus on key locations identified as ‘sites of transition’, or transition ‘hotspots’. This is grounded in the inherently spatial nature of (in)justice (Bouzarovski and Simcock, 2017) and the recognised importance of contextualised, placed-based approaches to transitions (e.g., Jenkins et al. 2025; Shapovalova et al. 2023). The hotspots approach integrates attention to specific places experiencing change because of or influenced by[9] the net zero transition.

The definition of ‘hotspots’ as used throughout this report is as follows:

  • Places reliant on a high-emitting industry and undergoing industrial change
  • Places hosting net zero developments and their aggregated impacts

Some hotspots are already known, while others will need to be identified and may become hotspots over time. Examples of identified hotspots include Aberdeen City, Aberdeenshire and Grangemouth in Falkirk from the perspective of industrial change. Shetland, Dumfries and Galloway or Caithness in the Highland Council are examples of hotspots hosting significant net zero developments (e.g. Voar, 2024; Equitable Energy, 2025; Mountain, 2024; Just Transition Commission, 2025). Two additional hotspot criteria have been identified but remain underdeveloped in this report: (i) places of legacy unjust transitions and aggregated effects and (ii) places facing high levels of climate change risk.

Alongside the importance of place-based transition monitoring, there is growing attention to the need for future-facing, anticipatory approaches to justice (e.g. Santos Ayllón et al. 2025; Trueworthy et al. 2024; Rodhouse et al. 2024). This was also mentioned by stakeholders during the workshop, with reference, for instance, to the known closure of Petroineos oil refinery operations at Grangemouth and a perceived failure to act in a timely fashion. The need for anticipatory, or “early warning” indicators and approaches to JT has also been emphasised in letters and consultation responses to the Draft CCP (2025) (e.g., Just Transition Commission, 2026b).

It is intended that anticipatory approaches to hotspot identification and monitoring as part of JT M&E can help mitigate risks of injustice – and pursue opportunities for more just outcomes – before transitions are locked in (Santos Ayllón et al. 2025).

The hotspot approach developed for this framework draws on existing work on place-based JT M&E. It presents an approach to monitoring place-specific sites of transition and proposes methodologies to anticipate potential transitions. In this vein, sections 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 set out approaches for hotspot identification, not monitoring. These approaches are exploratory and untested in practice and require further analytical development and pilot application. They were informed by support from Scottish Government analysts and by insight from stakeholders such as the Scottish Trade Union Congress (STUC).

Section 3.3.3 details the hotspot monitoring approach and a set of indicators. These indicators are proposed to monitor readily identified hotspots or known sites of transition. The development of the hotspots approach and hotspot indicators integrates place-based JT M&E within the proposed national JT M&E framework for Scotland.

Throughout these sections, this report reiterates the value of formalised and regular stakeholder engagement. Direct engagement with project developers, employers, planning authorities, local councils and sector-specific institutions will be invaluable to understand ongoing transition plans and decisions. This may be one of the most fruitful methods for anticipating potential transitions overall.

Identifying potential hotspots of industrial change

Locating potential industrial transition hotspots will involve identifying places hosting the types of industries which the low carbon economy is expected to move away from. These may include specific sectoral activities (e.g., oil and gas production or domestic vehicle combustion engine construction) and high emitting industrial sites which can be expected to undergo some form of decarbonisation over time.

To identify potential areas of industrial change using available data, the Scottish Government could pre-select a group of high-emitting sectors (e.g., heavy industry, manufacturing, energy, construction, or transport) using UK SIC code classifications. Although SIC code classifications do not precisely match distinctions between emitting and low-carbon activity, industry statistics by SIC code can be broken down to granular sector levels and small-scale geographies across Scotland.

A variety of statistical approaches could be then used to identify potential hotspots in relation to pre-identified sectors. ‘Location quotients’, for example, show the proportion of total employment in a place from a particular industry, compared to the national share. This can show sectors of dependency (or strength) for different local authority areas and at smaller scales. Location quotient data shows Aberdeen City as having a high location quotient in ‘mining and quarrying’ (SIC sector B) of 12.7, and Aberdeenshire of 3.2. This means that the proportion of jobs in ‘mining and quarrying’ in Aberdeen City and Aberdeenshire are 12.7- and 3.2-times the Scotland-wide share respectively (where 0.98% of Scottish jobs are in ‘mining and quarrying’)[10]. The data is sourced from the Business Register and Employment Survey and is available via NOMIS, and used by the Scottish Government, for example, in the Industry Statistics Database. 

The Scottish Government could also identify key locations of industrial activity in identified sectors (determined according to SIC codes) based on the following indicators: (i) number of employees and (ii) proportion of employment in the local area dependent on these industries. Data for these measures is available in the Scottish Government’s industry statistics (Scottish Government, n.d.). This proposal takes a slightly different approach to location quotients by recognising the relative importance of industries in places, regardless of their proportional comparison to the rest of Scotland. If a given location is particularly dependent on an industry relative to its local employment levels and economic scale, then a change in this industry could have a significant impact locally (even if the facility is relatively small compared to the Scotland-wide sectoral workforce). Possible geographical scale for these analyses (as advised by analysts in the industry statistics area in government) include, for example, ‘travel to work’ areas, which are based on commuting patterns. Some of these are larger than local authorities, while others are smaller and based around specific towns. The Scottish Government could also use data on ‘anchor firms’ as the largest place-based employers across Scotland to further support hotspot identification.

A sector-based approach could also support the identification of potential net zero ‘growth’ areas, again, using tools such as location quotients or proportion of employment in a local area. The pre-selection of opportunity net zero sectors could be based on existing government strategies and analysis (e.g., the National Strategy for Economic Transformation (2022) and the Green Industrial Strategy (2024)). This will also be conditioned to some extent by available SIC code breakdowns. The current review of SIC code classifications (UK Government, 2026) may enable improved analyses of net zero sectors in the future. There could be overlap between industrial change hotspots and growth areas.

In parallel to sector-based analyses, the Scottish Government could use data sources like the Scottish Environment Protection Agency’s (SEPA) Scottish Pollutant Release Inventory (SPRI), to identify the most emitting industrial sites across Scotland (SEPA, n.d.). This dataset is annually updated and includes an extensive list of pollutants, including key greenhouse gases such as carbon dioxide and methane. As an example, journalist investigations have previously used this data to identify what authors labelled “Scotland’s top 20 climate polluters” with a focus on carbon dioxide emissions (Edwards and Dobson, 2022). The authors identified the single most polluting sites (e.g., SSE’s gas-fired plant at Peterhead) and the most polluting companies (e.g., Ineos). A cement works plant, waste incinerators, a glass manufacturing plant and a whisky distillery were also in the ‘top 20’, highlighting potential transition sites outside of the known industrial transition sectors. This proposal is inspired by similar analyses shared by STUC.

There may also be value in using the regularly updated data and maps from the North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA). NSTA datasets include regularly updated, long term decommissioning plans by well (North Sea Transition Authority, n.d.). Alongside these, the Scottish Government’s Marine Directorate produces spatially mapped data of onshore and offshore oil and gas infrastructure (e.g., MarineScotland, 2020). A spatial, infrastructure-based approach hyper-localises the identification of potential sites of transition and may also support identification of key employers and operators across sites and wells. Additional analysis of the Marine Directorate and NSTA data to identify field names, operators and their employee base could provide further insight into oil and gas transitions more broadly. This project has identified this as a critical area requiring new data collection for JT monitoring.

Identifying potential net zero development hotspots

Scholarships focused on energy, justice and JT have demonstrated the potential negative implications of net zero developments in the places where they are deployed (e.g., Mejía-Montero, 2025; Kalt et al. 2023; Healy et al. 2019). As such, the Scottish Government should also anticipate potential sites of net zero development. This includes both the deployment of renewable energy and related infrastructure (e.g., transmission lines, subsea cables, power stations, and green hydrogen production plants). It also includes sites of land use change like woodland creation and peatland restoration (e.g., for carbon offsetting purposes).

In the case of renewable energy and adjacent energy infrastructure developments, the most comprehensive data source identified is the UK Renewable Energy Planning Database. This is updated multiple times a year (UK Government, n.d.). It tracks the progress of UK renewable electricity projects over 150kW (onshore and offshore) through the planning system across technology types[11]. This data is available in spreadsheet format and as an interactive map, and projects can be filtered by development stages (UK Government, n.d.). The Scottish Government could filter by projects at inception and planning stages as a starting point for anticipatory JT analysis of potential developments.

There is extensive research regarding the justice implications of energy. Data collection associated with renewable energy benefits and ownership distribution is already underway by the Scottish Government. In contrast, this project identifies natural capital projects resulting in land use change for net zero as an important and underexplored area from a JT perspective. The Scottish Crofting Federation, for example, voiced a clear concern regarding land purchase and accumulation through natural capital development opportunities. Conversations across natural capital and Woodland Carbon Code (WCC) areas of government recognised existing concerns about land ownership concentration and the establishment of ‘green lairds’ (McMorran et al. 2022) yet also suggested that ownership concentration is not happening to date. This contrast in stakeholder perspectives demonstrates the relevance of this arena for further research, data collection and anticipatory hotspot attention.

Stakeholder engagement during this project shed light on the limited data available in relation to natural capital projects and their impacts from a JT perspective. Existing data includes publicly available lists of projects registered with WCC and Peatland Code (PC) (Woodland Carbon Code, n.d., Peatland Code, n.d.). In addition, Peatland Action hold and map data regarding completed and in-progress peatland restoration across Scotland (NatureScot, n.d.). Their map includes data on conducted ‘feasibility studies’ which can show sites of future restoration (however, these areas will not necessarily see the development of peatland restoration projects). A similar map was not identified for woodland creation projects. Like energy developments, land use change projects need to obtain consent (e.g., Scottish Forestry, 2025). The Scottish Government could explore avenues to access planning applications for woodland creation and peatland restoration as a step towards understanding planned landscape change for net zero and climate resilience.

Net zero developments are happening at a fast pace and across all of Scotland. This project proposes that the Scottish Government visually map and regularly update related data to enable a more comprehensive understanding of (i) the degree of change across different areas in Scotland and (ii) aggregated effects in a single place. Additional criteria to inform identification of potential hotspots facing net zero developments are (i) considerations of project scale and expected impact and (iii) the local context. This is applicable to both energy and land use change hotspots.

Hotspot indicators

The following section sets out the list of 23 indicators recommended for monitoring hotspots. Various indicators for hotspot JT M&E were selected from the four outcomes in the full M&E framework. Alongside these, additional indicators were identified which provide relevant information regarding transition processes in specific contexts. The selection of indicators was also informed directly by the dual hotspot definition above.

There are known and predicted similarities in the concerns created by specific transition impacts. In the case of industrial change, for example, concerns include worker participation in decision-making processes, unemployment and worker mobility, reskilling, socio-economic wellbeing of the local community, local identity and cohesion and levels of deprivation (e.g., Mayer, 2018; International Labour Organisation, 2015; Walsh et al. 2016; Santos Ayllón and Jenkins, 2023; Shapovalova et al. 2023; Jenkins et al. 2025). For places hosting net zero developments, concerns include transparency and participation in decision-making, stakeholder recognition and decision-making power hierarchies, impacts on identity and place attachment, the distribution of socio-economic impacts and risks of extractivism (Jenkins et al. 2016; Shejale et al. 2025; Raymond et al. 2023; Kalt et al. 2023; Healy et al. 2019; Morrissey, 2023).

Known and predicted concerns informed both the definition of hotspots and the selection of hotspot indicators. As an example, industrial change hotspot indicators include workforce experiences and local economy fluctuations. They also include indicators monitoring alcohol and drug use hospitalisations. While not directly connected to net zero activity, the latter serve as early warning measures of deprivation. Their inclusion draws on Shapovalova et al. (2023) and on the SIMD. Given the SIMD is produced every four to five years, they provide advanced insight into deprivation (SIMD, 2020).

The selection of indicators is further informed by the fact that hotspots directly experiencing industrial or net zero transition impacts (e.g., from the closure of an industrial plant or the deployment of transmission lines), are also impacted by broader transition dynamics captured across the four JT outcomes. In this way, place-specific transitions are layered upon broader JT issues, such as fuel costs, transport accessibility, fair work or participatory capacity in net zero policy-making processes.

Hotspot indicators are proposed as a useful starting point and guide for monitoring hotspot areas. They are not a blanket approach that will apply equally in every site of transition or consistently through time. While hotspots may share characteristics regarding the types of transition underway (e.g. industrial change or decline), each will be unique. Indicators may illustrate similar trends for different hotspots, but this will not necessarily demonstrate that the same transitions are occurring, nor similarities in their just-ness.

Attention should be given to unique, place-based realities including through complementary analytical tools such as the SIMD, existing climate change risk maps and data (e.g., SEPA, 2025; Climate Just, n.d.) and qualitative engagement with stakeholders. This follows recommendations in Jenkins et al. (2025) regarding the importance of bespoke approaches and indicators grounded in the most relevant concerns per place. For the purposes of national-level implementation and taking a national perspective, this report provides a set of indicators as a starting point for hotspot JT monitoring. Table 8 provides an overview of hotspot indicators and their data source. Appendix G provides further detail on hotspot indicators including their desired trend and rationale.

H

Indicator (monitored by selected Local Authority)

Industrial change

Net Zero developments

Data source

H1

Employment rate for people aged 16-64 across Scotland

X

X

ONS

H2

Unemployment rate for people aged 16-64 across Scotland

X

 

ONS

H3

Number of people Not in Employment and Education or Training (16-19)

X

 

Skills Development Scotland

H4

Number of people in Modern Apprenticeships reporting that (i) their apprenticeship is in ‘green skills’/for the net zero economy’ during, 3-month and 15 months after finishing their apprenticeship and of these, (ii) number of people staying to work in their same Local authority

X

X

Skills Development Scotland – Apprentice Voice

H5

Population change (with attention to in-out migration)

X

X

Council area profiles – National Records of Scotland (NRS)

H6

Business activity/ survivability: Business birth and death rates

X

 

Scottish Government – Sub-Scotland Economic Statistics Database

H7

Sectoral economic dependence/diversification:

  1. Sectoral share of GVA (those increasing and in decline)
  2. Employment Share by Sector (Regional Sector Share) (to monitor changing employment across sectors in the local economy; those increasing and in decline).
  3. Location quotients (importance of a sector to a region relative to the national average)

Contextualised within broader economic trends per local authority

X

X

Business and innovation statistics – gov.scot

H8

Proportion of households reporting that they are managing well financially

X

 

Scottish Household Survey

H9

Median house price by Local Authority

 

X

Registers of Scotland

H10

People reporting they can afford their individual transport costs

X

X

Scottish Household Survey

H11

Proportion of adults within 5-minute walk of greenspace

 

X

Scottish Household Survey

H12

Operational capacity of community and locally owned energy installations in Scotland. Include a breakdown (i) by type of ownership (ii) by location and (iii) as a proportion of total renewable energy installed in local area

X

X

Energy Saving Trust

H13

Area of community assets (in hectares)

X

X

Community Ownership in Scotland 2024 – gov.scot

H14

Community benefits from energy (and for natural capital projects, once available)

if/as relevant

X

Local Energy Scotland community benefits register 

H15

Number of hospitalisations due to alcohol use

X

 

ScotPHO profiles

H16

Number of drug use hospitalisations

X

 

ScotPHO profiles

H17

Worker participation in industrial change processes

X

 

Data not currently available

H18

Premature deaths due to exposure to fine particulate matter (PM2.5)

X

X

Data not currently available

H19

Fuel poverty

x

(Every 3 yrs)

x

(Every 3 yrs)

Scottish House and Condition Survey

H20

Proportion of people who agree that the transition to net zero and climate resilience will support a more positive future for young people and future generations in Scotland

x

(Every 3 yrs)

x

(Every 3 yrs)

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

H21

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence (i) the Scottish Government’s approach to delivering net zero, and (ii) local policy and planning decisions relating to net zero

 

x

(Every 3 yrs)

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

H22

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence net zero and climate adaptation developments happening in their local area

x

(Every 3 yrs)

x

(Every 3 yrs)

 Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

H23

The proportion of people reporting that changes to their local place due to net zero infrastructure and/or land use change have maintained or improved the quality of their local area

 

x

(Every 3 yrs)

 Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

Table 8: Hotspot indicators, by hotspot ‘type’ and data source.

All hotspot indicators share two characteristics: they are all available at local authority level and data is updated on an annual basis (except for the Scottish Climate Survey and fuel poverty data, for which local authority data is available every 3 years). The local authority level is the smallest area for which data is available across all identified indicators. This allows comparability. This scale is also recognised as a limitation to the hotspots approach, given transition impacts may be contained to smaller local areas within local authorities. Highland Council data will not necessarily reflect realities of wind farm and transmission line installations in Caithness, for example, and centralised Orkney Islands level data may be insufficient to understand the just-ness of transitions underway on individual islands within the archipelago.

Annual data collection for most indicators is common and is the most frequent data update period (with some exceptions e.g., labour market trends, which are updated monthly). Given that hotspots are already undergoing transformational change, regular, timely monitoring is critical to understand the implications of the transition. Annual indicators could also serve as early warning indicators for hotspot locations over time. At the same time, this annual updating cycle is recognised as a limitation, given that data will never be available in real time. The limitations of the hotspots approach are returned to in Section 4.

Hotspot indicator monitoring should incorporate regular stakeholder engagement. This will be necessary to better understand both (i) where impacts are localised within each local authority and (ii) to obtain regular, near real time updates while indicator data is unavailable. Regular engagement will also triangulate monitoring with qualitative lived-experience data. The role of stakeholder engagement in JT M&E is expanded on in Section 3.5. A key recommendation for Scottish Government is the further development of effective approaches to engagement as a qualitative monitoring tool.

Interpreting indicators

The sections above have presented a set of proposed indicators across four JT outcomes, a selection of ‘summary indicators’ for these, and an additional set of hotspot indicators. Together, these indicators make up the core for monitoring a JT at a Scotland-wide level and for specific sites of transition in Scotland. The indicators are selected based on their relevance and representativeness of the outcomes and hotspots they relate to, alongside data availability.

The identified indicators are partial. Together, they support an understanding of progress towards JT outcomes, yet they are unable to capture every dimension, nuance and implication of the transition from a JT perspective. The transition itself is underway within a broader landscape of social, economic and planetary change, at local, national and international scales. For improved understanding of the just-ness of the transition, the indicators should be interpreted (i) as interrelated features of a JT within the framework, and (ii) in relation to broader contextual trends. This section addresses each of these points in turn.

Interpreting outcome and hotspots indicators

A JT to net zero and climate resilience is a dynamic, multi-layered process. As an example, an individual may face issues of transport affordability due to the shift towards electric vehicles, gain health benefits from reduced air pollution and be employed in peatland restoration while feeling disenfranchised from decisions about the installation of wind turbines near their home. This understanding of the JT was foundational to the conceptualisation of the proposed JT M&E framework.

A multi-layered and dynamic M&E framework was deemed too unwieldy for feasible implementation. As such, the core of the proposed framework is structured according to a linear logic in which high-level outcomes are monitored by a set of indicators, each with an individual desirable trend. If every indicator in the Communities and Places outcome is progressing in the desired direction, then the Scottish Government could interpret this as progress towards this JT outcome.

A review of individual indicator trends alone, however, is insufficient to assess the just-ness of the transition and may obscure experiences of injustice. As an example, an increasing trend in community energy ownership may not show differences in access to community energy ownership opportunities. These considerations also apply to interactions across indicators, and across outcomes too. Increasing community land ownership, for example, is deemed positive from the perspective of community empowerment and access to net zero opportunities. Yet changes in land ownership could also have negative distributional impacts on people previously employed on the land. The increase in marine protected areas is deemed desirable from the perspective of the Environment and Biodiversity outcome yet may also create additional pressures on fishers and coastal communities in relation to the Communities and Places outcome. Critical inquiry into the indicators, what they do not show and how they relate to each other will improve assessment of JT progress. This critical attention draws from methods developed by the field of responsible research and innovation (e.g., Stilgoe et al. 2013) and has also been proposed in anticipatory justice approaches (e.g., Santos Ayllón et al. 2025). It should be complemented with qualitative, stakeholder engagement, returned to in Section 3.5.

The hotspots approach is designed to capture the multi-layered, cross-cutting nature of the JT more effectively. This is made possible by the narrower scope offered by the hotspots approach. Thus, while hotspot indicators have an indicative desired trend (see Appendix G), they should be interpreted in their local context and, to the extent possible, in relation to each other.

Interpreting indicators against contextual trends

Indicator trends can provide the Scottish Government with an overview of progress towards (or away from) a set of desired outcomes. However, these indicators should be interpreted (i) in the context of climate change mitigation and adaptation actions and (ii) as part of a wider socio-economic landscape. The importance of interpreting indicators within context was emphasised by NatureScot team members, alongside Scottish Government analysts in the industry statistics area. The importance of context to understand quantitative indicators is also clear in Shapovalova et al.’s (2023) narrative interpretation of indicators for a JT in Aberdeen and Aberdeenshire. Contextual interpretation recognises the unpredictability of climate impacts and responses to these, and the ways in which wider trends can impact the ongoing transition (e.g., ICAT, 2024).

This report proposes an initial set of trends which can support the interpretation of monitored indicators. The first two relate to climate change mitigation and adaptation, followed by broader socio-economic trends:

  1. Greenhouse gas emissions in Scotland: To assess a JT in the context of progress towards climate change mitigation. Greenhouse gas emissions are reported on annually in the CCP (2026) with a time lag of circa two years.
  2. Climate risk (and adaptation) in Scotland: To assess a JT in the context of changing climate risk. A comprehensive assessment of climate change risk for Scotland is conducted every 5 years by the Climate Change Committee (CCC). Climate adaptation research and policy team members have used the CCC assessment to inform their M&E framework for SNAP3. The CCC presents a set of risks and evaluates these on a scale of high-medium-low. The recommendation is to use this (the number and type of risks per category) as a baseline for climate risk and adaptation (e.g., Climate Change Committee, 2021).
  3. Land ownership concentration in Scotland: To assess a JT to net zero and climate resilience in the context of evolving land ownership trends in Scotland. Changes in land ownership and land use could have a variety of impacts including potential job losses, landscape change and new distributions of benefits and harms. Land ownership was recognised by stakeholders as key to accessing opportunities from net zero and climate resilience. While data is currently unavailable to monitor land concentration trends, the annual Rural Land Market insights report by the Scottish Land Commission can provide a high-level overview of trends (Scottish Land Commission, 2025). This can be supplemented with insight from relevant Scottish Government teams and stakeholders like Community Land Scotland and the Scottish Land Commission.
  4. Economic trends in Scotland: To assess a JT to net zero and climate resilience in the context of the health and resilience of the Scottish economy at any given point in time. This can include particular attention to sectoral composition by % of GVA, to support high-level analyses of the direction of the economic transition. Economic statistics are updated annually across Scottish Government. Business and industry surveys are regularly conducted with the least regular surveys taking place on an annual basis.
  5. Poverty and inequality trends in Scotland: To assess a JT to net zero and climate resilience in the context of structural vulnerabilities and inequity. Relative and absolute poverty statistics, along with GINI coefficient and Palma ratio analyses of inequality are updated annually by Scottish Government.
  6. Global events: To assess a JT to net zero and climate resilience in the context of global affairs, including geopolitical shocks, economic crises, pandemics or accelerating commitments to climate action. Scotland is part of an interconnected economic, institutional and ecological global landscape. Developments in this landscape will undoubtedly impact on – and could be impacted by – Scotland’s progress towards a JT.

These trends are relevant for JT indicator interpretation across the four outcomes and hotspots[12]. Falling fuel poverty and increasing transport affordability indicate positive advances to address fuel and transport inequities. However, in a context of increasing greenhouse gas emissions these would not necessarily be associated with a net zero transition. A continued increase in poverty levels in a context of falling greenhouse gas emissions and increasing low carbon jobs and economic activity (JSEO1, JSEO4) may signal failings in securing JT objectives. Geopolitical shocks (such as the coronavirus pandemic, Russia’s invasion of Ukraine in 2022, or USA and Israel strikes on Iran in 2026) can impact fuel prices and the cost of living, change government policy priorities and affect public concerns. Analysis of indicators in relation to global affairs can thus support improved interpretation of indicator trends and any sudden shifts these may present.

Stakeholder engagement

The proposed framework is grounded in an underpinning commitment to formalised, regular stakeholder engagement. This is seen as fundamental to supporting JT monitoring. Workshop participants emphasised the value of stakeholder engagement and stakeholder participation both for JT delivery, and specifically to support JT M&E. They explained that building trusted and regular networks with key stakeholders could support data collection, fill data gaps, and improve communication about the transition. This focus on engagement also echoes Mechanism 3 in Drabble et al. (2024, p.47), which identified ‘stakeholder participation in Just Transition decision making’ as one of the conditions for JT success.

Stakeholder engagement is envisaged to enable qualitative data collection for relevant indicators and as a supplement to quantitative data. It is also deemed crucial for indicator interpretation, both to triangulate and contextualise indicators with experience on the ground. Importantly, stakeholder engagement can also provide insight into transition impacts before indicator data is available. Finally, engaging with key stakeholders is also suggested as an anticipatory tool for the Scottish Government to identify potential future hotspots.

Stakeholder engagement can provide granularity, nuance and qualitative case studies grounded in lived experiences of the transition. This can improve understanding of what is and is not captured by indicators, and therefore the multiple implications of the transition. As examples, a Poverty Alliance team member referred to instances in which heat pump installations in social housing had resulted in inhabitants falling into energy debt. During the workshop, a representative from CEMVO explained the difficulties often faced by ethnic minorities in accessing opportunities such as the Community and Renewable Energy Scheme (CARES) funding. Fuel poverty and community energy ownership indicators in the framework (PE3 and CP7) do not reflect these risks and inequalities relating to heat pumps and renewable energy. While indicator data does not capture these experiences, qualitative feedback can.

Some indicators in the framework suggest a combination of quantitative and qualitative data, the latter collected as ad hoc stakeholder insight or case studies. Examples include CP3 on community groups involved in climate and sustainability related activities. Climate Action Hub teams can provide qualitative insight into where community-led action is particularly strong. Conversely, this engagement can also show where it is struggling to take off and offer reasons why. Organisations like the Scottish Community Development Centre and the Scottish Communities Climate Action Network can provide further insight into community-led climate action. Recommendations for stakeholder engagement in indicator JSEO16 (on workforce participation) was informed by a discussion with STUC. This shed light on the legal and practical barriers to worker-involved transitions in high emitting industries.

Some indicators in the framework are fully qualitative. One example is CP9, which monitors engagement experiences of the fishing sector with offshore energy developments. Fishing was discussed not only as an economic activity but a way of life, with strong impact on coastal and island local economies and identities (as explained by the Regional Inshore Fisheries Group and Scottish Government team members). The Regional Inshore Fisheries Group reflected on power and resource hierarchies between offshore energy developers and the fishing sector, and on the different types of fishing and potential diverse impacts. Questions of sectoral coexistence, decline and change in the offshore economy are too complex to be captured in a single data point. Engagement with key stakeholder groups directly involved is therefore key.

The Scottish Government can explore different forms of engagement for JT M&E. These may range from individual meetings to establishing a regular stakeholder forum. There may be opportunities for the Scottish Government to complement these efforts with JTC support, which is to be renewed in 2026 (Scottish Government, 2025f). From the perspective of national JT M&E, the Scottish Government already has extensive knowledge and networks with stakeholder groups and organisations across many JT areas of concern. Internal and external stakeholders engaged with throughout this project are also deemed valuable contact points.

Alongside sector-specific stakeholders, and for national JT monitoring, the Scottish Government can engage with Scottish Government teams working on related Scotland-wide monitoring (e.g., the National Performance Framework or the Wellbeing Economy Monitor) to support contextualisation of indicators into Scotland-wide trends. In addition, the Scottish Government could explore existing connections to local authorities to contrast national-level JT monitoring with local concerns. Stakeholders such as the Convention of Scottish Local Authorities (COSLA) and the Scottish Climate Intelligence Service offer potential to connect nationwide JT monitoring to more local priorities. Local authorities could provide qualitative input to complement indicator monitoring, for example, and could report back on which indicators reflect local priorities at a given point in time.

In the case of hotspots monitoring, the Government could establish regular communication and feedback loops with a bespoke set of stakeholders on the ground. This may include local authority representatives, developers, employers, trade unions and local third sector organisations. Such arrangements could also be used as an anticipatory tool to identify future hotspots facing industrial and net zero change. In addition, existing partnerships and stakeholder networks including the eight Regional Economic Partnerships, for example, or the Sub-Scotland Economic Statistics Group, may be useful to support hotspot indicator interpretation.

While this section has focused on engagement with institutional stakeholders, this does not preclude engagement with individuals directly exposed to and experiencing transition impacts. In some cases, this could be the most direct way to access, listen to and integrate lived experience (e.g., Jenkins et al. 2025). Research into justice in energy transitions has explored the role of intermediaries in translating lived experiences such as of fuel poverty, including both their value and potential risks (e.g., Lacey-Barnacle and Bird, 2018; Santos Ayllón and Jenkins, 2023). This section recommends engagement with institutional stakeholders first for reasons of feasibility, and to ease potential burdens on directly affected groups.

Engagement with individuals experiencing transitions may in some cases be necessary to better understand and evaluate transition impacts. Where needed, the Scottish Government should build in opportunities for ad hoc qualitative research and engagement. The Scottish Government may also explore possible avenues for more formalised engagement approaches to reach lived experience, including through participatory citizens assemblies or ‘experts by experience’ panels (e.g., Elstub et al. 2022; Poverty and Inequality Commission, 2023).

Limitations and reflections

The proposed JT M&E framework has several limitations. Some of these relate to the practicalities of framework implementation, and others to the specific constraints affecting this project. Some limitations reflect the complexity of monitoring a JT itself.

Data availability, temporality and scale

Data availability has played an important role in the final shape of the proposed M&E framework. Broadly speaking, core areas of JT concern are included in the framework across outcomes and hotspot indicator lists. However, for many of these indicators, the data available is partial. For example, ‘adults within 5-minute walking distance of greenspace’ does not provide information on the quality or accessibility of this space. In addition, data for all indicators in the framework is retrospective. While many indicators in the framework are available on an annual basis, others are only available every two or three years. The current lack of real time data is arguably a limitation of any M&E framework aiming to monitor and assess a JT in Scotland.

More broadly, data limitations relate to their collection and categorisation parameters. Two clear examples are industrial classifications by SIC codes or the geographies of data collection, which do not necessarily match geographies of transition. This is particularly key in the case of hotspots. Although data is available at local authority levels, sites of transition often sit within local authorities. Transition dynamics may not necessarily be captured by local authority level data. As discussed in Section 3.5, close engagement with relevant stakeholders will be essential to better understand localised transitions. Engagement will provide as close to real-time data as possible and can triangulate and nuance indicator data. It may also be one of the most effective tools to anticipate future hotspots before transitions begin.

Finally, important data gaps remain. While the framework was developed with feasibility of implementation in mind, it also includes critical areas of JT concern for which both understanding and data is lacking. These gaps suggest areas for further research and data collection. These areas are summarised below:

  • Geographic and demographic breakdowns of low carbon and renewable energy jobs (often referred to as ‘green jobs’),
  • Education, training and skills development for the economy of the future (in ‘green’ jobs and more broadly),
  • Regular data collection on individuals’ sense of influence at smaller geographical scales (Scottish Climate Survey data is only available by local authority every 3 years),
  • Worker transitions, including the processes, distributional impacts and lived experience of workers in high-emitting sectors and on retraining pathways,
  • Exposure to climate change risk and the ability to access and adopt climate adaptation measures across people and places,
  • Climate change and net zero transition impacts on business, with attention to vulnerability, resilience and opportunities for different business types and scales. This includes direct attention to sole traders, who make up 71.9% of businesses in Scotland (Scottish Government, 2025g),
  • Implications, benefits and harms of land use change for natural capital projects,
  • Opportunities and risks relating to land ownership, access and distribution, with attention to stakeholders such as crofters, farmers and gamekeepers,
  • Land and coastal place-based identities and the implications of safeguarding or losing generational occupations and skills (e.g. crofting and fishing),
  • The spatial and demographic distribution of environmental degradation, pollution and hazardous sites across Scotland.

The list above relates to all indicators in the framework, including those with available data. For example, although there is an indicator focused on net zero skills development through apprenticeships, this is insufficient to capture the array of skilling and reskilling processes relating to net zero.

Alongside identified data gaps, stakeholder input spotlighted four key areas for further attention. These are not currently captured in the framework because they cut across various outcomes and are affected by extensive data gaps. The Scottish Government could explore (i) how these issues relate to JT delivery in Scotland and (ii) how they may be monitored and evaluated over time:

  • Distribution of responsibility, overconsumption and polluter pays considerations: Policy narratives often focus on distributing the benefits of the transition fairly and reducing the burden on disadvantaged households. However, less attention is given to responsibility, overconsumption and polluter pay considerations (at individual, business or industry levels). Participants in the workshop voiced concerns about how ‘climate policy is regressive’. Drabble et al. (2024, p.17) also briefly reflected on these considerations in their reference to ‘assessment of disproportionate benefits’. Most stakeholders engaged in this project and the evidence reviewed did not focus explicitly on issues of historical, international, intergenerational and intragenerational responsibility, often captured by the term ‘climate justice’ (e.g., Roser and Seidel, 2016). Overall, issues of distribution and responsibility are underexplored within a policy context in relation to JT and invite closer attention.
  • Intersections between food production systems, stakeholder power, food security, ecosystem and human health, and land use change: Interviews with NatureScot and the Scottish Crofting Federation pointed to the intersections between food production systems, power hierarchies and land use change in the transition to net zero. Concerns were also related to issues of food security, resilience and health. These insights invite further attention into how net zero and climate adaptation actions interact, if at all, with food production, food security and land use, and the risks and opportunities from the perspective of ensuring a JT.
  • Intersections between land prices, housing prices and availability and land use change in rural areas: The relevance of land ownership has been highlighted throughout, particularly in relation to distributional justice and access to net zero opportunities. The Scottish Crofting Federation also highlighted issues of land prices, housing prices and the ways in which land use change can affect these, particularly in rural and island areas. This may be directly affected by net zero and climate adaptation developments. In other cases, this may be adjacent to the transition underway and part of broader trends. Improved understanding of how land and house prices interact with the transition will support improved assessment of a JT.
  • Implications of human/nature relationships for the planetary crises and JT: There is growing attention to human-and-nature relationships from the perspective of justice, climate change, the energy transition and JT (e.g., Tafon et al. 2023; van Vugt et al. 2025; Tschakert et al. 2020; Stanley et al. 2025). This relates to beliefs, values and ethical systems, similarly to issues of justice (e.g., van Uffelen et al. 2024; Roser and Seidel, 2016). NatureScot interviewees emphasised the importance of assessing the JT within the current, exploitative relationship with nature (in industrial contexts) and its underlying causes. Disconnection from and domination over nature has also been recognised by the Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services (IPBES) as an underlying cause of biodiversity loss and nature’s decline (IPBES, 2025, p. 28 Figure SPM.1). In the workshop, indicator discussions for the ‘Environment and Biodiversity’ outcome highlighted diverse perspectives on the role of ‘nature’ within a JT. This included questions about the ways in which the climate and biodiversity crises (also known as the twin-crises) are interlinked; and the implications of this for a JT in Scotland. Overall, the space for nature within understandings of a JT and within JT policy in Scotland is unclear and would benefit from further attention.

Framework structure, design and development

The proposed framework is broadly structured according to a linear logic: outcomes inform the development of indicators which in turn, serve to assess progress towards the outcome. This enables targeted consideration of key areas of concern, along with an opportunity to monitor a suite of indicators providing detail into specific outcomes. At the same time, a linear approach clusters and to some extent, siloes areas and indicators. Indicators captured under ‘People and Equity’ or ‘Environment and Biodiversity’ may also be relevant to monitor progress towards ‘Communities and Places’, for example, but are not easily interconnected in the framework. In contrast to outcomes, a cross-outcome use of indicators is proposed for hotspot monitoring. An example of a cross-cutting indicator approach to M&E is the National Wellbeing Framework for Wales, in which each indicator is relevant to more than one outcome (Welsh Government, 2022b).

Secondly, this framework is designed with in-built stakeholder engagement and qualitative analysis as two fundamental tools for its effective use and delivery. Qualitative approaches are often deemed resource intensive and challenging to implement in practice. Their effectiveness also depends on diverse stakeholders with their own interests and agendas. Emphasis on the role of qualitative approaches also partially moves away from many M&E frameworks that focus predominantly on monitoring quantitative indicator trends over time. Innovation into policy tools and approaches to engage in this feasibly and effectively is a recommendation for the Scottish Government going forward.

Constrained resources for this project resulted in the prioritisation of conceptualisation, outcome and indicator development for monitoring, with less attention to mechanism identification and evaluation proposals. The mechanisms are a key dimension of a full ToC and are important to support evaluation of why a JT is happening, and what actions have driven change (e.g., Drabble et al. 2024, p.42). They allow for “a deeper understanding of what is necessary, and what must be avoided for a ToC to successfully achieve its impact” (Dhillon and Vaca, 2018, p.70). It is recommended that the Scottish Government elaborate on the mechanisms presented by Drabble et al. (2024) to subsequently explore effective and feasible ways for mechanism monitoring. This will also enable more comprehensive evaluations of JT progress.

Finally, the framework has not been ‘tested’ in practice. While indicators have been researched, identified and in some cases, developed, a baseline of data collection has not been undertaken. This report recommends that the Scottish Government collate data across outcome indicators alongside example hotspots such as Aberdeen City or the Shetland Islands. In doing so, it is anticipated that some indicators may evolve, others may be removed and new ones added. This will enable refining of the outcomes and hotspots approach.

Reflections on the temporal nature of (just) transitions

The net zero and climate adaptation transitions, alongside climate change impacts themselves, are by nature fluid, uncertain, and spread over time. Plans such as SNAP3 (2024) and the CCP (2026) set out long term goals to 2045, in keeping with Scotland’s target to reach net zero emissions. This is also reflected in Drabble et al.’s (2024) conceptualisation of a JT ToC for Scotland.

The groups and locations vulnerable to climate change impacts and affected by transition risks and opportunities will change over time. In the case of hotspots, new locations will become focal sites of transition over the next 20 years. The long-term, live and uncertain nature of the transition has implications for any effort towards JT M&E. This requires that the framework be kept live as new issues emerge and new data becomes available. In addition, identifying and defining when sites of transition become hotspots and when their transitions ‘start’ and ‘end’, will be an important consideration for the effective implementation of this framework.

It is recommended that places identified as ‘hotspots’ with known imminent transitions (such as the closure of the Mossmorran chemical plant in Fife (e.g., BBC, 2026)) or those with transitions already underway are monitored as early on as possible. In the case of anticipated hotspots, this becomes a more challenging question relating to pre-empting transitions and the implications of doing so, given that there is no clear cut, pre-determined list of sites of decline or opportunity. Further research into anticipatory policymaking, risk mitigation and future-facing M&E could inform decision-making in this arena.

Reflections on defining the scope of JT

It is also worth reflecting on learnings from this project’s efforts to develop an M&E framework for a JT. Understandings of a JT vary widely. For the development of this M&E framework, this project has understood a JT to be the just-ness of the process and outcomes of the transition in response to climate change through ‘net zero’ and ‘climate adaptation’ in Scotland. Even within these boundaries, issues of JT concern are wide-ranging and incredibly complex. They are also not always comfortably attributable to climate change impacts nor transition actions alone. Instead, they are interwoven with broader local, national and global political, economic and ecological networks, changes and shocks.

The value of tools such as M&E frameworks for a JT should be understood in the messy context of delimiting the scope of JT. Although M&E frameworks will struggle to capture every single aspect and lived experience relating to a JT, they can inform policymaker and societal understanding. They can provide insight into the ways in which the net zero transition and climate adaptation are unfolding and their just-ness. They can also inform interventions and importantly, hold actors in roles of influence and responsibility to account, including the Scottish Government.

Conclusion and recommendations

This project has developed an M&E framework for a JT to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland. The proposed framework supports monitoring of a JT for Scotland as a whole, while integrating attention to specific regions, places and to vulnerable and affected groups. The body of this framework is made up of quantitative indicators alongside recommendations for the development of qualitative indicators. It also integrates qualitative engagement, analysis and interpretation as necessary tools for effective JT M&E.

The proposed framework also builds in a place-based, hotspots monitoring approach. This recognises that specific places will be directly and significantly affected by processes of industrial change and net zero developments. Through the development of the hotspots approach, this framework also presents the future-facing potential of M&E in a JT context, to anticipate and inform transitions towards more just outcomes while mitigating risks (e.g., Santos Ayllón et al. 2025).

This framework is developed within severe constraints on data availability. It offers a step forward towards what is pragmatically possible now. The Scottish Government should keep the framework live and adaptable as the transition unfolds.

The next step is to test the proposed approach through data collection across outcome and hotspot indicators. This will assess how well the framework can be used in practice and its ability to capture JT concerns. In parallel, this report recommends that the Scottish Government develop a set of mechanisms and their monitoring along with approaches to JT evaluation. The identification and development of qualitative engagement tools and analytical approaches for risk mitigation, indicator interpretation and JT evaluation is also encouraged.

Based on stakeholder input and learnings throughout this project, the report closes with a set of key recommendations to Scottish Government for effective M&E of a JT in Scotland:

  • Start now: The urgency of understanding transition impacts is clearly felt by stakeholders and within government. The inclusion of JT indicators within the CCP (2026) recognises the centrality of a JT to climate action. In this vein, the Scottish Government should begin to systematically monitor, evaluate and report on progress towards a JT. Implementation of existing (albeit imperfect) frameworks and iterative learning is the next step.
  • Data collation and sharing avenues within and beyond government: Data collection and collation in databases, dashboards and reports is underway across teams and directorates in Scottish Government. There is an opportunity to develop cross-team mechanisms to collect and collate this data. There is also an opportunity to put the necessary infrastructure in place for data sharing by non-governmental actors (and to require this, where relevant) with the Scottish Government, to begin to fill data gaps.
  • Fill key data gaps with new data collection: Arguably, one of the most pressing data gaps relates to experiences and outcomes of the transitioning workforce in high-emitting sectors. Additional data gaps which require further research from a JT perspective include (i) land use change from natural capital projects, (ii) business vulnerability to climate change and net zero transitions, and (iii) vulnerability to climate impacts and access to adaptation solutions.
  • Governance, responsibilities and policy responsiveness: M&E frameworks in other areas of government (such as for SNAP3 (2024) or the Biodiversity Strategy (2024)) have developed governance structures for M&E delivery. It is recommended that the Scottish Government explore questions of JT governance and responsibility, including for JT M&E. This may increase attention and accountability of JT delivery. Relatedly, attention to what bounds JT interventions from a Scottish policy perspective can also support efforts towards governance and attribution analyses, alongside mechanism identification.
  • Trial anticipatory approaches to JT M&E: The Scottish Government can use M&E to support proactive JT planning in ways which mitigate risks and pursue opportunities for more just outcomes, particularly in place-specific contexts. The Scottish Government should also identify available tools for policy responsiveness to insights from anticipatory analyses and JT M&E across outcomes and hotspots more broadly.
  • Investigate qualitative tools and approaches for M&E: Despite the widespread use of quantitative data for M&E, this project has highlighted the key role of regular stakeholder input, qualitative data and analyses for effective JT M&E. Further development of qualitative engagement tools and analytical approaches is a key recommendation both for indicator monitoring, interpretation and JT evaluation. The implementation of a qualitative-strong JT M&E approach will also require the development and use of strategic analysis capabilities to interpret and evaluate progress towards a JT.
  • Use M&E to communicate about the JT and about the transition more broadly: There is value in using JT M&E as a tool for improved communication about climate change, climate action and the impacts of net zero and adaptation. This gains relevance in a political context that is shifting towards anti-climate change and net zero narratives. Monitoring JT indicators and communicating these in relation to net zero and climate adaptation (through dashboards, reports or other tools) is identified as a key avenue for dissemination.
  • Identify tools for data management and communication: The breadth and multi-dimensional nature of JT invite the development of digital visualisation tools. These might include websites or dashboards for ease of monitoring, reporting and broader communication purposes. It is also possible to use programmes like Excel to organise data and begin monitoring. This will enable framework implementation in the short-term with readily available tools. It is recommended that transparent internal and external reporting is prioritised.

References

Adindu, A., (2010) ‘Effective Monitoring and Evaluation of Primary Health Care Interventions Requires Participatory Approach,’ Journal of Advancement in Medical and Pharmaceutical Sciences, 4(1), pp. 93-97. Available at: (PDF) Effective Monitoring and Evaluation of Primary Health Care Interventions Requires Participatory Approach

BBC, (2026) ‘Mossmorran stops production after 40 years with jobs at risk,’ BBC News, 3 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/articles/cvg1jv77vy8o

Bergseng, A. M., (2023) ‘Monitoring and evaluation of a just transition in Scotland – summary report on international lessons,’ ClimateXChange, April, [online]. Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2024/12/CXC-Monitoring-and-evaluation-of-a-just-transition-in-Scotland-%E2%80%93-Summary-report-on-international-lessons.pdf

Bird, M., Büker, P., Keim, M., Treadwell, K., (2024) ‘Assessment Tool for Just Energy Transition Plans: Support for policymakers, stakeholders, and practitioners,’ Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit, Just Energy Transition for Coal Regions Knowledge Hub. Available at: https://www.jetknowledge.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/IKI-JET-Assessment-Tool-for-Just-Energy-Transition-Plans.pdf

Bouzarovski, S., Simcock, N., (2017), ‘Spatializing energy justice’, Energy Policy, 107, pp. 640-648. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0301421517302185

Brunt, A., Spooner, D., (1998) ‘The development of wind power in Denmark and the UK’ Energy & Environment, 9(2), pp. 279-296. Available at: https://www.jstor.org/stable/44397481

Cambridge dictionary (n.d.) ‘Evaluation meaning’, Cambridge dictionary, [online]. Available at: EVALUATION | English meaning – Cambridge Dictionary https://dictionary.cambridge.org/dictionary/english/evaluation

ClimateJust, (n.d.) Climate Just Map Tool, [online]. Available at: https://www.climatejust.org.uk/map.html

Climate Change Committee (CCC) (2021), ‘Summary for Scotland (CCRA3-IA),’ UK Climate Risk, 16 June, [online]. Available at: https://www.ukclimaterisk.org/publications/summary-forscotland-ccra3-ia/

Crown Estate Scotland, (n.d.) ‘Scotwind leasing round’, [online]. Available at: https://www.crownestatescotland.com/scotlands-property/offshore-wind/scotwind-leasing-round

Department of Health and Social Care, (n.d.) ‘Public Health Outcomes Framework’, [online]. Available at: https://fingertips.phe.org.uk/profile/public-health-outcomes-framework/data#page/0/gid/1000043/pat/15/par/E92000001/ati/6/are/E12000004/yrr/1/cid/4/tbm/1/page-options/car-do-0

Dhillon, L., Vaca, S., (2018) ‘Refining Theories of Change,’ Journal of Multidisciplinary Evaluation, 14(30). Available at: https://jmde.com/index.php/jmde_1/article/view/496/444

Edwards, R., Dobson, P., (2022) ‘The ‘rogues’ gallery’: Scotland’s top 20 climate polluters’, The Ferret, 17 April, [online]. Available at: The ‘rogues’ gallery’: Scotland’s top 20 climate polluters

Elstub, S., Escobar, O., Henderson, A., Thorne, T., Bland, N. & Bowes, E., (2022), ‘Research Report on the Citizens’ Assembly of Scotland’, Scottish Government Social Research, [online]. Available: https://www.gov.scot/isbn/9781802018943

Estrella, M., Gaventa, J., (1998) ‘Who counts reality? Participatory monitoring and evaluation: a literature review’. IDS working paper 70. Available at: https://opendocs.ids.ac.uk/articles/report/Who_Counts_Reality_Participatory_Monitoring_and_Evaluation_A_Literature_Review/26442646/1/files/48090631.pdf

Equitable Energy, (2025) ‘Social value from renewables in the Highlands and Islands,’ Platform, May, [online]. Available at: https://platformlondon.org/app/uploads/2025/05/Social-Value-from-Renewables-EER-280525.pdf

Farrell, C., (2012) ‘A just transition: lessons learned from the environmental justice movement’, Duke Forum for Law and Social Change, 4 (45), pp. 45–63. Available at: https://scholarship.law.duke.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi?article=1026&context=dflsc

Healy, N., Stephens, J. C., Malin, S. A. (2019) ‘Embodied energy injustices: Unveiling and politicizing the transboundary harms of fossil fuel extractivism and fossil fuel supply chains,’ Energy Research and Social Science, 48, pp. 219–234. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.erss.2018.09.016

Heyen, D. A., Beznea, A., Hünecke, K., Williams, R., (2021), ‘Measuring a Just Transition in the EU in the context of the 8th Environment Action Programme – An assessment of existing indicators and gaps at the socio-environmental nexus, with suggestions for the way forward,’ Oko-Insititute, e.V., Trinomics. March, [online]. Available at: JustTransition_Indicator_Paper_final_clean-2021.pdf

HM Treasury, (2026) ‘The Green Book. UK Government Guidance on Appraisal’, UK Government, [online]. Available at: The Green Book – UK government guidance on appraisal

HM Treasury, (2020) Magenta Book. Central Government guidance on evaluation, March, [online], Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/5e96cab9d3bf7f412b2264b1/HMT_Magenta_Book.pdf

Htitich, M., Krylová, P., Harmáček, J., (2024) ‘Just Transition Score: Measuring the relative sustainability of social progress,’ Environmental and Sustainability Indicators, 23(100440). Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indic.2024.100440

Initiative for Climate Action Transparency (ICAT), (2024) ‘Tracking Progress Towards a Just Transition A monitoring, evaluation and learning framework to guide justice-oriented, socially owned transition tracking in South Africa,’ Initiative for Climate Action Transparency, April, [online]. Available at: https://climateactiontransparency.org/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/D8.-JT-MEL-Framework-final.pdf

Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services (IPBES), (2025), The IPBES Thematic Assessment Report on the Underlying Causes of Biodiversity Loss and the Determinants of Transformative Change and Options for Achieving The 2050 Vision for Biodiversity (Transformative Change Assessment), [online]. Available for download at: https://www.ipbes.net/transformative-change-assessment

International Labour Organization, (2015), Guidelines for a just transition towards environmentally sustainable economies and societies for all, International Labour Organisation. Available at: https://www.ilo.org/sites/default/files/wcmsp5/groups/public/@ed_emp/@emp_ent/documents/publication/wcms_432859.pdf

Jenkins, K., Drabble, D., Copeland, R., (2025) ‘Assessing the low carbon transition at Grangemouth 2025 A case study for measuring fairness,’ Just Transition Commission, [online]. Available at: https://www.justtransition.scot/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/Assessing-the-low-carbon-transition-at-Grangemouth-A-case-study-for-measuring-fairness.pdf

Jenkins, K., McCauley, D., Heffron, R., Stephan, H., Rehner, R., (2016) ‘Energy justice: A conceptual review,’ Energy Research & Social Science, 11, pp. 174-182. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S2214629615300669

Just Transition Commission, (2026a) ‘No Time to Lose Final report of Scotland’s second Just Transition Commission 2022-26,’ Just Transition Commission, 19 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.justtransition.scot/publication/no-time-to-lose-final-report-of-the-2nd-just-transition-commission-2026/

Just Transition Commission, (2026b) ‘Letter to Cabinet Secretary – Developing the Just Transition approach in the draft Climate Change Plan,’ Just Transition Commission, 9 January, [online]. Available at: https://www.justtransition.scot/publication/letter-to-cabinet-secretary-developing-the-just-transition-approach-in-the-draft-climate-change-plan/

Just Transition Commission, (2025a) ‘A Just Transition for Dumfries and Galloway’, 25 March, [online]. Available at: A Just Transition for Dumfries and Galloway – Just Transition Commission

Just Transition Commission, (2025b) ‘A Just Transition for Aberdeen and the North East’, 22 May, [online]. Available at: A Just Transition for Aberdeen and the North East – Just Transition Commission

Just Transition Commission, (2024) ‘Conditions for Success: Annual Report 2024’, 12 December, [online]. Available at: Conditions for Success: Annual Report 2024 – Just Transition Commission

Kaljonen, M., Paloviita, A., Huttunen, S., Kortetmäki, T., (2024) ‘Policy mixes for just transitions: A holistic evaluation framework,’ Environmental Innovation and Societal Transitions, 52(100885). Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.eist.2024.100885

Kalt, T., Simon, J., Tunn, J., Hennig, J. (2023) ‘Between green extractivism and energy justice: competing strategies in South Africa’s hydrogen transition in the context of climate crisis’, Review of African Political Economy, 50(177-178), pp. 302–321. Available at: https://www.jstor.org/stable/48814433

Kelly, J. A., Deegan, C., Collins, A., Milimu, A., Kelleher, L., Farrugia Y., (2025) ‘Just Transition Indicator Framework for Ireland’, Environmental Protection Agency, [online]. Available at: https://www.epa.ie/publications/research/epa-research-2030-reports/Evidence-Synthesis-Report-6.pdf

Kelly, J. A., Clinch, P., Kelleher, L., Shahab, S., (2020) ‘Enabling a just transition: A composite indicator for assessing home-heating energy-poverty risk and the impact of environmental policy measures,’ Energy Policy, 146(111791). Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enpol.2020.111791

Lacey-Barnacle, M., Bird, C. M., (2018) ‘Intermediating energy justice? The role of intermediaries in the civic energy sector in a time of austerity,’ Applied Energy, 226, pp. 71-81. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apenergy.2018.05.088

Lázaro Touza, L., Biones, A., Tirado Sarti, S., Averchenkova, A., López Gunn, E., Escribano, G., (2025) ‘From phasing-out to phasing-in: lessons from Spain’s just transition governance framework,’ Elcano Royal Institute, 27 February, ARI 30/2025, [online]. Available at: https://media.realinstitutoelcano.org/wp-content/uploads/2025/02/ari30-2025-lazaro-et-al-lessons-from-spains-just-transition-governance-framework.pdf

Marine Scotland (2020), ‘Oil and gas sector and infrastructure,’ Scottish Marine Assessment, December, [online]. Available at: https://marine.gov.scot/sma/assessment/oil-and-gas-sector-and-infrastructure

Mayer, A., (2018) ‘A just transition for coal miners? Community identity and support from local policy actors,’ Environmental Innovation and Societal Transitions, 28, pp. 1-13. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S2210422417302459

McCauley, D., Pettigrew, K.A., Heffron, R. J., Droubi, S., (2023) ‘Identifying, improving, and investing in national commitments to just transition: Reflections from Latin America and the Caribbean,’ Environmental and Sustainability Indicators, 17(100225). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2665972723000028?via%3Dihub

McMorran, R., Reed, M. S., Glass, J., Bauer, A., Glendinning, J., Macaulay, B., McKee, A., Peskett, L., Rothenberg, L., Rudman, H., Williams, A., (2022), ‘Large-scale land acquisition for carbon: opportunities and risks A SEFARI Special Advisory Group’, SEFARI, Scotland’s Rural College, [online]. Available at: https://sefari.scot/sites/default/files/documents/Final%20report%20v2.pdf

Mejía-Montero, A. (2025) ‘From “just” energy to energy justice? Imaginaries of fair wind power in the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, Mexico’, World Development, 195, p. 107135, pp. 1-11.

Merrell, I., Wheatley, H., Pate, L., Glendinning, J., and MacKessack-Leitch, J. (2025) ‘Rural Land Market Insights Report 2025’, Scottish Land Commission, [online]. Available at: https://www.landcommission.gov.scot/downloads/684fe32f5ede6_SLC-2025-Insights.pdf

Minadakis, P.,Vega-Araújo, J. (2024) ‘Rethinking the social license to operate? A theoretical exploration of its synergies with social acceptance and energy justice for a just transition,’ Energy Research & Social Science, 113(103552), pp. 1-11. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S2214629624001439

Morrissey, J., (2023) ‘Coastal communities, blue economy and the climate crisis: Framing just disruptions,’ The Geographical Journal, 189(2), pp. 283-299. Available at: https://rgs-ibg.onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/geoj.12419

NatureScot (n.d.) ‘Peatland ACTION – Data mapping portal,’ [online]. Available at: https://www.nature.scot/climate-change/nature-based-solutions/nature-based-solutions-practice/peatland-action/peatland-action-data-research-and-monitoring/peatland-action-0

NatureScot, (2025) ‘NatureScot Research Report 1361 – SPANS Scotland’s People and Nature Survey 2023/24 – connection to nature,’ [online]. Available at: https://www.nature.scot/doc/naturescot-research-report-1361-spans-scotlands-people-and-nature-survey-202324-connection-nature

North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) (n.d.) ‘Interactive maps and dashboards,’ North Sea Transition Authority, [online]. Available at: https://www.nstauthority.co.uk/data-and-insights/insights-and-analysis/maps-and-dashboards/ (NB: Decommissioning data by well can be found under the dashboard heading ‘Power BI’).

Office for National Statistics (ONS) (2026) ‘UK SIC 2026 revision process’, 11 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.ons.gov.uk/methodology/classificationsandstandards/ukstandardindustrialclassificationofeconomicactivities/uksic2026revisionprocess

Oliver, D., Solis, E., Lloyd, K., Heron, S., Lynn S., (2025) ‘Exploring a potential approach to understand and map the local level impacts and opportunities of a Just Transition to Net Zero’. Cardiff: Welsh Government, GSR report number 15/2025. 7 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.wales/understanding-just-transition-approach

Poverty and Inequality Commission, (2023) ‘Learning from the Commission’s Experts by Experience Panel’, 22 December, [online]. Available at: https://povertyinequality.scot/publication/learning-from-the-commissions-experts-by-experience-panel/

Raymond, C. M., Stedman, R., Frantzeskaki, N., (2023) ‘The role of nature-based solutions and senses of place in enabling just city transitions,’ Environmental Science & Policy, 114, pp. 10-19. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1462901123000540

Rodhouse, T.S.G.H., Cuppen, E., Correljé, A., Pesch, U., (2024) ‘A new carrier for old assumptions? Imagined publics and their justice implications for hydrogen development in the Netherlands’, Technological Forecasting & Social Change, 204, pp. 1–13. Available at: https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=4044540

Roser, D., Seidel, C., (2016) ‘Climate Justice: An Introduction,’ Oxon, UK: Routledge. E-book available online at: https://doi.org/10.4324/9781315617961

Santos Ayllón, L. M., Jenkins, K. E. H., (2023) ‘Energy justice, Just Transitions and Scottish energy policy: A re-grounding of theory in policy practice,’ Energy Research & Social Science, 96(102922). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S221462962200425X

Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) (n.d.) ‘Scottish Pollutant Release Inventory,’ [online]. Available at: https://beta.sepa.scot/topics/environmental-data-and-reporting/spri/

Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA), (2025) ‘National Flood Risk Assessment 2025. Understanding Current and Future Flood Risk in a Changing Climate’, December, [online]. Available at: https://beta.sepa.scot/media/2kliy0j5/national-flood-risk-assessment-2025.pdf

Scottish Forestry, (2025) ‘Permissions for woodland creation,’ 22 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.forestry.gov.scot/do-i-need-consent-plant-woodlands

Scottish Government, (n.d.) ‘National Performance Framework’, [online]. Available at: [ARCHIVED CONTENT] National Performance Framework | National Performance Framework

Scottish Government, (2026a) ‘Scotland’s Climate Change Plan: 2026-2040. Annex 1 – Supporting Content’, 24 March, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-climate-change-plan-2026-2040-annexes/documents/

Scottish Government, (2026b) ‘Scotland’s Climate Change Plan: 2026-2040’, 24 March, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-climate-change-plan-2026-2040-annexes/documents/

Scottish Government, (2026c), ‘Just Transition Fund for the North East and Moray: applicant guidance 2026 to 2027’, 2 March, [online]. Available at: Commercial and public sector projects – Just Transition Fund for the North East and Moray: applicant guidance 2026 to 2027 – gov.scot

Scottish Government, (2026d) ‘A Circular Economy Strategy for Scotland – Appendix 2 – Circular Economy Indicators list including definitions and data sources’, 24 March, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/circular-economy-strategy-scotland/documents/

Scottish Government, (2026e) ‘Scotland’s Climate Change Plan: 2026-2040 Annex 3 – Monitoring and Analytical Annex’, 24 March, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-climate-change-plan-2026-2040-annexes/documents/

Scottish Government, (2025a) ‘Just Transition: draft plan for transport in Scotland’, 24 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/transition-draft-transition-plan-transport-scotland/documents/

Scottish Government, (2025b) ‘Supporting Scotland’s transition – land use and agriculture: consultation’, 6 August, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/supporting-scotlands-transition-land-use-agriculture-consultation/documents/

Scottish Government, (2025c) ‘Grangemouth Industrial – just transition plan: supporting a fair transition for Scotland’s core manufacturing cluster,’ 18 June, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/grangemouth-industrial-transition-plan-supporting-fair-transition-scotlands-core-manufacturing-cluster/documents/

Scottish Government (2025d) ‘Scotland’s Draft Climate Change Plan: 2026–2040,’ November, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2025/11/scotlands-climate-change-plan-2026-2040/documents/scotlands-draft-climate-change-plan-20262040/scotlands-draft-climate-change-plan-20262040/govscot%3Adocument/scotlands-draft-climate-change-plan-20262040.pdf

Scottish Government, (2025e) ‘The Environment Strategy for Scotland

Consultation Draft’, July, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2025/07/draft-environment-strategy/documents/environment-strategy-scotland-consultation-draft/environment-strategy-scotland-consultation-draft/govscot%3Adocument/environment-strategy-scotland-consultation-draft.pdf

Scottish Government (2025f) ‘FM: “Fair transition to net zero vital for Scotland’s economy”’ 29 October, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/news/fm-fair-transition-to-net-zero-vital-for-scotlands-economy/

Scottish Government (2025g) ‘Businesses in Scotland: 2025,’ 3 December, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/businesses-in-scotland-2025/

Scottish Government (2025h) ‘Scotland’s Carbon Footprint 1998-2021,’ 8 April, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-carbon-footprint-1998-2021/pages/what-is-scotlands-carbon-footprint/

Scottish Government, (2025i) ‘Scotland’s Draft Climate Change Plan: 2026–2040 Annex 2 – Sectoral Annexes’, November, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2025/11/scotlands-climate-change-plan-2026-2040/documents/scotlands-draft-climate-change-plan-20262040-annex-2-sectoral-annexes/scotlands-draft-climate-change-plan-20262040-annex-2-sectoral-annexes/govscot%3Adocument/scotlands-draft-climate-change-plan-20262040-annex-2-sectoral-annexes.pdf

Scottish Government, (2024a) Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024-2029: Monitoring and Evaluation Framework’, September, [online]. Available at: SNAP3 Monitoring and Evaluation Framework

Scottish Government, (2024b) ‘Biodiversity strategy and delivery plan: governance, monitoring and evaluation’, 27 November, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/biodiversity-strategy-delivery-plan-sbs-governance-monitoring-evaluation/

Scottish Government, (2024c) ‘Green Industrial Strategy’, 11 September, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/green-industrial-strategy/documents/

Scottish Government, (2024d), ‘Scottish Government Urban Rural Classification 2022,’ 16 December, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-government-urban-rural-classification-2022/pages/overview/

Scottish Government, (2023) ‘Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan – delivering a fair and secure zero carbon energy system for Scotland’, 10 January, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/draft-energy-strategy-transition-plan/documents/

Scottish Government, (2022) ‘Scotland’s National Strategy for Economic Transformation’, 1 March, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-national-strategy-economic-transformation/documents/

Scottish Government, (2021a) ‘Just Transition – A Fairer, Greener Scotland: Scottish Government response’ 7 September, [online]. Available at: Just Transition – A Fairer, Greener Scotland: Scottish Government response – gov.scot

Scottish Government, (2021b) ‘Climate change – Net Zero Nation: public engagement strategy’, 16 September, [online]. https://www.gov.scot/publications/net-zero-nation-public-engagement-strategy-climate-change/

Scottish Government, (2020) ‘The Environment Strategy for Scotland: vision and outcomes’, 25 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/environment-strategy-scotland-vision-outcomes/documents/

Scottish Government, (2016) ‘Fairer Scotland Action Plan’, 5 October, [online]. https://www.gov.scot/publications/fairer-scotland-action-plan/pages/6/

Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD) (2020) Scottish Index of multiple Deprivation, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/collections/scottish-index-of-multiple-deprivation-2020/

Scottish Parliament, (2019) ‘Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019’, [online]. Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/asp/2019/15

Shapovalova, D., Potts, T., Bone, J., Bender, K. A., (2023) ‘Measuring Just Transition: Indicators and scenarios for a Just Transition in Aberdeen and Aberdeenshire,’ Just Transition Lab, University of Aberdeen, October, [online]. Available at: https://www.abdn.ac.uk/media/site/geosciences/documents/Report_Measuring_JT_Aberdeen_and_Aberdeenshire.pdf

Shejale, S., Xinyu Zhan, M., Sahakian, M., Aleksieva, R., Biresselioglu, M. E., Bogdanova, V., Cardone, B., Epp, J., Kirchler, B., Kollmann, A., Liste, L., Massullo, C., Schibel, K-L. (2025) Participation as a pathway to procedural justice: A review of energy initiatives across eight European countries,’ Energy Research & Social Science, 122 (103982).Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.erss.2025.103982

Shen, W., Srivastava, S., Yang, L., Jain, K., & Schröder, P. (2020). Understanding the impacts of outdoor air pollution on social inequality: advancing a just transition framework. Local Environment25(1), pp. 1–17. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1080/13549839.2019.1687431

Simeone, L., Drabble, D., Morelli, N., de Götzen, A., (eds.), 2023 Strategic Thinking, Design and the Theory of Change. Edward Elgar Publishing. Accessed online.

Skills Development Scotland, (2021) ‘Climate Emergency Skills Action Plan 2020-2025’, [online]. Available at: https://www.skillsdevelopmentscotland.co.uk/media/w0ulewun/climate-emergency-skills-action-plan-2020-2025.pdf

Smith, K., (2011) ‘The Danish wind industry 1980–2010: Lessons for the British marine energy industry,’ Underwater Technology, 30(1). Available at: https://doi.org/10.3723/ut.30.027

Spanish Government (n.d.), ‘Plan estratégico de Actuación del Instituto para la Transición Justa, O.A. 2024-2026’, Ministry for the Ecological Transition and the Demographic Challenge, [online]. Available at: https://www.transicionjusta.gob.es/content/dam/itj/files-1/Documents/Plan%20de%20actuacion%20ITJ%202024-2026.pdf

Spanish Government, (2023), ‘Spain, 4 years towards a just energy transition,’ Ministry for the Ecological Transition and the Demographic Challenge, May, [online]. Available at: https://www.transicionjusta.gob.es/content/dam/itj/files-1/Documents/Publicaciones%20ES%20y%20EN/Spain_4%20years%20towards%20a%20just%20energy%20transition.pdf

Spanish Government, (2020) ‘Just Transition Strategy’, Ministry for the Ecological Transition and the Demographic Challenge, [online]. Available at: https://www.miteco.gob.es/content/dam/miteco/es/ministerio/planes-estrategias/transicion-justa/Just%20Transition%20Strategy_ENG.pdf

Stanley, T., Hirons, M., Turnbull, J., Lorimer, J., Mensah Kumeh, E., Hafferty, C., May Anderson, L., McDermott, C., (2025) ‘Just nature recovery: A framework for centring multispecies and multi-dimensional justice in land management’, environmental Science & Policy, 164(103992). Available at: Just nature recovery: A framework for centring multispecies and multi-dimensional justice in land management – ScienceDirect

Stilgoe, J., Owen, R., Macnaghten, P., (2013) ‘Developing a framework for responsible innovation,’ Research Policy, 42(9) pp. 1568-1580. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.respol.2013.05.008

Sun, L., Liu, X., Hu, Z., Zhang, J., Ducruet, C., Zhang, W., (2024) ‘Does just transition increase social and environmental risks? Evidence from global port cities development,’ Environmental Impact Assessment Review, 105(107370). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0195925523003360

SYSTRA (2023a) ‘Proposed just transition baseline variables: built environment and construction sector,’ ClimateXChange, November, [online] Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2024/12/CXC-Proposed-just-transition-baseline-variables-built-environment-and-construction-sector-November-2023.pdf

SYSTRA (2023b) ‘Proposed just transition baseline variables: energy sector,’ ClimateXChange, November, [online] Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2024/12/CXC-Proposed-just-transition-baseline-variables-energy-sector-November-2023.pdf

SYSTRA (2023b) ‘Proposed just transition baseline variables: transport sector,’ ClimateXChange, November, [online] Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2024/12/CXC-Proposed-just-transition-baseline-variables-transport-sector-November-2023.pdf

Tafon, R., Saunders, F., Pikner, T., Gilek, M., (2023) ‘Multispecies blue justice and energy transition conflict: examining challenges and possibilities for synergy between low‑carbon energy and justice for humans and nonhuman nature,’ Maritime Studies, 22(45). Available at: https://doi.org/10.1007/s40152-023-00336-y

Tarfa, P., Bappa, B., Ogunleye, J., Igwebuike, S., Agbo, C., Otobo, O., Nwordu, M., Msheilla, H., (2024) ‘The Nigeria Just and Gender Inclusive Transition (JGIT) Monitoring, Reporting and Verification (MRV) Framework Report’, Initiative for Climate Action Transparency, June, [online]. Available at: https://climateactiontransparency.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/Deliverable-4b.-Final-JGIT-MRV-Report.docx.pdf

Transition Plan Taskforce (2024) ‘Putting People at the Heart of Transition Plans: key steps and metrics for issuers. An advisory paper from the TPT’s Just Transition Working Group,’ April, [online]. Available at: https://itpn.global/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/Just-Transition-1.pdf

Transport Scotland, (2024) ‘Monitoring and Evaluation Report 2024 – National Transport Strategy’, 19 December, [online]. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/monitoring-and-evaluation-report-2024-national-transport-strategy/

Transport Scotland, (2021) ‘Monitoring and Evaluation Strategy – August 2021 – National Transport Strategy’, 26 August, [online]. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/monitoring-and-evaluation-strategy-august-2021-national-transport-strategy/

Transport Scotland, (2022) ‘Monitoring and Evaluation 2019 Baseline Report – May 2022 – National Transport Strategy (NTS2)’, 8 June, [online]. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/monitoring-and-evaluation-2019-baseline-report-may-2022-national-transport-strategy-nts2/

Transport Scotland, (2020) ‘National Transport Strategy 2’, 5 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/national-transport-strategy-2/

Trueworthy, A., McCarrel, A., Wieliczkiewicz, J., Cellan, S., Peterson, W., Anderson, S., DuPont, B., Grear, M., (2024) ‘Who will be making wave energy? A community-driven design approach toward just and sustainable energy futures in Alaska’, Energy Research & Social Science. 115, pp.1–18. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.erss.2024.103615

Tschakert, P., Schlosberg, D., Celermajer, D., Rickards, L., Winter, C., Thaler, M., Stewart-Harawira, M., Verlie, B., (2020) ‘Multispecies justice: Climate-just futures with, for and beyond humans,’ WIREs Climate Change, 12(2). Available at: Multispecies justice: Climate‐just futures with, for and beyond humans – Tschakert – 2021 – WIREs Climate Change – Wiley Online Library

UK Government, (n.d.), ‘Renewable Energy Planning Database,’ 1 July, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/renewable-energy-planning-database-monthly-extract

UK Government, (2026) ‘UK territorial greenhouse gas emissions statistics,’ 5 February, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/uk-territorial-greenhouse-gas-emissions-statistics

United Nations, (n.d.) ‘The 17 Goals’, department of Economic and Social Affairs. Available at: THE 17 GOALS | Sustainable Development

Van Uffelen, N., Taebi, B., Pesch, U., (2024) ‘Revisiting the energy justice framework: Doing justice to normative uncertainties’, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 189, Part A, 113974. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1364032123008328

van Vugt, J., de Ruiter, A., Henning, C., (2025), ‘Where to aim with multispecies climate justice? A critical realist account’, Environmental Politics. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1080/09644016.2025.2582121

Venture Taranaki (2020) Metrics and Evaluation. Transition Pathway Action Plan’, August, [online]. Available at: https://www.taranaki.co.nz/assets/Uploads/Like-No-Other/Metrics-TPAP-FINAL.pdf

Voar, (2024a) ‘A Just Transition for Shetland’, 24 September, [online]. Available at: https://www.justtransition.scot/wp-content/uploads/2024/09/Shetland-Community-Benefit-and-the-Energy-Transition-VOAR-Research-Accessible-Web-Version.pdf

Walsh, D., McCartney, G., Collins, c., Taulbut, M., Batty, G.D., (2016), ‘History, politics and vulnerability: explaining excess mortality in Scotland and Glasgow,’ Glasgow Centre for Population Health, May, [online]. Available at: https://www.gcph.co.uk/assets/000/000/367/Excess_mortality_final_report_with_appendices_original.pdf?1700036406

Welsh Government, (2022a), ‘Well-being of future generations: national indicators and milestones for Wales 2022 infographic’, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.wales/sites/default/files/publications/2024-05/well-being-future-generations-national-indicators-2022-infographic.pdf

Welsh Government, (2022b), ‘Wellbeing of Wales: national indicators,’ 29 September, [online]. Available at: https://www.gov.wales/wellbeing-wales-national-indicators

World Benchmarking Alliance, (2025) Just Transition Methodology, February [online]. Available at: https://assets.worldbenchmarkingalliance.org/app/uploads/2025/02/Just-transition-methodology-2025_FINAL.pdf

World Wildlife Fund, (n.d.) ‘Territorial Just Transition Plan Scorecard Assessment’, World Wildlife Fund, [online]. Available at: https://www.wwf.eu/?9036866/Territorial-Just-Transition-Plan-Scorecard-Assessment

Appendices

  1. Methods – Stakeholder engagement

The following tables detail (1) engagement with external (non-core Scottish Government) stakeholders through semi-structured and unstructured interviews and informal exchanges; (2) a list of workshop participants and (3) a descriptive list of areas across government that have engaged with and supported this work. Varying levels of detail on stakeholders reflect participant consents.

External stakeholders and public bodies

Method

NatureScot

Semi-structured interview

Poverty Alliance

Semi-structured interview

Scottish Trade Union Congress (STUC)

Semi-structured interview

Scottish Crofting Federation

Semi-structured interview

Community Land Scotland (shared project with Scottish Land Commission)

Unstructured interview

Just Transition Commission Secretariat

Unstructured interview

PhD researcher – qualitative framework development

Unstructured interview

Regional Inshore Fisheries Group

Unstructured interview

Sustainability impact consultant

Unstructured interview

Sustainability impact consultant

Unstructured interview

Scottish Climate Intelligence Service

Meeting and email exchange

Skills Development Scotland

Meeting and email exchange

Public Health Scotland

Meetings and written feedback

Academia – Just Transition M&E researchers

Meeting

IUCN UK Peatland Programme

Email exchanges

Scottish Environmental Protection Agency

Email exchanges

Table 1 (Appendix A): External stakeholder engagement list (by method and in alphabetical order)

Role

Organisation (in alphabetical order)

Environmental Projects Coordinator

CEMVO Scotland

ClimateXChange project lead

ClimateXChange

Culture/SHIFT programme manager

Culture for Climate Scotland

Director of Curriculum for STEM and Construction

Forth Valley College

Researcher

Heriot-Watt University

Just Transition Commissioner, Scotland Director for Business in the Community

Just Transition Commission

Secretary

Just Transition Partnership

Just Transition Communities Project Manager (Project & Practice Lead)

NESCAN – Just Transition Communities Project

Information Consultant, Climate Analyst Team

Public Health Scotland

Principal Information Analyst, Climate Analyst Team

Public Health Scotland

Strategy Lead, Just Transition Unit

Scottish Government

Head of Net Zero Economy and Carbon Markets

Scottish Government

Senior Manager, Sustainability, SSEN Transmission; and member, Climate Emergency Response Group

SSEN Transmission; Climate Emergency Response Group

Coordinator, Aberdeen Just Transitions Lab

University of Aberdeen

Operations Coordinator

2050 Climate Group

Organisation

Workshop facilitator

University of Edinburgh

Research Fellow (Lara Santos Ayllón)

University of Edinburgh

Academic Project Lead (Kirsten Jenkins)

Scottish Government (Climate Change Analysis Unit)

Project representative (Emily Creamer)

Scottish Government (Just Transition Unit)

Project representative (Abi Whitefield-Stevens)

Table 2 (Appendix A): Workshop participants (17 November 2025)

Scottish government focus areas

Agricultural reform research, monitoring and evaluation

City and Region Growth Deals

Climate adaptation policy

Climate adaptation research

Community climate action

Energy transition

Fair Work Convention Secretariat

Flood resistance policy

Geospatial Analysis

Heat research and analysis

Industry Statistics

Inshore fisheries

Just Transition Unit

Land use strategy

Marine climate change and biodiversity policy

National Performance Framework

Natural capital markets policy

Offshore wind policy – fisheries coexistence

Peatland restoration delivery

Poverty and deprivation

Regional Partnerships

Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services (RESAS) – Environmental Analysis Unit

Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services (RESAS) – Rural communities research

Scottish Forestry – woodland creation

Transport Statistics

Table 3 (Appendix A): Scottish Government areas (in alphabetical order)

  1. Evidence review: JT M&E terminology

The following table provides an overview of key Scottish Government JT policies and JT M&E publications by the JTC. It illustrates areas of overlap and difference in the use of M&E terminology and categorisation.

Key JT policy/ reports

Owner

Four themes

Additional terminology/ categorisation used

National Just Transition Planning Framework

Scottish Government (2021)

N/A

Themes, outcomes

Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan

Scottish Government (2023)

X

Guiding principles, outcomes

Draft Transport Just Transition Plan

Scottish Government (2025)

X

Outcomes, bespoke stakeholder groups, action timeframes

Draft Land Use and Agriculture Just Transition Plan

Scottish Government (2025)

X

Outcomes, themes, objectives

Grangemouth Industrial Just Transition Plan

Scottish Government (2025)

X

Pillars, outcomes, levers

Measuring and Evaluating Success in the Scottish Just Transition

Drabble et al. (2024) (JTC)

X

Outcome clusters, proxy outcomes, ultimate aims, mechanisms, original outcomes

Assessing the low carbon transition at Grangemouth: A case study for measuring fairness

Jenkins et al. (2025) (JTC)

X

Outcome clusters, proxy outcomes, ultimate aims, mechanisms

Table 1 (Appendix B): Overview of key JT policies and M&E framework terminology and categorisation approaches

  1. Outcome Indicators – Quality assessment

This appendix provides a summary of each indicator, including target population, desired trend, data source and timeframe. It also provides a data quality assessment based on three key criteria: relevance, representativeness and data availability. These criteria were selected from SNAP3 (Scottish Government, 2024a) as the most relevant for this project. Each is categorised according to assessed indicator quality. They are colour coded red for low quality, amber for moderate quality and green for high quality. This is aligned with the approach in used in the SNAP3 M&E framework (2024a, p.35) and in the CCP (2026) (Scottish Government, 2026e). Table 1 below describes each quality assessment criterion and its rating. The table is amended from the CCP (2026).

Criterion

Description

Low

Moderate

High

Relevance

The indicator should relate clearly to the emissions source, climate resilience or just transition outcome it is designed to monitor

Minimal or indirect relationship to emissions reductions, climate adaptation or just transition

Some relationship to emissions reduction, climate adaptation or just transition but indirect or partial

Clear and direct relationship to the emissions pathway, climate adaptation or just transition outcome

Representativeness

The indicator should be directly relevant to key dimensions of the just transition outcome it is designed to monitor

The indicator doesn’t capture the key drivers of the expected emissions reduction, climate adaptation or just transition outcome

Represents some important drivers but not the full picture

Represents the key drivers of just transition, emissions change or climate adaptation

Data availability

Data should be regularly published, accessible and sufficiently robust

Data unavailable, restricted, irregular or highly uncertain

Data available but with limitations (lag, infrequent updates, quality caveats)

Data regularly published, accessible, and statistically robust

Table 1 (Appendix C): Criteria used to evaluate indicators (amended from the CCP (2026) (Scottish Government, 2026e).

Communities and Places 

CP1: Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence (i) the Scottish Government’s approach to delivering net zero, and (ii) local policy and planning decisions relating to net zero

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide and (ii) by demographic groups in People and Equity (the same assessment applies)
  • Data source: Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from autumn 2026)
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP1: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given it focuses directly on participation and policymaking in relation to net zero, which is key to a JT.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given its direct relevance to JT concerns through a focus on participation and influence over net zero policymaking at national and local scales. Breakdown by demographic groups also reflects considerations of recognition and existing socio-economic inequities in relation to participation opportunities. It does not provide insight into the felt experiences of participation opportunities, and interpretations and experiences of influencing policy may vary across survey respondents.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that it depends on the annual commissioning of the Scottish Climate Survey.

CP2: Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence net zero and climate adaptation developments happening in their local area.

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide and (ii) by demographic groups in People and Equity (the same assessment applies)
  • Data source: Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from autumn 2026)
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP2: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given its direct focus on engagement and influence over net zero and climate adaptation developments.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns given its direct attention to issues of participation and influence over net zero and climate adaptation projects at local scales. Breakdown by demographic groups also reflects considerations of recognition and existing socio-economic inequities in relation to participation opportunities. It does not provide insight into the felt experiences of project engagement processes (e.g., consultations) and could underrepresent harder to reach populations, who are also often underrepresented in formal engagement processes.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that it depends on the annual commissioning of the Scottish Climate Survey.

CP3: Number of community groups involved in climate action/sustainability activities, as recorded by the Climate Action Hubs (and case studies)

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide and (ii) including qualitative attention to groups across Local Authorities
  • Data source: Climate Action Hubs; qualitative – with community action stakeholders
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP3: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance due to its focus on community-led climate action and sustainability initiatives, which related directly to JT outcomes.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Community-led and grassroots climate action more broadly are strongly associated to community empowerment and participation in the transition, both key dimensions of JT. Climate Action Hubs data is not representative of all community-led climate action across Scotland and may also include sustainability initiatives not directly related to net zero or climate adaptation. Engagement with the Climate Action Hub team can provide additional qualitative nuance, including insight into where community-led action is/ is not taking place and why, capturing considerations of spatial justice. Engagement with broader sectoral stakeholders can complement this indicator to provide a broader view of activity in Scotland.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that membership data is already collected by the Climate Action Hubs.

CP4: Geographical coverage of regional adaptation collaborations [once full coverage, updates on implementation]

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide and (ii) by Local Authorities not covered by adaptation partnerships
  • Data source: Adaptation Scotland
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP4: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance due to its direct focus on climate adaptation and on partnership working for climate action.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Cross-institutional and cross-stakeholder partnership working has been identified as a key feature of JT. From an adaptation perspective, it captures a range of collaborations and their regional coverage. However, the data records Adaptation Scotland partnerships and may not capture all adaptation activity and collaborations within a region.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that data is collected directly from Adaptation Scotland. The data will not reflect all adaptation collaborations in Scotland.

CP5: The proportion of people reporting that changes to their local place due to net zero infrastructure and/or land use change have maintained or improved the quality of their local area.

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from autumn 2026)
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP5: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance due to its direct focus on the impacts of net zero infrastructure and land use change.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. It puts the focus on the local perceptions and implications of net zero developments to capture distributional issues of benefit and harm from net zero developments. The focus on ‘quality of their local area’ may be interpreted differently by respondents. It may also obscure issues relating to the processes by which developments happened.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that it depends on the annual commissioning of the Scottish Climate Survey.

CP6: Area of community owned assets (in hectares)

Indicator information:

CP6: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for relevance given that land ownership directly affects community participation in the transition. However, it does not directly focus on community ownership of assets relating to net zero or climate resilience.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Ownership and control over land enables direct access for communities to net zero opportunities, decision-making and benefits distribution. However, this indicator does not reflect the uses of community owned land nor the related impacts on stakeholders dependent on the land.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that it is regularly collected by Scottish Government.

CP7: Operational capacity of community and locally owned energy installations in Scotland. Include breakdown (i) by type of ownership (ii) by location and (iii) as a proportion of total renewable energy installed (that year/ overall).

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Energy Saving Trust
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP7: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that the monetary and non-monetary benefits of community owned energy are well known and directly relate to JT outcomes and net zero.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness because it captures the megawatts of installed capacity but does not provide evidence of the benefit of this to communities. It does not reflect differences in who can and cannot become involved in community ownership initiatives and thus is not representative of socio-economic inequalities. Data breakdowns by type of ownership, by location and as a proportion of total renewable energy installed can provide a more nuanced understanding in this direction. Stakeholder engagement with representative organisations could provide qualitative insight in relation to involved groups and complement this data.

Data availability

Moderate

Data are published on an annual basis as part of Energy Saving Trust ‘Community and Locally Owned Energy in Scotland’ report. The register is not compulsory so may not capture all projects.

CP8: Average value of community benefits committed from renewable energy projects commissioned in the last 36 months, where a community or developer form is attached to a project.

Indicator information:

CP8: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the focus on community benefits from renewable energy as a net zero development.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Community benefits payments are a recognised vehicle to distribute benefit locally and increase community wealth in response to implications of renewable energy developments (including, for example, landscape change, noise and economic opportunities). The indicator does not show the distribution of these benefits across Scotland nor within communities, nor how the funds are used.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that data is regularly collected by Local Energy Scotland. It is provided by developers, project owners and fund administrators on a voluntary basis, so the data may be incomplete.

CP9: Engagement experiences of the fishing sector with offshore energy developments

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Data not available. Recommended data collection: qualitative engagement with key stakeholder groups e.g., Regional Inshore Fisheries Group and existing forums.
  • Desired trend: Monitor, improving
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP9: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the expected impact of planned offshore energy developments (wind, tidal, wave) as part of the net zero transition.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Offshore energy developments create a recognised net zero pressure on the distribution of marine space. The fishing sector is facing cumulative pressures in part, because of the net zero transition. This indicator recommends qualitative engagement with sectoral stakeholders to understand transition dynamics between the offshore energy and fishing sector. This data will not be representative of experiences with every development underway in Scotland and may be highly variable.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability as this data is not currently collected. Stakeholder networks involving the Scottish Government through which to begin to collect this data are available.

CP10: Distribution of marine space across activities, including % available for fishing

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Data not available in monitorable format. Data available and regularly updated in map format by the Marine Directorate (NMPi)
  • Desired trend: Monitor, qualitative
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP10: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the scale of potential offshore energy developments (wind, tidal, wave) as part of the net zero transition.

Representativeness

High

This indicator is rated high for representativeness of JT concerns. Offshore energy developments are a clear net zero pressure on the use of marine space. The fishing sector is facing cumulative pressures, in part because of the net zero transition. Monitoring available marine space for fishing over time (and where possible, in relation to developing offshore energy projects and related installations e.g., subsea cables) can support distributional justice analyses across energy and fishing stakeholders and provide insight into transition dynamics.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability as this data is not currently collected in a monitorable format. The data exists and is regularly updated in an online map format by the Scottish Government Marine Directorate.

CP11: Number of woodland creation projects registered with the Woodland Carbon Code (WCC) and peatland restoration projects registered with the Peatland Code (PC) owned by community groups and small landholdings; and as a % of total registered projects.

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Data not currently available. Projects registered with the WCC and PC are visible on their public registers (WCC registry, PCC registry), including details of ownership. Additional analysis may enable identification of community and small landholdings projects. Can collect case study data through qualitative engagement with (e.g., Scottish Forestry, Peatland Action, Community Land Scotland).
  • Desired trend: Monitor, increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP11: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the direct focus on natural capital projects developed for carbon offsetting for net zero.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Community and small landholding involvement in carbon offsetting projects reflects opportunities for smaller scale participation in carbon offsetting projects as a net zero opportunity. Delimiting ‘natural capital’ and carbon offsetting projects is challenging, and not all projects such projects will be registered with the WCC and PC. This indicator does not capture the impacts of these projects.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability as this data is not currently collected. Data exists on public WCC and PC registries. Specific community and small landholding data may be accessible through further analysis.

CP12: Socio-economic benefits from woodland creation and peatland restoration

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Qualitative engagement with key stakeholder groups e.g., Community Land Scotland, Scottish Forestry, Peatland Action, Scottish Land Commission, and with projects under development. The WCC has a benefits self-reporting tool from which data may also be available for the Scottish Government.
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

CP12: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the direct focus on the type and distribution of benefits from woodland creation and peatland restoration, both of which support net zero and climate resilience.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Woodland creation and peatland restoration will create diverse socio-economic benefits and their localised impacts across communities in Scotland directly affects distributional and procedural JT considerations. Defining and quantifying socio-economic benefits from natural capital projects (which are often not monetary benefits) is challenging. Qualitative data collection will support increasing understanding of these projects, their development processes and impacts.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability as this data is not currently collected. Potential stakeholders for qualitative data collection have been identified and have existing networks with the Scottish Government.

People and Equity

Indicators PE1 and PE2 are covered by the quality assessment in Communities and Places and are not repeated below.

PE3: Percentage of dwellings in Fuel Poverty

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) 6-fold rural/urban classification and (iii) Island local authorities
  • Data source: Scottish House Condition Survey (in Scottish Household Survey)
  • Desired trend: Towards the attainment of statutory targets
  • Timeframe: Annual (Local authority data availably every 3 years)

PE3: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that fuel poverty is an existing, systemic injustice related to access and affordability of energy, a key sector in the transition to net zero.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given the strong spatial dimension of fuel poverty in Scotland, where it is strongly characterised by its geographical distribution. Data by local authorities is only available every three years, however; and the indicator does not distinguish between fuel poverty and extreme fuel poverty, nor reflects the lived experiences of different households.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that data is published annually as accredited official statistics.

PE4: Housing with EPC C or above across housing/tenure types

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) 6-fold rural/urban classification and (iii) Island local authorities
  • Data source: Scottish House Condition Survey
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE4: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that increasing energy efficiency is a key vehicle for net zero, climate resilience, and addressing fuel poverty.

Representativeness

High

This indicator is rated high for representativeness given that access to energy efficiency and retrofit solutions is often costly, challenging and is a key avenue to decrease poverty alongside emissions reductions. Inequalities of access to retrofit and efficiency solutions are spread across housing and tenure types, which will also be captured by this indicator. In Scotland, energy efficiency inequalities are also spatially distributed across geographies.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given this data is collected annually in the Scottish House Condition Survey.

PE5: Percentage of people reporting that they can afford their individual transport costs

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) 6-fold rural/urban classification, (iii) island local authorities and (iv) people with different levels of household income.
  • Data source: Scottish Household Survey (SHS)
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE5: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that transport affordability is a key concern relating to the transition to net zero.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it directly asks about issues of affordability and can monitor these across Scotland’s geographies (in which transport needs vary) and with attention to low levels of income. The indicator is based on a reported sense of affordability and could be impacted by various factors other than the net zero transition. Over time, however, as the transition to net zero unfolds, transport should not become unaffordable.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given this data is collected annually through the Scottish Household Survey.

PE6: Number of people reporting they do not use public transport (buses) due to connectivity issues

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) 6-fold rural/urban classification, and (iii) island local authorities
  • Data source: Scottish Household Survey (SHS)
  • Desired trend: Decreasing
  • Timeframe: Every two years

PE6: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that transport connectivity is a key dimension of transport poverty which could be impacted by the net zero transition. Public transport is a key avenue for transport emissions reductions and is broadly more affordable transport, in particular by bus.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it focuses directly on issues of connectivity. Connectivity is a challenging issue to capture due to its overlap with other considerations. This indicator is based on a combined analysis of data to the question of why respondents do not use public transport (SHS). The suggested analysis includes attention to the following responses: lack of service, too infrequent, takes too long, inconvenient, no direct route, unreliable. In addition, analysis should also include the response ‘use my own car’ overlayed with these issues. Geographical breakdowns reflect different transport needs across regions in Scotland.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given this data is collected annually in the Scottish Household Survey.

PE7: (i) Proportion of adults within 5-minute walk of greenspace

(ii) Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) demographic groups, (iii) SIMD 20% most deprived (if data is available)
  • Data source: (i) Scottish Household Survey (ii) Ordnance Survey
  • Desired trend: Increasing over time
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for relevance given the role of greenspace in emissions reductions and increasing climate resilience, alongside the benefits from greenspace access for individuals. It is also important to monitor whether new net zero developments are reducing greenspace access.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it does not reflect the quality, safety nor accessibility of greenspace. Increases in greenspace may not be reflected in responses based on the ‘5-minute walking distance’ perimeter. Greenspace access inequities would support JT analyses, but this is subject to data availability e.g., by SIMD percentile.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given this data is collected annually in the Scottish Household Survey and the Ordnance survey. The two data sources are used in SNAP3 for annual reporting.

PE8: Proportion of people who agree that the transition to net zero and climate resilience will support a more positive future for young people and future generations in Scotland.

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from autumn 2026)
  • Desired trend: Increasing over time
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE8: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that an expansive JT has a strong component of intergenerational justice, that is, protecting the planet today for younger people and the generations of the future. This is an underlying driver of the transition to net zero and climate resilience.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that respondents could have varying understandings of what the transition means, or what a ‘more positive future’ entails.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that it depends on the annual commissioning of the Scottish Climate Survey.

PE9: Level of adaptation action being taken by people in Scotland

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) demographic groups, (iii) SIMD 20% most deprived (if data is available)
  • Data source: Scottish Climate Survey
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE9: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given it directly focuses on ability to engage in climate change adaptation.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness. The ability to adapt to a changing climate will be impacted by a range of factors, from systemic inequalities through to perceived risk and information and knowledge access. While this indicator captures self-reported data at an individual household level, it does not reflect institutional action to support climate resilience, for example, at local authority level.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that it depends on the annual commissioning of the Scottish Climate Survey.

PE10: Hospitalisations by heat

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) demographic groups (age and sex), (iii) SIMD 20% most deprived (if data is available)
  • Data source: Public Health Scotland
  • Desired trend: Decreasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE10: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given it directly focuses on the distribution of impacts from climate change.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it captures a health concern relating to climate change impacts and by attention to affected populations such as older adults. The data is modelled and will not necessarily reflect the increasing adoption of adaptation measures.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that the dataset is developed by Public Health Scotland with plans for annual publication and further development.

PE11: Proportion of householders with prior flood claims who can receive quotes from 5 or more insurers

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Flood-Re
  • Desired trend: Maintaining/increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE11: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given it directly focuses on issues of accessing solutions for climate change resilience and adaptation.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it reflects availability of flood insurance for readily impacted households, which has already been monitored at 100%. As flooding becomes more frequent in a changing climate, availability of flood insurance could be at risk of decreasing. The indicator does not reflect the affordability of this insurance, who can/cannot access it nor whether it is taken up.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability for the data is collected annually from Flood-Re for SNAP3 M&E.

PE12: Proportion of people living in a flood risk area who report an inability to implement flood risk measures

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from autumn 2026)
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE12: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given it directly focuses on issues of accessing solutions for climate change resilience and adaptation.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it focuses directly on affected populations by flood risk, and on adaptation capabilities. The implementation of flood resilience at a household level is challenging and very costly. This indicator only focuses on flood risk and does not capture broader risks of climate change and adaptation.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that it depends on the annual commissioning of the Scottish Climate Survey.

PE13: Premature deaths due to exposure to fine particulate matter (PM2.5) (number of premature deaths)

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): (i) Scotland-wide, (ii) by SIMD percentile and (iii) by demographic groups
  • Data source: Data not available in indicator format. Discussions with Public Health Scotland suggests feasibility of indicator development.
  • Desired trend: Decreasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

PE13: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the expected positive implications of net zero for reductions in air pollution and the distributed impacts of current pollution across Scotland.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness of JT concerns. Reductions in harmful pollutants is a benefit across Scotland. Suggested geographical and demographic breakdowns draw attention to potential inequities in exposure to polluted environments and subsequent health impacts, which should improve in the transition to net zero. The extent to which this is an issue in Scotland is to be determined once data is collected.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability as this indicator does not currently exist. Advice from Public Health Scotland suggests feasibility of development.

Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities

JSEO1: Employment (full-time equivalent) in the Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Economy (LCREE) in Scotland

Indicator information:

JSEO1: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given it is specifically focused on job creation in the net zero, low carbon economy.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness. The dataset cannot be broken down by geographies, demographic groups nor specific sectors. Capturing who can and cannot access low carbon jobs is thus an important gap in this indicator. The indicator also does not reflect the quality of these jobs. The LCREE data are survey-based estimates based on a sample, and results from sample surveys are always estimates and not precise figures.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that it is annually published as official statistics by the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

JSEO2: Total employment in Energy (including in renewables)

Indicator information:

JSEO2: Indicator quality assessment

Criterion

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the role of the energy sector in Scotland’s economy, and the significance of the energy sector in the move towards net zero.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness. Monitoring energy employment throughout the transition matters in the Scottish context given expected job losses in fossil fuel energy sectors alongside expected job creation in renewable energy. As a major sector driving activity in the net zero transition in Scotland, this justifies directed attention. If energy employment declines over time, there is reasonable scope to infer that the fossil fuel energy industry employment is not being replaced by growing renewable energy jobs. This indicator does not distinguish between types of energy sectors, occupation nor quality of jobs. It focuses solely on energy and hence on just one part of the net zero economy.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability for the data is annually collected as official statistics by the Scottish Government.

JSEO3: Employment in forestry and marginal employment changes from woodland creation

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Scottish Forestry
  • Desired trend: Increasing (qualitative, contextualised)
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO3: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the role of land use change activities in net zero and climate resilience.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness. As the transition unfolds, woodland creation is an economic and emissions reductions opportunity. This indicator captures changes in woodland creation employment, but this is only one of many forms of ‘natural capital’ employment. Not all woodland creation will be for the purposes of net zero or climate adaptation (but all woodland creation will impact emissions).

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that marginal employment changes are calculated annually by Scottish Forestry. In addition, Scottish Forestry also conduct ad hoc research providing further detail into employment impacts.

JSEO4: Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Economy (LCREE) estimated direct and indirect turnover

Indicator information:

JSEO4: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given its attention to economic turnover in the net zero, low carbon economy.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it is based on businesses self-reporting activity across a bespoke set of 17 sectors defined by the Office for National Statistics (ONS). LCREE estimates are survey-based and gather information from a sample of businesses rather than the whole population, so are subject to measurable sampling uncertainty.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that it is annually published as official statistics by the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

JSEO5: Businesses with 10+ employees with (i) a climate strategy (ii) biodiversity strategy (iii) publishing an annual sustainability report

Indicator information:

JSEO5: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given it provides information about business knowledge, planning and action towards climate change and climate adaptation in a transitioning economy.

Representativeness

Low

This indicator is rated low for representativeness. It reflects self-reported commitments towards actions on climate change and biodiversity by businesses, which implies a level of awareness, responsiveness and adaptation by businesses to a changing climate and economy. The Business Insights and Conditions Survey does not include every sector and reports on businesses of 10+ employees. This excludes smaller businesses including sole traders, who make up the majority of businesses in the Scottish economy (in Businesses in Scotland, Scottish Government, 2025g). The data is self-reported and does not reflect actual adaptation or decarbonisation actions.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that it is annually available through the Business Insights and Conditions Survey.

JSEO6: Number of people in Modern Apprenticeships reporting that their apprenticeship is in a ‘net zero or green sector’ (i) 3 months and (ii) 15 months after finishing

Indicator information:

JSEO6: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the direct focus on net zero or ‘green’ sectors in relation to skills development through apprenticeship training underway.

Representativeness

Low

This indicator is rated low for representativeness. The indicator focus is directly relevant to JT concerns in the transition to net zero. However, apprenticeships are only one of many training and education pathways. The sample size will be too small for the Scottish Government to gain insight into skills development, training and retraining underway in Scotland as a whole. Still, a steady increasing trend of apprenticeships in green sectors, alongside monitoring decreasing inequalities across demographic groups, can be considered a positive trend overall.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability because the data is collected on a rolling basis by Skills Development Scotland.

JSEO7: Trade union membership density in Scotland

Indicator information:

JSEO7: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the importance of worker representation and participation in decision-making throughout the transition to net zero and climate resilience. Trade union representation and access are core characteristics of the fair work economy, in line with Scottish Government commitments.

Representativeness

Low

This indicator is rated low for representativeness given it focuses on trade union membership density in Scotland as a whole, and not in specific sectors relating to the net zero and climate resilience transition. In addition, trade union membership does not ensure worker participation in transition decision-making. Attention to trade union access would support a more nuanced view.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability as this is annually collected as official statistics by the UK Government.

JSEO8: Proportion (%) of employees earning less than the Real Living Wage

Indicator information:

JSEO8: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the importance of quality and fair work jobs in the low carbon economy in Scotland. The real living wage is a key characteristic of a fair work economy, in line with Scottish Government commitments.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that it is not broken down by sectors and specifically, net zero and climate adaptation employment. However, it remains representative of a JT given the economy-wide implications of the transition in Scotland, across sectors.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given it is annually collected by the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

JSEO9: The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the transport sector (SIC H: Transportation and storage)

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Annual Survey of hours and earnings
  • Desired trend: Gap decreasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO9: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the opportunity for increased pay equity in net zero and climate adaptation related sectors (as a key dimension of fair work), including transport. This indicator was identified in the Draft Transport JT Plan (2025).

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness. It does not capture sub-sectoral categories of high emissions and low emissions transport, yet trends should highlight changes in the gender pay gap in transport overall. These can be contextualised within progress towards emissions reductions across sectors.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high on data availability for it is annually collected by the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

JSEO10: The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the energy sector (SIC B: Mining and Quarrying; SIC D: Electricity, Gas, steam and air conditioning supply).

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Annual Survey of hours and earnings
  • Desired trend: Gap decreasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO10: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the opportunity for increased pay equity in net zero and climate adaptation related sectors (a key dimension of fair work), including energy.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that current SIC code sectoral breakdowns for energy do not capture the full set of changing and new energy activities as a result of net zero.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability for it is annually collected by the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

JSEO11: The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the construction sector. [SIC F: Construction]

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Annual Survey of hours and earnings
  • Desired trend: Gap decreasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO11: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the opportunity for increased pay equity in net zero and climate adaptation related sectors (a key dimension of fair work), including construction.

Representativeness

High

This indicator is rated high for representativeness given the expected activity in relation to buildings and construction as part of the transition to net zero and climate resilience.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given that it is annually collected by the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

JSEO12: The difference between male and female full-time hourly earnings in the agriculture sector (SIC A: Agriculture, forestry and fishing)

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Annual Survey of hours and earnings
  • Desired trend: Gap decreasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO12: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the opportunity for increased pay equity in net zero and climate adaptation related sectors (a key dimension of fair work), including in agriculture and land use.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that current Sectoral Industrial Classification (SIC) breakdown does not capture sub-sectoral categories of land use change relating to net zero and climate resilience activities.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high on data availability for it is annually collected by the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

JSEO13: (i) Number of renewable energy supply chain businesses in Scotland.

(ii) Proxy: £ value of ScotWind projects committed to Scottish-based suppliers

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: (i) Data not available, (ii) Crown Estate Scotland
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO13: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that the creation of renewable energy supply chain businesses in Scotland is a key opportunity for distributed benefit from the net zero transition.

Representativeness

Low

This indicator is not currently available. The recommended proxy is rated low for representativeness. ScotWind offshore wind project supply chain commitments do not cover all supply chain activity in Scotland, do not represent all renewable energy activity Scotland, nor do they provide detail on business creation and growth. However, as an important energy development with recognised implications in Scotland, it serves as an interim proxy on whether economic opportunities from renewable energy are distributed across the Scottish economy.

Data availability (proxy)

Moderate

The proxy indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that it is collected by Crown Estate Scotland through developer supply chain commitments.

JSEO14: (i) Business resilience and ability to adapt to climate change and the transition

(ii) Proxy (in the CCP, 2026): Proportion of small businesses in Scotland reporting the level of energy prices as an obstacle.

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: (i) Data not available, (ii) Scotland Small Business Survey
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO14: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the need to understand to what extent businesses in Scotland are resilient to climate change, and whether they are benefiting from or being negatively impacted by net zero.

Representativeness

Low

This indicator is not available. The proxy indicator focused on small businesses reporting energy costs as an obstacle to their business is rated low for representativeness. A wide range of factors could be affecting energy prices and business success at different points in time, which makes it challenging to trace this back to the net zero transition itself. The potential impact on energy prices is just one of many ways in which small businesses may be affected by the net zero transition.

Data availability (proxy)

High

The proxy indicator is rated high for data availability given that the data is annually collected in the Scotland Small Business Survey.

JSEO15: Number of workers experiencing redundancy in high emitting industries in Scotland receiving support/ reporting that their employers are implementing transition plans for workers

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Data not available – survey recommended
  • Desired trend: Increasing (and qualitative engagement)
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO15: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the implications of the transition to net zero for high emitting industries and their workforce.

Representativeness

High

This indicator is rated high for representativeness, Managed, supported transitions for workers in high emitting industries is a core pillar of a JT, and the recommended survey should cover workers across high emitting sectors and in a range of occupations.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability because data is currently non-existent.

JSEO16: High emitting industry worker participation in decisions affecting them

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Data not available – survey recommended
  • Desired trend: Increasing (and qualitative engagement)
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO16: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the implications of the transition to net zero for high emitting industries and their workforce.

Representativeness

High

This indicator is rated high for representativeness given that managed, supported and negotiated worker transitions driven by participatory processes are key to delivering a JT. The recommended survey should cover workers across high emitting sectors and in a range of occupations.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability because data is currently non-existent.

JSEO17: Sense of uncertainty/ confidence in the transition amongst workers in high emitting industries

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Data not available – survey recommended
  • Desired trend: Increasing (and qualitative engagement)
  • Timeframe: Annual

JSEO17: Indicator quality assessment

Criteria

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the implications of the transition to net zero for high emitting industries and their workforce.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness. In a context of industrial change, including at times, site closure and redundancies, the sense of uncertainty and confidence in the transition should to some extent, reflect ongoing experiences with the transition and whether assurances and support are in place.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability because data is currently non-existent.

Environment and Biodiversity

EB1: Emissions of the eight priority Air Quality pollutants (ammonia, carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, non-methane volatile organic compounds, particulate matter, sulphur dioxide and lead) for Scotland and by industrial sector

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory
  • Desired trend: Decreasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

EB1: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for relevance given the expected impact of net zero actions on air pollutants and the implications this has for the future health of people and planet.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that air pollution has direct impacts on health across the population. The breakdown by industrial sector enables a degree of attention to where emissions are falling and which ones remain. However, the indicator does not show disproportionate impacts of air pollution on different groups or places, nor the distribution of responsibility for these emissions. Air quality in the UK is not just affected by emissions included in the National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory but also by secondary formation of air pollutants, emissions originating from outside the UK and geographical and meteorological factors. 

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given it is annually collected by the National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory.

EB2: Improvements to water quality across types in Scotland

Indicator information:

EB2: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that the transition to net zero should directly see decreases in water quality pollution from across industries (like fossil fuels and agriculture) but could also create risks to water sources (e.g., through wind farm installation). Annex 2 in the Draft CCP (Scottish Government, 2025i) also identified increased flood risk as posing risks to water quality.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that water quality in Scotland is key for healthy populations and ecosystems. However, the indicator does not capture where or by whom the risks and benefits of decreasing/increasing water quality are being felt because of net zero or climate adaptation interventions.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given it is annually collected by SEPA.

EB3: Scotland’s carbon footprint expressed in million tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent per year

Indicator information:

EB3: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the role of embodied emissions in the move towards net zero and the focus of carbon footprint measurements on consumption emissions. Consumption emissions are those associated with the spending of Scottish residents on goods and services, wherever in the world these emissions arise, alongside emissions directly generated by Scottish households through private heating and motoring (Scottish Government, 2025j). This is different to reporting on the greenhouse gas emissions produced within a country’s territory (UK Government, 2026).

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given the implications of consumption, resource use and embodied emissions for a JT in relation to planetary boundaries. The indicator does not monitor the distribution of harm nor responsibility for Scotland’s carbon footprint. It also cannot reflect why the footprint is increasing/ falling.

Data availability

High

This indicator is rated high for data availability given it is annually collected by the Scottish Government and trend data is available since 1998.

EB4: Global biodiversity impact (Measures the effect of Scotland’s resource use on biodiversity domestically and abroad)

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Material Flow Accounts
  • Desired trend: Decreasing negative impacts
  • Timeframe: Annual

EB4: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for relevance given that the net zero transition will have indirect impacts on resource use. The biodiversity crisis is a key planetary boundary with implications for climate resilience more broadly.

 

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that the dynamics of resource use, emissions reductions and net zero are uncertain.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability. The indicator is taken from the Circular Economy Strategy (Scottish Government, 2026d). The Material Flow Accounts data is collected by Zero Waste Scotland, but data for this indicator currently unavailable. Frequency of data collection is currently unknown.

EB5: Soil sealing

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: NatureScot
  • Desired trend: Monitor, qualitative
  • Timeframe: Annual

EB5: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for relevance given that the negative impacts of soil sealing on soil health can limit the potential benefits of healthy soils relating to water filtration and flood risk mitigation. Net zero developments like wind farms can have direct impacts on levels of soil sealing.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that the indicator does not show where or why soil is being sealed. The trade-offs between impacts on soil health for climate resilience versus the installation of a wind farm, for example, are uncertain. This indicator can be regarded alongside indicator EB6 on regeneration of vacant/derelict urban land.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability as data is collected by NatureScot from analysis of Ordnance Survey Mastermap data and NatureScot records of windfarm sites. There is historical data from 2009 to 2020, which was published in 2023.

EB6: Regeneration of vacant / derelict urban land (% of which is regenerated through environmental restoration, for climate adaptation and by net zero initiatives)

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Scottish Land Commission/SEPA, qualitative engagement with energy developers.
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual (TBC)

EB6: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that environmental restoration of vacant and derelict land directly supports JT outcomes and has implications for climate resilience.

 

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that the currently available data maps known sites of derelict urban land alongside action being taken. Further analysis is needed to understand what type of site regeneration is underway (e.g., environmental) and whether this is supported by net zero projects. Qualitative case studies and engagement with energy developers on regeneration initiatives may be a useful source of detail on activity underway.

Data availability

Low

This indicator is rated low for data availability. Although data is published by the Scottish Land Commission it is unclear whether it can be accessed and analysed to monitor this indicator.

EB7: Number of hectares of newly protected land and marine features across Scotland

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: NatureScot
  • Desired trend: Increasing
  • Timeframe: Annual

EB7: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given the importance of environmental restoration for JT. Better protected land and marine areas will be more resilient to climate change impacts.

Representativeness

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for representativeness given that measures of protection and restoration not covered by this dataset will not be reflected in the indicator.

Data availability

Moderate

This indicator is rated moderate for data availability given that frequency of data updates is still to be decided (as assessed in the SNAP3 M&E framework, (Scottish Government, 2024a, p. 40).

EB8: Carbon and social footprint of materials used for net zero developments in Scotland

Interim proxy: Carbon Intensity of Materials: indicates whether a nation is consuming more sustainable alternatives, independent of trends in overall greenhouse gas impact.

Indicator information:

  • Target population(s): Scotland-wide
  • Data source: Data not available. Developers increasingly conduct project lifecycle assessments for the planning process. This may be a starting point for data collection. Proxy data: Material Flow Accounts
  • Desired trend: Monitor, qualitative
  • Timeframe: Annual

EB8: Indicator quality assessment

Dimension

Rating

Explanation

Relevance

High

This indicator is rated high for relevance given that net zero developments like renewable energy projects will have embodied, social and environmental impacts and emissions. These span from material extraction for technological and project development through to waste once projects are decommissioned.

 

Representativeness

Low

This indicator in unavailable. The proxy indicator is rated low for representativeness given that while it provides an overall picture of trends in the carbon footprint of materials used in Scotland, it cannot distinguish by sectors.

Data availability (proxy)

Low

The proxy indicator is rated low for data availability. The indicator is taken from the Circular Economy Strategy (2026). The Material Flow Accounts data is collected by Zero Waste Scotland, but data for this indicator currently unavailable. Frequency of data collection is currently unknown.

  1. Outcome ‘focus areas’ for indicator development

The following table illustrates the breakdown of the four outcomes into more granular focus areas. These were used as prompts during the workshop held on the 17 November 2025 and in semi-structured interviews, to stimulate discussion about possible indicators.

Theme and Outcome

Potential focus areas for indicators, as directly relates to the process and outcome of net zero and climate adaptation:

Communities and Places

  • Community empowerment, participation and involvement
  • Sense of belonging, identity and place
  • Localised socio-economic benefit

Locally and in relation to Scotland as a whole.

People and Equity

  • Socio-economic inequalities
  • Quality of life (mental and physical health, housing, fuel and transport poverty)
  • Participation inequalities

With particular attention to affected and disadvantaged households and places, from a financial and a spatial lens.

Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities

  • Diversified and prosperous economy, including business health
  • Worker transitions and availability and accessibility of fair work jobs
  • Skills and training opportunities
  • Worker participation in transition processes

With particular attention to affected sectors and groups, alongside risks and opportunities for businesses and economic health more broadly.

Environment and biodiversity

  • Nature-positive Scotland
  • Environmental health across land, sea and species

Table 1 (Appendix D): Four JT outcomes and focus areas, prompts for discussion.

  1. ‘No data’ outcome indicators: rationale and recommendations

The four outcomes include indicators for which data is currently not available. These indicators represent key areas of JT concern. Stakeholder engagement and desk-based research have helped to identify possible avenues for further refinement and data collection. These indicators, their relevance for a JT in Scotland and possible avenues for data collection are expanded on below, categorised by outcome.

Communities and Places (indicators CP9-CP12)

CP9: Engagement experiences of the fishing sector with offshore energy developments

The fishing sector is experiencing cumulative pressures in part, because of the energy transition. This includes from marine surveying, subsea cable developments and the installation of offshore wind farms. Fishers face high levels of uncertainty regarding the cumulative impact of developments, both due to varying timelines for different projects and uncertainties around the long-term impacts of offshore energy production on the marine environment. The fishing sector is small in capacity and resource in comparison to large scale offshore wind developers, creating hierarchies of power and influence over decision-making. Often, the just-ness of engagement and decision-making processes depend on each individual developer’s approach. This project has not found quantitative data able to communicate this complexity. The recommendation is for the Scottish Government to monitor a qualitative indicator informed by iterative stakeholder engagement with key fisheries representatives (e.g. Regional Inshore Fisheries Group and others). Various forums involving marine stakeholders and the Scottish Government readily exist and could be a possible avenue for qualitative data collection.

CP10: Distribution of marine space across activities, including % available for fishing

Fishing stakeholders often refer to the experienced ‘spatial squeeze’ by the sector. This refers to the accumulating pressures of new blue economy activities, environmental protection and others and the overlap with – and shrinking of – traditional fishing grounds. Stakeholder insights suggested that potentially relevant indicators like ‘employment in fishing’ will be influenced by too many variables beyond the transition to net zero to be useful for JT M&E. However, monitoring available marine space for fishing over time should be able to increase understandings of ongoing spatial trade-offs in the marine environment, including in direct relation to fishing. The Scottish Government’s Marine Directorate publish an interactive website illustrating the distribution of marine space in Scotland. These visual maps are informed by backend data which could support trend analysis regarding % change in marine space available for fishing over time.

CP11-12: Land use change for net zero and climate resilience: ‘natural capital’ engagement processes, participation and distributed benefits

Research on the types of land use change activities and their implications as part of the transition to net zero and climate resilience illustrated the challenges of defining and monitoring these from a JT perspective. Stakeholders explained the difficulties in setting boundaries around the term ‘natural capital’ and what interventions do/ do not fall into the scope of net zero and climate adaptation efforts. Woodlands may be created for carbon offsetting purposes, for example, for social uses or for other economic productive uses like timber production or tourism; all of which could be considered ‘natural capital’. In addition, many of the benefits from natural capital are considered public goods. In this context, indicators CP11 and CP12 focus on issues of ownership and socio-economic benefits, based on insight from stakeholder discussions and identified avenues to trial data collection. Project ownership will largely be conditioned by land ownership. The benefits and costs of owning woodland creation or peatland restoration as a community will likely differ from those of community owned energy. This suggests the need for continued research in this area. Engagement key stakeholders such as Community Land Scotland and their Natural Capital Community Partnerships project will be important to better understand the implications of these projects from a JT perspective. This can enable qualitative data collection for monitoring alongside refinement of land use change JT indicators.

People and Equity (indicator PE13)

PE13: Premature deaths due to exposure to fine particulate matter (PM2.5)

This indicator draws attention to improved air quality and the health implications of existing pollution levels for Scotland, across different groups and in the most deprived areas. This indicator is available in England (Department of Health and Social Care, n.d.). It reflects distributional justice concerns associated with the unequal distribution of negative impacts from environmental pollution in the current, high carbon economy. This unequal distribution should be addressed throughout the transition to a low carbon one (Farrell, 2012; Shen et al. 2020; Sun et al. 2024). This includes attention both to the geographical distribution of premature deaths by air pollution, to different demographic groups and by levels of deprivation across Scotland. Drabble et al. (2024) included various indicators focused on the spatial distribution of pollution exposure (see p.26, p.28, p.42, p.46). Although this data is not published in this form at present, engagement with Public Health Scotland advised that the development of this indicator would be feasible.

Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities (indicators JSEO13 – JSEO17)

JSEO13: Number of renewable energy supply chain businesses in Scotland.

The development of a domestic renewable energy industry has been identified by the Scottish Government as a key economic opportunity from net zero for Scotland (e.g., in the Green Industrial Strategy, Scottish Government, 2024c). The growth of existing supply chain businesses in Scotland and development of new ones as renewable energy is installed would reflect a level of distributed benefit, in contrast with the UK experience with onshore wind in the 20th century (Smith, 2011; Brunt and Spooner, 1998). This indicator is not currently developed. Using UK SIC codes, the Scottish Government could first, identify sectors under which renewable energy supply chain activity would be categorised. It could then monitor business growth and business startups in these sectors, to assess whether there is a developing renewable energy supply chain.

Proxy: £ value of ScotWind projects committed to Scottish-based suppliers

The proxy indicator was identified with support from Scottish Government analysts. It is focused solely on ScotWind, the offshore wind leasing rounds led by Crown Estate Scotland. While offshore wind is not representative of the full renewable energy supply chain, the scale and breadth of expected offshore wind projects justify its use as a proxy (Crown Estate Scotland, n.d.). Developers bidding in ScotWind leasing rounds are required to detail their supply chain spend plans in Scotland. This is a suggested avenue for data collection.

JSEO14: Business resilience and ability to adapt to climate change and the transition

Businesses across Scotland will be affected by climate change and will need to adapt to these changes. They will also be affected by the transition to net zero and may benefit from or be harmed by related impacts. The evidence review alongside stakeholder engagement has highlighted an evidence gap regarding the vulnerabilities, risks and opportunities faced by different business types and scales in Scotland, in the context of climate change and the net zero transition. There are a variety of available, regularly updated data sources about businesses in Scotland (including: the Scottish Annual Business Statistics, Small Business Survey Scotland and Business Insights and Conditions in Scotland, amongst others). While some of these surveys ask businesses about climate change impacts or adaptation measures, this data is currently insufficient to convey business transition, vulnerability, risk and opportunity pathways from a JT perspective.

Proxy: Proportion of small businesses in Scotland reporting the level of energy prices as an obstacle

It is important for the Scottish Government to understand the ways in which energy prices are affecting business success. The proposed framework includes the JT indicator which was included in the CCP (2026) as a proxy. However, business energy costs may be affected by many variables, and is only one of a suite of dimensions reflecting business vulnerability and resilience to climate change and the transition. In addition, engagement with Scottish Government industry analysts suggested there are limited surveys for data collection on sole traders. Sole traders make up over 70% of Scottish businesses (in Businesses in Scotland, Scottish Government, 2025g). This suggests a clear opportunity for targeted data collection on the impacts and experiences of climate change and the transition across business types and scales.

JSEO15-17: Indicators relating to worker transitions

Evidence collected throughout this project has spotlighted the lack of data available/ accessible to understand ongoing industrial transitions and the processes, impacts and experiences of the workforce. Employment and skills development indicators included by Drabble et al. (2024) in their framework already highlighted this data gap, given that data could not be categorised e.g., by specific sectors. The framework proposed by this project includes indicators focused on support and participation experiences alongside a broader sense of uncertainty amongst high emitting industry workers. It recommends the development of a targeted survey alongside qualitative methods to understand what is happening in transitioning industrial sites on the ground. Stakeholders such as STUC recognised the challenges of reaching many workers, particularly those working offshore. Suggested methods include in person surveying in key sites of mobility, such as, for instance, Aberdeen Airport. All three indicators (JSEO15-17) can be supported with qualitative case study and experience data from key stakeholders such as STUC, who are involved in day-to-day experiences on the ground. This new data collection could be complemented with case study data from (i) workers accessing the Oil and Gas Transition Training Fund, (ii) workers experiencing redundancy in Grangemouth accessing skill support, and (iii) any other initiatives by Scottish Government to support managed transitions away from high emitting industries.

Environment and Biodiversity (indicator EB8)

EB8: Carbon and social footprint of materials used for net zero developments in Scotland

This indicator recognises that infrastructure developed for the purposes of net zero will also have social and environmental impacts. These impacts are spread throughout renewable energy technology and projects’ supply chains and lifecycles, from material extraction through to decommissioning and waste. This indicator targets responsible renewable energy developments and addresses procedural risks of greenwashing renewable energy production. Developers are increasingly conducting social and environmental lifecycle assessments as part of their project planning applications. The Scottish Government could explore the extent to which this data is accessible and collatable as a starting point for indicator data collection and monitoring. This data would allow for better understanding of net zero developments in Scotland at local and global scales, including the risks of offshored injustice (e.g., Healy et al. 2019).

  1. JT indicators in Scottish Government policy

This appendix details how this framework relates to existing JT indicators in the CCP (2026), the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan and draft sectoral JT plans. Detailed attention is awarded to the JT indicators in the CCP (2026) given that it is the first Scottish Government publication to include a set of JT indicators for Scotland within statutory annual reporting.

Climate Change Plan (2026)

The CCP (2026) includes 12 JT indicators. This project developed in parallel to proposals for JT indicators in the Draft CCP (2025). However, this framework’s development process was separate. The proposed framework has parallels with, and at times departs from the JT indicators published in the CCP (2026). Table 1 below presents indicators in the CCP (2026) (Scottish Government, 2026e, p. 14) which are not included in the outcome indicator list in the proposed framework and provides a brief explanation as to why.

JT indicator in CCP

Explanation

Employment rate for people aged 16-64 in five local authorities with high socioeconomic dependence on oil and gas industries: (i) Aberdeen City; (ii) Aberdeenshire; (iii) Falkirk; (iv) Shetland Islands; and (v) Orkney Islands

This is not in the full outcomes list in the JT M&E framework because it is part of the proposed hotspots approach.

Proportion of households reporting that they are managing well financially in three local authorities with a high proportion of employment in oil and gas industries: (i) Aberdeen City, (ii) Aberdeenshire, and (iii) Falkirk

This is not in the full outcomes list in the JT M&E framework because it is part of the proposed hotspots approach.

Number of recipients of the Oil and Gas Transition Training Fund joint Scottish Government and UK Government initiative

This indicator is removed from the proposed M&E framework. It is deemed too specific for a national JT M&E framework. It is more clearly policy-oriented than outcome focused. This indicator could support improved, case specific understanding of the transition in the northeast of Scotland, where the Transition Training Fund is being implemented. It could also support causal evaluations of place-based change alongside the articulation of mechanisms (not included in this report).

Table 1 (Appendix E): JT indicators in the CCP (2026) not amongst the outcome indicators of this JT M&E framework.

Draft sectoral JT plans and the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan

This project has delivered an M&E framework at a Scotland level and is thus less focused on granular assessment of the JT in the four net zero sectors identified by Scottish Government (energy, transport, agriculture and land use, buildings and construction). Similarly, the indicators in the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan are directly relevant to the place and site-specific transition underway in the Grangemouth industrial cluster and will not apply to all transitions underway in Scotland as a whole.

The Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities outcome in the proposed framework includes fair work indicators. These focus on gender pay gap for energy, agriculture and land use, transport and buildings and construction. This selection was informed by indicators in the Draft Transport JT Plan (2025) and insight from the Fair Work Convention Secretariat. Additional sectoral breakdowns for other indicators in the Jobs, Skills and Economic Opportunities outcome (such as for trade union density/ access, or green jobs) are not possible with currently available data.

Some JT indicators relevant in the Grangemouth industrial cluster context (such as access to greenspace, attention to derelict sites or satisfaction with opportunities to influence decisions) are also reflected in indicators across the four outcomes in the proposed M&E framework. More broadly, draft sectoral JT plans, the Grangemouth Industrial JT Plan and their indicators were reviewed as evidence to inform this framework.

  1. Hotspot indicator list – rationale

H

Indicator (reported on per selected local authority)

Desired trend (contextualised per hotspot)

Data source

Rationale

H1

Employment rate for people aged 16-64 across Scotland

Increasing

ONS

Employment trends in hotspots are a key indicator of the workforce’s activity and mobility, both in places of industrial change/decline and in locations hosting large-scale net zero developments.

H2

Unemployment rate for people aged 16-64 across Scotland

Decreasing

ONS

Unemployment trends provide nuanced insight into changing employment patterns, often reflecting mobility challenges. Combined attention to employment and unemployment is inspired by Shapovalova et al. (2023).

H3

Number of people Not in Employment and Education or Training (16-19)

Decreasing

Skills Development Scotland

This indicator reflects a lack of engagement with available opportunities, by younger generations in sites of transition. An increasing trend draws attention to whether opportunities are available at all. It can highlight concerning transition dynamics in sites of industrial change and in contrast to pre-transition levels.

H4

Number of people in Modern Apprenticeships reporting that (i) their apprenticeship is in ‘green skills’/for the net zero economy’ during, 3-month and 15 months after finishing their apprenticeship and of these, (ii) number of people staying to work in their same Local authority.

Increasing

Skills Development Scotland – Apprentice Voice

Although modern apprenticeships are just one of many education pathways, this indicator will reflect levels of training/retraining opportunities in ‘green skills’ in hotspot locations.

H5

Population change (with attention to in-out migration)

Monitor

Council area profiles – National Records of Scotland (NRS)

Population changes capture multi-dimensional distributional burdens and opportunities in sites of transition over time. For example, this may include: depopulating areas due to industrial closure or large-scale industrialisation for energy production, or inward-migration due to employment creation as a result of transition interventions.

H6

Business activity/ survivability: Business birth and death rates

Monitor, increasing survivability

Scottish Government – Sub-Scotland Economic Statistics Database

Levels of business birth and death are one way to monitor economic activity in a particular area. These data points can serve as an early signal of changing opportunities in a local economy, including highlighting risks of economic decline.

H7

Sectoral economic dependence/diversification:

  1. Sectoral share of GVA (those increasing and in decline)
  2. Employment Share by Sector (Regional Sector Share) (to monitor changing employment across sectors in the local economy; those increasing and in decline).
  3. Location quotients (importance of a sector to a region relative to the national average)

Contextualised within broader economic trends per local authority.

Monitor

Business and innovation statistics – gov.scot

Economic diversification was identified as an objective in the Scottish Government’s National Strategy for Economic Transformation (2022) and was identified by the JTC as a key strategic dimension of a JT (Just Transition Commission, 2024, p. 14).

Sectoral clustering creates innovation and productivity benefits but also increases potential exposure to sector-specific shocks. This indicator supports monitoring of changing economic patterns in hotspots. However, ‘Economic diversification’ does not necessarily demonstrate either resilience or a JT. The Scottish Government should contextualise this indicator within broader economic trends per local area, and the insight from relevant teams and stakeholders.

H8

Proportion of households reporting that they are managing well financially

Increasing

Scottish Household Survey

This indicator provides annual data on felt financial wellbeing by households. It will be particularly relevant to monitor a sense of financial wellbeing on an annual basis in places experiencing industrial change.

H9

Median house price by Local Authority

Monitor

Registers of Scotland

This indicator captures potential knock-on effects on house prices from changing land use in sites of transition. This may include the installation of energy infrastructure or natural capital projects.

H10

People reporting that they can afford their individual transport costs

Increasing

Scottish Household Survey

Through annual data, this indicator provides a frequent update on felt transport costs across households in sites of transition. In the case of net zero developments these are often rural and island areas with complex transport realities.

H11

Proportion of adults within 5-minute walk of greenspace

Increasing

Scottish Household Survey

This indicator monitors greenspace levels in places that will host net zero developments. This includes qualitative attention to reduced greenspace access from these developments (e.g., the Energy Transition Zone using part of St. Fitticks Park in Aberdeen. St Fitticks Park is in Torry, one of the more deprived areas of Aberdeen according to SIMD).

H12

Operational capacity of community and locally owned energy installations in Scotland. Include breakdown (i) by type of ownership (ii) by location and (iii) as a proportion of total renewable energy installed in local area.

Increasing

Energy Saving Trust

This indicator captures the multi-dimensional features of transitions given that sites of industrial change may also see community ownership developments. Hotspots of net zero transitions may see projects developing owned by a variety of different stakeholders. While community owned energy is identified as desirable from a JT perspective in Scotland, monitoring this in a hotspot context also enables qualitative attention to the benefits and potential harms of this type of ownership as well.

H13

Area of community- owned assets (in hectares)

Increasing

Community Ownership in Scotland 2024 – gov.scot

This indicator captures the multi-dimensional features of transitions given that sites of industrial change may also see community ownership developments. Community ownership of assets beyond energy also signals to opportunities to access transition opportunities beyond energy, alongside community wealth building and empowerment more broadly.

H14

Community benefits from energy (and for natural capital projects, once available)

Increasing

Local Energy Scotland community benefits register 

This indicator captures the multi-dimensional features of transitions. Sites of industrial change may also be hosting renewable energy developments making community benefit payments. In net zero development contexts this should increase alongside increasing renewable energy projects. This indicator will not, however, tell the Scottish Government the impact nor local acceptance of these benefits. Engagement with local stakeholders will provide nuanced insight through a JT lens.

H15

Number of hospitalisations due to alcohol use

Decreasing

ScotPHO profiles

This indicator is included as an early warning sign of deprivation in contexts of industrial change. It is taken directly from Shapovalova et al. (2023).

H16

Number of drug use hospitalisations

Decreasing

ScotPHO profiles

This indicator is included as an early warning sign of deprivation in contexts of industrial change. It is taken directly from Shapovalova et al. (2023).

H17

Worker participation in industrial change processes

Increasing

N/A

Worker participation in industrial change processes is core to a JT, and hence directly relevant to hotspots of industrial change. Data is currently unavailable. Data collection through surveys and engagement with stakeholders like STUC is recommended.

H18

Number of premature deaths by particulate matter (PM2.5)

Decreasing

N/A

This indicator is included for both sites of industrial change and net zero developments. Decreasing emissions should decrease pollution in industrial sites, and inhabitants in these places may have also had higher historical exposure to pollutants. Increasing premature deaths by PM2.5 particulate matter in hotspots of net zero developments would be a clear warning sign of unexpected transition developments/ stagnant transitions.

H19

Fuel poverty

Decreasing

Scottish House and Condition Survey

By Local Authority – every 3 years

This indicator monitors fuel poverty, which captures energy inequities affected by a complex array of factors. Fuel poverty could increase in areas experiencing industrial change while exacerbating felt injustices in locations hosting renewable energy production. Its inclusion also reflects the multi-dimensional aspect of transitions given that places potentially seeing negative consequences may simultaneously see e.g., falling levels of fuel poverty.

H20

Proportion of people who agree that the transition to net zero and climate resilience will support a more positive future for young people and future generations in Scotland

Increasing

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

By Local Authority – Every 3 years

This indicator provides high level overview of perceptions of the transition by and for younger people in places directly witnessing transition impacts. This indicator is only available at local authority level every three years.

H21

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence (i) the Scottish Government’s approach to delivering net zero, and (ii) local policy and planning decisions relating to net zero

Increasing

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

By Local Authority – Every 3 years

This indicator captures the sense of influence over national and local policy relating to the transition. This is a key dimension of the JT for Scotland and directly relevant in places seeing targeted interventions and experiencing change. This indicator is only available at local authority level every three years.

H22

Proportion of people in Scotland reporting satisfaction with opportunities to influence net zero and climate adaptation developments happening in their local area

Increasing

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

By Local Authority – Every 3 years

This indicator captures the sense of influence over net zero and climate adaptation projects in hotspots. This is a key dimension of the JT for Scotland and directly relevant in places seeing targeted interventions and experiencing change. It is directly relevant for net zero development hotspots and may also be relevant in hotspots of industrial change. This indicator is only available at local authority level every three years.

H23

The proportion of people reporting that changes to their local place due to net zero infrastructure and/or land use change have maintained or improved the quality of their local area

Increasing

Scottish Climate Survey (proposed addition from Autumn 2026)

By Local Authority – Every 3 years

This indicator monitors mid-term experiences of change in sites of transition. It is directly relevant to net zero hotspots and may be relevant in industrial hotspots. It does not reflect the reasons for improved quality nor a breakdown by respondents. This indicator is only available at local authority level every three years.

How to cite this publication:

Santos Ayllón, L. M., Jenkins, K. E. H., (2026) ‘Monitoring a Just Transition to a net zero and climate resilient Scotland’, ClimateXChange. DOI:

© The University of Edinburgh, 2026
Prepared by The University of Edinburgh on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).C

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk


  1. These themes were also referred to in the Draft CCP (2025), though they do not feature in the final CCP (2026).



  2. These four ‘themes’, now widely used across Scottish Government JT policy, are different in focus and definition to four ‘themes’ in the National JT Planning Framework (2021). The latter have not been returned to since.



  3. The National Performance Framework for Scotland is currently archived and under review.



  4. The draft Energy Strategy and JT Plan (2023) refers to the eight national JT outcomes in its Annex F to translate them into energy sector outcomes.



  5. The four themes are not referred to in the final CCP (2026).



  6. Some indicators such as ‘employment’, for example, were removed from the full outcome indicator list and integrated into the hotspots monitoring approach instead.



  7. With ‘net zero infrastructure and/or land use change’ this report refers to the installation of renewable energy production and related infrastructure (power stations, transmission lines), alongside projects of woodland creation and peatland restoration for net zero and adaptation purposes.



  8. JSEO indicators 9-12 focus on the gendered dimension of fair work in the four net zero sectors identified by the Scottish Government, following advice from the Fair Work Convention Secretariat and indicators in the Draft Transport JT Plan (2025). This framework prioritises gender pay gap as a measure of structural inequity.



  9. This caveat recognises that while the net zero transition will impact industries such as oil and gas, their declining activity in Scotland is also a result of various factors other than the response to climate change. These have been affecting these industries for some time (e.g., Shapovalova et al. 2023).



  10. Location quotient calculations were provided by the industry statistics area in Scottish Government, January 2026.



  11. The minimum threshold for installed capacity was 1MW until 2021, at which point it was lowered to 150kW. This means that projects below 1MW that were going through the planning system before 2021 may not be represented.



  12. For hotspots, trend three ‘economic trends in Scotland’ should also be complemented with economic trend data in the specific local authority monitored.